PDF Vodavi Triad S Description Install & Program

Starplus Triad-S Desc Install & Program Starplus Triad-S Desc Install & Program

User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 710

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Product Description Manual
Issue 1
December 1998

Part Number:

5050-11

LIFE SUPPORT APPLICATIONS POLICY
VODAVI Communications Systems products are not authorized for and should not be
used within Life Support applications. Life Support systems are equipment intended
to support or sustain life and whose failure to perform when properly used in accordance with instructions provided can be reasonably expected to result in significant
personal injury or death.
VODAVI Communications Systems warranty is limited to replacement of defective
components and does not cover injury to persons or property or other consequential
damages.

Copyright 0 1998 VODAVI Communications Systems, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This material is copyrighted by VODAVI Communications Systems. Any unauthorized reproductions, use or disclosure of this material, or any part thereof, is strictly prohibited and is a
violation of the Copyright Laws of the United States (17 U.S.C. Section 101 et. seq.).
VODAVI reserves the right to make changes in specifications at any time and without
notice. The information furnished by VODAVI in this material is believed to be accurate and
reliable, but is not warranted to be true in all cases.

STARPLUV
Triad-9’”

is a Registered trademark of VODAVI Communications Systems, Inc.
is a Registered trademark of VODAVI Communications Systems, Inc.

1 INTRODUCTION
PURPOSE ..............................................................................................................................
REGULATORY INFORMATION (U.S.A.) ..................................................................................

Telephone Company Notification ...................................................................................
Incidence of Harm .........................................................................................................
Changes in Service .........................................................................................................
Maintenance Limitations ...............................................................................................
Hearing Aid Compatibility ..............................................................................................
UL/CSA Safety Compliance .............................................................................................
Notice of Compliance .....................................................................................................
Toll Fraud and DISA Disclaimer ...........................................................................................
2 KEY STATION FEATURES
Account Codes ......................................................................................................................
Account Codes - Forced .......................................................................................................
Account Codes - Traveling COS (Verified) ............................................................................

Answering Machine Emulation .............................................................................................
Attendant Assignment ...........................................................................................................
Attendant Recall ....................................................................................................................
Automatic Call Back Timer ..................................................................................................
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) ........................................................................................
Agent Positions ..............................................................................................................
Alternate ACD Group Assignments .................................................................................
ACD Group Member Status ............................................................................................
Guaranteed Message Announcement .............................................................................
Incoming CO Direct Ringing .........................................................................................
No-Answer Recall Timer .................................................................................................
No-Answer Retry Timer .................................................................................................
Overflow Station Assignments .......................................................................................
Overflow Station Forwarding ..........................................................................................
PC/ACD Interface Trace ..................................................................................................
Recorded Announcements (RAN) ..................................................................................
Supervisor/Agent Calls in Queue Status Display ............................................................
Wrap-Up Timer Per ACD Group .....................................................................................
Automatic Line Access ..........................................................................................................
Automatic Night Service ........................................................................................................
STARPLUS

l-l
l-l
l-l

l-l
1-2
l-2
l-2
l-2
l-2

l-3
2-l
.2-l
.2-l

2-l
2-2
2-2
.2-2
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-3
,2-4
2-4
.2-4
.2-4
2-4
2-5
2-5
.2-6
2-7
2-7
2-7

Triad-S Product Description Manual

Automatic Pause Insertion With Speed Dial .........................................................................
Automatic Privacy .................................................................................................................
Automatic Selection ..............................................................................................................
Background Music ................................................................................................................
Battery Back-Up (Memory) ..................................................................................................
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) ........................................................................................................
Call Announce - Privacy .......................................................................................................
Call Back ..............................................................................................................................
Call Cost Display Feature ......................................................................................................
Call Coverage Feature ...........................................................................................................
Call Forward - Preset ............................................................................................................
Preset Call Forward - ACD Groups ................................................................................
Preset Call Forward - Hunt Groups ...............................................................................
Preset Call Forward - Off-Net ........................................................................................
Preset Call Forward - Per CO Line ................................................................................
Preset Call Forward - Stations .......... . ............................................................................
Preset Call Forward - UCD Groups ................................................................................
Preset Call Forward - VM Groups ..................................................................................
Call Forward: Station ............................................................................................................
Call Forward - Ab Calls .................................................................................................
Call Forward - Busy ......................................................................................................
Call Forward - Busy/No Answer ....................................................................................
Call Forward - Follow-Me ..............................................................................................
Call Forward - No Answer .............................................................................................
Call Forward - Off-Net ...................................................................................................
Call Park ...............................................................................................................................
Call Pick-Up ..........................................................................................................................
ACD/LJCD Groups ...........................................................................................................
Directed .........................................................................................................................
Group ............................................................................................................................
Station ...........................................................................................................................
Call Transfer .........................................................................................................................
Calling Station Tone Mode Option ........................................................................................
Camp-on ..............................................................................................................................
Camp-on Recall ....................................................................................................................
Centrex Compatibility ...........................................................................................................
Flex Button Programming .............................................................................................
Off-Hook Preference ......................................................................................................
Issue 1 - December 1998

2-7
2-7
2-8
2-8

2-8
2-8
2-8
2-8
2-8
2-9
2-9
2-10
2-10

2-10
2-10
2-11
2-11
2-11
2-11
2-11
2-11

2-11
2-12

2-12
2-12
2-12
2-12
2-12

2-13
2-13

2-13
2-13
2-13
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14

STARPLUS Triad-S ProductDescriptionManual

ii1

Private Line Appearance ...............................................................................................
Programmable Flash Timer ...........................................................................................
Programming S, #, and Hook-Flashes into Speed Dial ..................................................
Centrex/PBX Transfer ...........................................................................................................
Class Of Service (COS) Station ..............................................................................................
CO Line - Access ...................................................................................................................
CO Line - Class Of Service (COS) ..........................................................................................
CO Line - Control (Contact) ..................................................................................................
CO Line - Distinctive Ring .....................................................................................................
CO Line - Groups ..................................................................................................................
CO Line - Identification .........................................................................................................
CO Line - Incoming Ringing Assignment ..............................................................................
CO Line - Loop Button ..........................................................................................................
CO Line - Loop Supervision ..................................................................................................
CO Line - Pool Button Operation ..........................................................................................
CO Line - Queuing ................................................................................................................
CO Line - Ringing Options ....................................................................................................
CO Ring Detect ......................................................................................................................
Conference ............................................................................................................................
Multi-Party Conference ..................................................................................................
Unsupervised Conference ..............................................................................................
Conference Enable/Disable ............................................................................................
Database Printout (Dump) ...................................................................................................
Database Upload/Download ..................................................................................................
Class Of Service (COS) Day/night ..........................................................................................
Dial By Name ........................................................................................................................
Dial Pulse Sending ................................................................................................................
Dialing Privileges ..................................................................................................................
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) .....................................................................................
Group Access .................................................................................................................
DISA Call Forwarding .....................................................................................................
Programmable Access .......................................... ..; .......................................................
Station Access ................................................................................................................
Trunk-to-Trunk .............................................................................................................
Direct Station Selection (DDS) .............................................................................................
Direct Transfer Mode ............................................................................................................
Directory Dialing ...................................................................................................................
Disable Outgoing CO Line Access ..........................................................................................
STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

,2-14
2-15
2-15

2-15
2-15
2-15
2-16

2-16
2-16
2-16
2-16
2-17
2-17
2-18
2-18
2-18
2-18
2-18
2-19
2-19
2-19

2-15)
2-19
2-19

2-20
2-20
2-20
2-21
2-23

2-23
2-23
2-23
2-23
2-23
2-24
2-24
2-24

2-24

lssoe I- December 1998

Distinctive Ringing (User Selectable) ....................................................................................
D O Not Disturb (DND) ..........................................................................................................
One-Time Do Not Disturb ..............................................................................................
DTMF Sending ......................................................................................................................
End-to-End Signaling ............................................................................................................
Executive Override ................................................................................................................
Executive/Secretary Pairing ..................................................................................................
External Night Ringing ..........................................................................................................
Flash .....................................................................................................................................
Flash On Intercom ...............................................................................................................
Flash Rates (Programmable) ...............................................................................................
Flexible Button Assignment ..................................................................................................
Forced Least Cost Routing (LCR) ..........................................................................................
Forward Override ...........................................................................................................
Group Listening ....................................................................................................................
Headset Compatibility ...........................................................................................................
Headset Mode .......................................................................................................................
Hearing Aid Compatible ........................................................................................................
Hold - Exclusive ....................................................................................................................
Hold - Preference .................................................................................................................
Hold - Recall .........................................................................................................................
Hold - System .......................................................................................................................
Hot Keypad Feature ..............................................................................................................
Hot Line/Ring Down .............................................................................................................
Hunt Groups .........................................................................................................................
Chaining ........................................................................................................................
Pilot Hunting .................................................................................................................
Station Hunting .............................................................................................................
ICLID/Caller ID Features ......................................................................................................
Caller-Entered ICLID Digits ...........................................................................................
Caller ID Name/Number Option ....................................................................................
Calling Number/Name Display ......................................................................................
Incoming Number/Name for SMDR Records .................................................................
Unanswered Call Management Table .............................................................................
Idle Speaker Mode ................................................................................................................
Incoming CO Call Transfer ...................................................................................................
Intercom Button(S) ..............................................................................................................
Intercom Calling ...................................................................................................................
Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS

2-24
2-25
2-25
2-25
2-25
2-25
2-26
2-26
2-26
2-26
2-27
2-27
2-30
2-30

2-30
2-30
2-30

2-31
2-31

2-31
2-31
2-31
2-32

2-32
2-32

2-33
2-33
2-33
2-33

2-34
2-34
2-34
2-34
2-35

Triad-S Product Description Manual

Intercom Signaling Select .....................................................................................................
Inter-Digit Timeout ...............................................................................................................
Keyset Mode (Digital KTU Only) ............................................................................................
Keyset Self Test .....................................................................................................................
Last Number Redial (LNR) ...................................................................................................
LCD Interactive Display ........................................................................................................
Least Cost Routing (LCR) ......................................................................................................
3-Digit Table ..................................................................................................................
6-Digit Table (Office Codes) ...........................................................................................
Daily Start Time Tables ..................................................................................................
Default LCR Database ....................................................................................................
Exception Tables ............................................................................................................
Insert/Delete Tables .......................................................................................................
LCR Routing for Toll Information ..................................................................................
Route List Tables ...........................................................................................................
Weekly Time Tables .......................................................................................................
Local Number/Name Translation Table ................................................................................
Mailbox Button(S) ................................................................................................................
Meet Me Page ........................................................................................................................
Message Waiting ....................................................................................................................
Message Waiting Reminder Tone ..........................................................................................
Music-On-Hold .....................................................................................................................
Mute Key ...............................................................................................................................
Name In Display ...................................................................................................................
Name/Number Display At Idle ..............................................................................................
Night Service Feature ............................................................................................................
Night Service Mode ...............................................................................................................
Automatic Night Mode Operation ...................................................................................
External Night Ringing ...................................................................................................
Manual Operation ..........................................................................................................
Night Class of Service (COS) ..........................................................................................
Night Ringing Assignments ............................................................................................
Universal Night Answer (UNA) ......................................................................................
Weekly Night Mode Schedule .........................................................................................
Off-Hook Preference .............................................................................................................
Auto Feature Access .......................................................................................................
Auto Line Access ...........................................................................................................
Hot Line/Ring Down ......................................................................................................
STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

2-35
2-35
2-36
2-36
2-36
,2-36
2-36
2-36
2-37
2-37
2-37
2-37
2-37
2-37
2-38
2-38
2-38
2-38
2-39
2-39
2-39
2-39
2-39
2-39
Z-40
Z-40
Z-40
Z-40
Z-40
Z-40
Z-40
2-41
.2-41
2-41
2-41
2-41
,2-41
2-41

Issue I- December 1998

Intercom Access ............................................................................................................
User Programmable Preference ....................................................................................
Off-Hook Signaling ...............................................................................................................
Off-Hook Voice Over (OHVO) ................................................................................................
On-Hook Dialing ...................................................................................................................
Online Programming ............................................................................................................
One-Touch Recording ...........................................................................................................
Page/Relay Control ...............................................................................................................
Paging ...................................................................................................................................
Access Restriction ..........................................................................................................
External .........................................................................................................................
Internal .........................................................................................................................
Park Personal .......................................................................................................................
Pause Timer .........................................................................................................................
PBX Dialing Codes ................................................................................................................
Personalized Messages .........................................................................................................
Custom ..........................................................................................................................
Date and Time Entry to Personalized Message(s) .........................................................
Personalized Message Code on a Flex Key .....................................................................
Scrollable Canned Messages ..........................................................................................
Preferred Line Answer ..........................................................................................................
Privacy Release .....................................................................................................................
Per CO Line Option ........................................................................................................
Per Station Option .........................................................................................................
Private Line ..........................................................................................................................
Pulse-to-Tone Switchover .....................................................................................................
Range Programming .............................................................................................................
Remote Administration ........................................................................................................
Database Upload/Download...........................................................................................
Remote System Monitor And Maintenance ...........................................................................
Maintenance ..................................................................................................................
Monitor ..........................................................................................................................
Repeat Redial........................................................................................................................
Save Number Redial (SNR) ...................................................................................................
Single Line Telephone (SLT) Compatibility ..........................................................................
Speakerphone ......................................................................................................................
Speed Bins/Chaining ............................................................................................................
Speed Dial - Flash .................................................................................................................
Issue 1

- December 1998

2-42
2-42
2-42
2-42
2-43
2-43
2-43
2-43
2-43
2-43
2-43
2-44
2-44
2-44
2-44
2-44
2-45
2-45
2-45
2-46
2-46
2-46
2-47
2-47
2-47
2-47
2-47
2-48
2-48
2-48
2-48
2-48
2-49
2-49
2-49
2-49
2-50
2-50

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

,. :.- -- ,.,

vii

Speed Dial - Station ..............................................................................................................
Speed Dial - System ..............................................................................................................
Station ID Lock .....................................................................................................................
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) ..........................................................................
Station Relocation Feature ....................................................................................................
Text Messaging (Silent Response) ........................................................................................
Toll Restriction (Table Driven) .............................................................................................
Canned Toll Restriction ................................................................................................
Transfer Recall ......................................................................................................................
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) ..........................................................................................
Agent Queue Status Display ..........................................................................................
Alternate UCD Group Assignments .................................................................................
Auto Wrap-Up with Timer ..............................................................................................
Available/Unavailable Mode ...........................................................................................
Incoming CO Direct Ringing ..........................................................................................
No-Answer Recall Timer .................................................................................................
No-Answer Retry Timer ..................................................................................................
Overflow Station Forwarding Assignments .....................................................................
Recorded Announcements (RAN) .................................................................................
Universal Day/Night Answer (UDA/UNA) ...............................................................................
Voice Mail Groups (VM) .......................................................................................................
Disconnect Signal ..........................................................................................................
In-Band Signaling Integration ........................................................................................
LCD Message(s) Indication ............................................................................................
Message Waiting Indication ............................................................................................
Tone Mode Calling Option .............................................................................................
Transfer/Forward ...........................................................................................................
Transfer with ID Digits ...................................................................................................
Volume Control Bar ..............................................................................................................

2-50
2-50
2-50
.2-51

2-51
.2-51
2-51
.2-52
2-52
2-52
.2-52
2-53
2-53
2-53
2-53
2-53

2-54
2-54
.2-54
2-54
.2-54
2-55
2-55
2-55
2-56
2-56
2-56

2-56
2-57

3 SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE FEATURES
1
,.2‘
;;:2

:‘:.::
&
-.w -

Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..I....................................................................................,,.....,.,,.,,,.
..
Verified/Traveling COS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Call Distribution/Uniform Call Distribution (ACD/UCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-l
Automatic Line Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Brokering
Call Forward ..:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::
Call Pick-Up Directed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

3-l
3-l
3-l

;1;
3-2

I s s u e I - December 1998

Call Pick-Up Group ...............................................................................................................
Camp-On ..............................................................................................................................
CO Line Queuing ..................................................................................................................
Conference ...........................................................................................................................
Conference With Personal Park ............................................................................................
Direct Outside Line Group Access ........................................................................................
Direct Outside Line Ringing ..................................................................................................
D O Not Disturb (DND) ..........................................................................................................
Handset Receiver Gain ..........................................................................................................
Intercom Calling ...................................................................................................................
Loop Interrupt Option ..........................................................................................................
Message Waiting/Call Back ...................................................................................................
Messages ..............................................................................................................................
Personalized ..................................................................................................................
Custom ..........................................................................................................................
Off-Hook Preference .............................................................................................................
Personal Park .......................................................................................................................
Speed Dial - Station ..............................................................................................................
Speed Dial - System ..............................................................................................................
Toll Restriction (Table Driven) .............................................................................................
Canned Toll Restriction
Transfer ............................. ..::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::
Transfer Recall .....................................................................................................................
Universal Day/Night Answer (UDA/UNA) ...............................................................................
Voice Mail Groups (VM) ........................................................................................................
Message Waiting Indication ...........................................................................................

3-2
3-2
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-5
3-5
3-5
3-5
3-5
3-5
: ::E
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-6

4 ATTENDANT FEATURES

Attendant Features ...............................................................................................................
Alternate Position ..........................................................................................................
Automatic Night Mode ...................................................................................................
Direct Station Selector - DSS Console ............................................................................
Disable Outgoing Access ................................................................................................
Display........................................... I.. ...........................................................................
Night Service Feature .....................................................................................................
Off-Net Forward - Incoming CO Lines ..........................................................................
Overflow (Via Preset Forward) .......................................................................................
Override .........................................................................................................................
Issue 1 - December 1998

4-l
4-1
4-l
4-l
4-l
.,4-l
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-2

S TARPL US Triad-S Product Description Manual

Position ..........................................................................................................................
Recall .............................................................................................................................
Special Ring Mode ..........................................................................................................
Time And Date Programming ........................................................................................
DSS/DLS Features .................................................................................................................
Attendant Transfer Search .............................................................................................
Busy Lamp Field Indicators ...........................................................................................
Direct Station Calling .....................................................................................................
Messages - Custom ......................................................................................................
Release Key ....................................................................................................................
Volume Control Bar (DKT) ...........................................................................................

4-2
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
,4-4
4-4
.4-4

5 DIGITAL STATION OPERATION

Introduction .........................................................................................................................
Digital Terminal Station Features .........................................................................................
Handset and Speaker .....................................................................................................
Flexible Buttons .............................................................................................................
Fixed Feature Buttons ....................................................................................................
Outside Calls ..................................................................................................................
Intercom Calls ...............................................................................................................
Account Codes ......................................................................................................................
Account Codes/Traveling COS (Verified) ...............................................................................
Answering a Recall ................................................................................................................
Answering Machine Emulation .............................................................................................
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) ........................................................................................
ACD Agent HELP Feature ...............................................................................................
Agent Login/Logout Feature ...........................................................................................
ACD Agent Queue Status Display ....................................................................................
ACD Available/Unavailable Mode ....................................................................................
ACD Call Qualification ...................................................................................................
ACD Group Member Status ............................................................................................
ACD Overflow Station - Available/Unavailable Mode .....................................................
ACD Overflow Station - Forwarding ...............................................................................
Supervisor Login/Logout Feature ...................................................................................
Supervisor Monitor With Barge-In ................................................................................
Supervisor Queue Status Display ...................................................................................
Automatic Selection .............................................................................................................
Background Music (Optional) ..............................................................................................
STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

5-1
5-l
5-l
5-l
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-6
5-8
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
.5-12
5-12
.5-13
5-14
5-15
.5-16
5-16
,5-18
5-18

Issue I- December 1998

5-18
Call Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
......
Call Coverage Feature
: 1:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ::;i
Cali Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . .:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::
5-20
All Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...~.............................................................................................
.
BUSY ..............................................................................................................................

Busy/No Answer .............................................................................................................
Follow-Me ......................................................................................................................
No Answer ......................................................................................................................
Off-Net (via speed dial) ..................................................................................................
Station ...........................................................................................................................
Caller ID Name/Number Option ...........................................................................................
Calling Station Tone Mode Option ........................................................................................
Call Park ...............................................................................................................................
Call Pick-Up ..........................................................................................................................
Directed .........................................................................................................................
Group ............................................................................................................................
Call Transfer .........................................................................................................................
Camp-On ..............................................................................................................................
CO Line Access .....................................................................................................................
CO Line Queuing ..................................................................................................................
Conference Combinations ....................................................................................................
Dial By Name ........................................................................................................................
Directory Dialing - Stations.. ................................................................................................
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ....................................................................................
Distinctive Ringing ................................................................................................................
Do Not Disturb (DND) ..........................................................................................................
One-Time Do Not Disturb ..............................................................................................
Executive Override ................................................................................................................
Executive/Secretary Pairing ..................................................................................................
FLASH ...................................................................................................................................
Flash On Intercom ...............................................................................................................
Flexible Button Assignment.. ................................................................................................
Forward Override ..................................................................................................................
Group Listening ....................................................................................................................
Headset Mode .......................................................................................................................
Hold - Exclusive ....................................................................................................................
Hot Keypad Feature ..............................................................................................................
ICLID Unanswered Call Management Table ..........................................................................
issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS

5-22
5-22

:I;:
5-25
5-26
5-26
5-27
5-27
5-27
5-27
5-28
5-28

5-29
5-30
5-30
5-31
5-32
5-33
5-36
5-36
5-39
5-40
5-40
5-41
5-41
5-42

5-42
5-45
5-45
5-46
5-46
5-46
5-47

Triad-S Product Description Manual

Incoming CO Call Transfer ..................................................................................................
Intercom Buttons .................................................................................................................
Intercom Calling ...................................................................................................................
Intercom Transfer ................................................................................................................
Keyset Mode ..........................................................................................................................
Last Number Redial (LNR) ...................................................................................................
LCD Display - Contrast ..........................................................................................................
Least Cost Routing (LCR) ......................................................................................................
Mailbox Buttons ....................................................................................................................
Meet Me Page ........................................................................................................................
Message Waiting ....................................................................................................................
Mute Key ...............................................................................................................................
Night Service Feature ............................................................................................................
Off-Hook Preference ............................................................................................................
Off-Hook Voice Over (OHVO) ................................................................................................
One-Touch Recording ...........................................................................................................
Outside Call - Answer ...........................................................................................................
Outside Call - Place ...............................................................................................................
Outside Call - Place on Hold ................................................................................................
Paging ...................................................................................................................................
Park - Personal .....................................................................................................................
PBX/Centrex Transfer ...........................................................................................................
Personalized Messages ..........................................................................................................
Messages - Custom .......................................................................................................
Date and Time Entry on Personalized Message .............................................................
Personalized Message Code on a Flex Button ...............................................................
Scrollable Canned Messages ..........................................................................................
Prime Flex Button Programming ..........................................................................................
Programming PBX/Centrex Codes Onto Flex Button .............................................................
Programming Your Name Into The LCD Display ..................................................................
Pulse-to-Tone Switchover .....................................................................................................
Repeat Redial ........................................................................................................................
Save Number Redial (SNR) ...................................................................................................
Speakerphone .......................................................................................................................
Station Relocation Feature ....................................................................................................
Speed Dial - Station ..............................................................................................................
Speed Dial - Storing Numbers ...............................................................................................
Speed Dial - System ..............................................................................................................
STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

.5-48
5-48
5-50
5-51
5-51
5-52
5-53
5-53
5-54
5-55
5-55
5-56
5-56
.5-56
5-57
5-59
,5-60
5-61
,561
5-61
5-62
5-63
5-63
5-64
5-64
.5-65
5-66
5-67
5-68
5-68
5-68
5-69
5-70
5-70
5-71
5-71
5-72
5-73

I s s u e 7 - December 1998

xii

Text Messaging (Silent Response) ........................................................................................
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) ..........................................................................................
UCD Calls In Queue Display ..........................................................................................
UCD Available/Unavailable Mode ...................................................................................
UCD Overflow Station - Forwarding Assignments .........................................................
Universal Day/night Answer (UDA/uNA) ...............................................................................
Voice Mail Groups (VM) ........................................................................................................
VM Transfer with ID Digits .............................................................................................
VM Tone Mode Calling Option .......................................................................................
Volume Control Bar (DKT) ...................................................................................................
6

5-73
5-75
5-75
5-75
5-76
5-77
5-78
5-79
5-79
5-80

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE OPERATION

Introduction .........................................................................................................................
Account Codes ......................................................................................................................
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) .......................................................................................
Agent Login/Logout Feature ...........................................................................................
ACD Agent HELP Feature ...............................................................................................
ACD/tJCD Available/Unavailable Mode ...........................................................................
Automatic Line Access ..........................................................................................................
Call Back ..............................................................................................................................
Call Brokering ......................................................................................................................
Call Forward .........................................................................................................................
Call Forward - Follow-Me ..............................................................................................
Calling Station Tone Mode Option .......................................................................................
Camp-On ..............................................................................................................................
Call Park - Personal..............................................................................................................
Call Park (System) ................................................................................................................
Call Transfer.........................................................................................................................
Clear Call Forward, DND, Personalized Messages .................................................................
CO Line Queuing ..................................................................................................................
Conference ...........................................................................................................................
Conference With Personal Park ............................................................................................
Direct Outside Line Access ...................................................................................................
Call Pick-up Directed ............................................................................................................
Call Pick-Up Group ...............................................................................................................
Do Not Disturb (DND) ..........................................................................................................
PBX/Centrex Transfer (Flash Command to CO Line) ...........................................................
Handset Receiver Gain ..........................................................................................................
Issue 1

- December 1998

6-1
6-1
6-1
6-2
6-8
6-8
6-9
6-9
6-9
6-9
6-10
.6-11
6-1 I
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-13
6-13
6-13
6-14
6-14
6-14
6-14
6-15
6-15
6-15

S TARPL US Triad-S Product Description Manual

...
XIII

Intercom Calling ..................................................................................................................
Least Cost Routing (LCR) .....................................................................................................
Message Waiting....................................................................................................................
Off-Hook Preference .............................................................................................................
Personalized Messages ..........................................................................................................
Paging ...................................................................................................................................
Meet Me Page .......................................................................................................................
Programming Names - LCD Display .....................................................................................
Speed Dial - Station ..............................................................................................................
Speed Dial - Storing Station Numbers ...................................................................................
Speed Dial - System ..............................................................................................................
Universal Day/Night Answer (UDA/UNA) ...............................................................................
7

DIGITAL

ATTENDANT

,6-16
.6-16
6-17
6-17
6-17
6-1s
,6-19
6-19
6-19
6-19
6-20
6-20

OPERATIONS

Introduction .........................................................................................................................
Attendant Digital Key Telephone Station Features .................................................................
Attendant Unavailable (Alternate Position) ...........................................................................
Call Hold ...............................................................................................................................
Call Park ...............................................................................................................................
CO Lines Off-Net Forward - Incoming (via Speed Dial) .......................................................
Day/Night/Special Mode ........................................................................................................
Directory Dialing ...................................................................................................................
Programming .................................................................................................................
ICLID Unanswered Call Management Table .........................................................................
Messages - Custom ..............................................................................................................
Outgoing Access - Attendant Disable ....................................................................................
Override ................................................................................................................................
Outside Call - Answer ...........................................................................................................
Outside Call - Place ...............................................................................................................
Recall ....................................................................................................................................
Release Button .....................................................................................................................
Ring Mode .............................................................................................................................
Setting System Time and Date .............................................................................................
Software Version Display .......................................................................................................
Speed Dial - System Storing ..................................................................................................

7-l
7-l
7-5
7-5
7-6
,7-6
7-7
7-7
7-9
.7-13
7-13
,7-15
7-15
,7-15
7-15
7-16
,7-16
7-16
,7-16
7-17
7-17

8 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAYS

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

. 8-1
issue 7 - December 1998

xiv

SYSTEM

CONFIGURATION

General Description ..............................................................................................................
9-l
Basic Key Service Unit (BKSU) ..............................................................................................
9-l
Expansion Key Service Unit (EKSU) ......................................................................................
9-2
Peripheral Boards ................................................................................................................
9-2
Three 8 CO Line and Eight Digital Station Board (CKIB) ............................................... 9-2
Three 8 CO Line and 8 Single Line Station Board (CSIB) .............................................. 9-3
Optional Boards ...................................................................................................................
9-3
Miscellaneous Service Unit (MISU) ...............................................................................
9-3
Modem Unit (MOD@ ....................................................................................................
9-3
Message Wait Unit (MSGU) ...........................................................................................
.9-3
DTMF Receiver Unit (DTMF-A) ......................................................................................
9-3
Digital Station Instruments .................................................................................................
.9-14
S-Button Enhanced Digital Terminal .............................................................................
9-14
12-Button Executive Digital Terminals ..........................................................................
9-15
24-Button Executive/Enhanced Digital Terminals.. ....................................................... 9-16
Digital DSS/DLS Console ................................................................................................
9-17
A ICLID GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Introduction .........................................................................................................................

System Configuration ...........................................................................................................
Functional Performance .......................................................................................................
Calling Number/Name Display ......................................................................................
Incoming Number/Name SMDR ....................................................................................
Unanswered Call Management ......................................................................................
Local Name Translation .................................................................................................

A-l

A-l
A-2
A-2
A-3
A-3
A-4

B PART NUMBERS
C CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

I s s u e I- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

: :i:.: : _
-. : .:.

Digital Enhanced (S-Button) Terminal ........................................................................................
Digital Executive (12-Btn) Terminal ...........................................................................................
Digital Executive (24-Button) Terminal ......................................................................................
DSS Console Map # 1 ..................................................................................................................
Key Pad - Dial By Name ...............................................................................................................
Key Pad - Directory Dialing ..........................................................................................................
ICLID Unanswered Call Management ..........................................................................................
2500 Series SLT Telephones ........................................................................................................
2600 Series SLT Telephones .......................................................................................................
Attendant Digital Display Terminal ..............................................................................................
Starplus Triad-S System ...............................................................................................................
Starplus Enhanced (S-Button) Digital Terminal .........................................................................
Triad-S Executive (12-Button) Digital Terminal ..........................................................................
Triad-S Executive (24Button) Digital Terminal ..........................................................................
Triad-S Digital DSS/DLS Console .................................................................................................
CT1 System Configuration ............................................................................................................

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

issue

2-21
.2-22
.2-22
4-5
5-33
5-34
5-47
6-3
6-5
7-3
9-4
9-14
9-15
9-16
9-17
A-l

1 - December 1998

xvi

Flex Button Programming Codes ................................................................................................
Key Station Features/Software Packages ....................................................................................
SLT Features/Software Packages ................................................................................................
Attendant Features/Software Packages ......................................................................................
Digital Terminal Numbering Plan ..............................................................................................
Ringing Choices ..........................................................................................................................
Flex Button Programming Codes ................................................................................................
Other Key Pad Codes ..................................................................................................................
SLT Numbering Plan ..................................................................................................................
Digital Attendant Numbering Plan ..............................................................................................
ICLID Unanswered Call Management .........................................................................................
Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD) ....................................................................................................
Digital System Capacity ...............................................................................................................
Electrical Specifications ..............................................................................................................
Environmental Specifications .....................................................................................................
Loop Limits ................................................................................................................................
Dialing Specifications .................................................................................................................
Trunk Ordering Information: Public Network Lines ...................................................................
Physical Dimensions and Weight ...............................................................................................
Miscellaneous Specifications .......................................................................................................
Single Line Audible Signals .........................................................................................................
Digital Station Visual Signals - CO Line Buttons .........................................................................
Digital Station Visual Signals - DSS / BLF Buttons ......................................................................
Digital Station Visual Signals - Feature / Function Buttons ........................................................
Signals to Called Stations (Digital Station) ..................................................................................
Signals to Calling Station (Digital Station) ..................................................................................
Voice Mail Confidence Tones ......................................................................................................
Starplus Triad-S Part Numbers ..................................................................................................
System Parameters ....................................................................................................................
Directory Dialing Defaults (FLASH 23) ......................................................................................
Hunt Group Parameters (FLASH 30) ..........................................................................................
Verified Account Codes (FLASH 3 1) ...........................................................................................
CO Line Programming (FLASH 40) ............................................................................................
Miscellaneous CO Parameters & Timers (FLASH 41) .................................................................
CO Line Ringing Assignments (FLASH 40) .................................................................................
DID/ICLID Default Ringing Assignments (FLASH 43) ...............................................................
Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS

2-29
2-58
3-7
4-6
5-4
5-38
5-44
i-f’
7-4
7-13
8-1
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-7
9-7
9-7
9-8
9-9
9-10
9-10
9-l 1
9-12
9-12
9-13
B-l
C-l
C-8
c-12
c-12
c-19
c-20
c-21
c-22

Triad-S Product Description Manual

xvii

Station Programming (FLAS H 50) ..............................................................................................
Button Assignments (FLASH 50) ................................................................................................
System Speed Dial Numbers ......................................................................................................
ACD Group Parameters ..............................................................................................................
UCD Group Parameters ..............................................................................................................
Voice Mail Group Parameters .....................................................................................................
Mailboxes (FLASH 68) ...............................................................................................................
Exceptions (FLASH 70) ...............................................................................................................
Exceptions (FLASH 70) ...............................................................................................................
Least cost Routing (FLASH 75) ...................................................................................................
Daily Start Time ..........................................................................................................................
Weekly Schedule .........................................................................................................................
Route List ................................................................................................................................
Insert/Delete ...............................................................................................................................
3-Digit Area/Office Code Route List .............................................................................................
6-Digit Area Code/Routing ..........................................................................................................
6-Digit Office Code ......................................................................................................................

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

c-30

c-31
c-33
c-35
C-38
c-39

c-41
c-49
c-50

c-51
c-51
c-51
...~-5 2
c-55
C-58

c-60
c-61

Issue I- December 1998

*..
XVIII

I s s u e 1 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

Purpose
This manual provides the information necessary to program, install, operate and maintain the STARPLUS
Triad-S’Lhf system.

Regulatory Information (U.S.A.)
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) established rules to allow the direct connection of the
Triad-S systems to a telephone network. Certain actions must be undertaken or understood before the
connection of customer provided equipment is completed.

Telephone Company Notif ication
Before connecting the Triad-S system to the telephone network, the local serving telephone company must
be given advance notice of intention to use customer provided equipment, and must be provided with the
following information:
+

The telephone numbers to be connected to the system.

Triad-S System Information:
+
+

The Ringer Equivalence Number also located on the KSU: 1.3B
The USOC jack required for direct interconnection with the telephone network: RJllC

FCC Registration Numbers:
o
o

For systems configured as a key system: (button appearances)
DLPKOR-24039~KF-E
For systems configured as a Hybrid system: (dial access codes)
DLPKOR-24026-MF-E

Incidence of Harm
If the telephone company determines that the customer provided equipment is faulty and possibly causing
harm or interruption to the telephone network, it should be disconnected until repairs can be made. If this is
not done, the telephone company may temporarily disconnect service.
I s s u e I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S

Product Description Manual

INTRODUCTION

l-2

REGULATORY INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

Changes in Service
The local telephone company may make changes in its communications facilities or procedures. If these
changes affect the use of the Triad-S system or compatibility with the network, the telephone company
must give written notice to the user to allow uninterrupted service.

Maintenance Limitations
Maintenance on the Triad-S system must be performed only by the manufacturer or its authorized agent.
The user may not make any changes and/or repairs except as specifically noted in this manual. If
unauthorized alterations or repairs are made, any remaining warranty and the software license for the
system will be voided.

Hearing Aid Compatibility
Ail Triad-S Digital Terminals are Hearing Aid Compatible, as defined in Section
and Regulations.

68.316 of Part 68 FCC Rules

UL/CSA Safety Compliance
The Triad-S system has met all safety requirements and was found in compliance with the Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) 1459. This system is authorized to bear the “NRTL/C” marking.

Notice of Compliance
The Triad-S system complies with rules regarding radiation and radio frequency emissions by Class A
computing devices. In accordance with FCC Standard 15 (Subpart J), the following information must be
supplied to the end user:
‘This equipment generates and uses RF energy and if not installed and
used in accordance with the Instruction Manual, may cause interference
to Radio Communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class A computing device, pursuant to Subpart J of Part
75 of
the FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection
against such interference, when operated in a commercial environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause in terference, in which case the user, at his own expense, will be required to take
whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.”

I s s u e I - December 7998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

INTRODUCTION
Toll Fraud and

DISA Disclaimer

Toll Fraud and DISA Disclaimer
“While this device is designed to be reasonably secure against intrusions from fraudulent callers, it is by no
means invulnerable to fraud. Therefore, no express or implied warranty is made against such fraud
including interconnection to the long distance network.”
“While this device is designed to be reasonably secure against invasion of privacy, it is by no means
invulnerable to such invasions. Therefore, no express or implied warranty is made against unlawful or
unauthorized utilization which results in the invasion of one’s right of privacy.”
Vodavi has made every reasonable effort to ensure that this product works in most business environments.
However, there may be some environments (RF1 and EFI) in which this product may not work properly. In
such cases, it is the responsibility of the installer to take the necessary actions to correct the situation.
This product is tested and found to be Year 2000 compliant. Vodavi shows 00 as the year in SMDR output and
on LCD displays.

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue I- December 1998

INTRODUCTION

l-4

Toll Fraud and

DISA Disclaimer

h.
.L.
.:
,
I..._
^,
,... ..._
..;..y.;.

I s s u e ‘I - December 1998

JARPLUS

Triad-S Product

Description Manual

g;3;

%:-;

The System and Key Station features of the STARPLUS Triad-??‘“I are listed and described below in
alphabetical order. An abbreviated feature index is provided in Table 2-2:Key Station Features/Sojware
Packages on page 2-58.

Account Codes
An account code is the last field within Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR), that provides tracking
capabilities for specific calls by entering a non-verified, variable length (up to 12 digits) identifier. The use of
forced Account Codes is optional, offered on a system-wide basis. SMDR must be enabled to use account
codes.

Account Codes - Forced
The Triad-S system allows arranging of the system so that station users must enter an account code before
placing an outside call. Account codes can also be used as a Traveling Class-of-Service to upgrade a restricted
stations class-of-service for unrestricted dialing. Account codes must be entered before the call when forced.

Account Codes - Traveling COS (Verified)
The Verified Account Code/Traveling Class of Service (COS) feature provides the ability to track specific calls
by entering a verified, variable length (up to 12 digits) identifier. Each account code can be assigned a day
and night Class-of-Service for determining the dialing privileges allowed by that account code. This provides a
means for users to override a restricted station. If the dialed account code matches the Verified Account code
table, an intercom dial tone is returned, otherwise an error tone is presented. The use of forced Account
Codes is optional, offered on a system-wide basis. SMDR must be enabled for the account code to print as
part of the SMDR record. The Triad-S system allows up to 250 la-digit account codes.

,. -= Answering Machine Emulation
When a call is sent to a voice mailbox, the station associated with that mailbox can press a pre-programmed
button to listen to the caller leaving the voice mail message. If the mailbox owner decides to speak with the
caller, they can press the pre-programmed button and connect to the caller. Two methods of notification are

issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

KEY STATION FEATURES
Attendant Assignment

available, a ring mode or a speaker mode. These methods are controlled by the type of flexible button
assigned on the telephone.

Attendant
Any three Digital Terminals in the system can be assigned as attendant stations. These stations receive
recalls and can place the system into Night Service. The attendant stations must be either Enhanced or
Executive stations.

Attendant Recall
When a line is left on hold for a programmable time period, the station placing that line on hold is recalled.
If that station fails to answer the recall, the call is recalled to the attendant(s) for handling. There can be
three attendants per system. Transferred, Parked and Camp-on recalls also recall the attendant.

Automatic Call Back Timer
This feature invokes a call back anytime a user places an intercom call and listens to a busy tone for a
preset time period. By default, this timer is disabled and is variable from 00 to 99 seconds.

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Thisfeature is available with optional so@zuare. When purchased, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) is not
used and is replaced by the ACD functions identified below. Sixteen Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
groups can be programmed, each containing up to 16 station numbers (up to the system station
maximum). Each group is assigned a pilot number. When this number is dialed, the first available agent in
that group is rung. Calls are routed to the station that has been on-hook for the longest time period.

Agent Positions
+

Agent Login/Logout with Agent ID Feature: The Agent Login/Logout Feature provides a means for an
agent to log into one of the ACD groups and receive calls. The Agent ID entered in the login process
identifies the agent and places that agent in the available agent list for the ACD group specified in
the login process. This feature allows an agent to log into any ACD group from any station in the
system and receive calls.

I s s u e 1 - December 1998

S JARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Mat-ml

2-3

KEY STATION FEATURES
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

+z+ Agent Identification:
Each ACD Agent has a unique Agent ID (0000-9999) for use during login and logout procedures. This
unique ID is not verified or stored in the system database.
$4 Agent Available/Unavailable Mode:
Stations programmed into an ACD group may remove themselves from their assigned ACD group by
dialing the Available/Unavailable code. When an agent is in the Available mode, that agent receives
ACD calls in the normal manner. When an agent is in the Unavailable mode, that agent no longer
receives ACD calls, however the agent may receive non-ACD calls. Agents that have gone Unavailable
receive a visual reminder with a flashing LED/LCD message.
+ze Agent Help Request:
The HELP feature provides a means for an ACD agent to signal the assigned supervisor for assistance.
While on a call, the agent can press the HELP button to signal the assigned supervisor. The
supervisor may respond by using the HELP button and the ACD Barge-In feature.
+ Agent Call Qualification:
This feature provides a means for an agent on ACD calls to enter codes that identify the call. This
feature permits entering up to 12 digits to print in the SMDR record. A programmable confirmation
tone option was added to the Agent Call Qualification feature on a system-wide basis.
6 Agent ACD Transfer Display:
This feature changes the LCD message to indicate to what ACD group the call was transferred. The
LCD indicates if the call was transferred to a station number or a pilot group number.

Alternate ACD Group Assignments
An alternate ACD group can be programmed so if stations in one group are busy, the alternate group is
checked for an available station.

ACD Group Member Status
The Supervisors Group Member Status feature provides a means for an ACD supervisor to view the status of
the 16 ACD groups in the system, individually. This display tells the supervisor which stations are logged into
the group, and if the station logged in is available, unavailable, out-of-service, in DND, or busy on a call. The
supervisor can use this display to determine why there are a lot of queued calls in a specific group.

‘$:j$ Guaranteed Message Announcement
C‘
This feature provides a means to force incoming callers to an announcement before being placed into an
ACD Queue or routed to an agent. The outside callers are presented with the entire message before being

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue I- December 1998

2-4

KEY STATION FEATURES
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

routed to the ACD Group. Agents in an ACD Group with a Guaranteed Message enabled receive incoming
callers only after the caller has heard the designated recorded announcement in its entirety.

Incoming CO Direct Ringing
CO Lines can be programmed to ring directly into an ACD group. When all agents are busy and RAN is
enabled, the system answers the caller and presents the first RAN announcement automatically.

No-Answer Recall Timer
If a call routed to a station via ACD is not answered by the ACD Agent/Station before the No-Answer Recall
timer expires, the call is returned to ACD Queue with the highest priority. Additionally, the station that failed
to answer the ringing ACD call is placed into an out-of-service (00s) state.

No-Answer Retry Timer
When the No-Answer Retry timer expires, a station that failed to answer the ringing ACD call is placed into
an out-of-service (OOS) state. The station that was taken out-of-service (00s) is placed back in service if the
agent presses his available flex button or dials the available flex code. Additionally, the agent is placed back
in service if the No-Answer Retry timer expires. If the agent does not answer his next ACD call, he is again
taken out-of-service. This cycle continues until the station answers calls, logs out, or goes unavailable.

Overflow Station Assignments
An overflow station may be assigned to route callers in queue to a designated station after a specified time.
The Overflow station may remove themselves from their assigned group by dialing the Overflow
Available/Unavailable code. When the Overflow station is in the available mode, that station receives ACD
calls in the normal manner. When the Overflow station is in the Unavailable mode, that station no longer
receives ACD calls, however they may receive non-ACD calls. The Overflow station that went Unavailable
receives a visual reminder with a flashing LED. The overflow station may NOT be one of the ACD group
stations.

Overflow Station Forwarding
This feature allows ACD calls reaching the ACD Overflow Station to call forward to another station, This is
allowed or denied on a system-wide basis. Once enabled in programming, an ACD Overflow station can
Busy/No-Answer forward to Voice Mail Groups, ACD Groups, Hunt Groups and stations. If the ACD Overflow

/sue 7 - December 7998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

2-5

KEY STATION FEATURES
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

station is busy or does not answer before the no-answer call timer expires, the ACD call forwards to Voice
Mail.

If no

stations are logged into the ACD Group, ACD calls route to the
attendant station.

PC/ACD lnterf ace Trace
This feature is available with optional software. The PC/ACD Interface Trace provides a series of events trace
output that can be used for ACD reporting packages from third parties.

Recorded Announcements (RAN)
Recorded announcement devices can be assigned to provide up to eight different messages per system, if all
stations in an ACD group are busy. The eight messages are available to all 16 ACD groups in different
configurations. Each group can have a Guaranteed RAN and two other RANs, a primary and a secondary. A
RAN device can provide an announcement to one caller at a time. Subsequent callers are queued onto the
message on a first-in basis.
Each RAN Announcement Table can be directed to a Hunt Group, therefore each primary and secondary RAN
Table can have eight announcements. RAN Hunt Group numbers can be chained together by placing the RAN
Group Number (458-461) as the last member in the desired group. RAN Groups are pilot type only.
Callers may dial a RAN directly via their station number. This allows users to change RAN recordings by
calling the RAN device, providing DTMF instructions, then voice recording. This affects Guaranteed Message
Announcements and RAN Announcements.
0.0.1 Supervisor Positions

Supervisor Login/Logout Feature:
The Supervisor Login/Logout Feature provides a means for a supervisor to log into one of the ACD
groups, The Supervisor ID entered in the login process identifies the supervisor for the specific ACD
group to which he is assigned. A supervisor can log into any ACD group from any station in the
system. However, to let the supervisor monitor with barge-in feature, the supervisor must log in at a
station with monitor barge-in capability.
Supervisor Identification:
Each ACD Supervisor has a unique Supervisor ID (0000-9999) that is used during login and logout
procedures. This unique ID is not verified or stored in the system database.

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

issue 7 - December 1998

KEY STATION FEATURES
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

$3 Supervisor Help Request:
The HELP feature provides a means for an ACD agent to signal his assigned supervisor for
assistance. While on a call the agent can press the HELP button to signal the assigned supervisor.
The supervisor may respond by using the HELP button and the ACD Barge-In feature.
+z+ Supervisor Monitor with Barge-In Feature:
The ACD Supervisor Monitor with Barge-In feature provides a means for an ACD supervisor to
monitor an agent’s call in progress to coach sales techniques or customer relations skills. When
used, a supervisor may intrude onto an agents call in a listen only mode or in a true conference
mode. This feature is available with or without a warning tone.
The use of Supervisor Monitor with Barge-in is limited by federal law and
may also be limited or prohibited by state or local law, so check the relevant
laws in your area before employing these features.
A change in volume may occur on the CO line or intercom call after the
barge-in occurs.

+
o
+z+
+z+

Supervisor Station Assignment Feature:
The ACD Supervisor Station Assignment feature provides a means to assign each ACD group a
supervisor. This supervisor station can:
Receive calls in queue display in real time.
Receives No Answer/out-of-service.
Receives HELP displays from the groups to which the supervisor is assigned.
Can barge in on active calls in his ACD group or groups.

Supervisor/Agent Calls in Queue Status Display
This feature provides a means for an agent and ACD supervisor to view the status of their ACD group. This
display is an idle state display and prompts a supervisor that agents in the group are having problems
answering all their calls. The display tells the agent and his supervisor how many calls are in queue, how
many agents are logged into the ACD group, and the length of time that the oldest call has been in queue.
This feature displays the oldest call in queue duration in hours, minutes and seconds. When an ACD agent
is on a CO call, the LCD displays the trunk name and call duration of the present call in the lower half of the
display.
This feature allows an ACD station (12/24 button executive only) to assign multiple buttons that display the
calls in queue information for a particular group on the LCD. Additionally, the button LED indicates the
number of calls in queue.

issue 7 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

KEY STATION FEATURES

2-7

Automatic Line Access

Wrap-Up Timer Per ACD Group
This feature provides can be programmed on a per group basis instead of on a system-wide basis.

Automatic Line Access
Each station, key or SLT, may have their phone programmed to access a particular CO Line, such as a private
line or a line from a Group of CO lines upon going off-hook. This is useful in Centrex or PBX applications
when station users have dedicated or individual lines. An outside line dial tone is received just by going offhook, without dialing an access code.

Automatic Night Service
The system may optionally be programmed to go in and out of night service automatically. This method does
not require the attendant to activate or deactivate night service on a daily basis. The automatic night service is
enabled and disabled on a programmable daily schedule including Saturday and Sunday. A time can be set to
enable Night Service and to Disable Night Service on a per day basis.

Automatic Pause Insertion With Speed Dial
If a flash command is placed into system speed dial numbers or station speed dial numbers, a pause is
automatically inserted after the flash. A pause is also automatically inserted after a PBX dialing code is used.
Manually dialing a flash during a call causes only those numbers dialed after the flash to be redialed for a
Last Number redialed number or for a Save Number redialed number.

Automatic Privacy
Privacy is automatically provided on all calls. If one station is conversing, another station cannot intrude on
that line. The Automatic Privacy feature can be disabled, allowing up to seven other stations to join in on
existing CO line conversations.
Disabling of the privacy feature may be limited by federal, state or local
law, so check the relevant laws in your area before disabling privacy.

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

issue I - December 1998

KEY STATION FEATURES

2-8

Automatic Selection

Automatic

Selection

The user can select an outside line, intercom station, speed dial button, or dial a feature and automatically
place the phone in the dialing mode without pressing the ON/OFF button or lifting the handset,

I‘;I-:-- :. ,‘\:!,
_-‘C..;,
:-

Background Music
Each Digital Terminal user may receive music over their speaker when an optional music source is
connected to the system. This feature can be allowed or denied on a system-wide basis by programming.

Battery Back-Up (Memory)
A Lithium battery is located on the Master Processor Board (MPB) of the Triad-S system to protect system
memory in case of commercial power outage or the system power being turned off for a time period.
Battery Back-up Memory retains all system features including system and station speed dial during a power
outage.

Busy Lamp Field (BLF)
When a button on an Digital Terminal is assigned as a DSS, it also serves as a Busy Lamp Field to display the
status of that telephone.

Call Announce - Privacy
Each telephone user can set their intercom signaling switch or HPT button (Digital Terminals) to receive
intercom call announcements without having the calling party hear any conversations in progress.

Call Back
A station can initiate a call back request to another busy station. Once that station becomes idle, the station
that left the call back request is signaled.

., .

Call Cost Display Feature
The Call Cost Display Feature allows a user to view the approximate cost of each call made, This
approximate cost is also printed as part of the SMDR record.

Issue 1 - December 7998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

KEY STATION FEATURES
Call Coverage Feature

The Call Cost Display replaces the call duration display when a call is made using LCR. This display is enabled
in programming.
-: .,‘i
1;;.
.c_.;, .A;?
c.-+:*

The cost information is programmable by selecting one of the 16 route list tables and one of the four time
periods. This allows the user to program four separate costs based on the time of day for each of the 16
routes. The costs entered in the tables is a cost for one minute, however, costs are calculated using a l/l&h
of a minute value. These costs are rounded down and are based on the start time of the call, even if the call
extends into a different time period. The SMDR printout contains a cost calculated using a l/lOth of a minute
increment and the display updates approximately every 30 seconds. The user must have LCR enabled to get
the call cost display.

Call Coverage Feature
This feature provides the functionality for stations to answer calls for other stations by utilizing call coverage
buttons. Visual and Audible status of ringing stations to an assigned coverage station are provided. Multiple
coverage stations can have the same remote ringing station(s) programmed on their stations. Once a
coverage station answers the call, other stations attempting to answer the call receives busy tone and the call
coverage button extinguishes on all appearances of that button. This feature can cover SLT extensions,
however an SLT cannot perform the call coverage function. The SLT extension need not be physically
installed, only the SLT card must be installed.
Direct CO calls have ring and LCD priority over call coverage calls. The call coverage station must have a
direct CO appearance or Loop button in order to pick up an external call. If the call coverage station is in
DND, no audible ringing is heard, however visual and LCD information is presented.
This feature can be programmed by the station user or through admin programming. By default, no call
coverage buttons are assigned.

Call Forward - Preset
This feature allows the system database to be configured so that incoming CO Lines, which are programmed
to ring at a particular station, can be forwarded elsewhere in the system predetermined by programming.
This feature is active if the station ringing is not answered in a specified time, and is particularly useful in
overflow applications in which a Voice Mail or Auto Attendant may be in use.
et4
0

A station may have one designated preset forward location defined in the database.
Preset Call Forward is chainable only to other predetermined preset forward stations specified in the
database up to a chain of 5 stations.

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

Issue 1

- December 1998

I ..

2-10

KEY STATION FEATURES
Call Forward - Preset

+
+

Chainable Preset Call Forwarding forces the incoming CO Line to ring at each station preassigned in
the database for the Preset Forward Ring Timer specified in the database before forwarding.
Each station in the system may, independently, have incoming CO calls preset forwarded to the
following destinations:

Preset Call Forward - ACD Groups
CO Lines can be preset forwarded to ring into an ACD Group from any station. A CO line does not preset
forward to a busy ACD group, however each time the preset forward timer expires (for a total of five
attempts) the group is checked for an idle station. If a member of the group is idle the call is then presented
to that member.

Preset Call Forward - Hunt Groups
CO Lines can be preset forwarded to ring into a Hunt Group from any station. A CO line does not preset
forward to a busy Hunt group, however each time the preset forward timer expires (for a total of five
attempts) the group is checked for an idle station, If a member of the group is idle the call is then presented
to that member.

Preset Call Forward - Off-Net
CO Lines can be preset forwarded to ring Off-Net via speed dial from any station, After the expiration of the
preset forward timer, the system selects an idle CO line and dial the off-net location, then connect the two
CO lines.

Preset Call Forward - Per CO Line
This feature allows each CO line to be preset call forwarded on a per CO line basis. This allows a CO line to
initially ring at multiple stations and forward to a predetermined destination. The destination can be a
station or Hunt Group. Each CO line has a preset forward timer. Additionally, each CO line has a VMID field
to allow specific VM digits to be sent when a CO line forwards to a VM group.
This feature applies to initial CO ringing lines only. If a forward destination is programmed in the CO line
field, the CO call forwards to that destination after the CO Preset Forward timer expires, This forward occurs
regardless of how many or how few stations the line is ringing on. Once the CO line is answered and
transferred, station call forwarding rules are in effect. Calls still follow all call or busy forwards, however, CO
preset forward forwards the call if the first forward destination has not answered the call, VMID digits per
CO line override station VMID. Calls ringing into ACD, UCD or VM Groups continue to ring the group. The
CO call does not forward when ringing one of these types of groups.
I s s u e 1 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

..: -,
+>;.>\
/_‘:.---I:.1-T’. ..,.
.z_

KEY STATION FEATURES
Call Forward: Station

Preset Call Forward - Stations
.r:. _.
pc&
.;.:-S.

Each Digital Terminal user may have preset in the database Initial Ringing Incoming directed to another
station in the system, if the call goes unanswered for a predetermined amount of time.

Preset Call Forward - UCD Groups
CO Lines can be preset forwarded to ring into a UCD Group from any station, A CO line does not preset
forward to a busy UCD group, however each time the preset forward timer expires (for a total of five attempts)
the group is checked for an idle station. If a member of the group is idle the call is then presented to that
member.

Preset Call Forward - VM Groups
This feature is available with optional software. CO Lines can be preset forwarded to ring into aVoice Mail
Group from any station. A CO line does not preset forward to a busy Voice Mail group, however each time the
preset forward timer expires (for a total of five attempts) the group is checked for an idle Voice Mail port. If a
VM port is idle the call is then presented to Voice Mail.

Call Forward: Station
When any type of station call forwarding is invoked, the LCD display normally indicates the call forwarding
mode at all times. This feature has modified the LCD forwarding display to make the call forwarding mode
display optional. This feature is enabled/disabled in admin programming on a system-wide basis.

Call Forward - All Calls
This feature allows a station the ability to have all their calls (internal or external) forwarded immediately to
a designated station, an ACD or UCD group pilot number, Voice Mail group number, or Hunt group.

Call Forward - Busy
..-z-k..:-. . <
c-:--A-

‘-‘I”

This feature allows a station the ability to have their calls forwarded to a designated station, an ACD or UCD
group pilot number, Voice Mail group number, or Hunt group when their station is busy.

Call Forward - Busy/No Answer
Allows a station the ability to forward a combination busy/no answer calls to a designated station, an ACD or
UCD group pilot number, Voice Mail group number, or Hunt group. No answer calls forward when the
system-wide no answer timer expires. Initial CO ringing, transferred CO ringing and intercom ringing calls
STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

KEY STATION FEATURES
Call Park

can all be forwarded. Calls that ring to an idle station is call forwarded after expiration of the No Answer
Ring Timer.

Call Forward - Follow-Me
This feature allows a user who is away from their station, to activate/deactivate call forwarding from another
station in the system. This enables the user to have their calls forwarded to their current location or
forwarded into Voice Mail, ACDRJCD, Hunt Groups, or to any other station in the system, When this call
forward is activated, all calls presented to the forwarded station forward to the destination station
immediately. This feature also provides the capability for DISA and TIE callers to activate/deactivate call
forwarding from a remote location. Both internal and external calls forward to the designated station, The
call forward status is stored in a battery protected area of memory.

Call Forward - No Answer
This feature allows a station the ability to have their calls forwarded to a designated station, an ACD or UCD
group pilot number, Voice Mail group number or Hunt group number when there is no answer at the
station. No answer calls forward when the system-wide no answer timer expires.

Call Forward - Off-Net
Stations are allowed to forward intercom and transferred CO line calls to an off-net location, This allows a
station to reroute calls that would normally be lost. Calls can be forwarded to home or another off-net site.
Initially ringing CO calls cannot be forwarded with this feature (see Incoming CO lines Off-Net Forward
feature).

Call Park
An outside line can be placed into one of eight parking locations and can be retrieved by any station that has
a direct line appearance or an available loop button. Parked calls have their own recall timer and recall the
originating station and, if still unanswered, the attendant(s).

Call Pick-Up
ACD/UCD Groups
Stations outside of an ACD or UCD group can pick up a tone-ringing intercom call, transferred, incoming, or
recalling outside line call ringing to a specific UCD station. The call must be a tone ringing call.
Issue 1 - December 7998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

KEY STATION FEATURES

2-13

Call Transfer

Directed
&:j~
ye&;

A station can pick up an intercom call, transferred, incoming, or recalling outside line call to a specific
unattended station. The call must be a tone ringing call.

Group
Stations can be placed in one or more of four pick-up groups. Stations within a group can pick up tone
ringing intercom calls, transferred, incoming, or recalling outside line calls for another station in that
group.
By default, 04 Voice Mail stations are placed in Pick-Up Group 1. You may
need to chuge this default setting.

Station
A station can pick up a tone-ringing intercom call, transferred, incoming, or recalling outside line call to a
specific unattended station. The call must be a tone ringing call.

Call Transfer
An outside CO line can be transferred from one keyset to another. By using the TRANS button, screened
(announced) or unscreened transfers can be made. The line being transferred rings on the keyset and
provides Exclusive Hold flashing indication to the receiving party’s keyset. Any number of attempts can be
made to locate someone by calling different keysets without losing the call. If a line is transferred to a busy
station, it receives muted ringing.
The Direct Transfer Mode allows transferring of an outside CO line directly to the key station handset, if
enabled in programming.
An system-wide database parameter can select music on hold or ringback tone to the CO caller when CO calls
are transferred in the system.

c-..:.;z,:‘_.;mG-_-,p:-:

Calling Station Tone Mode Option
This feature provides an easy means for a Calling station to override a desired stations H (handsfree) or P
(call announce) intercom setting. A dial code has been added that is dialed in front of the extension number
to force the tone ringing.

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue I- December 1998

KEY STATION FEATURES

2-14

Camp-on

Camp-on
A station may alert a busy party that an outside line is on hold and waiting for them by using the CAMP-ON
button. To camp on a call, press the TBANS button to transfer the call to the desired busy station, then press
the CAMP ON button. The busy party receives a muted ring over the keyset speaker, and a visual flashing
CAMP ON LED. By pressing the CAMP ON button, the person called places his existing outside call on hold
and is connected to the person placing the Camp On. He can then pick up the call on the appropriate line.
Calls cannot be camped on when a station is in DND or in Conference.

Camp-on Recall
When a station does not answer a Camp-On, that call recalls the person placing the Camp-On, and if
unanswered by them, recalls the attendant(s).

Centrex

Compatibility

The Triad-S system provide features that are Centrex compatible so that Centrex users can utilize the TriadS system to enhance their Centrex capabilities. The system actually simplifies and provides easier access to
many Centrex features by offering the following features:

Flex Button Programming
Flexible button programming allows Centrex users to program complex Centrex dial codes onto a keyset
button for easy one touch access to Centrex features.

Off -Hook Preference
Digital Terminals and Single line telephones may be programmed to have their personal Centrex line
accessed automatically just by lifting the handset or pressing the ON/ OFF button, Internal features to the
Triad-S system are still made available to Digital Terminals by accessing intercom before going off-hook.

Private Line Appearance
The Triad-S system allow for private line assignment on an unlimited basis. Each station may have sole
access to a particular outside line if desired and may also be assigned to receive incoming ringing on that
line.

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

KEY STATION FEATURES

2-15

CentrexlPBX Transfer

Programmable Flash Timer

@$
. . . . . . . ,.

CO line flash is a momentary opening on a CO line used for signaling. When using the Triad-S system in a
Centrex environment, the CO line flash is to signal the intention to transfer a caller using Centrex transfer.
The CO line flash timer is programmable on a per CO line bases to facilitate a mixture of Centrex and CO
lines within the same system.

Programming g, #, and Hook-Flashes into Speed Dial
Many Centrex codes utilize a hook-flash followed by, in many cases, the digit [ *] and or [#I. The Triad-S
system allow programming of these codes as a part of system or station speed dial sequences.

Centrex/PBX Transfer
When Centrex or PBX lines are connected to the Triad-S system, users may, by using the Flash button,
transfer callers to other Centrex or PBX extensions. Additionally, the Flash command may be included within
a Speed Bin and programmed onto a flex button for one button transfer.

Class Of Service (COS) Station
Each station is assigned a Class of Service which governs that stations dialing privileges. Day Class of Service
and Night Class of Service assignments to stations provide the system administrator additional control over
station dialing, preventing misuse of phones after hours. Six uniquely defined Classes of Service are available
for assignment to stations on a per station basis and all six are available for day and night assignment. Station
Class of Service works in conjunction with CO line Class of Service to provide the most flexible means for
offering custom toll restriction. As a part of the Dialing privilege assignment through Class of Service the
system offers two programmable Allow and Deny tables for additional customization of a toll restriction plan
for a particular customer. Additionally, each station can reference up to four special area code tables.

CO Line - Access
Through programming, telephones are allowed or denied access to particular outside lines or line groups.

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

issue I - December 1998

2-16

KEY STATION FEATURES
CO Line - Class Of Service (COS)

CO Line - Class Of Service (COS)
Each CO Line may be programmed with a Class-of-Service to provide dialing privileges. The Triad-S system
use an array between CO Line Class-of-Service and Station Class-Of-Service to offer a wide variety of dialing
privilege possibilities.

CO Line - Control (Contact)
On the Triad-S system, there are two (2) control contacts which may be individually programmed as either
CO Line Control (to control ancillary equipment) or Loud Bell Control to control a customer provided
ringing device to external areas. When programmed as CO Line Control and assigned to a CO line, the
corresponding contact closes whenever that CO line is accessed by a station.

CO Line - Distinctive Ring
The tone ring signal used to notify stations of an incoming call can be changed in administrative
programming to provide distinctive ringing on a per CO line basis. A distinctive ring tone can be
programmed for each CO line that is used to ring each station. The system provides 36 different ring
patterns that can be selected for each CO line in the system. CO line distinctive ringing overrides station
distinctive ringing.

CO Line - Groups
Outside lines can be placed in one of eight groups if the customer’s business requires such grouping.
Stations are then individually assigned access to these groups and given the ability to dial on particular
lines.

CO Line - Identification
This feature allows entering a name into the database for each individual line (trunk) connected to the
system. The name may be entered in any combination up to 12-characters in length (this represents 24
digits entered). Once entered, LCD Digital Terminals including the attendant station(s) receives the
programmed line name in place of the default LINE XXX message. This applies to all line call processing
conditions where the current LINE XXX message appears.

issue I- December 7998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

KEY STATION FEATURES

2-17

CO Line - Incoming Ringing Assignment

SMDR always print the line number in place of the programmed name. A programmable data field is
available for each line in the system.
This feature is for LCD Display appearance only!

CO Line - Incoming Ringing Assignment
Each CO line may be programmed (in database admin) so that incoming ringing on the specified CO line(s)
may be assigned initial ringing to one of the following destinations:
9 One or more stations (Keyset or SLT)
+ To an ACD, UCD, Voice Mail or Hunt Group
+ Off-Net (via Speed Dial)
The ring-in follows Day Ring assignments unless Night Service mode is active, in which case all incoming CO
calls follow Night Ring assignments.
When ringing is assigned to a keyset, a direct line appearance or an idle Loop button must be available to
receive the call. Station call forwarding of initial ringing CO call is possible and can be directed to other
keysets with an available Loop button or direct appearance.
If the initially ringing CO call cannot ring at the destination assigned, it rings at the first attendant station.

CO Line - Loop Button
A station not having a direct appearance for a CO line receives incoming CO calls and transferred CO calls
under the loop button. Only one call at a time can be connected to a keyset on the loop button. If more than
one loop button is on a key set, the loop buttons may be conferenced together. If all programmed Loop
buttons on a keyset are busy or have a CO call on hold, the party attempting to transfer a CO line to that
station receives busy tone and cannot transfer the call to that station. If a transfer is attempted, the CO line
recalls the initiator immediately.
CO lines are also presented to a Loop when dialing out using LCR or when using speed dial to dial out and the
line chosen does not appear on the key station.

TARPLUS

Triad-S Product Descrip fion Manual

i s s u e I - December 1998

2-18

KEY STATION FEATURES
CO Line - Loop Supervision

CO Line - Loop Supervision
The Triad-S system can be programmed to monitor CO lines while on-hold or connected to RAN devices or
Voice Mail systems, or in Trunk-to-Trunk connections for disconnect signal provided by the Telco.
After a disconnect signal is detected, the Triad-S system releases the CO lines and automatically place them
back in service.

CO Line - Pool Button Operation
The Pool Group Key is used primarily to access CO lines that do not appear on a station so that outgoing
calls may be made. Pooled group keys are associated to CO line groups and may be programmed for use on
any of the flexible line buttons. CO lines are accessed in descending order of priority starting with the
highest numbered available (not busy) CO line in a CO line group. Stations may have as many POOL
buttons as there are CO line groups. Multiple POOL buttons for the same group are also allowed.

CO Line - Queuing
When all the outside lines in a group are busy, stations can be placed in queue awaiting a line in the same
group to become available. If a station doesn’t answer the queue signal within 15 seconds, that station is
dropped from the queue.

CO Line - Ringing Options
When a CO call rings at a busy station, the call rings at the station using a muted ring signal. This option
allows a user to receive a reminder ring at his busy station, instead of muted ringing. Additionally, a
reminder ring timer is available to provide the reminder ring every time the timer expires, as long as the
incoming CO line remains connected. The system defaults this option to muted ringing.

CO Ring Detect
The duration of the ringing signal from the CO or the PBX is matched with ringing detection circuitry in the
Triad-S. The ring detect can range from 200 to 900 ms programmed in 100 ms increments. This timer
helps prevent false ringing.

issue 1 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

KEY STATION FEATURES
Conference

Conference
There are two different types of conferencing.

Multi-Party

Conference

Up to eight parties can engage in a conference. A maximum of five external parties can be conferenced.

Unsupervised

Conference

The conference initiator can exit a conference with two outside parties and leave them in an unsupervised
conference. The initiator can re-enter the conference at any time. The Triad-S system can automatically
terminate the call when both parties hang up, when Loop Supervision is provided by the Telco and enabled in
the database.
A programmable conference timer disconnects the unsupervised conference if the initiator does not re-enter.

Conference

Enable/Disable

This feature allows administering of the system conference feature on a per station basis for the ability of a
station to initiate a conference.

Database Printout (Dump)
Through a system programming command, either portions of or a complete database dump can be printed
using the RS-23X connector located on the optional Miscellaneous Service Unit (MISU) board on the TriadS system.

Database

Upload/Download

DataBase Upload/Download feature provides a maintenance facility which has been added to the Remote
Administration routine. This routine permits downloading of the database to a PC, when a software change is
made or when the system must be initialized and re-programmed. Additionally, the routine facilitates the
programming of a database on an in-house system which can be downloaded to a PC and then uploaded to a
system in the field. After the system maintenance is completed, the file saved in the PC can then be uploaded
to the system.

STARPLUS

Triad-S Producf Description Manual

issue I- December 1998

KEY STATION FEATURES
Class Of Service (COS) Day/night

Class Of Service (COS) Day/night
This feature allows stations that are a certain COS during the day, to be assigned a different COS when the
system is put in the night mode. The night COS goes into affect when the system is placed into the night
mode, manually or automatically. This prevents the misuse of phones after hours.

Dial By Name
The system allows station users to dial extension numbers, or speed bins by entering the name of a person
that has been programmed for that station. The system database allows entry of a name (alphanumeric) up
to 24 digits in length for each station. The programmed name can be used for dial-by-name station users
and in directory dialing. This feature should not be confused with the Name In Display feature.

Dial Pulse Sending
Each CO interface circuit for outside lines can be programmed to send dial pulse or DTMF signals, Dialing
speed and break/make ratios are programmable.

Issue 1

- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

KEY STATION FEATURES
Dialing Privileges

Dialing Privileges
The system provides a flexible means of providing toll or dialing restriction. Through the assignment of class
of service (both station and outside line) many combinations of allow and deny numbers can be set. Both
area and office codes can be screened for allow/deny privileges.

Figure 2-1: Digital Enhanced (8-Button) Terminal

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

Issue I- December 1998

KEY STATION FEATURES
Dialing Privileges

Figure 2-2: Digital Executive

(IP-Btn) Terminal

Figure 2-3: Digital Executive (24-Button) Terminal

I s s u e I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

2-23

KEY STATION FEATURES
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
The Triad-S system allows programming of an unlimited number of outside line calls to provide direct access
to the system and use of features such as WATS lines, intercom dial tone or the ability to dial out on outgoing
trunks without going through the attendant. The duration of a Trunk-to-Trunk DISA call can be set by the
system administrator. DISA callers may also access LCR, All Internal/External paging, All Call paging, Call
Park pick-up, and Meet-Me paging. A DTMF receiver must be available for DISA operation.
Vodavi has taken precautions to prevent fraud by requiring a security code
for this feature. However, it is may still be vulnerable to fraud.

Group Access
Incoming DISA callers may access all line groups such as FX or WATS lines or other outgoing services while
away from the office.

DISA Call Forwarding
Four options are available for a DISA line: 1) 24-hour, 2) night, 3) 24-hour with forwarding, 4) or night with
forwarding. The CO line ringing at a station follows preset forward or no-answer call forward using the preset
forward timer the same as an initially ringing CO line does. It follows direct forward and busy forward the
same as an initially ringing CO line. If the preset forward timer is set to 00 (disabled) the first forward of the
DISA ringing call at a station takes 15 seconds.

Programmable Access
A three-digit security code can be assigned in the system database to restrict unwanted use of the DISA
circuits. Each DISA line can be programmed independently for each option.

Station Access
DISA callers may dial any station directly without going through the attendant.

Trunk-to-Trunk
The DISA Trunk-to-Trunk (or Conference) option on the CO line governs a DISA callers ability to access other
outside lines, CO lines must have DISA Trunk-to-Trunk enabled to allow a DISA caller to establish an
outgoing trunk-to-trunk connection. This allows for specific CO line access restriction on DISA calls.

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue I- December 1998

2-24

KEY STATION FEATURES
Direct Station Selection (DDS)

Direct Station Selection (
A user with DSS buttons assigned at their Key Station can call an intercom station or transfer a CO call by
simply pressing the appropriate DSS button.

Direct Transfer Mode
An outside CO line can be transferred from one keyset to another. By using the TRANS button, a screened
(announced) transfer can be transferred directly to the handset on any key station. Any number of attempts
can be made to locate someone by calling different keysets without losing the call. If a line is transferred to
a busy station, it receives muted ringing.
This feature is programmable on a system-wide basis in admin programming.

Directory Dialing
Directory dialing allows station users to obtain a directory of station users and have the system dial the
extension that is currently on the display. The Triad-S system provide locations for up to 200 names.
Directory dialing also allows users to program a name along with a speed dial bin for use in later locating a
speed dial number. When prompted to do so, the system displays the name associated with a speed dial
number on the LCD display so that when the desired name is shown, the user may then have the system
dial the number.
Directory dialing also allows users to associate a name with an entry in the local number/name translation
table. When prompted to do so, the system displays the name associated with the table on the LCD display
so that when the desired name is shown, the user may then have the system dial the number.

Disable Outgoing CO Line Access
This feature allows the first attendant station to dial a code and disable a CO line from outgoing CO calls,
This applies to all station(s) that have access to that line. Incoming status is not affected.

Distinctive Ringing (User Selectable)
The tone ring signal used to notify stations of an incoming call can be changed by each station user to
provide distinctive ringing among a group of stations. Each station user may select a distinctive ringing tone

I s s u e I - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

KEY STATION FEATURES

Do Not Disturb

‘.

2-25

(DND)

that is used to ring their station. The system provides 36 different ring patterns that the station users may
select from.

Do Not Disturb (DND)
Placing a keyset in DND eliminates incoming outside line ringing, intercom calls, transfers and paging
announcements. A ringing station may go into DND to silence ringing. The attendant can override a station in
DND. The station in DND can use the telephone to make normal outgoing calls. A station can be denied this
feature through programming. DND does not apply to the first attendant station.

One-Time Do Not Disturb
Allows a station user to turn off muted ringing that occurs while off hook (handset or ON/OFF) on another
call. Useful when having an important conversation and do not wish to be disturbed by ringing. The station,
while off hook, (ON/OFF or handset) depresses the DND button which eliminates muted ringing. When the
station goes on-hook the DND button is extinguished and DND is cancelled.

DTMF Sending
Each CO interface circuit for outside lines can be individually programmed to send DTMF (tone) or dial pulse
signals.

End-to-End Signaling
This feature enables station users to communicate with external devices such as answering machines and
IVR devices.

Executive Override
This feature allows designation of certain stations as executive stations with the ability to override and Barge
in on other keysets engaged in conversation on a CO line or intercom call.
In addition to the station programmable option, a system programmable option enables or disables a
warning tone when the station marked as an executive is cut-thru to the conversation. This is useful for an
ACD agent supervisors or training personnel who require a service observing option.
A separate condition has been added to this feature which allows or disallow an Executive to override an
extension. This prevents an extension with override capability from overriding an Executive’s station,
STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

KEY STATION FEATURES

2-26

Executive/Secretary Pairing

Use of this feature when the exec tive override warning tone is disabled
may be interpreted as a violation of federal or state laws.

A change in volume may occur on the CO line or intercom call after the
barge-in occurs.

Executive/Secretary Pairing
There are four sets of Executive/Secretary pairings available. When the Executive station is busy or in DND,
the Secretary station receives intercom calls and transfers. The Secretary station can signal the Executive in
DND by using the Camp-On feature.

External Night Ringing
The system can be programmed so that CO lines marked for UNA provides ringing out the external page
ports when the system is placed into Night mode.

Flash
Provides telephone users with the ability to terminate an outside call or transfer a call behind a PBX or
Centrex and restore dial tone without hanging up the handset. A FLASH button is located on each Digital
Terminal.

Flash On Intercom
This feature enables key station users to utilize the Flash Key to terminate pages and intercom calls. While
connected to a page zone or another internal station pressing the Flash key terminates the call and return
intercom dial tone.

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

2-27

KEY STATION FEATURES
Flash Rates (Programmable)

Flash Rates (Programmable)
Fixed and flexible button flash rates can be programmed. There are programmable flash rates for 19
features/functions that can now be programmed to up to 15 different red flash rate options and 14 different
green flash rate options. These are set-up in admin programming.
All other flash rates in the system are fixed (defaulted) at the rates for the Triad-S system.

Flexible Button Assignment
The Triad-S system has the following flexible button assignment features:
+

Enhanced or Executive Digital Terminals (24-Btn/12-Btn) with 11 fixed feature buttons and 24/12
flexible buttons. The system powers up with a default button mapping as shown inFigure 2-I: Digital
Enhanced @-Button) Terminal and Figwe 2-2: D@tal Executive (12-B&) Terminal. Each flexible
button can be assigned as a CO/PBX line, DSS button, Speed Dial or Feature button. Refer to Table 2I:Flex Button Programming Codes.
Q Enhanced Digital Terminals (8-Btn) with 5 fixed feature buttons and 8 flexible buttons. The system
powers up with a default button mapping as shown in F&we 2-2: Dz@tal Executive (12-B&)
Terminal. Each flexible button can be assigned as a COIPBX line, DSS button, Speed Dial or Feature
button. Refer to Table 2-1:Flex Button Programming Codes.
This feature enables programming of flexible buttons from a remote location (off-site). Range programming
can also be used to assign these buttons to multiple stations.
Outside Line: Automatically accesses assigned line. (Assigned in database)
DSSBLF: Automatically signal assigned station and provides BLF for off-hook and DND. (User
programmable)
Feature: Any feature with a dialing code (i.e., Personalized Messages, Paging, Account Code, Call Park,
Music, etc.) can be assigned to a flexible button. (User programmable)
Group Access: (Le., ACD, UCD, Hunt, Voice Mail group pilot numbers) (User programmable).
Speed Dial: Automatically dials Speed number. (System, Station, Saved Number Redial, Last Number
Redial) (User programmable)
Pooled Group Access: Some or all outside lines can be grouped; pressing this button accesses the
highest numbered unused CO line in that group. (Assigned in database)
loop: Used to answer a transferred call on a line for which a user does not have a button assigned.
(Assigned in database)

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e I- December 7998

KEY STATION FEATURES

2-28

Flexible Button Assignment

Unassign (Locked-Out): Specific buttons may be designated as unused or locked out. When a
button is programmed as unused, the button may not be programmed by the station user using
flex button programming procedures.

I s s u e I- December 1998

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

2-29

KEY STATION FEATURES
Flexible Button Assignment

100-131

‘l‘riact-S’t’31 Ext. Numbers

43+tq
438

Call Park Location l-7 (System)
Personal Park

44
45
55
55

VI
P-d
PJI

PJI
56 WI

566
567
57o+[YY]
571
572+5 [UU]

Voice Mail Group Pilot Numbers O-7
Hunt Group Pilot Numbers O-7
ACD* Group Pilot Numbers O-9
UCD Group Pilot Numbers O-7
ACD* Group Pilot Numbers 1 O-15
ACD*/UCD Available/Unavailable
ACD*/UCD Calls in Queue Display
ACD* Call Qualifier Code
ACD* Agent Logout
ACD’ Agent Login

573

ACD* Group Member Status
Display

574
575+5 [UU]

ACD* Agent Help
ACD* Supervisor Logout
ACD* Supervisor Login

576+5 [UU]
577+5 [UU]
578
579+5 [UU]
601

ACD* Supervisor Queue Status
Display
ACD* Overflow Avail/Unavail
ACD* Calls in Queue Display buttons

603

Attendant Override
CO Line Off-Net Forward

604
621
622

Night Service
Line Queue
Call Back

625

Executive Override/
Monitor Barge-In

626
627

LCR Queue Cancel
Account Code Enter

628
631

OHVO Enable
Do Not Disturb

632
633+[ZZ]

Background Music
Personalized Messages

633+[00]

Clear Personalized Messages

634
635

Headset Mode
ICLID Display (unanswered calls

639
641

Incoming CO Call Transfer
Release button

643
644+[IDX]
645
646+1XxX]
647+[XXX]
649+[44V]
653
654+[0, I]
680
695
70
71
72

Repeat Redial
Mailbox button
Intercom button(s)
Call Coverage (Ringing Type)
Call Coverage (Non-Ringing Type)
One-Touch Recording
Caller ID Name/Number Toggle
Answering Machine Emulation mode
Dial Speed Directory
Distinctive Ringing
All Call Page (Internal and External)
Internal Page Zone 1
Internal Page Zone 2
Internal Page Zone 3

73
74
75

Internal Page Zone 4

76+[1]
77

Internal All Call Page
External Page Zones
Meet-Me-Page Answer

9
#O

Least Cost Routing (LCR) Access
Group Call Pick Up

#5
[SPEED]+[YY]

Universal Day/Night Answer
Speed Dial Access
(00-19 Station) (20-99 System)

[SPEED]+[S] Save Number Redial
[SPEED]+[#] Last Number Redial

XXX = Station Extension Numbers
YY = Speed Dial Bin Numbers
ZZ = Personalized Messages
U = ACD* (O-15) or UCD (O-7) Group Number
C = Call Park Location O-7
H = Hunt Group Number O-7
V = Voice Mail Group Number O-7
IDX = 001-255
l

Features available with optional software.

Table 2-1: Flex Button Programming Codes

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

issue I- December 7998

KEY STATION FEATURES

2-30

Forced Least Cost Routing (LCR)

Forced Least Cost Routing (LCR)
The Triad-S system may be programmed on a per station basis to force the use of LCR for outgoing
accessed. This allows the system administrator to maintain greater control over dialing patterns and the
lines used for placing outgoing CO calls.

Forward Override
This feature allows a user to reach a busy station that is busy forward, no answer forward or all call
forwarded. This allows the calling station to call to a forwarded station, OHVO, Executive Override, Monitor,
Message Wait, Camp-On, or Call Back at that station rather than forwarding to the busy destination.

Group Listening
All digital key stations have built-in speakerphones. Station users may use the speaker to monitor a call
while using the handset to converse with the outside party. This enables other people in the room to listen
to both parties in the conversation.
This feature is not available when the station

is in headset mode.

Headset Compatibility
The Triad-S Digital Terminals are designed to allow the connection of an industry standard, electret mic
compatible, modular headset. The user connects the modular headset to the handset jack on the telephone
leaving the handset in place. The ON/OFF button on the Digital Terminal is then used to activate the
headset.

Headset Mode
Each digital terminal can be individually programmed for headset operation. When programmed, an
industry standard headset with it’s adapter box may be connected to a digital terminal for headset use. This
allows handset or headset operation by switching the selector switch on the adapter box. Speakerphone
operation and call announce on intercom are disabled while a station has enabled headset mode.
Once programmed in station programming, the user may then select between headset mode or normal
handset/speakerphone mode by simply dialing a code or pressing a user programmable flex button,
I s s u e I - December 1998

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

KEY STATION FEATURES

2-31

Hearing Aid Compatible

Hearing Aid Compatible
All Digital Terminals and Single Line Telephones are hearing aid compatible in compliance with the FCC Part
68, Section 68.316. This allows using the telephone in conjunction with users wearing hearing aids.

Hold - Exclusive
When a line is placed on Exclusive Hold, no other station in the system can retrieve this call. Exclusive Hold
may be programmed and activated on the first or second depression of the Hold button, CO Lines while in a
transfer hold are always placed in an Exclusive Hold condition.

Hold - Preference
This allows either System or Exclusive hold as the primary hold on the first depression of the HOLD button,
depending upon programming. A second depression invokes the second hold preference.

Hold - Recall
When an outside call has been on Hold for a programmable length of time, recall ringing tone is sent to the
station placing the call on Hold. If this station does not answer the recall, a recall tone is sent to the
attendant(s).

Hold - System
When a line is placed on System Hold, any station in the system with an appearance of that line can retrieve
the call.

Hot Keypad Feature
This feature enables a station user to activate the telephone by dialing digits without going off hook.

Hot Line/Ring Down
Digital key stations may be programmed to immediately call or ring down a particular station or outside
number upon going off hook. This is done by programming the stations Off-Hook preference to activate a

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue I- December 1998

-‘.-..

2-32

KEY STATION FEATURES
Hunt Groups

DSS or Speed dial feature key. This feature can be overridden if the station user selects a CO line first when
going off-hook.

Hunt Groups
The system can be arranged for up to eight Hunt groups. Each Hunt group can contain up to eight stations
each. Each Hunt group is independently arranged to utilize either a pilot hunting technique or station
hunting technique.

Chaining
Hunt Groups can be chained or joined together forming larger Hunt Groups. This is accomplished by
assigning a pilot hunt group number as the last member of a group.

Pilot Hunting
Incoming CO, transferred CO, and intercom calls can be directed to a pilot extension number of a Hunt
group. The system searches sequentially (in the order the extensions were entered in the database
programming) for an idle station in the group and rings that station. Calls directed to stations (by calling
the extension number) within the hunt group do not hunt but receive call progress tones of the extension
dialed.

Station Hunting
Transferred CO calls and intercom calls that are presented to a busy, or DND station, who is a member of a
station Hunt group, searches sequentially (in the order the extensions were entered in database
programming) for an idle station in the group and rings that station. Direct ringing CO Line calls to the
station number rings at the station. If station hunting is desired on a direct ringing call, program the station
hunting pilot number in the CO Line ring assignment list. This allows the member of the hunt group to
receive private calls and hunt group calls.

ICLID/Caller ID Features
The ICLID (Incoming Calling Line IDentification) feature has been added to the Triad-S system. However, in
order for this feature to operate properly, it must be activated from the Central Office so that the numbers
of the calling party is delivered over the individual tip and ring of the CO lines during the first silent interval
between ringing. The following features have been implemented.

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

KEY STATION FEATURES
ICLID/Caller

2-33

ID Features

Caller-Entered ICLID Digits
This feature is available with optional software. The Guaranteed Message announcement feature provides a
means to force incoming callers to an announcement before being placed into an ACD Queue or routed to an
agent, The outside callers are presented with the entire message before being routed to the ACD Group.
Agents in an ACD Group with a Guaranteed Message enabled receives incoming callers only after the caller
has heard the designated recorded announcement in its entirety.
Additionally, the Guaranteed Message feature provides an option to capture digits dialed by the incoming
caller which can be inserted as ICLID incoming number identification.
If the Guaranteed Message announcement is programmed in Admin, incoming ACD calls is routed to the
Guaranteed Message RAN before going to the ACD Group. If the ICLID option is selected, digits received before
the announcement time-out is captured and inserted as incoming ICLID number information. When the
ICLID option is selected, a [#I is recognized as a termination of the announcement and a [*I is recognized
as an entry error. An entry error removes the ICLID number and the incoming caller can re-enter his phone
number.

Caller ID Name/Number Option
This feature allows a station user to program a flexible button to view both the number and name on the LCD
when receiving a Caller ID CO call. The top line of the LCD displays the number of the caller and the bottom
line of the LCD displays the name.

Calling Number/Name Display
This feature is intended as the basic offering of the ICLID service when associated with the Triad-S system.
Whenever an incoming call is received at the system, the number received along with the ringing signal is
stored in the line control tables and used at various points in the processing of the call,
$4
+

The primary function is that the calling number is displayed (if available) at any point at which the
LINE RINGING is displayed in the system.
Additionally, with the availability of the calling name feature, if the calling name is provided, the
system delivers that to the display instead of the calling number,

Incoming Number/Name for SMDR Records
This feature operates normally in the absence of ICLID information or the failure of the ICLID equipment, If
the information is present at the time that an SMDR record is generated for a call, it alters the content and
format of the SMDR output record.
STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e I - December 1998

2-34

KEY STATION FEATURES
Idle Speaker Mode

If the calling number is available, the number is output in the SMDR record in the same location as the
dialed number is located in the outgoing calls.
If the calling name is present, an additional line is output in the SMDR record identifying the name. This
record immediately follows the normal SMDR record. The normal SMDR record includes an indicator
which identifies that a following record with name identification is present.
Unanswered calls is recorded in the SMDR record for incoming with an indicator to allow the identification
of callers for statistical and call-back purposes.

Unanswered Call Management Table
An Unanswered Call Management Table with 100 entry capacity is maintained in the system database. The
calling number/name information pertaining to any unanswered call is placed in this table at the time the
system has determined that the call has been abandoned.
This table may be accessed from any display telephone to review unanswered calls . Only an attendant
station(s) can delete an entry from this table.

Idle Speaker Mode
This feature allows the system to determine whether the first digit dialed is heard over the digital terminal
speaker. This feature is allowed or denied on a system-wide basis in programming.

Incoming CO Call Transfer
This feature provides station users the ability to transfer a call that is currently ringing at their station
without answering it. Only Incoming and Transferred calls can be forced. This feature only operates when
the station is in an idle mode and is not available to Single Line Telephone users. Calls may be forwarded to
any available station, ACD/LJCD group, VM Group. Destination station must have an direct appearance for
that CO Line or Loop button and not in DND or error tone is presented to the originator and the call
remains ringing at his station. If the station is busy, the current call must be placed on hold, the ringing
transfer initiated, and then the station can return to his original call.

Intercom Button(S)
This feature provides station users the function of ringing a busy station via the intercom without using the
Camp-On or Executive Override features. This also allows stations to place intercom calls on hold. If calls

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

, ,-...
..-,
c.::;;
.$:-,..I
.. . .d..,.<.
L_
..-.d
. “2.
,.l.-.:: :”.T..,

KEY STATION FEATURES

2-35

Intercom Calling

are ringing on intercom buttons and a Handsfree call is received, the Handsfree call is allowed and the calls
ringing continue with muted ringing. Multiple intercom path buttons can be assigned to a single station,
however up to five internal parties can be placed on hold per station. Music-On-Hold is provided to intercom
callers on hold.
This feature can be programmed on any key station or DSS Console with an available flexible button. If there
is an available intercom button, a station calling that station cannot OHVO, Camp-On or Override that station.
Depending on the key station programming, intercom ringing is muted or reminder ringing. If all intercom
buttons are in use, then the station may utilize the Camp-On or Executive Override features. By default, no
intercom buttons are assigned to any key stations.

Intercom Calling
The system’s architecture allows non-blocking of intercom calls. A station is reached on intercom by dialing
the associated three-digit number.

Intercom Signaling Select
Users can control the method by which they receive intercom calls and signals. A convenient intercom signal
switch(es) or HPT button (Digital Terminals) is located on each Terminal for easy selection, The choices are:
o
*s

Handsfree (H): The station user, upon hearing a tone burst and voice announcement over the
speaker, can reply handsfree.
Privacy (P): The station user receives a burst of tone and a voice announcement over their speaker.
The microphone is deactivated for privacy, The called party must lift the handset or press the MUTE
button to answer the call.
Tone Ringing (T): A standard tone ring notifies the party of an incoming intercom call. The called
party answers by lifting the handset or moving the switch to the handsfree (H) position or pressing
the ON/OFF button.

Inter-Digit Timeout
This feature allows programming of the inter-digit time-out on a system-wide basis. This feature applies to
intercom and LCR calls, DISA inter-digit time-out remains unaffected by this timer.

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

I s s u e I- December 7998

2-36

KEY STATION FEATURES
Keyset Mode (Digital KTU Only)

Keyset Mode (Digital KTU Only)
This feature allows the station user to determine the mode in which the Digital Terminal with CT1 Box
(optional) operates. The five (5) modes are: Inactive mode, PC Phone mode, ATD Command mode, ATH
Command mode and CKTU mode. Through the use of a dial code, the station user can also determine the
baud rate for each mode selected. This setting is stored in back-up memory in the event of a power outage
or system reset.

Keyset Self Test
The Triad-S system contains a test mode feature that supports the off-line testing of Digital Terminals and
DSS consoles. The term off-line means that the unit under test is disconnected from the system during the
test operation. Digital Terminals not under test continue to operate in the normal manner. Tests are
provided to verify the keyset and DSS LED, LCD, and keypad button operations.

Last Number Redial (LNR)
Permits the automatic redialing of the last telephone number dialed on an outside line. Up to 24-digits can
be stored. Outside line selection of the same line used is automatic.

LCD Interactive Display
The Executive Digital Terminal provides the user with visual indication of call status, Calls to and from other
extensions, number dialed, line used and camp-on are some of the features displayed.

Least Cost Routing (LCR)
Allows the system to automatically select the least costly route available according to the number dialed, the
time of day/day of week, the class of service (COS) assigned to the station/trunk group priority level
assigned.

3-Digit Table
This table is divided into two sections: Leading 1 (1 is dialed before the number) and Non-Leading 1 (no 1
is dialed before the number). This gives the system the ability to handle call routing in areas that require a
1 before a long distance number as well as in areas that do not require the 1.

I s s u e I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

. .-.

KEY STATION FEATURES

2-37

Least Cost Routing (LCR)

6-Digit Table (Office Codes)

g$$
-r’

The 6-Digit Table can include 20 office code maps. Each map can be programmed to route up to 800 office
codes to one of the 16 possible route lists. Each map must be associated with a specific area code in the 3Digit Table. Several different office code maps can be used with the same area code to provide additional
routing flexibility.

Daily Start Time Tables
The Daily Start Time tables allow the user to match the Time Periods discount structure to the carriers rate
schedule.

Default LCR Database
In an effort to decrease installation and set-up time usually associated with LCR a default LCR database has
been incorporated. The default LCR database provides basic routing for all local and long distance dialing.

Exception Tables
This table is used to route operator assisted calls and any other calls which would use a one or two-digit
number rather than a three-digit area code.

Insert/Delete Tables
There are 20 Insert/Delete Tables. Up to 20-digits, including pauses, can be inserted and up to 16-digits
deleted. Digits can be inserted before or after the number dialed, but can be deleted only from the beginning
of a number dialed. To insure that a pause is inserted in LCR at default, the database programming has been
changed to add a pause in each of the 20 LCR insert and delete tables and insert table 0 in each of the route
tables.

LCR Routing for Toll Information
This feature adds provisions to the LCR call processing which allows common call routing for all toll
information calls.
i -..\
:. . r._
&is::7

l-(xXx)555-1212,

(XxX)555-1212, 1-555-1212 and 555-1212 calls are intercepted and sent to a selected
route in the Route List Table. Numbers dialed is integrated and if it is a toll information call, either preceded
with an area code or without or with a leading digit 1 or not, the call is sent to the route designated in
programming.

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e I - December 1998

KEY STATION FEATURES

2-38

Local Number/Name Translation Table

Route List Tables
Up to 16 different routes can be programmed. Each route can contain up to four route lists - one for each
of the four time periods. Up to seven CO line groups (routing choices) and their corresponding
Insert/Delete Tables may be programmed within each route list.

Weekly Time Tables
The least costly route for a particular dialed number may be different at different times of the day and on
different days of the week. To accommodate this situation, there are two Time-of-Day tables: a Daily Start
Time Table and a Weekly Schedule Table.
The Weekly Time table determines which one of the four Routes LCR to use based on the Time-of-Day and
Day-of-the-Week.

Local Number/Name Translation Table
An administrable table provides a local translation from a received calling number to a name. This table
can be administered by the customer from the attendant console location. This table is also shared by the
ICLID features. In cases of conflict between the name delivered from the CO and that in the local translation
table, the local translation table shall rule. 200 entries are provided for the Triad-S system.

Mailbox Button(S)
This feature provides station users to program specific mailbox index numbers onto flexible button at their
station or DSS Console. Users can then transfer internal/external callers to specific Voice Mail Groups or
Mailbox numbers. These Voice Mail Groups or Mailbox numbers are programmed in admin programming.
A total of 255 mailbox buttons are allowed per system.
This feature can be programmed on any key station or DSS Console with an available flexible button. If a
station is an OHVO, Camp-On or Executive Override initiator, they may not use the mailbox button feature.
Stations engaged in a conference cannot use this feature.
If no station(s) are programmed in the Voice Mail Group, the user receives an error tone. By default, no
mailbox buttons are assigned to any key stations.

I s s u e I - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

KEY STATION FEATURES
Meet Me Page

Meet Me Page
p;

Users may answer a page call from any phone in the system by dialing a special code. The party who initiated
the page must remain off-hook.

Message Waiting
Stations that are busy, unattended, or in DND can be left a message indication by other stations in the
system. Up to five messages can be left at one keyset. Upon return to the station, the user can press the
flashing MSG WALT button to ring each party in sequential order.

Message Waiting Reminder Tone
A key station with a message waiting can be reminded at a programmed timed interval with a tone.

Music-On-Hold
A music source, when connected to the system, provides music to all lines on Hold, parked calls, transferred
calls and calls waiting to be answered by Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) or Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD). This feature can be allowed or denied on a system-wide basis in database programming. This feature
can also allow or deny Music-On-Hold heard on each CO line and is programmable on a per CO line basis.
This feature also allows the system to assign CO line circuits as additional music inputs, This increases the
capacity of music channels beyond the two available on this system. A total of eight channels is available for
use on the system.

I
j
;

Mute Key
Pressing the MUTE button while in the speakerphone mode or using the handset disables the microphone
but not affect the speech coming over the speaker or handset. Pressing the illuminated MUTE button again
reactivates the microphone.
I

(i$j Name

In Display

This feature allows every extension (Key or SLT) the capability to program the users name, for that station, so
that people using display telephones see the name instead of the station number on their display. The name
is programmed at each station by the user and may be up to seven letters in length.
STARPLUS Triad-S

Product Description Manual

I s s u e 7 - December 1998

2-40

KEY STATION FEATURES
Name/Number Display At Idle

Name/Number Display At Idle
This feature allows the programmed seven-digit name and station number to display together. This option
is programmable on a per station basis, however the feature must be enabled/disabled in admin
programming. If a station has this feature enabled but has not programmed a name, the name portion of
the LCD is blank, The priority of the idle display is UCD/ACD, Hunt, Station/Name, or Station alone.

Night Service Feature
The Night Service feature provides a means to put the system in night mode from any keyset or remove the
system from night mode from any keyset as long as the system was put in night mode by the night service
feature flex button. If the system was placed in night mode by the attendant using the DND button or if the
system was placed in night mode by the automatic schedule, the night service flex button can not remove
the system from night mode.

Night Service Mode
Automatic Night Mode Operation
The Triad-S system can be programmed in database administration to place the system into automatic
night mode. The attendant(s) can override the Automatic Night mode schedule simply by pressing the
NIGHT (DND) button.

External Night Ringing
The system can be programmed so that CO lines marked for UNA rings on the external page speakers.

Manual Operation
The attendant(s) can control the use of Night Mode manually by pressing the NIGHT (DND) button. An LED
indicates when the system is in Night Mode operation.

Night Class of Service (COS)
,“,/

The system allows each station to be assigned a different COS for night operation. The night COS goes into
effect when the system is put into night mode manually or via the automatic schedule. Prevents the misuse
of phones after hours.

Issue 1

- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Mm.ml

-.
._..

KEY STATION FEATURES

2-41

Off-Hook Preference

Night Ringing Assignments.
Each CO line may be individually programmed for Night ringing to other stations, to Hunt groups, ACD
groups, UCD groups, Voice Mail groups, or off-net via speed dial. When the system is placed into night mode,
manually or automatically, ringing follows the night ringing assignments for each CO line.

Universal Night Answer (UNA)
Incoming CO lines can be programmed for Universal Night Answer (UNA). Stations which do not have access
to a line during the day can answer that line while the System is in the Night Mode by dialing a UNA code.

Weekly Night Mode Schedule
A programmable weekly night mode schedule provides for 24 hour, 7 day a week automatic night mode
operation. The system can be put into and out of night mode automatically on a daily basis,

Off -Hook Preference
Auto Feature Access
In addition to auto line access Digital Terminals have the ability to have their off-hook preference select a
DSS or feature button upon going off-hook or pressing the ON/OFF button.

Auto Line Access
Each station, key or SLT, may have their phone programmed to access a particular CO Line such as a private
line or a line from a Group of CO lines upon going off-hook. This is useful in Centrex or PBX applications
when station users have dedicated lines. Outside line dial tone is received just by going off-hook, without the
need to dial an access code.

Hot Line/Ring Down
Digital Terminals may be programmed to immediately call or ring down a particular station or outside
number upon going off hook. This is done by programming the stations Off-Hook preference to activate a
DSS or Speed dial feature key. This feature can be overridden if the station user selects a CO line first when
going off-hook.

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue 1

- December 1998

KEY STATION FEATURES

2-42

Off -Hook Signaling

Intercom Access
When off-hook preference is enabled, at a key station, that station may still obtain intercom dial tone for
accessing internal stations or other system features. This is done either by pressing an DSS button or dialing
their own intercom station number prior to going off-hook.

User Programmable Preference
Based on a station programmable option Digital Terminals may be given the ability to enable, disable or
change their off-hook preference by dialing a code. This option can be denied in station programming on a
per key station basis.

Off -Hook Signaling
If a station has been programmed to receive direct outside line ringing and is busy on another call, the call
rings at the station using a muted ring signal. This option allows a user to receive a reminder ring at his
busy station, instead of muted ringing. Additionally, a reminder ring timer has been added to the system to
provide the reminder ring every time the timer expires, as long as the incoming CO line remains connected.
The system defaults this option to muted ringing. Additionally CO calls may be camped-on to a busy station
and receive muted ringing.

Off -Hook Voice Over (OHVO)
This feature allows Digital terminal users, off-hook on a call (CO or Intercom), to receive a voice
announcement through the handset receiver without interrupting the existing call, The Voice Over is muted
so as not to override or drown out the existing conversation. The overridden party may then respond to the
calling party using CAMP-ON procedures to talk to the calling party or use Silent Text Messaging to respond
to the calling party via LCD displays. The calling (originating) station and receiving station MUST be a digital
terminal. The receiving station MUST also be programmed to receive OHVO calls.
A third method provides for the receiving station to respond to an OHVO announcement utilizing the MUTE
feature button. This button is pressed to carry on a two-way conversation with the OHVO initiator while still
listening to the original call.
The calling station is placed in a one-time DND mode upon initiating the
Voice-Over. One- Time DND cannot be toggled during the OHVO call. The
station receiving the OHVO call must be off-hook and in the H mode.

Issue 1 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

KEY

STATION

2-43

FEATURES

On-Hook Dialing

On-Hook Dialing
..:. , 1..-.
_.._.L
s.. . .
6::

The Digital Terminal user can place calls without lifting the handset. If the speakerphone is disabled, the
handset must be lifted to converse.

Online Programming
Changes to the system database can be made without interrupting normal system operation. Programming
may be performed using a key station terminal connected to the system (Station 100) or via an external PC
either on-site or remotely.

One-Touch Recording
This feature allows the station user while on an internal/external call to press a button and have the system
record the conversation in the station users mailbox. It has been designed to work with the Triad-S Dispatch
Voice Mail system via in-band signaling.
Use of this feature may be interpreted as a violation of federal or state
laws and an invasion of privacy. Check applicable laws in your area before
recording calls using this feature.

Page/Relay Control
On the Triad-S system, there are two dry relays that may be individually programmed for: External Page,
Loud Bell Control, CO Line Control and Recorded Announcement uses.

Paging
Access Restriction
Programming on a per-station basis, can deny any station the ability to make any type of page.
(ii;

External
There is one external paging zone available on the Triad-f!P1 system. External Paging requires a three-digit
dialing code. External paging requires an externally provided amplifier and paging system. The zone can have
a relay contact associated to it.
STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

issue I- December 1998

2-44

KEY

STATION

FEATURES
Park Personal

Internal
There are four internal paging zones available in the Triad-S system. A station can be in any or all zones or
in no zone at all. Stations not assigned to a page group can still make page announcements, if allowed in
station programming. Stations can be assigned to a page group in order to receive pages but not allowed to
make page announcements.

Park Personal
Each digital terminal in the system can place a call into a personal park location and then later retrieve that
call from the originating station. Intercom calls and CO line calls can be placed into the stations’ personal
park location. Calls parked in a personal park location are subject to the system call park recall timer. A
station retrieving a personal parked CO call must have either a direct CO line appearance or an available
loop button to retrieve the parked call.
Only one call can be parked in a Personal Call Park location at one time.
When dialing the Personal Park location and the location is already occupied, the initiating station receives the previously parked call and the
second call is then parked.

Pause Timer
When dialing a speed number, a timed pause between digit sending can be placed in the number. The
length of this pause can be programmed in the system database.

PBX Dialing Codes
Five one or two-digit access codes can be entered into memory. When one of these codes is dialed, it signals
the KSU that the user is dialing a PBX access code, not dialing directly over an outside CO line, and to apply
toll restriction to the next dialed digits after the code. Therefore, toll restriction is not applied to the station
unless one of these five PBX codes is dialed first. This allows dialing of PBX extensions 100, 110, 111, etc.
and functions on lines marked as PBX lines in programming.

Personalized Messages
Each station (Key and SLT) can select a pre-assigned message to display on the LCD of the digital key
terminal calling that station. There are ten possible messages whkh can be displayed:
issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

,(-:. :,
I_.%,, . _.. .. -.,,,
;?.’

KEY STATION FEATURES

2-45

Personalized Messages

00 = Clears Messages
01 = ON VACATION
02 = RETURN AM
03 = RETURN PM
04 = RETURN TOMORROW
05 = RETURN NEXT WEEK
06 = ON TRIP
07 = IN MEETING
08 = AT HOME
09 = ON BREAK
10 = AT LUNCH

Custom
This feature allows the system administrator to enter up to ten custom messages for use by station users of
the system. These messages may be specified and customized by the customer on a system-wide basis,

Date and Time Entry to Personalized Message(s)
This feature allows the station users to activate certain messages that allow the user to enter a specific time or
a date of return. These messages display on calling stations to alert them of the desired party’s return time or
date.
11 = ON VACATION UNTIL: MM/DD
12 = RETURN: HH:MM xm or MM/DD
13 = ON TRIP UNTIL: MM/DD
14 = MEETING UNTIL: HH:MM xm
15 = AT HOME UNTIL: HH:MM xm
16 = ON BREAK UNTIL: HH:MM xm
17 = AT LUNCH UNTIL: HH:MM xm

c,.?::..::-:‘_T.:y-. 2’:

Personalized Message Code on a Flex Key
This feature allows a key station user to program the personalized message code [633#] onto a flex button,
This speeds access of the pre-selected messages.

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e 7 - December 1998

2-46

KEY STATION FEATURES
Preferred Line Answer

Scrollable Canned Messages
This feature allows the user to use a single digit [#I or [*I to scroll through the canned messages and
select one. When the desired message is displayed, pressing the hold button places that message on the
station LCD. This feature operates when the phone is in the idle mode only. This feature cannot be activated
if the station is in the Call Forward or DND mode(s). This feature is not available to attendant stations. The
messages is scrolled in the following order:
Q Clears Message
o AT HOME
+ AT LUNCH
+ IN MEETING
+ ON BREAK
+ ONTRIP
Q ON VACATION
+ RETURN AM
+z+ RETURN EM.
+ RETURN NEXT WEEK
+ RETURN TOMORROW

Preferred Line Answer
A station with Preferred Line Answer can answer any assigned outside, transferred, or recalling line, or
queue callbacks by lifting the handset or pressing the ON/OFF button. The station MUST be physically
ringing, to function properly.

Privacy Release
Privacy is insured on all communications in the system. If desired, the customer may elect to disable the
Automatic Privacy feature, thus allowing up to three other stations to join in on an existing CO Line
conversations.
Disabling of the privacy feature may be limited by federal, state or local
law, so check the relevant laws in your area before disabling privacy.

Issue 1

- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

KEY STATION FEATURES

2-47

Private Line

Per CO Line Option
This feature allows programming of each CO line individually for privacy. This feature is useful for
maintaining security on such lines as Data lines, Private lines, or special circuits requiring privacy. If privacy
is disabled on a CO line then, while in use, another station may enter the conversation simply by pressing the
CO line button, A programmable warning tone is presented to all parties prior to actual cut-thru. The station
attempting to enter the conversation must also have privacy disabled.

Per Station Option
Each station may be programmed to give the station the capability to join an existing conversation simply by
pressing the CO line button that is in use. A programmable warning tone is presented to all parties when the
station enters the conversation. The CO line must also have privacy disabled to allow the cut-through.
Privacy per station on SLT type stations allows/denies camp-on to the SLT. This is useful for data
applications.

Private Line
Private line programming allows certain lines to ring at a specific station only. When placed on Hold, these
lines are active at the programmed station only. A private line can be transferred to other stations, provided
the station receiving the call has a loop button or direct appearance of that CO line.

Pulse-to-Tone Switchover
When commanded, the system changes the signaling on an outside line from dial pulse to DTMF (tone),
allowing the use of common carriers behind a dial pulse outside line. This can be done manually when
dialing, or can be stored within a speed dial number.

Range Programming
The Triad-S system allow for range programming when programming CO lines and Stations. Range
programming allows you to program all parameters alike for the entire range or you can change or modify a
few items for all members in the range.

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

issue I- December 1998

KEY STATION FEATURES

2-48

Remote Administration

Remote Administration
The Remote Administration feature allows authorized personnel to access the administration programming
via a terminal device (portable terminal device or personal computer with communications software
package).
The feature permits the review and entry of the customer database in the same manner as via the digital
terminal at ADMIN Station 100. The terminal device can be connected directly to the RS-23X connector on
the Miscellaneous Service Unit (MISLJ) on the Triad-S system, or can be accessed by a telephone modem
linking the RS-23X connector (via a CO line) to a remote location. When entering the system remotely via
a terminal device, access to the On-Board 9600 baud modem is accomplished by accessing Port 499 either
through a direct ringing assignment or through DISA or by being transferred to Port 499 by any internal
station.

Database

Upload/Download

Database Upload/Download provides a maintenance facility which is added to the Remote Administration
routine. This routine permits downloading of the database to a PC, when a software change is made or
when the system must be initialized and reprogrammed. Additionally, the routine facilitates the
programming of a database on an in-house system which can be downloaded to a PC and then uploaded to
a system in the field. After the system maintenance is completed, the file saved in the PC can then be
uploaded to the system.

Remote System Monitor And Maintenance
Maintenance
The Remote Maintenance feature allows the Interconnects’ technical staff to review the system
configuration data and individual card slot configuration data. This can be done on-site using a data
terminal or remotely using a modem to access a remote data terminal. When entering the system remotely
via a terminal device, access to the optional 9600 baud modem is accomplished by accessing Port 499
either through a direct ringing assignment or through DISA or by being transferred to Port 499 by any
internal station.

Monitor
The Remote Monitor feature provides remote access to the installed system for diagnostic purposes, These
capabilities benefit Service personnel enabling them to support the end user remotely. Different levels of
Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

KEY STATION FEATURES
Repeat Redial

__.:.-b,-. ;’
-_-:;.
c::‘- -5

access, via password, allows authorized personnel to trace, monitor and up-load critical information directly
from the Triad-S system. This provides a more accurate means of acquiring system information that leads to
a quick resolution of problems that may occur. This is all done without interfering with ongoing call
processing or normal system operation, and in many cases may be performed without a site visit,
Capabilities allowed and reserved for this High level troubleshooting additionally are:
$0 Monitor Mode
+:b Enable and Disable Event Trace
o Dump Trace Buffer (Up-Load)

Repeat Redial
The feature allows a digital key station to press a flexible button or dial a code and redial a busy or no-answer
number at specific intervals. The user is signaled via a queue callback indication. The Repeat Redial flexible
button flashes at the callback rate of 120 ipm for 15 seconds. If the station doesn’t answer within the 15
seconds, the callback is canceled. The system retains the last call the user made. If the station is busy on an
internal/external call when the Repeat Redial queue callback occurs, the callback does not occur until the
user goes on-hook. The user must enter a Redial timer value when invoking this feature. This value is from
006-999 which represents seconds. A 2-minute interval would be entered as 120. Default value is 1 minute
(60).

Save Number Redial (SNR)
Any number dialed on an outside line can be saved permanently and used at any time. This number is saved
until a new number is stored.

Single Line Telephone (SLT) Compatibility
The Triad-S system support industry standard 2500 Type (DTMF) single line instruments. When the CO
Line/Single Line Interface Board (CSIB) is installed in the Triad-ST”’ system up to 24 single line telephones
can be supported.

Both Enhanced and Executive Digital Terminals are equipped with a speakerphone. However, the
speakerphone can be programmed to work in one of three ways:
STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

KEY STATION FEATURES

2-50

Speed Bins/Chaining

o
+
+s

Normal speakerphone operation.
Disabled for outgoing and incoming CO calls but handsfree on intercom allowed.
Headset operation allowed.

Speed Bins/Chaining
Speed dial bins may be chained together by simply pressing one speed bin, then another and another as
required. This is helpful for accessing Long Distance carriers or banking services when account codes may
be required.

Speed Dial - Flash
A flash can be programmed within a speed dial number. When this is done, a pause is automatically
inserted before the remaining speed dial digits are sent.

Speed Dial - Station
Each station user can program up to 20 frequently dialed numbers of up to 24-digits in length. Pauses,
flash commands, pulse-to-tone switchover, and NO-DISPLAY characters take up digit spaces. There are a
total of 2000 speed locations in the Triad-S system for dividing among all telephones.
Numbers are dialed by use of the SPEED button and a two-digit code. This feature can additionally be
assigned to any of the buttons in the flexible button field on each keyset for one-button activation,

Speed Dial - System
Up to 80 commonly dialed numbers can be programmed into System Speed Dial for use by stations allowed
this feature. These numbers can be up to 24-digits including pauses, flash commands, pulse-to-tone
switchover, and no-display characters. The last 40 numbers are not monitored by toll restriction.

Station ID Lock
This feature provides a means for the installer/programmer to lock the station Id of all stations in the
system. Once locked, attempts to plug unlike devices (Le., a DSS into a 24-button port) results in the device
not working.

I s s u e 7 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

KEY STATION FEATURES
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

This feature is designed to prevent the loss of station programming that results when a different station type
is plugged into a port already designated as another station type.

‘T;=- -

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
The Triad-S system provides details on both incoming and outgoing calls. This feature is programmable to
allow recording of all calls or just outgoing long distance calls. The system tracks calls by outside line,
number dialed, time-of-day, date, station that placed the call and duration of call. Account codes may also be
entered and recorded. The optional MISU is required.

Station Relocation Feature
The Station Relocation feature provides a means to allow a user to unplug their station and plug it in at
another location. Then by dialing a code followed by the old station number, all station attributes, including
extension number, button mapping, speed dial, and class of service are transferred to the new location.

a station is assigned to a specific port and that station user unplugs their
station and plugs it in at another location, the database administration
programming is updated to reflect the new port change. Station lock may
prevent this feature from working correct/y.

Text Messaging (Silent Response)
This feature allows a station user to use text messages to respond to a caller that has either Camped-On or
has used the Off-Hook Voice Over (OHVO) feature to alert a busy station of a waiting call or message. The
camped-on station may respond to the caller via the personalized, custom, and response text (LCD)
messages. The text messages appear on the calling party LCD display. The calling (originating) station and
receiving station MUST be a digital terminal. The receiving station MUST also be programmed to allow OHVO
calls.

Toll Restriction (Table Driven)
The system provides a flexible means of providing toll restriction to internal stations of the Triad-S system.
Each station is assigned a Class of Service for day mode operation and one for night mode operation these
station COS’s work in conjunction with a CO line Class of Service to allow for customized toll restriction. Two
Allow and Deny tables along with four special tables afford the system administrator to devise a variety of
complex toll restriction or dialing privilege schemes.
STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

KEY STATION FEATURES
Transfer Recall

Canned Toll Restriction
The system provides an easy means of applying the most common form of toll restriction where 1 + and
0+ along with 976, 555, and 411 type of calls are denied and l-800, 1-888, 911, l-911, and 1-611 type of
calls are allowed. This canned toll restriction is applied through the use of a single pre-built Class-of-Service
and can be assigned to stations using range programming.

Transfer Recall
Screened and unscreened transfers recalls the initiating party if unanswered for a programmable length of
time, and then if unanswered, recalls the attendant.

Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Eight Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) groups can be programmed, each containing up to eight three-digit
station numbers. Each group is assigned a pilot number. When this number is dialed, the first available
agent in that group is rung. Calls are routed to the station that has been on-hook for the longest period of
time.

Agent Queue Status Display
The Agent Queue Status feature provides a means for an agent and UCD supervisor to view the status of
their UCD group. This display is an idle state display and prompts a supervisor that Agents in a group are
having problems answering all their calls. The display tells the agent and his supervisor how many calls are
in queue, how many agents are available or logged into the group, and the length of time in minutes that
the oldest call has been in queue. The agent receives the calls in queue display whenever there is a call in
queue.
There are two methods of viewing UCD Group call queue status,
1

In-service UCD agents and the assigned overflow station sees the quantity of calls in
queue on the LCD of their station for the UCD group of which they are a member. If
every member of a UCD group is busy and calls are in queue, the Supervisor/Agent
Queue Status display is seen at all UCD members of that group.
If a UC0 member is token out of the group (Le.. DND, All Call Forward,
Unavailable. etc.) they do not receive calls in queue information.

issue 1 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

._. . -.-_

. .

2-53

KEY STATION FEATURES
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)

Any station not assigned in a UCD group can view the number of calls in queue for any
given UCD Group. To view the number of calls in queue the station user dials the Calls In
Queue code (or presses a programmed FLEX button with this code) then enters the UCD
group desired. The LCD displays, on a real time basis, the number of calls in queue for
that group.

Alternate UCD Group Assignments
An alternate UCD group can be programmed so that if stations in one group are busy, the alternate group is
checked for an available station.

Auto Wrap-Up with Timer
After completion of a UCD call (on-hook) the agent is not subjected to another UCD call for the duration of
the Auto Wrap-Up Timer (regardless of the number of calls in queue), allowing the agent to finish call related
work or access other facilities. This allows agents to remove themselves from the group (i.e., DND,
Unavailable, Call Forward or originate another call). The Auto Wrap-Up Timer is programmed as part of the
UCD database. (System-wide)

Available/Unavailable Mode
Stations programmed into a UCD group may log off and on to their assigned UCD group by dialing an
Available/Unavailable code. When an agent is in the Available mode that agent receives UCD calls in the
normal manner. When an agent is in the Unavailable mode that agent no longer receives UCD type calls,
however may receive non-UCD calls. Agents that have logged off by going Unavailable receives a visual
reminder that they are logged off with a flashing LED and or a LCD display message.

Incoming CO Direct Ringing
CO Lines can be programmed to ring directly into a UCD group. When all agents are busy and RAN is enabled,
the system answers the caller and present the 1st RAN announcement automatically.

No-Answer Recall Timer
. -::-’
-. j,;
“-1.=_;jr
r
:=

If a call routed to a station via UCD is not answered by the UCD Agent/Station before the No-Answer Recall
timer expires, the call is returned to UCD Queue with the highest priority. Additionally, the station that failed
to answer the ringing UCD call is placed into an Out-Of-Service (00s) state.

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

2-54

KEY STATION FEATURES
Universal Day/Night Answer (UDAIUNA)

No-Answer Retry Timer
When the No-Answer Recall timer expires, a station that failed to answer the ringing UCD call is placed into
an out-of-service (00s) state. The station that was taken out-of-service (00s) is placed back in service if the
agent hits his available flex button or dials the available flex code. Additionally, the agent is placed back in
service if the No-Answer Retry timer expires. If the agent does not answer his next UCD call, he is again
taken out-of-service. This cycle continues until the station answers calls, logs out, or goes unavailable.

Overflow Station Forwarding Assignments
An overflow station may be assigned to route callers in queue to a designated station after a specified time.
The overflow station may not be one of the UCD group stations.
This feature allows UCD calls reaching the UCD Overflow Station to call forward to another station. This is
allowed or denied on a system-wide basis. Once enabled in programming, a UCD Overflow station can
Busy/No-Answer forward to Voice Mail Groups, Hunt Groups and stations. If the UCD Overflow station is
busy or does not answer before the no-answer call timer expires, the UCD call forwards to Voice Mail.

Recorded Announcements (RAN)
Recorded announcement devices can be assigned to provide up to eight different messages, if all stations in
a UCD group are busy. The eight messages are available to all eight UCD groups in different configurations.
A RAN table can be the answer port for unanswered incoming calls to a UCD group, while another table can
provide the secondary message. Each RAN device can provide an announcement to one caller at a time.
Subsequent callers is queued onto the message on a first-in basis.

Universal Day/Night Answer (UDA/UNA)
Incoming CO lines can be programmed for Universal Day Answer (UDA) or Universal Night Answer (UNA).
UDA/UNA assigned CO lines can also signal over the external page port(s). External Day ringing is
programmed on a system-wide basis in admin programming. Stations which do not have access to a line
during the day can answer that line while the System is in the Night Mode by dialing a UNA code. In order to
utilize this feature, a Loop button or an appearance of the trunk must be present on the station.

Voice Mail Groups (VM)
The Voice Mail feature automatically handles unanswered calls. Stations may forward calls to a voice mail
group (for leaving mail) or may call the voice mail group directly (to retrieve mail) with no assistance from
Issue 1

- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

2-55

KEY STATION FEATURES
Voice Mail Groups (VM)

the attendant. Up to eight voice mail groups containing up to eight Voice Mail stations can be configured in
the system. Each station interfaces with a port on the Single Line Interface Board (SLIB). Each voice mail
station can be shared by a number of actual users. A CO Line/Single Line Interface Board (CSIB) is required
when utilizing the Triad-S system Voice Mail In-Band integration,
Additionally, calls that are transferred from aVoice Mail group do NOT recall to the VM group. Instead, the
call recall to the attendant station. If no attendant station is programmed in the system, the call continues to
recall this station. This is useful for Voice Mail systems that only provide unsupervised transfer capability.
By default, all Voice Mail stations are placed into Pick-Up Group
may need to change the default setting.

1. You

Disconnect Signal
To avoid Voice Mail ports from being unavailable as a result of CO line callers abandoning the call or not
exiting the VM system properly, a disconnect signal is provided to notify the VM system that a CO or intercom
caller hung up or abandoned the call. Silence is provided to the VM port followed by busy tone to aid the VM
system to recognize that an intercom caller has abandoned the call.

In-Band Signaling Integration
The Triad-S system allow programming so that if a station programmed to receive incoming CO line ringing
is forwarded to Voice Mail, they may have incoming callers routed directly into their stations voice mail box
through the use of In-Band signaling. Alternately, incoming CO lines can be programmed to ring directly into
the Voice Mail system. In this case, callers are answered by the Voice Mail or Auto Attendant Main greeting.
Incoming CO callers can be call forwarded into Voice Mail automatically, if a Preset Forward Destination is
programmed for that CO line and the same CO line programmed to ring at one station. Additionally, CO lines
programmed to ring at an attendant station call forward into the Voice Mail system (if programmed to ring at
one attendant station) and presented to the main greeting (not the attendant stations mail box) even when
ID digits are enabled.

~~~~ LCD Message(s) Indication
:t. iS:i~:‘‘~1,:This feature presents the number of new Voice Messages to users on their LCD display. The new VM LCD
message on the keyset takes priority over Forward, DND, Messages, and idle displays. Ringing, Recalling,
Outgoing Calls, and current call operation displays override the VM message display for the duration of the
call or operation.
STARPLUS

Triad-S Product

Description Manual

I s s u e 1 - December 1998

KEY STATION FEATURES
Voice Mail Groups (VM)

Message Waiting Indication
When Voice Mail receives a voice message for a user who has a station on the Triad-S system, the VM
connected to the system can leave a message indication at the VM users station. When the station retrieves
their mail, the VM system can cancel the message waiting indication left at a station via a VM port.
The message waiting indication displays on the programmed Voice Mail (group) button, If such a button
was not programmed, a voice mail message waiting indication displays on the MSG WAIT button as a
normal message waiting signal.

Tone Mode Calling Option
Voice mails systems and/or Automated Attendants can utilize the Calling Station Tone Mode option, This is
useful when using supervised transfer or call screening options on voice mail or auto attendant(s)
requiring ring back tone for proper call handling.

Transf et-/Forward
This feature allows Voice Mail calls, upon reaching a forwarded to VM station, to forward back into the Voice
Mail unit. This is useful when VM ports are used as Auto Attendant and VM ports. This feature can be
enabled/disabled for all VM groups.

Transfer with ID Digits
This feature provides an attendant or station user a way to transfer a caller directly into a voice mail box.
This allows the station identification digits to be entered by the transferring party. Using this feature, a caller
can be transferred to a voice mail box when 1) a station user on the system is not forwarded to VM, or 2)
the destination voice mail box owner is not a station user. CO trunks and internal calls may be transferred
into voice mail using this feature. If no voice mail ID digits are dialed by the transferring station, the
identification digits of the transferring station are sent to the voice mail.
This feature allows dialing of digits 0000-9999 when using the VM with ID feature. This allows, on a per
station basis, the ID number that is sent to Voice Mail to be flexible. By default, the station number is sent
to the Voice Mail system. In database programming, there is a field to insert a 4-digit entry (0000-9999)
that can be sent to the Voice Mail system instead of the station number. This is useful when a station user
manually transfers a caller to a mailbox.

issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

KEY STATION FEATURES

2-57

Volume Control Bar

Volume Control Bar
The volume control bar on the Digital Key Terminal is located below the keypad. It controls ringing, handset,
and speakerphone volumes.
..-.-I 4.
F-:

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

issue I - December 1998

. .

2-58

KEY STATION FEATURES
Volume Control Bar

FEATURE

iCOUNT CODES
VERIFIED ACCOUNT CODES
ANSWERING MACHINE EMULATION
ATTENDANT RECALL
AUTOMATIC CALL BACK TIMER

STD
PKG

ACD
PKG

ADDITIONAL
EQUIPMENT

.
.
.

N
N

.
.

AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)
Agent Positions
Alternate ACD Group Assignment
ACD Group Member Status
Guaranteed Message Announcement
Incoming CO Direct Ringing
No-Answer Recall Timer
No-Answer Retry Timer
Overflow Station Assignments

VM System
N

.
.
.
.

N
N
N

N
N

.
.

.
.
.

Overflow Station Forwarding
PC/ACD Interface Trace
Recorded Announcements
Supervisor Positions

.
.
.

(RAN)

N
N
N
N
N
N

.
.
.

N
N

.
.

N
N

AUTOMATIC PRIVACY

.
.

N
N

AUTOMATIC

.
.

Music Source
N

Supervisor/Agent Calls in Queue Display
Wrap-Up Timer Per ACD Group
AUTOMATIC LINE ACCESS
AUTOMATIC NIGHT SERVICE
AUTOMATIC PAUSE INSERTION
SELECTION

EACKGROUND MUSIC
BATTERY BACK-UP (Memory)
BUSY LAMP FIELD (BLF)
N = No Additional Equipment Required

Table 2-2: Key Station Features/Software Packages

Issue 7 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Descrjption Manual

KEY STATION FEATURES
Volume Control Bar

FEATURE

:ALL ANNOUNCE - PRIVACY
CALL
CALL
CALL
CALL

BACK
COST DISPLAY FEATURE
COVERAGE FEATURE
FORWARD: PRESET

STD
PKG

ACD
PKG

ADDITIONAL
EQUIPMENT

.
.

.
.
.

N
N
N

N
N

.
.

ACD Groups
Hunt Groups
Off-Net
Per CO Line
Stations
UCD Groups
VM Groups
CALL FORWARD: STATION
All Calls
Busy
Busy/No Answer
Follow-Me

.
.
.

N
N

.
.

N
N

VM System

.
.
.

N
N

No Answer
Off-Net
CALL PARK

.
.
.
.

.
.

CALL PICKUP
Directed Call Pick-Up

.
.
.
.

N
N
N
N

.
.

N
N

.
.

N
N

Group Pick-Up
CALL TRANSFER
CALLER ENTERED ICLID DIGITS
CALLER ID NAME/NUMBER OPTION
CALLING STATION TONE MODE OPTION
CAMP-ON
CAMP-ON RECALL
CANNED TOLL RESTRICTION
N = No Additional Equipment Required

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

N
N
N

.
.

Table 2-2: Key Station Features/Software Packages (Continued)

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

Lssue I- December 1998

_- -.

I -...

2-60

KEY STATION FEATURES
Volume Control Bar

STD
PKG

ACD
PKG

ADDITIONAL
EQUIPMENT

.
.

N
N
N

CHAINING SPEED BINS
CO LINE ACCESS

.
.

CO LINE CLASS OF SERVICE
CO LINE CONTROL (Contact)
CO LINE GROUPS

.
.
.

N
N

CO LINE IDENTIFICATION
CO LINE INCOMING RINGING ASSIGNMENT

.
.
.

Ancillary Relay
N
N

CO LINE LOOP SUPERVISION
CO LINE QUEUING
CO LINE RINGING OPTIONS

.
.

N
N

.
.

N
N

.
.
.

N
N

.
.

PCfierminaVMlSU
Printer/Terminal/MEA J

FEATURE
CENTREX COMPATIBILITY
Flex Button Programming
Off-Hook Preference
Private Line Appearance
Programmable Flash Timer
Programming ‘%“, ‘I#“, and Hook-Flashes into
Speed Dial
CENTREWPBX TRANSFER

CO RING DETECT
CONFERENCE
Multi-Party Conference

Unsupervised Conference
CONFERENCE
ENABLE/DISABLE

.
.

:ATABASE PRINTOUT (Dump)

DATABASE UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD
DAY/NIGHT CLASS OF SERVICE (COS)

.
.

DEFAULT BUTTON MAPPING

.
.

DIAL BY NAME
DIAL PULSE SENDING
DIALING PRIVILEGES

Printer/Terminal
N
N
N
N

hl =
hln Arlr(itinn~l
Fmhvnnnt
Rnnlh-d
- I.”r\““ILI”IIUS byuymIIL.mm.
m.“ywl””
I.

Table 2-2: Key Station Features/Software Packages (Continued)

Issue 1 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

KEY STATION FEATURES

2-61

Volume Control Bar

FEATURE
FEATURE
DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA)
CO Line Group Access
DISA Call Forwarding
Programmable

ACD
PKG

ADDITIONAL
EQUIPMENT

DTMF Rcvr

.
.

N
N

Access

Station Access
Trunk-to-Trunk
DIRECT STATION SELECTION
DIRECT TRANSFER MODE
DIRECTED CALL PICK-UP
ACD/UCD Groups
Station
DIRECTORY DIALING
DISABLE OUTGOING CO LINE ACCESS
DISTINCTIVE RINGING (User Selectable)
DISTINCTIVE RINGING ON CO LINES
DO NOT DISTURB
One-Time Do Not Disturb
DTMF SENDING
EMERGENCY TRANSFER
END-TO-END SIGNALING
EXCLUSIVE HOLD
EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE
EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY

STD
PKG

TRANSFER

EXTERNAL NlGliT RINGING
E
FLASH
FLASH ON INTERCOM
FLASH RATES (Programmable)
FLASH WITH SPEED DIAL
N = No Additional Equipment Required

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

N
N
N

.
.

N
N
N

.
.

N
N

.
.

.
.
.

PFTlJh 2v
N

.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.

N
N
N
Paging Equip.
N
N
N
N

Table 2-2: Key Station Features/Software Packages (Continued)
STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e I - December 1998

KEY STATION FEATURES
Volume Control Bar

FEATURE
FLEXIBLE ATTENDANT
FLEXIBLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENT
FLEXIBLE INTER-DIGIT TIMEOUT
FORCED ACCOUNT CODES

STD
PKG

ACD
PKG

ADDITIONAL
EQUIPMENT

.
.

24-Btn/l2-Btn
N
N

.
.

FORCED LEAST COST ROUTING (LCR)
FORWARD OVERRIDE
c
u

.
.

GROUP CALL PICK-UP

GROUP LISTENING

.
.

HEADSET COMPATIBILITY
HEADSET MODE

.
.

Headset
N

HEARING AID COMPATIBILE
HOLD PREFERENCE

.
.
.

.
.

N
N

.
.
.

N
N
N

.
.

N
N
N

HOLD RECALL
HOT KEYPAD FEATURE
HOT LINE/RING DOWN
HUNT GROUPS
Hunt Group Chaining

.
.
.
.
.

Pilot Hunting
Station Hunting

!
ICLID FEATURE
Calling Number/Name Display
Incoming Number/Name for SMDR Records
Unanswered Call Management
IDLE SPEAKER MODE
INCOMING CO CALL TRANSFER
INCOMING CO LINES OFF-NET FORWARD
(via Speed Dial)
INTERCOM BUTTONS
N = No Additional Equipment Required

N
N

MISU
.
.
.
.
.

Exec Keyset
Exec Keyset
Exec Keyset
N

.
.

N
N
N

Table 2-2: Key Station Features/Software’Packages (Continued)
issue 1

- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

2 -63

KEY STATION FEATURES
Volume Control Bar

STD
PKG

ACD
PKG

ADDITIONAL
EQUIPMENT

.
.

N
N

.
.
I*,

CTI Box
24-Btn/l2-Btn

:AST NUMBER REDIAL (LNR)
LCD INTERACTIVE DISPLAY

.
.

LEAST COST ROUTING (LCR)
3-Digit Table
6-Digit Table (Office Codes)
Daily Start Time Tables

.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.

FEATURE
INTERCOM CALLING
INTERCOM SIGNALING SELECT
K
KEYSET MODE
KEYSET SELF TEST

Default LCR Database
Exception Tables
Insert/Delete Tables
LCR Routing for Toll Information
Route List Tables
Weekly Time Tables
LOCAL NUMBER/NAME TRANSLATION TABLE

.
.
.
l

N
Exec Keyset
N
N
N
N
N
N

.
.
.
.

N
N
N

.
.

LOOP BUTTON CO LINE ACCESS

MAILBOX f3unoN

MEET ME PAGE
MESSAGE WAITING
MESSAGE WAITING REMINDER TONE

.
.
.

N
N

.
.

N
Music Source

N
N

MESSAGES - PERSONALIZED
Custom Messages
Date and Time Entry to Personalized
Messages
Personalized Message Code on a Flex Key
Scrollable Canned Messages
N = No Additional Equipment Required

Table 2-2: Key Station Features/Software Packages (Continued)

S JARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue I- December 1998

KEY STATION FEATURES

2-64

Volume Control Bar

FEATURE
MUSIC ON HOLD
MUTE KEY
:AME IN DISPLAY
NAME/NUMBER DISPLAY AT IDLE
NIGHT SERVICE FEATURE

STD
PKG

ACD
PKG

ADDITIONAL
EQUIPMENT

.
.

N
N

.
.
.

Exec Keyset
Exec Keyset
N

.
.

N
N

.
.

N
N

.
.
.

.
.

N
N

.
.

N
N

.
.
.

N
N
N

.
.

N
N

.
.

NIGHT SERVICE MODE
Automatic Night Mode Operation
External Night Ringing
Manual Operation
Night Class of Service (COS)
Night Ringing Assignments
Universal Night Answer (UNA)
Weekly Night Mode Schedule
%FF-HOOK PREFERENCE
Auto Feature Access
Auto Line Access
Hot Line/Ring Down
Intercom Access
User Programmable Preference
OFF-HOOK SIGNALING
OFF-HOOK VOICE OVER (OHVO)
ONE-TOUCH RECORDING
ON-HOOK DIALING
ON-LINE PROGRAMMING
FAGEIRELAY corrrRoL
PAGING
External Paging
Internal Paging

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Paging Equip

N = No Additional Equipment Required
Table 2-2: Key Station Features/Software Packages (Continued)
lssue 1 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product

Description Manual

KEY STATION FEATURES

2-65

Volume Control Bar

STD
PKG

ACD
PKG

ADDITIONAL
EQUIPMENT

Paging Access Restriction
PAUSE TIMER
PBX DIALING CODES
PERSONAL PARK

.
.
.
.

.
..
.

N
N
N

POOL BUTTON OPERATION

.
.

N
N

PREFERRED LINE ANSWER
PRIVACY RELEASE

Per CO Line Option
Per Station Option
PRIVATE LINE

.
.
.

.
.

N
N

PULSE-TO-TONE

.
.

N
N

:ANGE PROGRAMMING
REMOTE ADMINISTRATION

Database Upload/Download
REMOTE
SYSTEM
MONITOR
MAINTENANCE
Remote System Maintenance

PC/Term/Modem

.
.

PC/Term/Modem
PC/Term/Modem
N

FEATURE

SWITCHOVER

AND

.
.

HAVE NUMBER REDIAL (SNR)

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE (SLT)
COMPATIBILITY
SPEAKERPHONE
STATION CLASS OF SERVICE

.
.
.

.
.

2500/2600 Type

STATION ID LOCK

Remote System Monitor
REPEAT REDIAL

STATION MESSAGE DETAIL
(SMDR)
STATION RELOCATION FEATURE
STATION SPEED DIAL

CSIB

RECORDING

SYSTEM CAPACITY

.
.

24-Btn/l2-Btn
N
N

Printer/Terminal

.
.
.

.
.

N
N

N = Nn
Artrlitinnsl
Fmlinmnnt
I .” ,
,““I~I”IIUI
Lt,jUq#IIIUIIk
IRnn~~irnrl
\ryull G”
I.

Table 2-2: Key Station Features/Software Packages (Continued)
STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

issue I - December 1998

2-66

KEY STATION FEATURES
Volume Control Bar

STD
PKG

ACD
PKG

ADDITIONAL
EQUIPMENT

SYSTEM HOLD
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL

.
.

N
N

L
TEXT MESSAGING (Silent Response)
TOLL RESTRICTION (Table Driven)
TRANSFER RECALL

.
.

.
.
.

Exec Keyset
N

.
.
.

N
N
N

.
.

FEATURE

u
UNIFORM CALL DiSTRlBUTlON (UCD)
Agent Queue Status Display
Alternate UCD Group Assignments
Auto Wrap-Up with Timer
Available/Unavailable Mode
Incoming CO Direct Ringing
No-Answer Recall Timer
No-Answer Retry Timer
Overflow Station Assignments
Recorded Announcements (RAN)
UNIVERSAL DAY/NIGHT ANSWER
(UDA/UNA)
:OfCE MAIL GROUPS (VM)
VM Disconnect Signal - Pass Through
VM In-Band Signaling Integration
VM LCD Message(s) Indication1
VM Message Waiting Indication

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.

N
N
N
N

RAN Devices

.
.

VM System
VM System

.
.

VM Tone Mode Calling Option
VM Transfer/Forward

.
.

VM Transfer with ID Digits

.
.

VOLUME CONTROL BAR (DKT)
N = No Additional Equipment Required

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

VM System
VM System
VM System
VM System
VM System
N

Table 2-2: Key Station Features/Software Packages (Continued)

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

-x.J,.’. -...
.::;;?
.L
. . _.. . . ..

Single Line telephones have access to most system and station features listed in the previous section;
however, the features listed below are common to CO Line/Single Line Interface Board (CSIB) and are
required in the STARPLUS Triad-S TM System for proper SLT operation. An abbreviated feature index is
provided in Table 3-1:SLT FeatureslSoflware Packages.

Account Codes
SLT stations may enter an account code to identify calls for billing/tracking purposes, The account code may
be entered before the call or during the call (the outside caller is placed on hold while the account code is
entered if during the call). The account code is recorded on the SMDR printout, Account codes are not
verified and can vary in length from 1-12 digits.

Verified/Traveling COS
The Verified Account Code/Traveling Class of Service (COS) feature provides tracking of specific calls by
entering a verified, variable length identifier (up to 12 digits). Each account code can be assigned a day and
night Class of Service for determining the dialing privileges allowed by that account code. This provides a
means for users to override a restricted station. If the dialed account code matches the Verified Account code
table, an intercom dial tone is returned, otherwise an error tone is returned. The use of forced Account Codes
is optional, offered on a system-wide basis. SMDR must be enabled for the account code to print as part of
the SMDR record. The Triad-S system allows up to 250 12-digit account codes for verification purposes.

Automatic Call DistributionNnif
(ACDIUCD)

orm Call Distribution

A single line telephone (SLT) may be an agent in an ACD group.

Automatic Line Access
SLTs may have their station programmed to access a particular CO Line, such as a private line or a line from
a Group of CO lines, upon going off-hook. This is useful in Centrex or PBX applications when station users
have dedicated or individual lines. Outside line dial tone is received just by going off-hook, without dialing
access codes.

I s s u e I- December 7998

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE FEATURES

3-2

Call Brokering

Call Brokering
Enables SLT user on a CO call to Hook-Flash and make another CO call. Once this other call is established,
the SLT user can Hook-Flash to move back and forth between parties.

Call Forward
Single line telephones may direct intercom calls and transferred CO lines for forwarding to another station.
SLTs have access to all forwarding options that Key station users have:
8
+
+
Q
+
+>

Call Forward - All Calls
Call Forward - No Answer [7]
Call Forward - Busy [S]
Call Forward - Busy/No Answer [9]
Call Forward - Off-Net [++I
Preset Call Forward

Call Pick-Up Directed
Tone ringing intercom calls, Initial Ringing CO calls and transferred outside line calls to specific stations
can be picked up by single line telephones. For this type of pickup, the stations need not be in the same
pickup group.

Call Pick-Up Group
Tone ringing intercom calls, transferred outside line calls, and initially ringing calls can be picked up by
single line telephones by dialing a special pickup code. The telephones must be in the same pickup group,

Camp-On
A busy station can be notified that an outside line is on hold and waiting for them. The busy station is
notified of this by a beep tone. Single line telephones can receive a camp on indication or initiate one by
using an access code.

Issue 7 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

y. . 2
,. ^. -_-2.,..,....
_.._
._

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE FEATURES
CO Line Queuing

CO Line Queuing
Single line telephones can be placed in a queue awaiting the first available outside line in a group to become
available.

Conference
An SLT user can initiate a conference with an outside line and one other internal station,

Conference With Personal Park
Single Line Telephones (SLT) can initiate a conference between two outside (CO) calls. The personal park
feature is used in conjunction with the SLT conference code to make this possible..

Direct Outside Line Group Access
Single line telephones can access outside lines by dialing CO line group access codes 9 or 81-87.

Direct Outside Line Ringing
Single line telephones can receive direct outside line ringing. SLTs may be programmed to receive incoming
CO Hinging on more than one CO line. However, an SLT can answer only ONE call at a time. If an SLT is busy
when a CO call rings in, camp-on tone is given to that SLT station.

Do Not Disturb (DND)
Each telephone user can place their phone in Do Not Disturb. The user receives an error tone if they are not
allowed this feature. They also receive a stuttered dial tone when lifting the handset to remind them they are
in Do Not Disturb. The attendant can override a station in DND.

Handset Receiver Gain
This feature allows an SLT user, while on a CO/KM call, to hookflash and dial a code to increase/decrease the
handset volume.

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

Lssue I- December 1998

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE FEATURES
Intercom Calling

Intercom Calling
Single line telephones can make and receive intercom calls.

Loop Interrupt Option
This feature enables single line telephone ports to provide a loop disconnect signal to any devices connected
to an SLT port. This is an inherent operation, no programming is necessary.
J*
$
+

Signal is provided when a CO Line, marked with loop supervision, connected to an SLT port receives
loop supervision from the Central Office.
Upon termination of an internal call to an SLT, the SLT provides the loop interrupt signal,
Loop interrupt signal consists of an open for 700 ms with less than 5 mA.

Message Waiting/Call Back
Single Line Telephones calling a station that is busy, idle, or in Do Not Disturb can leave a message waiting
indication to signal the station to call back.

Messages
Personalized
Each SLT station can select a pre-assigned message to display on the LCD of the Digital Terminal receiving
that message, There are ten possible messages that can be displayed:
OO=

Clears Messages

01~ ON VACATION
02= RETURN AM
03= RETURN PM
04= RETURN TOMORROW
05= RETURN NEXT WEEK
06= ON TRIP

07= IN MEETING
08= AT HOME
09= ON BREAK
1 O= AT LUNCH
I s s u e I- December 1998

JARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE FEATURES
Off -Hook Preference

Custom
This feature allows the system administrator to enter up to ten custom messages for use by system station
users, These messages may be specified and customized by the customer on a system-wide basis.
@;
Lr

Off -Hook Preference
SLTs may access a particular CO Line such as a private line or a line from a Group of CO lines upon going offhook. This is useful in Centrex or PBX applications when station users have dedicated lines. Outside line dial
tone is received just by going off-hook, without the need to dial access codes.

Personal Park
Single line telephones can be connected to two calls (Intercom or CO lines) at the same time and toggle
between the two calls. This can be performed with originated or received calls. This feature is also used with
the SLT multi-line conference feature.

Speed Dial - Station
An SLT user may program up to 20 speed dial numbers. Each speed dial number can be up to 24-digits in
length.

Speed Dial - System
Each SLT user can access system speed dial numbers on a programmable basis. The last forty system speed
numbers override toll restriction.

Toll Restriction (Table Driven)

.r2 :.
‘ii2
d

The system provides a flexible means of providing toll restriction to internal stations of the Triad-S system.
Each station is assigned a Class of Service for day mode operation and one for night mode operation these
station COS’s work in conjunction with a CO line Class of Service to allow for customized toll restriction. Two
Allow and Deny tables along with four special tables afford the system administrator to devise a variety of
complex toll restriction or dialing privilege schemes.

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue I- December 7998

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE FEATURES
Transfer

Canned Toll Restriction
The system provides an easy means of applying the most common form of toll restriction where 1 + and
Of alongwith 976, 555, and 411 type of calls are denied and l-800, l-888,911, l-911, and l-611 type of
calls are allowed. This canned toll restriction is applied through the use of a single pre-built Class-of-Service
and can be assigned to stations using range programming.

Transfer
Outside lines may be transferred by or to single line telephones. These transfers can be announced or
unannounced.

Transfer Recall
Screened and unscreened transfers recalls the initiating party if unanswered for a programmable length of
time, and then if unanswered, recalls the attendant.

I s s u e 1 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE FEATURES
Voice Mail Groups (VM)

STD
PKG

FEATURE
I

%CO”NT CODES

VERIFIED ACCOUNT CODES/
TRAVELING COS
AUTOMATIC LINE ACCESS
BROKER CALL

ACD
PKG
I

ADDITIONAL
EQUIPMENT
I

I*1

CONFERENCE
CONFERENCE WITH PERSONAL PARK
CALL FORWARD
CAMP-ON
CO LINE QUEUING
DIRECT OUTSIDE LINE GROUP ACCESS
DIRECT OUTSIDE LINE RINGING
DIRECTED CALL PICK-UP
DO NOT DISTURB (DND)
:ROUP CALL PICK-UP

:ANDSET RECEIVER GAIN

INTERCOM

CALLING

FOOP INTERRUPT OPTION
:ESSAGE WAITING/CALL BACK
MESSAGES - PERSONALIZED

.
.

I
I

.
.

I
I

I*I*l
.

N
N

Table 3-l: SLT FeaturedSof tware Packages

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

issue I- December 1998

3-8

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE FEATURES
Voice Mail Groups (VM)

FEATURE
Messages - Custom
:IGHT SERVICE
%FF-HOOK

PREFERENCE

FERSCNAL PARK
ETATICN SPEED DIAL
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
TRANSFER
LI - LI- A -1-1:1:---1 h--..:----zI ---..:..--I
IY = NW nUUlllullal cqulplllelll
equll eu.

I
I

STD
PKG

ACD
PKG

ADDITIONAL
EQUIPMENT

.
.
.

I
I
I

N
I

1:I:i
.

i
N

Table 3-1: SLT Features/Software Packages (Continued)

I s s u e I- December 7998

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

*,>;: 3,
+f.$3

The Attendant and Attendant(s) with DSS/DLS Features of the STARPLUS Triad-S’“f system are listed and
described below in alphabetical order. An abbreviated feature table is provided in Table 4-l:Atiendant
Feature.s/Sojware Packages.

Attendant Features
Alternate Position
This feature allows Attendant stations to program a flexible button to place their station in an unavailable
mode. When the station is in unavailable mode, the next attendant station (second) receives incoming and 0
calls. All other available attendants receive recalls. This feature is based on the system having three Attendant
stations. If all Attendants are unavailable, no attendants are available for internal/external calls.

Automatic Night Mode
In addition to the attendants capability to place the system into and out of night mode manually, by pressing
the Night key, an automatic night mode schedule is added to the system. The automatic schedule is
determined in database programming on a weekly basis, including Saturday and Sunday. The Attendant can
override the automatic schedule by pressing the NIGHT (DND) button,

Direct Station Selector - DSS Console
An optional DSS console is available which may be associated with an atendant station to provide additional
buttons for DSS/DLS features.

Disable Outgoing Access

-.
_-

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Answering Machine Emulation

button and the audio is broadcast over the keyset speaker. The mute key is enabled on the keyset at
this point. The LED lights solid green.
SPKR MODE: The voice mail message is broadcast over the speaker. The mute key is enabled on the
keyset at this point. The LED lights solid green.

Below are the mailbox owners options at this point:
1 To leave the caller in the voice mail and stop the speaker broadcast, the mailbox owner
presses the ON/OFF button. The mailbox owner can continue to listen to the message
without taking action at their keyset. When the caller disconnects after leaving the voice
mail message, the button returns to solid red and the keyset returns to idle.
2

The station can press the MUTE key to talk to the party leaving the message. The
station is still in the CONF mode at this point and the caller can hear the VM and the
station user.

The station can pick up the call by pressing the flexible button. When the mailbox owner
picks up the call, the voice mail system disconnects from the call, and the voice mail port
returns to the idle (waiting) state.

The caller is in a normal talk state with the CO caller.

Conditions:
+ The user must have an Electronic or Digital Keyset.
+ The keyset must have a pre-programmed ANSWER MACHINE flex button.
+ After the in-band digits are sent to the voice mail, the station’s flexible button status is checked.
Then, the feature is executed based on this check. The result of the check is as follows:
*P Inactive = no feature operation executed
+ Active = feature executed as per button function (ring mode or speaker mode)
Q An idle station can press the flexible button to go to the inactive mode. The LED extinguishes and no
answer machine calls are presented to the station.
+ Once the button is programmed at the station, it is in the inactive mode (LED extinguished),
o If the station user answers the call, the normal CO line LCD window displays, The call timer shows
the elapsed time including the time the caller was in VM. The call timer does not start at 0 in this
case.

cc.

,;-,:‘. -2,,.,
.-1. ;-..I
: .:’

When the call is ringing the station in the ring mode, the display shows:
VM SCREENING RING
MM/DD/YY

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

HH:MMam

issue I- December 1998

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION

5-8

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

When the station is monitoring the caller in VM, the display shows:
VM SCREENING
MM/DD/YY

Flex

HH:MMam

Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table 53:FZe.x Button

Programming Codes.

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
is avulluble with option& software. When purchased, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) is not
used and is replaced by the ACD functions identified below. Sixteen Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
groups can be programmed, each containing up to sixteen 3-digit station numbers.

Thisfeature

ACD Agent HELP Feature
The ACD Agent HELP feature provides a means for an ACD agent to signal his assigned supervisor for
assistance. A flex button must be programmed for this feature. Refer to Table 53:FZm Button
Progmnming Codes.

While on a call in progress, the agent:
1

Presses his pre-programmed* HELP flex button. A confirmation tone is heard by the
agent. The agent’s HELP button illuminates if a supervisor is logged into his ACD group.
If no supervisor is logged in, the agent receives a burst of error tone and the HELP
button does not illuminate.

The ACD supervisor station receives a HELP message if an ACD group member he is
assigned to initiates a HELP request. The HELP function also sends a Camp-On tone to
the speaker of the supervisors keyset. The HELP message takes precedence over any
other message and can be cleared by the supervisor by pressing his HELP button.

At the time the supervisor receives a HELP request, he can press his HELP flex button
followed by the override feature button to bridge onto the ACD group member’s call.
The HELP button places an intercom call to the station requesting HELP. The HELP
message is cleared after the supervisor’s HELP button is pressed. Additionally, the
HELP message is cleared if the agent was on a call and went back on hook before the
supervisor could respond. In this case, the HELP message is converted to a message
wait indication. The agent can also clear the HELP request by pressing his HELP button
a second time.

Conditions:
+ Up to five messages can be left at any supervisor station. .
I s s u e 7 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

The supervisor can cancel a HELP request signal by pressing his flashing HELP button. Additionally, a
call is placed to the agent requesting HELP If the agent is on a call, the supervisor can press the
barge-in button to monitor the call or give assistance.

.?.
i?$
-I;,.“. Agent Login/Logout Feature
c
The Agent Login/Logout feature lets an agent log into one of the ACD groups and receive calls. An agent must
first login to be placed into an active ACD state. The agent logs in by:
1

Dial the LOGIN CODE [572] on the dial pad, followed by the ACD group number (5xx)
into which the agent is going to log.
or
Press a pre-programmed* LOGIN flex button.

The agent enters his unique AGENT ID code (0000-9999). The LOGIN flex button LED
is lit steady. Confirmation tone is heard and the agent is logged onto the ACD group. The
ON/OFF LED extinguishes if the agent started the sequence in the handsfree mode.
When the agent logs in, an ACD login event is sent to the ACD Events Trace port, if
active.
The ACDAgent Login LED will only/ight
to that button.

for the ACDgroup that is assigned

If a member is assigned to a specific ACD group and uses the login-logout
codes to enter and exit an ACD group, other than his assigned group, the
da tabuse is changed to re flee t the different group.

For an agent to remove himself from the ACD group as an active agent:
+:+ Dial the LOGOUT CODE [571] on the dial pad,
Or

Press a pre-programmed* LOGOUT flex button. LOGIN flex button LED extinguishes. When the agent
logs out and removes himself from the ACD group, an ACD logout event is sent to the ACD Events
Trace port, if active.
When an ACD agent has a Login flex button programmed onto his station,
thut flex button can be used to Login and Logout of the assigned ACD
group.
@

Conditions:
44 If an agent logs into an ACD group from a station that is logged into another ACD group, the station is
automatically removed from the previous ACD group.
o An agent may log out while in wrap-up, or unavailable.
STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

hue 7 - December 1998

5-10

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

An agent logging in is placed in wrap-up mode before receiving an ACD call.
If an agent attempts to log into an ACD group that already has 16 members, that agent receives
error tone.
The Triad-S Digital System does not verify agent’s ID codes, other than requiring entry of four digits.

+
Q

*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Table 5.JMZex Button Programming
Codes.

ACD Agent Queue Status Display
From an idle key telephone:
I
Dial [567] on the dial pad,
or
Press pre-programmed* flex button.
2

Dial the 3-digit ACD group number (5xx). ON/OFF button LED lights steady.

The Agent Queue Status display shows the following information:
ACDSxx 00 CALLS IN QUEUE
MMM DD YY
HH:MMam

Where:
5xx = ACD Group (550-565).
The above display is an idle state display and tells the agent and/or his supervisor how many calls are in
queue.
*z.

Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF button to terminate the display.
This feature cannot be used with a call in progress. The station is considered busy for incoming calls during this operation. Each time this feature
is used, wrap-up is started.

The agent automatically receives an enhanced Calls in Queue display whenever there is a call in queue.
The display shows the following information:
5xx: CIQ: xx AGENT(S): xx
HH:MM:SS
oc:

Where:
$3 = ACD Group (550-565)
issue 1 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

I,-:. . ,.
$?.-;_ .-. -

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION

5-11

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

CIQ: xx = Calls in queue
AGENT(S): xx = Agents logged in
OC: hh:mm:ss = Oldest call in hours, minutes and seconds
This feature also allows an ACD station (12/24 button executive only) to assign multiple buttons that display
the calls in queue for a particular group on the LCD. Additionally, the button LED indicates the number of
calls in queue, determined in programming.
From an idle key telephone:
1

The pre-programmed* flex button for the ACD group being monitored is flashing at 240
ipm indicating there are calls in queue. Press the pre-programmed flex button. The Agent
Queue Status display shows the following:

ACDSXX 00 CALLS IN QUEUE
MM/DD/YY
HH:MMam

Where:
5xx = ACD Group (550-565)
The above display is an idle state display and tells the agent and/or his supervisor how many calls are in
queue.
2

Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF button to terminate the display.

The user assigns a flexible button by dialing 579 XXX. Where XXX is the ACD group number 550-565.
The user sees the following LED indications:
Conditions:
+:* Any ACD station can have a button assigned to view the calls in queue for any ACD group.
*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table 5-3:FZe.x Button
Programming Codes.

ACD Available/Unavailable Mode
If you are an ACD agent, you may place your station in the Available mode to receive ACD calls, or you may
place your station in the Unavailable mode to block ACD calls from ringing your station.
To go Available:
43 Dial [566] on the dial pad,
or
Press the pre-programmed* AVAILABLE/UNAVAILABLE button. You may now receive ACD calls.
To go Unavailable:
STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

issue I- December 1998

:
DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Dial [566] on the dial pad,
Or

Press the pre-programmed* AVAILABLE/UNAVAILABLE button. You are now blocked from receiving
ACD calls.
*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table 5-3:Flex Button
Programnilzg Codes.

ACD Call Qualification
The CALL QUALIFICATION feature provides a means for an Agent on ACD calls to enter call identification
codes. This feature provides up to four digits for the ACD SMDR reporting function. Up to 12 digits can be
entered, however only the first four digits are used in the SMDR record.
o The QUALIFY button is programmed using flex code [570].
*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table53;FZexButton

Prog~amm’ng

Codes.

While on a call, the agent:
0% Presses the pre-programmed CALL QUALIFY flex button, followed by the 4-digit qualify code. Enter
an [*] to complete the sequence. A short burst of confirmation tone is heard through the keyset
speaker, if programmed.
Conditions:
+ The outside party does not hear the (qualify code) account code being entered,
o The qualify code is the first four digits of the account code. Therefore, the account code record in
the SMDR contains the qualify code in the first four digits.
*z+ The qualify code must be entered during CO talk state.

ACD Group Member Status
The ACD Group Member Status feature provides a means for an ACD Supervisor/Agent to view the status of
the eight ACD groups in the system. This display tells the Supervisor/Agent which stations are logged into
the group, and if the stations logged in are Available/Unavailable, Out-of-Service, in DND, or busy on a call.
The Supervisor/Agent can use this display to determine why there are many queued calls in a specific
group.
Any station (Supervisor or Agent) logged onto the ACD group view the group members display by:

I s s u e 7 - December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION

5-13

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Dialing the ACD Group Member Status code [573] on the dial pad,
or
Pressing the pre-programmed* flex button. The display now shows ACD Group 550.
The status of the ACD agents is displayed with a letter following the station number where the agent is logged
in.
ACDSxx: 110A 111A 112A
1130 114U 115D 116B 117N

The status is displayed with the following priority:
Where:
(N) = Not Equipped
(D) = Do not Disturb
(0) = Out of service
(U) = Unavailable
(B) = Busy on a call
(A) = Available
(If an agent made a call while out of service, the status would be out of service, not busy.)
+zo Dial [*I on the dial pad to scroll up to the next ACD Group. If more than eight members are in the
ACD group, pressing [ *] displays the additional members,
or
Dial [ #] on the dial pad to scroll down to the previous ACD Group. To return to an idle display, the
Supervisor/Agent station returns to on-hook condition.
Conditions:
+fr The ACD Group Members Status display is updated at the time the code is dialed.

ACD Overflow Station - Available/Unavailable Mode
If you are an ACD Overflow station, you may place your station in the Available mode to receive ACD
you may place your station in the Unavailable mode to block ACD calls from ringing your station.

calls, or

To go Available:
+z+ Dial (5781 on the dial pad,
or
Press the pre-programmed* AVAILABLE/UNAVAILABLE button. You may now receive ACD calls.
To go Unavailable:
STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e I- December 7998

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Dial [578] on the dial pad,
or

Press the pre-programmed* AVAILABLE/UNAVAILABLE button. You are now blocked from receiving
ACD calls.
If no stations are logged into the ACD Group, ACD calls are routed to the
Attendant station.

*A FlexButton must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table53:FZexButton Programming
Codes.

ACD Overflow Station - Forwarding
This feature allows ACD calls reaching the ACD Overflow Station to follow the call forward of the overflow
station.
1

Lift the handset or press ON/OFF button.

Press the FWD button.

Dial the desired code:
[7]
[8]

= No Answer Calls
= Busy Calls
[9] = Busy and No Answer Calls
Skip the preceding step for

immedic

forwarding.

Dial the 3-digit destination number where calls are to be forwarded (Station, Voice Mail,
ACD groups, or Hunt group). Confirmation tone is heard.

Replace handset or press ON/OFF button.

To remove Call Forwarding:
1 Lift handset or press ON/OFF button.
2

Press the FWD button. Confirmation tone is heard and the FWD LED is extinguished.

The overflow station follows the following rules:
I

It forwards on the no answer timer if the forward is set to NO ANSWER or BUSY NO
ANSWER.

It forwards immediately if the station is set to any other forward type.

I s s u e 1 - December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

I -

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table 5-3:FZex Button
Programming Codes.

GT2 Supervisor Login/Logout Feature
E:: --.y.:;>
y’ .”

The Supervisor Login/Logout feature provides a means for a supervisor to log into one of the ACD groups and
monitor calls.
1

Dial the LOGIN CODE [576] on the dial pad, followed by the ACD group number (5xx)
that the supervisor is going to log into,
or
Press a pre-programmed* LOGIN flex button. (Flex button must have 576+5xx
programmed onto it.)

The supervisor enters a unique SUPERVISOR ID code (0000-9999). The LOGIN flex
button LED is lit steady. Confirmation tone is heard and the supervisor is logged onto the
ACD group. The ON/OFF LED extinguishes if the supervisor started the sequence in the
handsfree mode. When the supervisor logs in, an ACD login event is sent to the ACD
Events Trace port, if active.

For a supervisor to remove himself from the ACD group as an active supervisor:
+:+ Dial the LOGOUT CODE [575] on the dial pad, followed by the ACD group number (5xx) that the
supervisor is going to log out of,
or
Press a pre-programmed* LOGOUT flex button. (Flex button must have 575 + 5xx programmed onto
it), The LOGIN flex button LED extinguishes. When the supervisor logs out and removes himself
from the ACD group, an ACD logout event is sent to the ACD Events Trace port, if active.
The ACD
assigned

Supervisor Log-in LED will only light for the ACD group that is
to that button.

When cm ACD Login flex button is programmed in the system,
f/ex button can be used to toggle the Login/Logout feuture.

thut same

Conditions:
9 If a supervisor logs into an ACD group from a station that is logged into another ACD group, the
station remains in the previous ACD group.
o A supervisor may log out while in wrap-up, or unavailable.
+ A supervisor logging in is first placed in wrap-up mode before receiving an ACD call.
+ If a supervisor attempts to log into an ACD group as an agent and that group already has 16
members, the supervisor receives error tone.
STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

The Triad-S Digital System does not verify the supervisor’s ID codes, other than requiring that four
digits are entered.
*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table 5-3:Hex Button
Programming Codes.

Supervisor Monitor With Barge-In
The Supervisor Monitor with Barge-In feature provides a means for an ACD supervisor to monitor an
agent’s call in progress, to coach sales techniques or customer relations skills. When used, a supervisor
may intrude onto an agent’s call in a listen-only mode or in a true conference mode by use of the barge-in
feature. This feature is available with or without a warning tone.
The use of Supervisor Monitor with Barge-in is limited by federal law and
may also be limitedorprohibitedby state orlocallaw, so check the relevant
laws in your area before employing
these features.
A change in volume may occur on the CO line or intercom call after the
barge-in occurs.

The ACD supervisor can intrude on an agent’s call in the listen only mode by:
+

Dialing the agent’s 3-digit station number. Upon hearing busy tone, press the pre-programmed*
Barge-In flex button. The conversation in progress is heard by the Supervisor on the handset
receiver and the Supervisor’s MUTE button LED is lit indicating that the Supervisor’s transmit is
muted. If the Supervisor wishes to participate in the conversation in a true conference mode, he
can press the MUTE button which removes mute.
The Executive Override Code, [625]
/n feature onto a flex button.

programs Supv Monitor with Barge-

Conditions:
+
9

Supervisors are granted the Barge-In option if they log in at a station with the Supervisor BargeIn/Executive Override enabled in programming.
Supervisors can only Barge-In on calls of ACD group(s) members into which they are logged.

Supervisor Queue Status Display
The Supervisor Queue Status feature provides a means for an ACD supervisor to view the status of their ACD
group. This display is an idle state display and prompts a Supervisor when a group is having problems

I s s u e 7 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

:
DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

answering their calls. The display tells the supervisor how many calls are in queue, how many agents are
logged into the ACD group, and the length of time, in minutes, that the oldest call is in queue.
The supervisor station logged onto the ACD group can obtain the Queue Status display by:
+t+

Dialing the Queue Status code [577] on the dial pad, followed by the ACD group (5xx) the supervisor
wants to observe,
Or

Press the pre-programmed* flex button.
The Queue Status display shows the following information:
5xx: CIQ: xx AGENTS: xx
oc:
HH:MM:SS

Where:
5xx = ACD Group (550-565)
CIQ: xx = Calls in queue
AGENT(S) : xx = Agents logged in
O C : hh:mm:ss = Oldest call in hours, minutes and seconds
If the supervisor wants to change the display to a different group:
+ Dials the Queue Status code [577] on the dial pad, followed by the ACD group that the supervisor
wishes to observe,
or

Presses the pre-programmed* flex button.
Conditions:
o To receive the Supervisor’s Queue Status display, the station must be logged in as a Supervisor and
dial the flex code for the appropriate group.
Q ACD Supervisors receive the Queue Status display in real time.
$4 The Queue Status display is only given when the ACD group member or Supervisor’s station is not
receiving a higher priority display, such as HELP or Out-Of-Service, or other applicable off-hook
events are taking place at the station.
o The Supervisor’s Queue Status display is saved in battery backed memory.
+ When a Supervisor logs out of the group presently displayed, he must enter a new request for Queue
Status display.

STARPLUS Triad-S

Product Description Manual

issue I- December 1998

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION

5-18

Automatic Selection

Automatic

Selection

Pressing an outside line button, or pool button; a speed button; a station button; or dialing a number in the
Triad-S system numbering plan, automatically activates the speakerphone and lights the ON/OFF button, if
your keyset is programmed as a speakerphone.

Background Music (Optional)
1

Dial [632] on the dial pad,
Or

Press the pre-programmed* flexible button.

The LCD display shows the following:
0:OFF
MMIDDNY

1 :CH-1

2:CH-2
HH:MM

Enter the desired channel on the dial pad. Confirmation tone is heard. Music is now
heard through the speaker.

Press the Volume Bar to change the volume. The following message is shown on the
display phone:

SPEAKER BGM
MMM DD YY

[#########I
HH:MM am

Conditions
+ When you pick up the handset or press the ON/OFF button, music is discontinued automatically
9 Once the headset is enabled, BGM is discontinued.
*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table 5.$Hex Button
Programming Codes.

Call Back
If you dial a telephone that is busy and want to activate Call Back:
1

Press the CALL BACK button.

2 Hang up.
3

When the busy station hangs up, you are signaled.

I s s u e 1 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Call Coverage

Feature

Answer the call; station you called is then signaled. (If your station is busy when signaled,
an automatic MSG is left at your phone).
When the Automatic Cull Back Timer is enabled, a call back request will
automatically be invoked unytime a user listens to intercom busy tone for
a preset period of time.
Only one Call Back request can be left at a station; the second request is
converted to a message wuit call back request.

*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table 53:Fle.x Buttm Prog~zlmzing
Codes.

Call Coverage Feature
This feature lets stations answer calls for other stations by utilizing enhanced DSS buttons, AVisual and
Audible status of ringing stations to an assigned coverage station are provided.
To program a flexible button for call coverage at a station:
1 Press the SPEED button twice.
2

Press the desired flexible button to program.

Dial [646XxX](Ringing Type) or [647XxX](Non-Ringing Type) on the dial pad where
XXX is the extension number to cover. Confirmation tone is heard. If an error was made
during entry, error tone is presented.

Once the button is assigned on the station and a call rings in:
1

The coverage station hears ringing for the coverage station after a five second
delay.The ring tone is the internal ring tone cadence. The LCD of the coverage station
identifies the ringing station as:

CALL FOR STA XXX
MMM DD YY
2

HH:MM

The Coverage station then presses their flashing Coverage flexible button,
or
Presses the ON/OFF button,
or
Lifts the handset if PLA is enabled. The flash rate is the same as the incoming CO line
ringing rate. The call is answered and ceases to ring at any other stations that may have

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

issue I- December 1998

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Call Forward

the same coverage appearance. The following message is displayed after the call is
answered:

CALL TO STATION XXX
FROM STA YYY
HH:MM:SS

By default, no call coverage buttons are assigned.
Conditions:
Multiple coverage stations can have the same remote ringing station(s) programmed on their
stations.
Once a coverage station answers the call, other stations attempting to answer the call receive a
busy tone and the call coverage button extinguishes on all appearances of that button,
This feature can cover SLT extensions, however an SLT cannot perform the call coverage function.
The SLT extension need not be physically installed, only the SLT card must be installed.
Direct CO calls have ring and LCD priority over call coverage calls. The call coverage station must
have a direct CO appearance or Loop button to pick up an external call. If the call coverage station is
in DND, no audible ringing is heard, however visual and LCD information is presented.
This feature can be programmed on any key station or DSS Console with an available flexible
button. If the DSS with a call coverage button assigned is unplugged or moved, the station
associated with that DSS stops ringing until the DSS is plugged in again.
Camp-On or Override drops any internal callers to which a station is talking.
Only one button type (646 or 647) per covered station can be assigned on a keyset.
*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to TabZe53:HexButton Programming
Codes.

Call Forward
All Calls
If you were given the ability to forward your calls:
1

Lift handset or press ON/OFF button.

Press the FWD button or dial [640].

Press DSS button of desired station,
or
Dial the 3-digit extension number where to forward calls, including ACD or UCD, Voice
Mail, Hunt Group pilot numbers and Speed Dial bins for off -net forwarding.

issue 1

- December 1998

S JARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Call Forward

Replace handset or press ON/OFF button.

Conditions:
Call Forward remains engaged until manually released. When released, the station number is
returned to the LCD.
Calls cannot be forwarded to a station in the DND mode. An error tone is received when this is
attempted. It cannot be forwarded to a busy station, the caller receives busy tone in this case,
CO Line queues, a Message Waiting request, and pre-selected messages are canceled when a station
is placed in the Forward mode.
A forwarded call signals to the forwarded station in the Tone mode, regardless of the Intercom
Signaling Switch Mode selection.
A station in the Forward mode can make outgoing calls.
A Camp-On signal is allowed at the forwarded station if that station is busy.
A station denied the use of Call Forwarding receives an error tone when pressing the Call Forward
button.
A forwarded CO Line call can be transferred back to the original forwarding station, effectively
overriding the forward. Also, a station receiving the Call Forward can call the original forwarding
station.
If a CO Line rings into a station with manual Call Forward, the line sequences to the last station of the
chain. If the last station is in DND mode or does not have a Direct appearance for the CO Line or a
Loop button, the call reverts back to the first station.
If a CO Line rings into a station with both Manual and Preset Call Forwarding, Manual Call
Forwarding takes precedence. Once the Manual Forward determines the station to be rung as per
above, preset Call Forward may then apply at the new station.
An unlimited number of stations can be set up in a Manual Call Forward chain. However, a station
cannot forward to a station that is already a member of his chain.
If the last number of the Manual Call Forward chain is in DND mode, the internal caller gets a DND
response.
Calls to a station in both Manual Call Forward and DND mode follow the forward.
If a private line rings into a station with Manual Call Forward the CO Line forwards, providing the
forwarded station has a direct CO Line appearance or an available Loop button.
When a forwarded SLT goes off-hook, a Call Forward warning tone is heard by the user to inform the
user the phone is forwarded.
SLTs may use Call Forward in the same manner as digital terminals.

S TARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue I- December 1998

5-22

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Call Forward

A station’s Call Forward status is stored in a battery protected area of memory, A station’s Call
Forward status is returned after a power failure or system reset occurs.
Idle Keyset in hands-free mode will not follow no answer/busy-no-answer forwarding.

_ _ .: _ . _
_

To remove Call Forwarding:
1 Lift handset or press ON/OFF button.
2

Press the FWD flex button. Confirmation tone is heard and the FWD LED is
extinguished.

Busy
If you were given the ability to forward your calls:
1 Lift the handset or press ON/OFF button.
2

Press the FWD button or dial [640].

Dial the Call Forward Busy code [8] on the dial pad.

Dial the 3-digit destination number to forward calls. Confirmation tone is heard.

Replace handset.

To remove Call Forwarding:
1

Lift the handset or press ON/OFF button.

Press the FWD button. Confirmation tone is heard and the FWD LED is extinguished.

Busy/No Answer
If you were given the ability to forward your calls:
1 Lift the handset or press ON/OFF button.
2

Press the FWD button or dial [640].

Dial the Call Forward Busy/No Answer code [9] on the dial pad.

Dial the 3-digit destination number to forward calls. Confirmation tone is heard.

Replace handset.

To remove Call Forwarding:
I

Lift the handset or press ON/OFF button.

Press the FWD button. Confirmation tone is heard and the FWD LED is extinguished.

Conditions:
o

The user cancels the feature by dialing the Call Forward Code or pressing the Call Forward button
again.

issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION

5-23

Call Forward

+
+z+
8
$6
o
+

For Call Forward No Answer, the number of rings before the call is forwarded is determined by the
Call Forward No Answer timer.
Stations Call Forwarded/No Answer forward incoming CO calls according to the Preset Forward Ring
Timer.
CO Line transfers to a station forwarded to a ACD, UCD or VM group receives BGM until a member of
the group becomes available.
KM calls forwarded to a VM group receive ringback until a member of the VM group becomes
available.
If a station is denied Station Call Forwarding, then Off-Net Forwarding is not allowed.
A station’s Call Forward status is stored in a battery protected area of memory. A station’s Call
Forward status is returned after a power failure occurs.

The Call Forward condition Codes are as follows:
NONE
Unconditional forward (all calls forwarded)
Forward after the No Answer time (programmable)
[71
Forward only when station is busy
[81
Forward if station is busy or after the No Answer time expires
[91

Follow-Me
This feature lets a user who is away from their station, activate/deactivate call forwarding from another
station in the system. This lets the user forward their calls to their current location or into Voice Mail,
ACD/UCD, Hunt Groups, or to any other station in the system. When this call forward is activated, all calls
presented to the forwarded station forward to the destination station immediately.
If you were given the ability to forward your calls:
J

Lift the handset or press ON/OFF button.

Dial the Follow-Me Forward code [642 YYY XXX] on the dial pad, where YYY=station
forwarding from and XXX is station forwarding to.

3 Replace handset.

To remove Follow-Me Forwarding:
1

Lift the handset or press ON/OFF button.

Dial the Follow-Me Forward code [642 YYY YYY] on the dial pad, where Y=station
forwarded from.

To establish Follow-Me Forwarding from an off-site location:
1

Dial into the system on a DISA or TIE trunk. Enter the DISA access code, if applicable.

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

/ssue I- December 1998

5-24

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Call Forward

Dial the Follow-Me Forward code [642 YYY XXX] on the dial pad, where YYY=station
forwarding from and XXX=station forwarding to.

To remove Follow-Me Forwarding from an off-site location:
1

Dial into the system on a DISA or TIE trunk. Enter the DISA access code, if applicable.

Dial the Follow-Me Forward code [642 YYY YYY] on the dial pad, where Y=station
forwarded from.

Conditions:
+
+
+:*
Q
+
Q

+z+

If a Call Forward mode is currently active at the station where forwarding is desired, the new
forward becomes active and cancels the previous forward.
Both internal and external calls to the affected station forward to the designated location,
Call forwarding must be allowed in programming for the affected station.
When remote forward is activated the forwarding is immediate.
A station’s Call Forward status is stored in a battery protected area of memory. A stations Call
Forward status is returned after a power failure or system reset occurs.
When a key telephone is forwarded remotely, the key stations forward button lights. The station
user may cancel the forwarding at their station by pressing ON/OFF, then the FWD button, SLT users
can cancel their forwarding by going off hook and dialing the forward code.
DISA callers entering the code and making a mistake are given error tone for 3 seconds, silence for
2 seconds, then the dial tone is returned.

No Answer
If you were given the ability to forward your calls:
I

Lift the handset or press ON/OFF button.

Press the FWD button or dial [640].

Dial the Call Forward No-Answer code [i’] on the dial pad.

Dial the 3-digit extension number where calls are to be forwarded. Confirmation tone is
heard.

Replace handset or press ON/OFF button.

To remove Call Forwarding:
1

Lift the handset or press ON/OFF button.

Press the FWD button or dial [640]. Confirmation tone is heard and the FWD LED is
extinguished.

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION

5-25

Call Forward

Off -Net (via speed dial)
g=3 ~
-Z’S
U,?

This feature allows stations to forward intercom and transferred CO calls to an off-net location,
In a speed dial bin, store the number of the off-net location where to forward calls. Follow instructions provided
for storing station or system speed dial numbers.
1

Lift handset or press ON/OFF button,

Press the FWD button or dial [640].

Dial [*] on the dial pad. Dial the 2-digit speed bin number (00-19, 20-99) that contains the
number where to forward calls. Confirmation tone is heard. FWD button LED flashes.

Replace handset or press ON/OFF button.

Conditions:
Q The user cancels forwarding by going off-hook and pressing Call Forward button.
6 Forwarding is unconditional and occurs immediately when a station calls an Off-Net forwarded
station.
*a The call to a station is not answered until the outgoing CO Line is seized and the digits are outpulsed, The calling Station receives ICM ringback until answered. Upon answer the Station receives
whatever CO progress tones apply (i.e., Ringback, Busy, Error, Announcement, etc.).
Q If a station is denied Station Call Forwarding, Off-Net forwarding is not allowed.
Q Toll Restriction is based on the forwarding station’s COS and the outgoing CO Line COS.
o The calling station must have an appearance (Direct, Loop) for the outgoing (Off-Net) line. The call is
not forwarded if a Direct Appearance or Loop key is unavailable.
+ SMDR printout reflects transferred and outgoing calls like a DISA call record.
+ Station users may use Station or System Speed Dial as the Speed Dial Bin used for Station Off-Net
Forward.
+ A station’s Call Forward status is stored in a battery protected area of memory, A station’s Call
Forward status is returned after a power failure or system reset occurs.
+ Call must be an intercom or transferred CO call.
To remove Off-Net Forwarding
1 Lift the handset or press ON/OFF button.
^‘:>.
..-_ .
_..__
-v
t32

Press the FWD button. Confirmation tone is heard and the FWD button LED is
extinguished.

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Descripfion

Manual

issue I- December 1998

5-26

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Caller ID Name/Number Option

Station
When any type of station call forwarding is invoked, the LCD display normally indicates the call forwarding
mode at all times. This feature changes the LCD forwarding display to make the call forwarding mode
display optional. This feature is enabled/disabled in admin programming on a system-wide basis.

Caller ID Name/Number Option
This feature lets a station user program a flexible button to view the number and name on the LCD when
receiving a Caller ID CO call.
If the feature is enabled, the flex button LED is lit solid, the name and number is displayed. During the call,
the user can press the flexible button to view the normal call information.
The top line of the LCD displays the number of the caller and the bottom line of the LCD displays the name.
Conditions:
0 When enabled, this display overrides transfer call LCD messages, ACD Ring messages, Call Pickup
messages, and Answer messages. If the user wishes to view the Line Number/Call Timer and the
standard call information, they can press the flexible button to toggle between the name/number
and normal mode.
+ By default, no button is assigned on telephones.
*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to TabZe53;FlexBzrtton
Programming
Codes.

,:y;.:<,_-1.-.
I..-.
.:
_. . . . :. ,..
.
.._

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Producf Description Manual

5-27

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Calling Station Tone Mode Option

Calling Station Tone Mode Option
Enables a calling station to override a called station’s H or P intercom settings,
When placing a call to a station and Tone ringing is desired:
1

Dial [6#] on the dial pad.

Dial the 3-digit extension number,

or
Press DSS button of desired station (call tone rings station).

Call Park
To place an outside call in park and consult with, page, or call an internal party:
While connected to an outside line:
1

Press TRANS button. The caller is put on hold.

Dial parking location (430 to 437). Confirmation tone is heard.

If you hear busy tone, press TRANS twice and dial another parking location.

Retrieving a Parked Call:
1

Lift handset or press ON/OFF button.

Press the [#] button.

Dial parking location (430 to 437) where the call was parked.

Call Pick-Up
Directed
A station can pick up a tone ringing intercom call, transferred, incoming or recalling outside line to a specific
unattended station. The call must be a tone ringing call:

_-,,: ;?
=.;
,_;.2x?
;- .’
4-

Dial the station number of the known ringing telephone. Receive ringback tone or call
announce tone depending on the intercom selector switch setting.

Press the pre-programmed* PICK UP button to answer the call.

*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table53:FZex Button Programming
Codes.
Conditions:
+:+ User must have access to the specific outside line or a Loop button to do a directed call pick up.
STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e I - December 1998

I --...

5-28

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Call Transfer

Group
When intercom tone ringing, transferred outside line ringing, recall ringing or initially ringing call is heard
at an unattended telephone:
1

Lift handset or press ON/OFF button.

Dial [#0] on the dial pad,
Of
Press the pre-programmed* PICK UP button to connect to the calling party.
You must be in the some pick up group
the call.

the ringing telephone to pick up

*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to TabZe5-3:FZexButton
Programming
Codes.
Conditions:
a+ User must have access to the specific outside line or loop button to do a group call pick up.

Call Transfer
Outside lines can be transferred from one phone to another within the system. The transfer can be
screened (announced) or unscreened to an idle or busy station, ACD or UCD Group, or Hunt Group.
Screened Transfer
While connected to an outside line:
1

Press DSS button where to transfer call (if programmed on your telephone),
or
Press TRANS button and dial 3-digit station number.

The called extension signals according to the intercom position.

When that extension answers, announce the transfer.

Hang up to complete transfer.

Direct Transfer Mode is enabled in admin programming, the supervised
tronsfer is transferred directly to the key stution handset.

Issue 1 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Monuol

I- -.

...

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION

5-29

Camp-On

Answering a Screened Transfer
Your intercom signals according to the intercom position.
7”
gi;
2,

Answer the intercom and receive the transfer notice.

Press the outside line button or loop button flashing on hold.

Transfer Search
When attempting to locate a party:
1

Press a station button to signal the desired station.

If the party is not located:
21

Press another station button to continue the search.

When the called party answers, hang up to complete the transfer.

Unscreened Transfer
When the called extension begins to signal, hang up to transfer the call (Recall timer starts).

Camp-On
If you call a station that is busy and wish to alert them to your call:
1

Press the CAMP-ON button. Called station receives one-burst of ringing. Wait for their
response.

When called party answers, consult with them or hang up to transfer the call.
If a station is in DND, only the attendant can Camp On using the attendant
override feature. Cump-On or Override wi/l drop any internal callers to
which that station is talking.

Answering a Camp-On
If you are on a connected call, hear one burst of muted ringing, and your CAMP-ON button is flashing, you
have a call waiting.
..__.l
-..- : .I :..z.:
.s2:
f ’

To answer:

Press the CAMP-ON button. Any outside line you are connected to is placed on hold.
You may converse with the station placing the call.

Press flashing outside line button if a call is being transferred

TARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue I - December 1998

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
CO Line Access

If you do not have a Camp-On button:
0 Go on-hook with present call. Camp-On rings through,
or

Place present call on hold, then go on-hook. Camp-On rings through.

CO Line Access
To access outside line:
1

Press idle CO line button, Pool button,
or
Dial CO line group access code or LCR access code.

Dial desired number for outside call.

Lift handset to converse or use speakerphone.

CO Line Queuing
A station can queue only one line at a time. If you see that a particular outside line is busy and you wish to
be placed on a list waiting for that line to become available:
To Place a Queue:
1

Press desired busy outside line button,
or
Pool button. (Busy tone is heard.)

Press pre-programmed* LINE QUEUE button.

Replace handset or press ON/OFF button.

To Answer a Queue:
If you hear ringing and an outside line of the line group or a Loop button you queued onto is rapidly
flashing:
I

Lift handset or press ON/OFF button.

Press flashing outside line button or Loop button to answer.
If your station has been programmed for Preferred Line Answer, you will
have the line automatically upon /if ting the handset.

I s s u e I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product

Description Manual

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Conference

Combinations

Conditions:
9 A Loop button or direct appearance of the queued line is required.
*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table53;FZe.x
Codes.

Button Programming

Conference Combinations
Only stations that have conference enabled can institute a conference,
o Add-On Conference: Up to eight internal parties can engage in a conference, or seven internal
parties with one external party A maximum of five g-party conferences (five external parties
maximum) can be established.
o Multi-Line Conference: One internal station can engage in a conference with up to four outside
parties.
A maximum of eight parties can be included in a

conference.

Establishing a Conference:
1

Lift handset.

Select intercom station or dial desired outside party.

When called party answers, press the CONF button.

Add next conference party by selecting another outside line or intercom station.

If the next conference party is an outside line and a busy or wrong number is
encountered, press one of the conference parties on hold. This drops the busy or wrong
number party. Press the conference button again and repeat step 4.

When party answers, press the CONF button twice.

All parties are connected.

Exiting a Conference (Controller only).
There are three methods of exiting a conference:
1 Press the ON/OFF button to ON, press the MUTE button, and replace the handset (to
monitor a conference).

Use the following method only if multi-line conference is in progress.
2

Press HOLD button to place outside parties on hold. Hold timer starts. If one of the two
parties is internal, that party is dropped.

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

issue I- December 7998

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION

5-32

Dial By Name

Press CONF and hang up or press the ON/OFF button to leave the other conference
parties still connected in an unsupervised conference. CONF button flashes and timer
starts. There is a warning tone before the other parties are dropped.

Re-entering a Conference:
When the controller re-enters the conference, the disconnect timer is reset.
1

Lift handset to re-enter a monitored conference.

To re-enter a conference placed on hold, repeat steps for establishing a conference.

To re-enter an unsupervised conference, lift handset and press flashing CONF button.
The CONF button lights steady and confirmation tone is heard.

Terminating a Conference:
To terminate a conference, the conference initiator who is actively in the conference:
+ Replaces handset or pushes ON/OFF button to OFF.
To terminate an unsupervised conference:
G

Pressing the flashing CONF button while on hook, all parties are dropped.

Dial By Name
The system lets station users dial extension numbers by entering the name of a person programmed for
that station. The system database allows entry of a name (alphanumeric) up to 24 characters for each
station. This programmed name can be used for dialing-by-name station users and displays on LCD
displays.
To dial a station user by name:
1

Dial the Dial-By-Name code [6*] on the dial pad,
01

Press the pre-programmed* DIAL-BY-NAME flex button.

Issue 1 - December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Directory Dialing - Stations

Dial person’s last name on the keypad. UseP@re5-2:

Key Pad - Dial By Name below:

Figure 5-2: Key Pad - Dial By Name

+ Example: searching for the name BROWN, press [Z] [7] [6] [9] [6].
0% When the system finds a unique numeric match to the name being dialed, the call is placed to the
station matching the name. The intercom call signals the station according to the H-P-T button. If
fewer than 8 digits are dialed, the numeric match is dialed after a 10 second interdigit time-out
occurs, or if [#] is pressed.
*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to TaBZe5-j:FZex Button Programming
Codes.
Conditions:
+ The system dials the station that matches the dialed name when a unique match is found. If multiple
names are located (found) after eight digits, the first one is dialed.
+ Names are entered as part of the system attributes database. Numbers may be entered as part of a
name. To avoid conflicts, all names must have a unique numerical sequence.

Directory Dialing - Stations
Directory dialing lets station users obtain a directory of station users and automatically dial the extension
currently displayed. The Triad-S System provides locations for up to 200 names.

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

issue I - December 1998

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION

5-34

Directory Dialing - Stations

Directory dialing also lets users program a name along with a speed dial bin for later locating a speed dial
number. When prompted, the system displays the name associated with a speed dial number on the LCD
display. When the desired name is shown, the user may have the system dial the number.
Directory dialing lets users associate a name with an entry in the local number/name translation table.
When prompted, the system display the name associated with the table on the LCD display. When the
desired name is shown, the user may have the system dial the number.
The Directory Dialing list may be programmed and maintained at the first assigned attendant station in one
of two ways. However this admin routine provides a means for maintaining the directory by the system
programmer either locally (at Station 100) or remotely, via modem access,
Directory dialing may also be used to transfer a call from one station to another.
To view the directory list:
1

Dial the Directory List dial code [680] on the dial pad,
Ol-

Press the pre-programmed* flex button programmed as a directory dialing button.
z

Press a button on the key pad once, twice or three times to represent the letter of the
alphabet to begin viewing the list of names (i.e., pressing 2 produces the names
beginning with A. Pressing 2 again produces the names beginning with B. Pressing 2 a
third time produces the names beginning with C). The letters of the alphabet are
represented on the key pad as shown below in Figure 5-3: Key Pad - Directory Dialing.

Figure 5-3: Key Pad

I s s u e I- December 1998

- Directory Dialing

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Directory Dialing - Stations

Names beginning with the letter chosen display on the LCD display.

there are no names in the Directory List beginning with the desired letter,
a name with the next higher letter shows on the LCD disp/ay

Dial [*] on the dial pad to scroll up (next entry) through the list,
or
Dial [#] on the dial pad to scroll down (previous entry) through the list,
or
Press another button to view the list for a different letter of the alphabet.

When the desired name is shown on the LCD display, press the SPEED button to
automatically dial the destination station or outside phone number (via speed dial).

Conditions:
+ If the desired party is an intercom station, that station is signaled according to it’s H-P-T switch (SLT
stations tone ring).
+ If the desired party is associated to a speed dial bin, the system selects a CO line and dials the
number programmed into the speed dial bin. Call progress tones are then heard.
a” If a station is in the Directory Dialing mode and a CO or intercom call rings in, the station must exit
the Directory Dialing mode to answer the call.
To Transfer a call using Directory Dialing while on a call:
1

Press the TRANS button.

Dial the Directory Dial Code [680] on the dial pad,
or
Press a pre-programmed* flex button programmed for directory dialing.

Press the digit associated with the person’s name and when it displays, press the SPEED
button to automatically dial the destination station.

Hang up to complete the transfer.
Calls may be transferred to internal stations on/y, An attempt to transfer
a call off -net (via a speed dial bin) result in the call recalling upon going onhook.

*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table53:Fiex Button Programming
Codes.

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

issue I- December 1998

1..

5-36

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
1

Call the phone number the system administrator specified as the DISA line. The system
answers and returns internal dial tone.

Enter the DISA access code specified by the system administrator, if applicable. Dial
tone returns.

To place an outgoing call:
I

Dial a group access code: 9, 81-87. CO Dial tone returns.

Dial the desired telephone number.
The conference timer will monitor a DISA ‘trunk- to- trunk” call and release
the lines one (7) minute of ter the time expires.

To reach an internal station:

Dial the 3-digit station number. Ringback tone is heard.

Converse when party answers.
If the station dialed is unattended, busy or in DND, intercom dial tone
returns, (after the Preset Call Forward Timer expires).

WARNING: Toll fraud can occur

if DISA is not properly implemented.

Distinctive Ringing
The tone ring signal that notifies stations of an incoming call can be changed by each station user to provide
distinctive ringing among a group of stations. Each station user may select a distinctive ringing tone used to
ring their station. The system provides 36 different ring patterns that station users may select from.
To select a distinctive ring tone for a station:
1 Dial the Tone Ring program code (6951 on the dial pad. The following message is shown
on the display phone:

ENTER RING TONES
XX PRESS SPEED TO SAVE

issue 7 - December 1998

00-36

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

--,..
!.<:-‘$
.: :. -:

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Distinctive Ringing

Enter the 2-digit tone number. The telephone speaker sounds a steady tone that
correlates to the 2-digit entry.

When the desired tone is selected (default ringing code is set to 00) press the SPEED
button to save it as the tone to present when the station is tone rung. Confirmation tone
is heard. This tone is presented as a result of an incoming CO or intercom call, recalling
CO line or Transferred CO line or at any other time the station is tone rung. The 2-digit
tone number displays in the lower left corner of the LCD display.

The ringing choices are as follows:

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

Issue I- December 1998

5-38

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Distinctive Ringing

TONE #

I
I

FREQ

TONE #

FREQ

85211477

852/1633

1209/1633

1209/O

770/1336

1336/1477

770/1477

1336/1633

770/1633

133610

770/O

1477/1633

8521941

1477/o

85211209

1477/o

85211336

Off

94111477

6971770

6971852

7701941

77011209

/I
II

I
I

Tone Duration = 50 ms150 ms
Table 5-2: Ringing Choices

lssue I- December 1998

STARPLUS
Triad-S ProductDescription

Manual

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Do Not Disturb (DND)

Conditions:
+ Station users may listen to all tones by dialing the 2-digit codes one after another. The tone that is
sounding when the SPEED button is pressed is saved as that station’s tone ringing selection.
*:a A station’s tone ringing selection is maintained in a battery protected area of memory, Therefore, if a
system experiences a power failure or a soft or hard restart, the tone ringing selection is restored.
+ The tone selected provides TONE ringing normal or muted to the station whenever the station is
commanded to tone ring (i.e., this excludes camp-on tone programming confirmation tones or
other specific tones not considered TONE ringing).
~4 The selected tone is used to notify the station in the following cases:
Incoming CO Call
Incoming Intercom Call
Transferred CO Line
Recalling CO Line
Call Back Notification
Message Wait Call Back
All types of forwarded calls
Executive/Secretary calls
Line Queue Call Back
LCR Queue Call Back

CO distinctive ringing supersedes station distinctive ringing.

Do Not Disturb (DND)
DND blocks incoming paging and ringing, and provides visual status indication to other telephones with DSS
appearance. The DND code is [631].
* Press the pre-programmed* DND button. DND button lights steady,
The DND button can be pressed while the phone is ringing to stop the ringing. (Refer to One-Time Do Not
Disturb below.)
Removing Do Not Disturb:
.:+ Press the pre-programmed* DND button or dial [631], The button LED extinguishes and DND
cancels.
Conditions:
o
4th

Calling stations will receive DND audible tone.
The first programmed attendant does not have DND capability,

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

issue I- December 1998

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION

5-40

Executive Override

DND cpability is programmable on a per-station basis.

One-Time Do Not Disturb
Prevents calls from ringing at your station while you are on a call. The One-Time DND condition
automatically cancels when you end your call.
Q

Press the pre-programmed* DND button while you are off-hook and connected to a CO line or intercom call.
TheDND button LED lights and off-hook tones at your station cancel.

To cancel:
+ Replace handset. The DND button LED extinguishes and DND cancels.
*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table5.?:FZex
Codes.

Button Programming

Executive Override
This feature enables Executive designated stations the ability to override and barge-in on other keysets
engaged in conversation. Code is 16251.
If you call a busy station:
t Press the pre-programmed* EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE button. Executive station is
bridged onto the CO line conversation in progress at the called station. Optional
warning tone is heard and presented to all parties prior to cut-through.
z

Replace handset at Executive station to terminate the override.

Conditions:
3 An error tone occurs:
- If the called party is in a conference.
- If the called party is already on an OHVO call.
- If the called party has a Camp-On at his station.

If the Executive joins a call and one of the members does a hook-flash or presses his transfer
button, the Executive is dropped.
+ If the Executive does a hook-flash or presses his transfer button, it is ignored.
I” When the Executive joins an intercom call or CO call and the Executive is not in a mute state, and
any member of the party hangs up, the call is converted to a two-party conversation.

I s s u e I - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Executive/Secretary Pairing

+
+

When the Executive joins an intercom call or CO call and the Executive is in the mute state, and
either of the two parties in the intercom call hang up, the call is dropped. If the Executive hangs up,
the call remains a two-party conversation.
Certain forwarding types affect override operation.
Intercom button will disallow Executive Override.

*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table 5-.j:FZe.xButton
Codes.

P~ogmmming

Use of this feature when the Executive Override warning tone is disabled may be interpreted
as a violation of federal, state or local laws, and an invasion of privacy. Check applicable
laws in your area before intruding on calls using this feature.

A change in volume may occur on the CO line or intercom call after the
barge-in occurs.

If you are designated the Executive station and your phone is busy or in DND, all calls are routed to
the Secretary station.
If you are the designated Secretary station, you can signal the Executive that is busy or in DND by
using the Camp On feature.

Flash
When connected to an outside line:
‘_
2 -: .
“‘,;.
‘:Y,*‘i
c:--

Press FLASH to disconnect outside line and reseize outside line dial tone.

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

issue I- December 7998

5-42

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Flash On Intercom

Flash On Intercom
When connected to a page zone or another internal party, press FLASH to disconnect page or intercom call.
Intercom dial tone is heard.

Flexible Button Assignment
If you have buttons on your telephone that have NOT been assigned as CO lines, Pooled group, or Loop
buttons, you may program them to suit your own needs. This feature was enhanced in database
programming to allow programming of flexible buttons from a remote location (off-site). Range
programming can also assign these buttons to multiple stations. There are five possible functions you may
assign to these buttons:
DSS/BLF:

When this button is pressed, it automatically signals the assigned intercom station.
DSS/BLF buttons are programmed by the station user.
FEATURES: When this button is pressed, it activates a particular feature, thus eliminating the
need for dialing the feature code. Some features require a programmed flex button for that feature
to be accessible to the station user. In the case, it is designated in this Feature Operation Section
and user guide. Feature buttons are programmed by the station user. Refer to Table 5-3: Hex
Button Programming Codes for a complete listing of code/features that may be programmed onto
a flexible button.
SPEED DIAL: This button can automatically access a speed number location for one-step
operation. PBX and Centrex codes can be programmed into a speed dial bin and accessed by
pressing one button.
POOLED GROUP ACCESS: A group of outside lines can be placed under one button. When this
button is pressed, the system selects an available line from this group on which the user may place
a call. Pool buttons are assigned in database administration.
LOOP: This button appears as the direct button for outside lines that do not appear on the user’s
telephone. Any phone that does not have all lines appearing on it must have a loop button. There is
NO limit to the number of LOOP buttons a station may have. Loop buttons are assigned in database
administration.
UNASSIGN (Locked Out): Specific buttons may be designated as locked out or unused. When a
button is unused, the button may not be programmed using flex button programming procedures.
To program flexible buttons:
1

Press the SPEED button twice.

Press the assigned button to program (it must be programmed in the database as a
multi-function button).

issue 7 - December 7998

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Flexible Button Assignment

Dial the desired code. Refer toTable 5-.?:Flex Butfou Progmnzming Codes.

To erase a flexible button:
gg.3
w..;

Press the SPEED button twice.

Press the button to erase.

Press the FLASH button. Confirmation tone is heard.

Replace handset or press ON/OFF button.

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

issue I- December 1998

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Flexible

Call Park Location l-7 (System)

I544+[IDX]

Repeat Redial
Mailbox button

438

Personal Park
Voice Mail Group Pilot Numbers O-7

I6 4 5

Intercom button(s)

I646+[XXX]

Hunt Group Pilot Numbers O-7
ACD* Group Pilot Numbers O-9

I647+[xxx]

Call Coverage (Ringing Type)
Call Coverage (Non-Ringing Type)

UCD Group Pilot Numbers O-7

I6 5 3
I654+[0,

566

ACD’ Group Pilot Numbers IO-15
ACD*/UCD
Available/Unavailable

567
57o+[YY]

ACD*/UCD C a l l s i n Q u e u e D i s p l a y
ACD* Call Qualifier Code

6I 9 5

571
572+5 [UU]

ACD* Agent Logout
ACD* Agent Login

573
574

ACD* Group Member Status
Display
ACD* Agent Help

575+5 [UU]

ACD* Supervisor Logout

576+5 [UU]
577+5 [UU]

ACD* Supervisor Login
ACD* Supervisor Queue Status
Display

[VI
45 WI
55 WI
44

56 WI

578
579+5 [VU]
601
603
604
621
622
625
626

Ext. Numbers

ACD* Overflow AvaillUnavail
ACD* Calls in Queue Display buttons
Attendant Override
CO Line Off -Net Forward
Night Service

I649+[44v]

6I 8 0

One-Touch Recording
Caller ID Name/Number Toggle
Answering Machine Emulation mode
Dial Speed Directory
Distinctive Ringing
All Call Page (Internal and External)

70
71

Internal Page Zone 1
Internal Page Zone 2

72
73

Internal Page Zone 3
Internal Page Zone 4

74
75

Internal All Call Page

76+[1]
77

External Page Zones
Meet-Me-Page Answer

Least Cost Routing (LCR) Access
Group Call Pick Up

#O
#5

I[SPEED]+[*]

Universal Day/Night Answer
Speed Dial Access
(00-19 Station) (20-99 System)
Save Number Redial

I[SPEED]+[#]

Last Number Redial

I[SPEED]+[YY]

Line Queue
Call Back
Executive Override/
Monitor Barge-In

627
628

LCR Queue Cancel
Account Code Enter
OHVO Enable

631
632

Do Not Disturb
Background Music

633*[ZZ]
633+[00]

Personalized Messages

634
635

I6 4 3

Assignment

43*[c]

~100-131

‘I riad-Sr”t

Button

Clear Personalized Messages
Headset Mode

639

ICLID Display (unanswered calls
Incoming CO Call Transfer

641

Release button

Features available with optional software.

Table 5-3: Flex Button Programming Codes

~~~~~~
I s s u e I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Forward Override

Forward Override
This feature lets a user reach a busy station that is busy forward, no answer forward or all call forwarded.
This allows the calling station to call a forwarded station, OHVO, Executive Override, Monitor, Message Wait,
Camp On, or Call Back at that station rather than forwarding to the busy destination.
++

Dial [ 5# XXX] on the dial pad where XXX is the desired station extension,

Group Listening
All digital key stations have a built-in speakerphone. Station users may use the speaker to monitor a call
while using the handset to converse with the outside party. This enables other people in the room to listen to
both parties in the conversation.
$4

While conversing on the handset, press the ON/OFF button. Both parties can then be heard on the
digital station’s speaker. The speakerphone microphone is muted while the handset is off-hook.
To deactivate Group Listening while off-hook, press the ON/OFF button.
Conditions:
.;* While using the speakerphone, lifting the handset turns off the speakerphone. To activate group
listening, press the ON/OFF button (to ON) while the handset is off-hook.
+ While in group listening mode, pressing the MUTE button causes the transmit from the handset to be
muted (the speakerphone microphone is already muted). However, the distant end is still heard over
the handset receiver and the station speaker.
+s If full speakerphone operation is desired while in group listening mode, simply set the handset onhook.
Q Group listening is unavailable when the station is in headset mode.
+ When placing the handset on-hook to full speakerphone operation, it is normal for a to hear a squeal
caused by audio feedback. To eliminate this noise, press MUTE prior to initiating speakerphone
operation.
o Must be enabled in Station Programming.

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e I- December 7998

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Headset Mode

Headset Mode
To activate Headset Mode:
+ Dial [634] on the dial pad,
or

Press pre-programmed* HEADSET MODE button. LED lights steady
While Headset mode is active, the ON/OFF button activates the headset
and disables speakerphone and intercom call announce operation at your
station.

NOTE: To install the headset, see the Installation Manual.
To deactivate Headset Mode:
* Dial [634] on the dial pad,
or

Press the pre-programmed* HEADSET MODE button. LED extinguishes.
Station must be programmed in database programming
ation before flex button can be programmed.

for headset oper-

*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table53: FlexButton Programming
Codes.

Hold - Exclusive
When a line is placed on Exclusive Hold, no other station in the system can retrieve the call. Exclusive Hold
may be programmed for activation when the Hold button is pressed once or twice. CO Lines, while in a
transfer hold, are always placed in an Exclusive Hold condition.

Hot Keypad Feature
This feature enables a station user to activate the telephone by dialing digits without going off hook.

issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
ICLID Unanswered Call Management Table

ICLID Unanswered Call Management Table
An Unanswered Call Management Table with 100 entry capacity for the Triad-S System is maintained in the
system. The calling number/name information pertaining to any unanswered call is placed in this table at
the time the system determines the call was abandoned.
This table may be accessed from any user station display phone so the unanswered calls may be reviewed and handled
by the end user. Any Attendant station(s) can delete a table entry, one entry at a time. Upon entry into the review
process, the functions available to a phone are:

2. Review next item in table
entry.

MUTE

3. Step to next table entry.

HOLD

4. Delete this table entry.
(attendant only)

FLASH

5. Exit table review function.

ON/OFF

6. Step to previous table
entry.

TRANSFER

7. Call Back.

SPEED

Table 5-4: ICLID Unanswered Call Management

Conditions:
o
+P

Telco must activate Caller ID service.
Auto Attendant calls are considered answered.

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

issue 7 - December 7998

I
5-48

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Incoming CO Call Transfer

Incoming CO Call Transfer
This feature lets station users transfer a call that is currently ringing at their station without answering it.
This feature is unavailable to Single Line Telephone users.
While station is idle:
1

Call rings in at idle station.

Press the pre-programmed* INC CO XSFR flexible button,
Of

Dial the Incoming CO call transfer code [639] on the dial pad.
3

Press a DSS, Group button or dial the 3-digit station number or group number. Call is
automatically transferred to that destination.

While on an internal/external call and an incoming or transferred CO call is ringing at your station:
1 Place the current call on hold.
z

Press the pre-programmed* INC CO XSFR flexible button,

or
Dial the Incoming CO call transfer code [639] on the dial pad.
3

Press a DSS, Group button or dial the 3-digit station number or group number. Call is
automatically transferred to that destination. The incoming transferred CO call
receives Music-On-Hold during the transfer state.

Station user can return to call placed on hold.

*AFlex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to TabZe5-3:FZexButton
Codes.

Programming

Conditions:
+ Calls may be forwarded to any available station, ACD/UCD group, Hunt Group or VM Group.
+ Destination station must have a direct appearance for that CO Line or Loop button, and not in DND,
or error tone is presented to the originator and the call remains ringing at his station.
+ Attendant stations do not send ID digits.
o ACD agents are not allowed to transfer ACD calls using this feature.

Intercom Buttons
This feature enables station users the ring a busy station via the intercom without using the Camp-On or
Executive Override features. This allows stations to place intercom calls on hold.

I s s u e I - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION

5-49

Intercom Buttons

To program a flexible button as an intercom button:
1 Press the SPEED button twice.
2

Press the desired flexible button to program.

Dial [645] on the dial pad. Confirmation tone is heard. If an error was made during entry,
error tone is heard.

You place an intercom call to a busy station that has an intercom button:
1 The calling station receives ringback tone instead of busy tone. The called station hears
muted or reminder ring and their intercom button LED starts flashing at the incoming CO
line rate. This indicates an incoming intercom call.
z

The called station can place the current CO call on hold by pressing the HOLD button,
Of

Place the current intercom call on hold by pressing the HOLD button. The intercom call is
placed on hold on the available intercom button.
3

The called station then presses the flashing intercom button to answer the incoming
intercom call. Once the call is answered, the following message displays on the called
station LCD:

CALL FROM STA XXX
MMM DD YY

HH:MM:SS

Sta Xxx can be a programmed station name.
By default, no intercom buttons are assigned to key stations
Conditions:
o If calls are ringing on intercom buttons and a Handsfree call is received, the Handsfree call is allowed
and the calls ringing continue with muted ringing.
Q Multiple intercom path buttons can be assigned to a single station, however up to five internal parties
can be placed on hold per station. Music-On-Hold is provided to the intercom caller on hold.
+ Once an intercom button is set up on the keyset, callers dialing that station will always receive
ringback tone as long as an available intercom button is idle. If all intercom buttons are in use, the
station may utilize the camp-on or executive override features to reach the station. Internal callers
are dropped after the camp-on is answered.
o This feature can be programmed on any key station or DSS Console with an available flexible button.
If there is an available intercom button, the following actions cannot be performed: Executive
Override, ACD Supervisor Barge-In, OHVO, Camp-On or Override.
+ A call ringing to a station on an intercom button rings muted or reminder ringing, depending on the
stations tone ringing cadence.
STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

Issue I- December 1998

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION

5-50

intercom Calling

Up to five internal parties can be placed on hold. No recall timers apply to Intercom buttons.
Internal callers can be placed and removed from hold when they appear on an Intercom button.
0% To utilize the capability of intercom buttons, busy forward cannot be active at the station.
“P A call ringing to a station on an intercom button and the DND button is pressed, returns DND tone
to the caller and the call is dropped.
*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to TubZeS-3:FZexButton
Codes.

Progrumming

Intercom Calling
Placing an Intercom Call:
1

Press the DSS button of the party to be called (if programmed at your phone),
or
Dial the 3-digit extension number.
Dialing a number in the numbering plan activates the telephone automatically.

You hear ringing if the called station is in the T answering mode; or three bursts of tone
if called station is in the H or P position.

Lift the handset or use the speakerphone after the three tone bursts stop.

Hang up to end the call.

Answering an Intercom Call:
With your H-P-T button in the T mode (LED On), you hear repeated bursts of intercom tone ringing and the
HOLD button slow flashes.
1 Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF button to answer,
or
Press the H-P-T button to the H mode (No LED) to reply.
2

Replace the handset to end the call.

In the P mode (LED flashes at 30 ipm), you hear three bursts of tone and one-way announcement, The
calling party cannot hear conversations in progress.
+ Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF button to answer,
01

Press the H-P-T button to the H mode to reply

issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S

Product Description Manual

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Intercom Transfer

In the H mode (No LED), you hear two bursts of tone and an announcement, Reply handsfree or lift the handset
for privacy.

zg2 Intercom Transfer

6‘2. .=.t

Intercom transfer without DSS buttons:
1

Receive or make an intercom call.

Press the TRANS button. Intercom dial tone is heard.

s Dial the station.
4

When the second station answers, you are in a supervised transfer mode (first station is
staged for transfer).

Hang up (stations 1 and 2 are connected).

Intercom transfer using DSS buttons:
1 Receive or make an intercom call using a DSS button.
2

Press the TRANS button. Intercom dial tone is heard.

Press the DSS button where to transfer the call.

Hang up (stations 1 and 2 are connected).

Keyset Mode
This feature lets a station user determine the mode and baud rate of the optional CT1 Module connected to
their phone. This setting is stored in back-up memory in the event of a power outage or system reset.
At an idle station:
1 Dial the Keyset Mode code [648] on the dial pad,
Or

Press the pre-programmed* KEYSET MODE button. The display shows the following
information:

INACTIVE
M O D E = % SAVE=HOLD BAUD=#
2

Press [*] to scroll through the keyset modes. The available modes are: Inactive, PC
Phone, ATD Command, ATH Comm and CKTU.

Press [#] to scroll through the baud rates. Available baud rates are: 1200, 2400, and
4800.

Press the HOLD button to save the desired entries.

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

Issue I- December 1998

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION

5-52

Last Number Redial (LNR)

When the telephone is set to the AT command mode, the following AT commands are supported:
+s ATD: This is the modem dialing command. The telephone recognizes the ATD and accepts digits
after the command.
-e ATH or ATHX: Where X = 0 or 1. This is the modem on hook/off hook command. ATH or ATHO
forces the telephone to the on hook state from it’s current state. ATHl forces the telephone to the
off hook state from it’s current state.
If the handset is off hook (/if ted), these commands are discarded and no
action is taken by the telephone.

+z+

AT or ATW:

Where X = 0 or 1. This is the modem reset/initialize command. Whenever these
commands are sent to the keyset, the keyset returns OK in ASCII format.
o CKTU: This mode is used when the optional Wanderer (cordless key telephone unit) is connected
to the station. Refer to the Wanderer User Guide for additional information.
Conditions:
9* The telephone must be in the AT command mode to process AT commands.
o All CT1 information is still sent out the RS232 port in the AT command mode.
+ These access codes are assigned to available flexible buttons for feature activation.
-z+ The ATD command is always accepted by the telephone while it is in the AT command mode. ATHX
is accepted only if enabled.
+z+ AT2 is always enabled if the station is in the AT command mode.
+ ATD accepts W to indicate a pause command.
+ ATH or ATHO causes an on hook event. ATHl must be specified to go off hook.
+z+ Default mode is inactive.
*AFlex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table53:FZexButton Programming
Codes.

Last Number Redial (LNR)
1

Press the SPEED button.

Press [#I, The last number dialed over an outside line is automatically redialed.

The system automatically selects the original line used to place the call and redials the
number.

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

DIGITAL STATION
LCD Display - Contrast

OPERATION

If that line is busy, the system automatically selects another line from the same group and
redials the number.
+S If no lines are available in the same group, the station receives busy tone and can queue for a
line.
9 If the station user preselects a line before activating LNR, the preselection overrides the line that
was used originally.

LCD Display - Contrast
There are four contrast adjustments available to the user to adjust the LCD for different lighting levels, At idle
phone:
1

Press volume bar up or down for desired effect.

Conditions:
+
o
Q

BGM must be inactive.
Handset must be in cradle.
ON/OFF button must be set to OFF.

Least Cost Routing (LCR)
To place an outside call when LCR is enabled in the system:
1

Dial [9] on the dial pad.

Dial the desired telephone number.

Wait for an answer. Lift handset or use the speakerphone to converse.

If all available lines are busy, remain off-hook for four seconds to automatically be queued onto LCR for an
available line, then hang up.
If an LCR Queue Callback is activated:
1 When telephone is signaled, answer the call.
2

Desired telephone number is automatically redialed.
Only one LCR Queue Call Back request may be initiated by a station. When
a second request is made, the first request is cancelled.

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

issue

1 - December 1998

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION

5-54

Mailbox Buttons

If an LCR Queue Callback is activated and you wish to cancel that callback request:
I

Dial the LCR Queue Cancel code, [626] on the dial pad.

Replace handset or press ON/OFF button.
i... >.<
/
.-- .!
&,_ ,.,:
-*...,.
. -,....,. Is,
.,_

Mailbox Buttons
This feature lets station users program specific mailbox index numbers onto flexible buttons at their station
or DSS Console. Users can then transfer internal/external callers to specific Voice Mail Groups or Mailbox
numbers. These Voice Mail Groups or Mailbox numbers are programmed in admin programming. Up to
255 mailbox buttons per system are allowed.
To program a flexible button for a mailbox button at a station:
1 Press the SPEED button twice.
2

Press the desired flexible button to program.

Dial [644] on the dial pad followed by the 3-digit VM Index number (001-255).
Confirmation tone is heard. If an error was made during entry, error tone is heard.

To use your mailbox button while on an internal/external call:
+z+ The called station presses the Mailbox flexible button and goes on-hook. The call is then transferred
to the VM port by the telephone system.
By default, no mailbox buttons are assigned to key stations.
Conditions:
G This feature can be programmed on any key station or DSS Console with an available flexible
button. If a station is an OHVO, Camp-on or Executive Override initiator, they may not use the
mailbox button feature.
-+ Stations engaged in a conference cannot use this feature.
*:. If no station(s) are programmed in the Voice Mail Group, the user receives error tone.
+ Mailbox buttons interact with the station VMID feature as follows:
- VM transfer with ID (manually enter digits) = No station VMID.
- VM transfer with ID (press DSS button) = Use station VMID.
- Mailbox button feature = No station VMID.

*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table53;FlexButton
Codes.

Issue I- December 1998

Programming

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Meet Me Page

Meet Me Page
To request another party to meet you on a page:
1 Dial the desired 2-digit or 3-digit paging code,
or
Press pre-programmed* PAGING button.
2

Request that party meet you on the page.

Do not hang up, wait for the requested party to answer. As soon as the paged party
answers and is connected to you, the page circuit releases.

Answering a Meet Me Page
+ Go to the nearest telephone and dial [77] on the dial pad,
or

Press the pre-programmed* MEET ME PAGE ANSWER button. You are connected to the paging party
*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table j-3:FZex Button Programming
Codes.

Message Waiting
Leaving a Message Waiting Indication:
If you dial a station that is busy, unattended, or in DND, you can leave a message waiting indication.
1

Lift handset or press ON/OFF button.

Dial the desired intercom station.

Press the MSG button. Confirmation tone is heard. Called party’s MSG button slow
flashes.

Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF button to end the call.
Up to five messages can be left at any Station.

Answering a Message Waiting Indication:
If your MSG button is lit, you have a message waiting for you. The first message left is the first one called.
1

Press the MSG button. Station that left message is signaled with tone ringing.

If called station does not answer, press MSG button once to leave message.

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue I- December 1998

...

..:.

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION

5-56

Mute Key

Mute Key
The MUTE button provides privacy during speakerphone or handset operation by disabling the microphone.
1

Press the MUTE button while off-hook on speakerphone or handset to activate.

Press the MUTE button again to deactivate.

The mute feature automatically deactivates upon call termination.

Night Service Feature
The Night Service feature [604] will provide a means to put the system in night mode from any keyset or
remove the system from night mode from any keyset as long as the system was put in night mode by the
Night Service feature flex button. If the system was placed in night mode by the attendant using the Night
Service (DND) button or if the system was placed in night mode by the automatic schedule, the Night
Service flex button can not remove the system from night mode.
From an idle station:
o

Press the pre-programmed* Night Service flex button. The system is now in the Night Service Mode.

To remove the Night Service Mode:
+ Press the pre-programmed* Night Service flex button again. The system is now removed from the
Night Service Mode.
*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to TabZe53:Hex Button Programming
Codes.

Off -Hook Preference
If your phone has been programmed for Off-Hook Preference, you will access an outside line, or a feature
by going off-hook or pressing the ON/OFF button. It simulates the depression of a specific button and can
be programed by a station user or a database administration programmer. Code [691] + Button Number.
While Off-Hook Preference is enabled, you may access internal intercom dial tone by:
1 Pressing the pre-programmed* ICM button,
or
Dial your 3-digit intercom number. (Do not lift handset or press ON/OFF button before
dialing intercom number.) LED lights steady and intercom dial tone is heard.
z

You may now dial an internal station or Feature Access code.

I s s u e I - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

i’_ ‘:.-. .:,
,... I.. ..-., , I1
. .a:.-.

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Off -Hook Voice Over (OHVO)

*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table53;FZex Button Progwnming
Codes.

F-T
.y. :>;.1::

Off -Hook Voice Over (OHVO)
This feature enables users, off-hook on a call (CO or Intercom), receive a voice announcement through the
handset receiver without interrupting the existing call. The Voice Over is muted so it does not override or
drown out the existing conversation. The overridden party may then talk to the calling party, using CAMP-ON
procedures, or use Silent Text Messaging to respond to the calling party via LCD Displays,
Placing an Off-Hook Voice Over (OHVO) call:
When an OHVO station calls a busy OHVO station, and busy tone is received:
1 The calling OHVO station dials the OHVO code [628] on the dial pad,
or
Presses a pre-programmed* OHVO button to initiate an OHVO announcement, The
HOLD button LED flashes at the called OHVO station.
2

The OHVO receiving station receives a one-beep warning tone. The station receiving
the OHVO call must be off-hook and in H mode, then the calling OHVO party may begin
the voice announcement to the called OHVO party. The called OHVO station’s existing
conversation is uninterrupted and the voice over announcement does not drown out the
existing conversation. The calling OHVO station is not connected to or otherwise able to
hear the called station’s conversation (the connection only allows the calling station to
transmit to the called station).
The ca/ling station is placed in a one-time ON0 mode upon initiating the
Voice Over. One-Time DND cannot be toggled during the OHVO call. The
station receiving the OHVO call must be off-hook and in H mode.

Responding to an Off-Hook Voice Over (OHVO):
After receiving an OHVO announcement, three options are available to respond to the calling party:
Option 1: This method lets the receiving station respond to an OHVO announcement utilizing the
MUTE feature button. This button is pressed to carry on a two-way conversation with the OHVO
initiator while still listening to the original call.
Option 2: The OHVO receiving station may respond to the calling station by using the Silent Text
Messaging (this feature is only available to digital key terminals, and the calling station must be a
digital display terminal.) The OHVO receiving station may press a pre-programmed Message button
STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

issue I- December 1998

5-58

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Off -Hook Voice Over (OHVO)

to respond to the voice over announcement without being released from the current call, (i.e. by
pressing a flex button pre-programmed for the message IN MEETING), the calling station receives
this message on the LCD display
Option 3: The OHVO receiving station may respond to the calling OHVO station by using the CampOn feature. The OHVO receiving station presses the flashing HOLD button to consult with the calling
station, The existing call (CO line) goes on Exclusive Hold automatically. This method then follows
Camp-On procedures and operation.
Conditions:
+ The station receiving the OHVO call MUST be off-hook and in H mode.
+z+ The receiving station must have OHVO enabled.
.a When the dialed station responds via Camp-On, all conditions and options available to Camp-On
apply (refer to the feature description for Camp-On).
+ OHVO may be used to notify the called party of a transferred call (CO Line or Intercom) by
announcing the call, then releasing to complete the transfer. When this occurs, the receiving station
need not respond to the OHVO.
o When a call is transferred via OHVO, the receiving station receives muted ringing after the transfer
is complete.
Q Any messages including CANNED, CUSTOM, or SILENT RESPONSE text messaging may be used to
respond to an OHVO call. The message appears on the calling station and called station LCD
displays.
0% If the calling station is a non-LCD terminal, the called station receives error tone when responding
via text messaging.
+ The called station may press a flex button programmed as a Text Message button, [633 + #], Press
this flex button and dial the 2-digit message number (31-51) to respond to the calling station.
DTMF digits are not heard by either party
o The receiving station must be programmed to allow OHVO calls.
+ When silent messaging is used to respond to an OHVO call, the existing call on the called station is
not disconnected while the messages are being sent to the calling station,
Q The calling station of an OHVO call must remain off-hook to receive silent messages. The calling
station’s voice transmit remains connected to the called station and may respond verbally to the
text messages. The OHVO call ends when the calling station goes on-hook.
Q If the receiving station is on-hook in speakerphone mode and a calling party initiates OHVO, the
receiving station receives a Camp-On warning tone and normal Camp-On procedures are followed.

I s s u e I- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
One-Touch

9
Q

Recording

The called station may send a message, and then press MUTE to talk to the calling station. Each time
a message is sent, the splash tone is heard and both displays are updated.
LEDs follow Camp-On LED lamp sequences.
OHVO will not function if the busy station is in the Group Listening Mode.

One-Touch Recording
This feature lets the station user, while on an internal/external call, press a button to have the system record
the conversation into the station users mailbox. Code [649 44X], where X= O-7 for desired VM group.
Use of this feature when the One-Touch Warning Tone is disabled may
be interpreted as a violation of federal, state or locallaws, and an invasion
of privacy. Check applicable laws in your area before recording calls using
this feature.

While on an internal/external call:
1

Station user presses the pre-programmed* VM RECORD buttaIn. The LED flutters red

at 240 ipm during the set up and the following message displays:

RECORDING SETUP
MMM DD YY
2

oo:oo:oo

Once the system connects to the station, the user’s mailbox, the flexible button LED
lights solid green and the LCD displays:

RECORDING
oo:oo:oo
MMM DD YY
3

When the user finishes recording, press the pre-programmed* VM RECORD button. The
LED extinguishes and the normal LCD call information displays.

Conditions:
Q If the user hangs up without terminating the record function, the system performs the exit
procedure as described in step 3 above.
+ If the user presses the TRANS, CAMP-ON, MSG, or FWD buttons during recording, pressing the button
is ignored.
0% During the recording setup, pressing the CONF button is ignored.

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue I- December 1998

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION

5-60

Outside Call - Answer

If no VM port is available when the station user wants to record, the user receives the following
display (lasts six seconds):
RECORDING UNAVAILABLE
MMM DD YY
oo:oo:oo

The user may retry after the display extinguishes.
In the recording mode, pressing the CONF button lets the user add members to the recording
(conference). Normal conference operation/conditions apply.
If an internal station is being recorded, the internal station receives a CONFERENCE LCD message
and the CONF LED lights.
If the FLASH or HOLD button is pressed during the recording, the recording is terminated.
If a station user presses the record button while in a two-party conference, the conference is
recorded. If the button is pressed a second time, the conference ends and the call is returned to a
two-way conversation.
Only one active recording per station is allowed.
If a recording is done to another internal station, the station being recorded cannot invoke the
record feature.
If a conference is being recorded and the conference master exits, the recording stays active. The
recording stops if the initiator re-enters the conference and ends it, removes the record function, or
the conference ends on it’s own.
Only the initiator of a conference can invoke/remove the record function during a conference.
Conference Warning Tone is not given to the conference members, if the initiator is recording the
conference and the record tone is disabled.
Recording is not allowed for a station that is barged in, Executive Overridden, or on an active OHVO
call.
An unsupervised conference call can be recorded.
*AFlex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table53;FlexButton Progmmning
Codes.

Outside Call - Answ
1

Lift handset or press ON/OFF button.

Press slow flashing outside line button or Loop button. (If your telephone is
programmed with Preferred Line Answer, you may answer an outside line by lifting the
handset, or pressing the ON/OFF button.)

I s s u e I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Outside Call

- Place

Outside Call - Place
1

Press outside line or Pool button. ON/OFF button LED lights and dial tone is heard.

Dial the desired party.

When called party answers, lift handset to converse or use speakerphone.

Station user may also dial the individual trunk group access code to access an outside line.

Outside Call - Place on Hold
1

If your system is programmed for Exclusive Hold Preference, press HOLD button once
for Exclusive Hold and twice for System Hold.

If your system is programmed for System Hold Preference, press HOLD button once for
System Hold and twice for Exclusive Hold.

Paging
If you were given the ability to make page announcements:
1 Lift handset or press ON/OFF button.
2

Dial the 2-digit or 3-digit paging code,
or
Press pre-programmed* PAGE button.

[70]
[71]
[72]
[73]
[74]
[75]
[76]
3

= All Call - Internal and External
= Internal Zone 1
= Internal Zone 2
= Internal Zone 3
= Internal Zone 4
= Internal All Call
+ [l] = External Page

Stations receiving a Page Announcement can press the Volume Bar to change the
paging volume. The following message is shown on the display phone:

SPEAKER PAGE
MMM DD YY

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

[#########J
HH:MM am

issue I- December 1998

..-.

5-62

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Park - Personal

Stations off -book or in DAD do not hear the internal page announcement.
When making a zone page or All Call page and the zone is busy, the page
initiator receives ring back tone until the zone becomes available. You then
hear a warning tone and can make the page announcement.
External paging requires op

tiond hardware.

*AFlexButton must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table53:FZexButton Programming
Codes.

Park - Personal
Each station in the system can place a call to a personal park location and later retrieve that call from the
originating station.
While connected to an outside line:
1

Press the TRANS button. The caller is put on Exclusive Hold.

Dial the Personal Park location [438] on the dial pad,
or
Press the pre-programmed* PERSONAL PARK button. Dial tone is heard.
When dialing the personal park location and it is already occupied, the
initiating station receives the previously parked call and the second call is
parked.

Retrieving a Parked Call:
I* Dial the Personal Call Park location code 14381 on the dial pad,
or
Press the pre-programmed* PERSONAL PARK button. A talk path is established between the two
parties.
Conditions:
+ Intercom calls and CO line calls can be placed into the station’s personal park location.
Q Calls parked in a personal park location are subject to the system call park recall timer.
*a A CO call parked in a personal call park location recalls to the station that parked the call, when the
call park recall timer expires. The CO call rings to this station until the system hold timer expires.
The CO call then recalls the attendant(s) (at this point, the attendant station and the initiating

Issue 1

- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

: : :.

5-63

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
PBX/Centrex Transfer

station are ringing), and the attendant recall timer is initiated. When the attendant recall timer
expires, the CO call is disconnected.

.-w-.
;~s:
c-

UCD Available/Unavailable Mode
If you are an UCD agent, you may place your station in Available mode to receive UCD calls, or you may place
your station in Unavailable mode to block UCD calls from ringing your station.

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

Issue I- December 1998

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION

5-76

Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)

To go Available:
$3

Dial [566] on the dial pad,
Or

Press the pre-programmed* AVAILABLE/UNAVAILABLE button. You may now receive UCD calls.
To go Unavailable:
+ Dial [566] on the dial pad,
Or

Press the pre-programmed* AVAILABLE/UNAVAILABLE button. You are now blocked from receiving
UCD calls.
*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table53:lexButton
Programming
Codes.

UCD Overflow Station - Forwarding Assignments
This feature enables UCD calls reaching an Overflow Station to be forwarded.
1

Lift the handset or press ON/OFF button.

Press the pre-programmed* FWD button.

Dial the desired code:

[7] = No Answer Calls
[8] = Busy Calls
[9] = Busy and No Answer Calls
Skip the preceding step for immediate forwarding.

Dial the 3-digit destination number where to forward calls (Station, Voice Mail, UCD
groups, or Hunt group). Confirmation tone is heard.

Replace handset or press ON/OFF button.

To remove Call Forwarding:
I

Lift handset or press ON/OFF button.

Press the pre-programmed* FWD button. Confirmation tone is heard and the FWD LED
extinguishes.

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Universal Day/Night Answer (UDA/UNA)

Conditions:
o

An overflow station may be assigned to route callers in queue to a designated station after a specified
time. A queued call is one that has been answered by a recorded announcement device or
transferred into the group.

*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table53:Flex
Codes.

Button Programming

Universal Day/Night Answer (UDA/UNA)
Incoming CO lines can be programmed for Universal Day Answer (UDA) or Universal Night Answer (UNA).
UDA/UNA assigned CO lines can also signal over the external page port(s). If External Day programming is
enabled and the system is in the day mode, the assigned external page port(s) present a ringing signal.
UDA/UNA is established on a per CO line basis in admin programming.
When the system is in Day or Night mode and you hear an outside line ringing at another station, and wish to
answer it:
+

Dial [#5] on the dial pad. The connected outside line can be transferred or disconnected.
Each telephone utilizing Universal Day/Night Answer must have a loop
button appearance if the ringing outside line does not display at theirphone.

Conditions:
+z+
$3
4~

During the Day mode, all common CO lines programmed for UDA ringing will ring.
CO lines not programmed for UDA ringing do not participate in common audible ringing.
If External Day ring is disabled, or the system is not in the day mode, external page ringing is
disabled.
o Ringing CO lines not assigned CO line group access for a particular SLT may be answered in a UDA
service. Dialing privileges are unavailable on CO lines to which an SLT does not have access. CO lines
without UDA status may not be answered or accessed via UDA procedures,
o If two single-line telephones attempt to retrieve one ringing CO line simultaneously, one user is
connected to the incoming CO line and the other user receives intercom busy tone.
+ The special ring mode is treated as day mode.

STARPLUS

Triad-S

Product Description Manual

I s s u e 7 - December 1998

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION

5-78

Voice Mail Groups

(VM)

Voice Mail Groups (VM)
Forward Callers to your Mail box:
Intercom and Transferred CO callers may be routed directly to your mail box by forwarding your phone to a
voice mail group. Callers are then greeted by your personal voice mail greeting, if available. (Refer to Call
Forward -Voice Mail Operation.)
Retrieving Voice Messages:
If your Message Waiting button or programmed Voice Mail Group button is flashing, you may have a voice
message waiting.
To enter the voice mail system to check for mail:
1

Dial the Voice Mail Group number [440-4471,
or

Press the pre-programmed* Voice Mail group button or flashing Message Wait button.
2

When prompted, enter the mailbox password.

Receiving a Voice Mail Message Wait:
To receive a message waiting indication that a voice message is waiting, the Voice Mail system must be
programmed to provide the indication.
After the voice mail system receives a voice message for a station user:
I

The voice mail must go off -hook and dial the voice mail message wait code [420] on
the dial pad.

Dial the 3-digit extension number of the station user who received a voice message.

Turning the Message Waiting Lamp Off:
When a station user retrieves the voice messages from the voice mail system, the voice mail system must:
1 Be programmed to go off -hook and dial the message cancel code [421] on the dial pad.
2

Dial the 3-digit extension number of the station user who received a voice message.

Conditions:
o

Only VM extensions are allowed to turn ON/OFF VM message wait indications.

*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table53:FZexButton Programming
Codes.

lssue I- December 7998

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

5-79

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION
Voice Mail Groups (VM)

VM Transfer with ID Digits
- F.,
.~.,_.‘.,YO ”.,a
L-.
i. 5

This feature lets an Attendant or station user transfer a caller directly into a voice mail box. This allows entry
of the station identification digits by the transferring party. A caller using this feature can transfer to a voice
mail box when: 1) a station user on the system is not forwarded to VM, or 2) the destination Voice Mail Box
owner is not a station user.
When a caller wishes to be transferred into a user’s Voice Mail box and that user’s station is not forwarded
into voice mail, the attendant or a station user may initiate a Voice Mail Transfer.
When the caller wishes to leave a Voice Message for a VM user:
1 The initiating station presses the TRANS button.
2

Dial the Voice Mail Group number,
or
Press the pre-programmed* VM group button.

Dial the desired party’s VMID (Mail Box location) and go on-hook. The system makes the
connection to an available Voice Mail port and sends the Leave Mail Prefix (if any) plus
the digits dialed as the VMID number, then the Leave Mail Suffix digits (if any). The
system then cuts through the transferred caller.
The VMID (mail box location) can be any number between 000 through
999. If 4-digit VMID (Flash 09) is enabled, the range is between 0000
through 9999.

OR
1

The initiating system presses the Voice Mail button.

Press DSS button to transfer desired party’s Voice Mail ID.

Conditions:
$* CO Trunks and Internal Calls may be transferred into Voice Mail using this feature.
o If no VMID digits are dialed by the transferring station, the identification digits of the transferring
station are sent to VM.

<:* .--;-,.>>.;.;-Jzid A
c

VM Tone Mode Calling Option
Lets the Voice Mail system override a called station’s H or P intercom settings.
When placing a call to a station and Tone ringing is desired, the Voice Mail system MUST be programmed to:
7 Dial [6#] on the dial pad.
2

Dial the 3-digit station extension (call tone rings station).

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue I- December 1998

DIGITAL STATION OPERATION

5-80

Volume Control Bar (DKT)

Volume Control Bar (DKT)
There is a volume control bar below the keypad to control the ringing, handset, and speakerphone volumes.
The following message is shown on the display phone, while listening to Background Music:
SPEAKER BGM
MMM DD YY

[#########]
HH:MM am

The following message is shown on the display phone, while using the speakerphone on a Intercom call:
SPEAKER CALL
MMM DD YY

[#########]
HH:MM am

The following message is shown on the display phone, while using the handset on a Intercom call:
HANDSET ICM
MMM DD YY

[#I########]
HH:MM am

The following message is shown on the display phone, while using the speakerphone on a CO call:
SPEAKER CALL
MMM DD YY

[#I########]
HH:MM am

The following message is shown on the display phone, while using the handset on a CO call:
HANDSET CO
MMM DD YY

[######I###]
HH:MM am

The following message is shown on the display phone, while receiving a page announcement:
SPEAKER PAGE
MMM DD YY

[#########]
HH:MM am

The following message is shown on the display phone, while receiving an incoming tone ringing Intercom or
CO call:
SPEAKER RING
MMM DD YY

issue I- December 1998

[#########]
HH:MM am

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

Introduction
This section of the manual contains the operating instructions for Single Line users. It is designed to provide
step-by-step instructions for operating the Single Line telephones in the system.
Literature similar to these operating instructions was prepared for use by the customer in the form of a
Single Line Telephone User’s Guide.

Account Codes
SLT stations can enter an account code to identify the call or calling station,
Entering Account Code before a call
1

Lift the handset.

Dial [627] on the dial pad.

Dial the account code.
If the account code contains fewer than 12 digits, dial [S] to return to intercom dial tone.
Dial tone is heard.

Dial [9] or CO Access code and the desired number.

Entering Account Code during a call
1 Press the hookswitch momentarily. Your call is placed on hold while you enter your
account code.
2

Dial [627] on the dial pad.

Dial the account code.

If the account code contains fewer than 12 digits, dial [+I+] to return automatically to the call.

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Thisfeature is available with optional soJware. When purchased, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) is not
used and is replaced by the ACD functions identified in the following. Sixteen Automatic Call Distribution
(ACD) groups can be programmed, each containing up to sixteen 3-digit station numbers.

Issue 1

- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

SINGLE

LINE

TELEPHONE

OPERATION

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Agent Login/Logout Feature
The Agent Login/Logout feature provides a means for an agent to log into one of the ACD groups and receive
calls, For an agent to be placed into an active ACD state, the agent must first login.
I

Dial the LOGIN CODE [572] on the dial pad, followed by the ACD group number (5xx)
into which the agent is going to log.

The agent enters his unique AGENT ID code (0000-9999). Confirmation tone is heard
and the agent is logged onto the ACD group. When the agent logs in, an ACD login
event is sent to the SMDR port, if active.

u member is assigned to a specific AC0 group and uses the login-logout
codes to enter and exit an AC0 group other than his assigned group, the
database is changed to reflect the different group.

For an agent to remove himself from the ACD group as an active agent
o Dial the LOGOUT CODE 15711 on the dial pad. When the agent logs out and removes himself from
the ACD group, an ACD logout event is sent to the SMDR port, if active.
Conditions:
* If an agent logs into an ACD group from a station that is logged into another ACD group, the station
is automatically removed from the previous ACD group.
+z+ An agent may log out while in wrap-up, or unavailable.
3 An agent logging in is placed in wrap-up mode before receiving an ACD call,
c, If an agent attempts to log into an ACD group that already has I6 members, that agent receives
error tone.

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE OPERATION

6-3

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

The Triad-S system does not verify agents ID codes, other than requiring entry of four digits.

2500 Type

2500 Type with Message Waiting Lamp on Top

Figure 6-1: 2500 Series SLT Telephones

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

Issue I- December 7998

6-4

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE OPERATION
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

2500 Type with Message Waiting Lamp

2500 Type Wall Phone

2500 Type with Flash Key

Figure 6-l: 2500 Series SLT Telephones

i s s u e I - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE OPERATION

6-5

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Model 2601 Feature Telephone

Model 2602 Feature Telephone

Model 2603 Feature Telephone

Model 2603E Feature Telephone

Figure 6-2: 2600 Series SLT Telephones

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue 1

- December 1998

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE OPERATION
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Model 2604 Feature Telephone

Model 2604E Feature Telephone

Model 2605 Feature Telephone

Model 2606 Feature Telephone

Figure 6-2: 2600 Series SLT Telephones (Continued)

I s s u e I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE OPERATION
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Triad-S Ext. Numbers
Call Park Location O-7 (System)
Personal Park
Voice Mail’ Group Pilot Numbers O-7
44 WI
Hunt Group Pilot Numbers O-7
45 [HI
ACD* Group Pilot Numbers O-9
55 WI
UCD Group Pilot Numbers O-7
55 SJI
ACD* Group Pilot Numbers 1 O-l 5
56 WI
ACD” or UCD Available/Unavailable
566
571
ACD” Agent Logout
572 55[U] ACD” Agent Login
574
ACD” Agent Help
ACD* Overflow Sta AvaillUnavail
578
6# [XXX] Tone Mode Ring Option
620
Camp-On
621
Line Queue
622
Call Back
623
Message Wait
625
Executive Override
626
LCR Queue Cancel
Account Code Enter
627
631
Do Not Disturb
633+[2Z] Personalized Messages
633+[ 001 Clear Personalized Messages
Handset Receiver Gain
636+[0]
636+[3] Handset Receiver Gain Decrease
636+[#] Handset Receiver Gain Increase
640
All Call Forward
No
Answer - Call Forward
640+[7]
640+[6]
Busy - Call Forward
Busy/No Answer - Call Forward
640+[9]
640+[%] Off-Net - Call Forward
660
SLT Flash Command To CO Line
661+[YY] SLT Station Speed Dial Programming
SLT Clear - Call Forward, DND,
662
Personalized Messages
663
Message Wait Return
664
SLT Conference w/Personal Park
666+[YY] SLT Speed Dial Access
690
Name in Display Programming

70
71
72
73
74
75
76+[1]
77
ai

TOO-1 71
43 PI
438

a2
a3
a4
a5
86
67
88
9
0
#O
#l+[XXX]
#43+[c]
#5

All Call Page (Internal and External)
Internal Page Zone 1
Internal Page Zone 2
Internal Page Zone 3
Internal Page Zone 4
Internal All Call Page
External Page Zones
Meet-Me-Page Answer
CO Line Group 1
(if LCR is enabled)
CO Line Group 2
CO Line Group 3
CO Line Group 4
CO Line Group 5
CO Line Group 6
CO Line Group 7
All CO Line Groups
(CO Line Off-Net Forward)
LCR or CO Line Group 1
(if LCR is disabled)
Attendant
Group Call Pick Up (Key and SLT)
Directed Call Pick Up (SLT)
Call Park Pickup (Key and SLT)
Universal Day/Night Answer

XXX = Intercom Station Numbers
YY = Speed Dial Bin numbers
ZZ = Personalized Messages
BB = button Number
U = ACD” (O-15) or UCD (O-7) Group Number
C = Call Park Location O-7
H = Hunt Group Number O-7
V = Voice Mail* Group Number O-7
P = External Page Zone Number (l-2)
* Features available with optional software.

I
-..

I aDte 0-l: SL I Numbering Plan

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue I- December 1998

6-8

‘.

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE OPERATION
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

ACD Agent HELP Feature
The ACD Agent HELP feature provides a means for an ACD agent to signal his assigned supervisor for
assistance.
While on a call-in-progress, the agent:
1

After hook-flashing, dials the HELP code [574] on the dial pad. The agent must hookflash again to return to his call after the code is dialed. If no supervisor is logged in, the
agent receives one-burst of error tone.

The ACD supervisor station receives a HELP message if a member of one of the ACD
groups he is assigned to initiates a HELP request. The HELP function also sends a
Camp-On tone to the speaker of the supervisors keyset. The HELP message takes
precedence over any other message and can be cleared by the supervisor by pressing
his HELP button.

At the time the supervisor receives a HELP request, he can press the HELP flex button
followed by the override feature button to bridge onto the ACD group members call.
The HELP button places an intercom call to the station requesting HELP. The HELP
message is cleared after the supervisor’s HELP button is pressed. Additionally, the
HELP message is cleared if the agent was on a call and went back on hook before the
supervisor could respond. In this case, the HELP message is converted to a message
wait indication for the station.

Conditions:
+ Up to five messages can be left at any supervisor station.
+ The supervisor can cancel the HELP request signal by pressing the flashing HELP button.
Additionally, a call is placed to the agent requesting HELP If the agent is on a call, the supervisor can
press his barge-in button to monitor the call or give assistance on the call.

ACDNCD

Available/Unavailable Mode

If you are an ACD agent, you may place your station in the Available mode to receive ACD calls or you may
place your station in the Unavailable mode to block ACD calls from ringing your station.
To go Available:
Q

Dial [566] on the dial pad. Confirmation tone is heard through the handset. You may now receive
ACD calls.

To go Unavailable:
Q Dial [566] on the dial pad. Confirmation tone is heard through the handset. You are now blocked
from receiving ACD calls.
Issue 1

- December 7998

JARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE OPERATION
Automatic Line Access

Conditions:
e

Single line telephones receive a stuttered dial tone when unavailable.

&$$ Automatic Line Access
SLTs may have their station programmed to access a particular CO Line, such as a private line or a line from
a Group of CO lines, upon going off-hook. This is useful in Centrex or PBX applications when station users
have dedicated or individual lines. Outside line dial tone is received just by going off-hook, without dialing
access codes.

Call Back
You call a busy station and receive busy:
1 Briefly press and release the hookswitch.
2

Dial [622] on the dial pad.

3 Replace handset.

Only one Cull Back request can be /ef t ot a station; the second request
converts to Message Waiting Request.

Call Brokering
Enables SLT user on a CO call to Hook-Flash and make another CO call. Once this other call is established,
the SLT user can Hook-Flash to move back and forth between parties. Hoof-Flash timer may require
adjustment for proper operation.

Call Forward
To Call Forward calls to another station:
1 Lift handset.
EF. ”: . > :*
g+&$

Dial [640] on the dial pad.

Skip this step for immediate forwarding. Otherwise, dial the appropriate code:

[7] = Call Forward No Answer
[S] = Call Forward Busy
[9] = Call Forward Busy/No Answer
STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

I --.

6-10

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE OPERATION
Call Forward

[x] = Call Forward Off-Net (via speed dial)
4

Dial the 3-digit extension number or speed bin number where calls are to be forwarded.
Confirmation tone is heard.
Replace handset.

To Remove Call Forwarding:
I

Lift handset, stuttered dial tone is heard.

Dial [640] on the dial pad or [662] on the dial pad. Confirmation tone is heard.

3 Replace the handset.

Call Forward - Follow-Me
This feature enables a user who is away from their station, activate/deactivate call forwarding from another
station in the system. This lets the user forward their calls to their current location or into Voice Mail,
ACD/UCD, Hunt Groups, or to any other station in the system. When this call forward is activated, all calls
presented to the forwarded station forward to the destination station immediately.
If you were given the ability to forward your calls:
1

Lift the handset or press ON/OFF button.

Dial the Follow-Me Forward code [642 YYY XXX] on the dial pad, where YYY=station
forwarding from and XXX is station forwarding to.

3 Replace handset.

To remove Follow-Me Forwarding:
i

Lift the handset or press ON/OFF button.

Dial the Follow-Me Forward code [642 YYY YYY] on the dial pad, where Y=station
forwarded from.

To establish Follow-Me Forwarding from an off-site location:
I

Dial into the system on a DISA or TIE trunk. Enter the DISA access code, if applicable.

Dial the Follow-Me Forward code [642 YYY XXX] on the dial pad, where YYY=station
forwarding from and XXX=station forwarding to.

To remove Follow-Me Forwarding from an off-site location:
1

Dial into the system on a DISA or TIE trunk. Enter the DISA access code, if applicable.

Dial the Follow-Me Forward code [642 YYY YYY] on the dial pad, where Y=station
forwarded from.

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE OPERATION

6-11

Calling Station Tone Mode Option
Conditions:
o
+
+
+
+ze

If a Call Forward mode is currently active at the station where forwarding is desired, the new forward
becomes active and cancels the previous forward.
Both internal and external calls to the affected station forward to the designated location.
Call forwarding must be allowed in programming for the affected station.
When remote forward is activated the forwarding is immediate.
A station’s Call Forward status is stored in a battery protected area of memory. A stations Call Forward
status is returned after a power failure or system reset occurs.
When a key telephone is forwarded remotely, the key stations forward button lights, The station user
may cancel the forwarding at their station by pressing ON/OFF, then the FWD button, SLT users can
cancel their forwarding by going off hook and dialing the forward code.
DISA callers entering the code and making a mistake are given error tone for 3 seconds, silence for 2
seconds, then the dial tone is returned.

Calling Station Tone Mode Option
This feature enables a calling station to override a called station’s H or P intercom settings. Use from VM port.
When placing a call to a station and Tone ringing is desired:
i

Dial [6#] on the dial pad.

Dial the 3-digit extension number,
or
Press DSS button of desired station (call tone rings station).

Camp-On
After receiving intercom busy tone:
1 Briefly press and release the hookswitch.
2

Dial 16201 on the dial pad. When the called party answers, consult with them.

While on a CO line you receive a Camp-on warning tone through handset:
++ Choose desired call (hang up present call and take the new one, or ignore the Camp-on signal). (Also
see Personal Park)

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

I s s u e 7 - December 1998

I
6-12

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE OPERATION
Call Park - Personal

Call Park - Personal
While connected to first call:
1

Press the hookswitch momentarily. Intercom dial tone is heard.

Dial [438] on the dial pad (call is placed in personal park).

Dial desired number for second call.

Press the hookswitch momentarily. Intercom dial tone is heard.

Dial [438] on the dial pad (first call is returned and second call is placed in Personal
Park).
The user can alternately connect to the other call by doing a hook-flash
and dialing [438] as many times as necessary.

Call Park (System)
This feature enables an outside call to be placed on hold and consult with, page, or call an internal party
prior to transfer.
While connected to an outside line:
t

Press and release the hookswitch. The caller is put on Exclusive hold.

Dial parking location (430 to 437) on the dial pad. Confirmation tone is heard.

If you hear busy tone, press and release the hookswitch to re-establish contact with the
called station, and press and release the hookswitch again prior to dialing another
parking location.

Retrieving a Parked Call
1 Lift handset.
2

Dial [#] on the dial pad.

Dial parking location (430 to 437) where the call was parked.

Call Transfer
Making an Unscreened Transfer
1 Briefly press and release the hookswitch.
2

Dial desired intercom number.

Hang up to complete the transfer.

I s s u e 1 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE OPERATION

6-13

Clear Call Forward, DND, Personalized Messages

Making a Screened Transfer
1 Briefly press and release the hookswitch.
g&
. . ;a:

Dial desired telephone number. Announce the call.

Hang up to complete the transfer.

Clear Call Forward, DND, Personalized Messages
SLTs can activate and cancel call forward by dialing [640] on the dial pad and DND by dialing [631]. SLTs can
enable and cancel personalized messages by dialing [633xx].
A convenient code [662] is incorporated to cancel either Call forwarding, DND, or Personalized Messages
when the SLT user forgets which code was programmed on the phone
To cancel Call Forward, DND, Personalized Messages:
1 Lift handset. Notification tone is heard.
2

Dial [662] on the dial pad. Confirmation tone is heard.

Replace the handset.

CO Line Queuing
1

Dial outside line access code. Receive busy tone.

Briefly press and release the hookswitch.

Dial [621] on the dial pad. Confirmation tone is heard.

Conference
You may set up a conference of one external and one other internal station.
1
2

f%$
-->’

Lift handset.
Make outside call.

Briefly press and release the hookswitch to put the call on hold.

Dial number of internal station to add.

When that station answers, briefly press and release the hookswitch again and all three
parties are connected.

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE OPERATION

6-14

Conference With Personal Park

Conference With Personal Park
While connected to an outside line:
1 Press the hookswitch momentarily. Intercom dial tone is heard.
2

Dial [438] on the dial pad (first call is placed in personal park).

Dial desired number for second call.

Press the hookswitch momentarily. Intercom dial tone is heard.

Dial [664] on the dial pad. All three parties are conf erenced.

Hang up to terminate conference.

Direct Outside Line Access
1 Lift handset.
2

Dial access code (9, 81-87) on dial pad.

Dial desired telephone number.

Call Pick-up Directed
Upon hearing an unattended telephone ring:
1 Lift handset.
2

Dial [#I] on the dial pad.

Dial station number of ringing telephone. You are connected to intercom, incoming,
recalling or transferred outside line.

Call Pick-Up Group
Upon hearing an unattended telephone ringing:
1

Lift the handset.

Dial [#0] on the dial pad. You are connected to intercom, transferred or recalling
outside line call.
You must be in the same pickup group.

I s s u e I - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

6-15

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE OPERATION
Do Not Disturb (DND)

Do Not Disturb
:-*._- I-.., _ _.:_
‘..d
c:.:>,...j

Activating Do Not Disturb
1 Lift handset.
2
3

Dial [631] on the dial pad.
Replace handset.

To cancel Do Not Disturb
1 Lift handset.
2

Dial [631] on the dial pad or [662] on the dial pad.

s Replace handset.

PBX/Centrex Transfer (Flash Command to CO Line)
To initiate a PBX or Centrex Transfer command from an SLT.
While connected to a PBX or Centrex line:
1

Briefly press and release the hookswitch. Intercom dial tone is heard.

Dial [660] on the dial pad. A Flash command is presented to the PBX or Centrex line.

PBX or Centrex stutter tone is heard. Dial number of desired extension.

Replace handset to complete transfEr.

Handset Receiver Gain
This feature allows an SLT user to increase/decrease the handset volume while on a CO or intercom call.
While on a CO or intercom call:
1 Hookflash and dial the Handset Receiver Gain code [638] on the dial pad.
2

Dial a l-digit entry [0] through [9] (O=lowest, 9=highest) on the dial pad,
Of

Press [#] to increase or [a] to decrease the gain, one level at a time.
3

Hookflash again to return to call.

Repeat above procedures, if necessary.

Replace the handset to end the call.

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE OPERATION

Intercom Calling

Intercom Calling
Ringing is heard if called station is in T answering mode; or two bursts of tone if called station is in the H or
P position. To place an intercom call:
1

Lift the handset.

Dial the 3-digit intercom number.

Converse after the two tone bursts stop.

Replace the handset to end the call.

Answering an Intercom Call
1 Lift handset to converse.
2

Replace handset to end call

Conditions:
+

Off-Hook Preference may affect this feature. See “Off-Hook Preference” on page 6-17

Least Cost Routing (LCR)
To place an outside call when LCR is enabled in the system:
1 Lift the handset.
z

Dial [g] on the dial pad.

Dial the desired telephone number.

Wait for an answer, then converse.

If all lines available are busy, remain off-hook for four seconds to automatically be queued onto LCR for an
available line.
If an LCR Queue Callback is activated:
1

When telephone is signaled, answer the call.

Desired telephone number is automatically redialed.
Only one L CR Queue Call Back request may be initiated by a station.
a second request is made, the first request is cancelled.

When

To cancel an LCR Queue Callback:
1 Dial the LCR Queue Cancel code, [626] on the dial pad.
2

Replace the handset.

I s s u e 7 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

6-17

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE OPERATION
Message Waiting

Message Waiting
Leaving a Message Waiting Indication
1

Lift handset.

Dial the desired intercom station. Receive no answer, or DND tone.

Briefly press and release the hookswitch.

Dial [623] on the dial pad.

5 Replace handset.

Answering a Message Waiting Indication (message waiting lamp is flashing) :
1

Lift handset.

Dial [663] on the dial pad. Station that left the message rings.
Only SLTs equipped with a message waiting /amp have access to this
feature.

Off -Hook Preference
If your phone was programmed for Off-Hook Preference, an outside line dial tone is heard when lifting the
handset.
When this operation is enabled, you may not have access to all features described in this document.
However, consult your Centrex or PBX User’s Guide for additional features you may have.

Personalized

Messages

Each station can select a pre-assigned message to display on the LCD of any Key Telephone calling that
station. To select one of the ten available messages:
1

Dial [633] on the dial pad.

Dial the 2-digit code for the message.

[00] = clears message
[Ol] = ONVACATION
[02] = RETURN AM
[03] = RETURN PM
[04] = RETURN TOMORROW
STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue I- December 1998

. .

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE OPERATION

6-18

Paging

[05]

= RETURN NEXT WEEK

[ob] = ON TRIP
[07] = IN MEETING
[08] = AT HOME
[09]

= ON BREAK

[ 103 = AT LUNCH
This feature is unavailable

to the attendant(s).

Replace the handset. (Activating DND or Call Forwarding cancels selected message.)

Paging
1

Lift handset.

Dial the Z- or 3-digit paging code. Wait for page warning tone.

[70] = All Call - Internal and External
[71] = Internal Zone 1
[72] = Internal Zone 2
[73] = Internal Zone 3
[74] = Internal Zone 4
[75] = Internal All Call
(All Ext. Zones)
[76] + [l] = External Zone 1
J Deliver message.

Stations off-hook or in DND do not hear the internal page announcement.
When making a Zone Page or All Call Page and the zone is busy, the page
initiator receives ringback tone until the zone becomes available. You then
hear a warning tone and can make the page announcement.
4

Use Flash, depress hookswitch or replace handset to terminate page.

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

6-19

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE OPERATION
Meet Me Page

Meet Me Page
To request another party to meet you on a page:
1

Dial the desired Z- or 3-digit paging code.

Request that party meet you on the page.

Do not hang up; wait for the requested party to answer. As soon as the paged party
answers and is connected to you, the page circuit is released.

Answering a Meet Me Page
e4 Go to the nearest telephone and dial [77] on the dial pad. You are connected to the party that paged
you.

Programming Names - LCD Display
Every SLT extension has the capability to program the users name so that people using display telephones see
the name instead of the station number.
1

Lift handset.

Dial [690] on the

Enter the name (up to 7 characters may be entered) by using keys on the dial pad as
shown in Figure 5-2: Kq Pad - Dial By Name, Chapter 5, page 5-33. Also refer to Figure 5-3:
Key Pad - Directory Dialing, Cbapter5, page 5-34 and Table 5-5:Other Key Pad Codes, Chapter5,

dial pad.

page 545.
4

Press the hookswitch to complete the programming process.

Speed Dial - Station
I Lift handset.

.-.
&Gs;
e;?:x

Dial [668] on the dial pad.

Dial desired station speed bin number (00-19).

Speed Dial - Storing Station Numbers
, Lift handset.
2

Dial [661] on the dial pad.

Dial desired station speed bin number (00-19).

Dial telephone number to store.

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

issue I- December 1998

SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE OPERATION
Speed Dial - S y s t e m

Briefly press and release the hookswitch (Confirmation tone is heard.)
Line Group 1 is programmed along with SL T speed numbers and thus, Line
Group I is used when activating station speed dial from an SL T.

Speed Dial - System
I Lift handset.
z

Dial [668] on the dial pad.

Dial desired system speed bin number (20-99).

Universal Day/Night Answer (UDABJNA)
Upon hearing an incoming signal:
1 Lift handset.
z

Dial the UDAlUNA access code [#5] on the dial pad. You are connected to ringing
outside line.

I s s u e 1 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

ff?$

Introduction
The STARPLUS Triad-Srhl system has a wide variety of features and flexible programming, allowing each
telephone user to program their telephone to meet their individual needs.
This section contains the operating instructions for Attendant Digital Key Terminal user(s) and includes an
illustration of the digital key telephone used in the Triad-S system. It also includes a description of the
telephone keys and their functions. This section is intended for use in conjunction with the Station Operation
section to provide step-by-step instructions for operating the Attendant(s) Digital Terminal(s) in the system.
Visual and audible cues that accompany the various feature operation steps are also included.
Digital Attendant features are an addition to digital station features. An Attendant User’s Guide is also
available that provides detailed operating instructions.

Attendant Digital Key Telephone Station Features
Each Triad-S system provide the following keys, indicators and features:
HANDSET AND SPEAKER

are located at the left side of the front panel. A handset is provided to allow
confidential conversation when desired. Lifting the handset from its cradle (going off-hook) disengages the
station’s built-in speaker.
The speaker is located directly below the center portion of the handset. The station may be operated with the
handset on-hook. When this occurs, audio is transmitted to the station user through the station’s speaker.

FLEXIBLE BUTTONS

access idle outside lines, provide DSVBLF for internal stations, access speed dial
numbers and activate features. These buttons can be programmed by the individual station user.
The default flex feature buttons are described below:
+a

.:.
e.

CALL BACK

button lets you initiate a call back request to another busy station, As soon as that station
becomes idle, the station that left the call back request is automatically signaled. A flex button must
be assigned to use this feature.
PICK-UP button lets you pickup a tone ringing intercom call, transferred, incoming, or recalling
outside line call to a specific unattended station by group or directed call pick-up.
DND (DO NOT DISTURB) button. On Attendant stations, this button becomes the system Night
Mode button. A flex button must be assigned to use this feature.

Issue I- December 7998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

7-2

DIGITAL ATTENDANT OPERATIONS
Attendant Digital Key Telephone Station Features

+z+

LINE QUEUE button lets you queue onto an outside line when all lines in a group are busy, Your
station is placed in queue awaiting a line in the same group to become available.

FIXEDFEATUREBUTTONS:
VOLUME BAR lets the user adjust ringer, speakerphone and handset volume.
H-T-P lets the user select the KM Signaling Mode, handsfree tone, or privacy.
FLASH button terminates an outside call and restores dial tone without hanging up the handset. It
also transfers calls behind a PBX or Centrex within those systems,
CAMP-ON button lets you alert a busy party that an outside line is on hold and waiting for them.
MSG (MESSAGE WAIT) button lets you initiate a message waiting indication at stations that are
busy, unattended, or in Do Not Disturb. Message Waiting Callback request left at your station is
indicated by a flashing MSG WAIT LED.
SPEED button gives you access to speed dialing, save number redial and last number redial. This
button also accesses flex button programming.
TRANS (TRANSFER) button transfers an outside call from one station to another.
CONF (CONFERENCE) button establishes and builds conference calls.
FORWARD (FWD) button lets you forward your calls to another station.
ON/OFF button lets you make a telephone call without lifting the handset. It turns the telephone on
and off when using the speakerphone.
MUTE button lets you switch the built-in microphone on or off when using the speakerphone, or
the handset microphone when using the handset.
HOLD button lets you place an outside caller on hold.

OUTSIDE CALLS are announced by a tone signal repeated every 3.2 seconds. The corresponding outside
line indicator flashes slowly.

INTERCOM CALLS can be tone ringing or voice announce. If it is voice announced, the receiving station
receives two bursts of tone prior to the announcement. If it is a tone ringing call, the receiving station hears
a tone ring every 2.4 seconds.

I s s u e I - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

DIGITAL ATTENDANT OPERATIONS
Attendant Digital Key Telephone Station Features

Figure 7-l: Attendant Digital Display Terminal

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

DIGITAL ATTENDANT OPERATIONS
Attendant Digital Key Telephone Station Features

1 0 0 - l /l
43qc1
438
44+[v]
45+[H]
499
5#
55+[u]
55+[u]
56+[U]
566
587+5 [VU]
57O+(YY]
571
572+5 [UU]
573
574
575
576
577
578

Triad-S Ext. Numbers
Call Park Location O-7 (System)
Personal Park
Voice Mail* Group Pilot Numbers O-7
Hunt Group Pilot Numbers O-7
Modem via DISA Access or Transfer
Forward Override
ACD” Group Pilot Numbers O-9
UCD Group Pilot Numbers O-7
ACD” Group Pilot Numbers IO-15
ACD” or UCD Available/Unavailable
ACD’ or UCD Calls In Queue Display
ACD” Call Qualifier
ACD’ Agent Logout
ACD” Agent Login
ACD’ Group Member Status
ACD” Agent Help
ACD’ Supervisor Logout
ACD’ Supervisor Login
ACD* Supervisor Gueue Status Dlsplay
ACD’ Overflow Sta AvaibUnavail
6# W=l Tone Mode Ring Optlon
8%
Dial By Name
601
Attendant Override
602
Disable Outgoing CO Line Access
603
CO Line Off -Net Forward
605
SIW Version Display
606
Clears T-l alarms
607
Attendant Unavailable (Alternate Position)
823
Message Walt
625
Executive
Override/Monitor
Barge-In
626
LCR Queue Cancel
628
OHVO Enable
631
DaylNightISpeclal (Attendant only)
632+[0.1,2] Background Music
633+[zz]
Personalized
Messages
633+[00]
Clear Personalized Messages
634
Headset Mode
635
ICLID Unanswered Calls Display
636+[XXX] Station Relocate
639
Incoming CO Call Transfer
FWD
All Call Forward
[FWD]+[7]
No Answer - Call Forward
[FWD]+[B]
Busy - Call Forward
[FWD]+[Q]
Busy/No Answer - Call Forward
;FWD]+[%] Off -Net - Call Forward
348+[#.%] Keyset M o d e

080
690
BQl+[BB]
692

Speed Dial Directory
Name in Display Programming
Off -Hook Preference Programming
Time and Date Programming
(first programmed Attendant)
893
Directory List Program Code
694+[XX]
Custom Message(s) Program Code
695+[XX]
Distinctive Ringing
70
All Call Page (Internal and External)
71
Internal Page Zone 1
72
Internal Page Zone 2
73
Internal Page Zone 3
74
Internal Page Zone 4
75
Internal All Call Page
76+[1]
External Page
77
Meet-Me-Page Answer
81
CO Line Group 1 (if LCR is enabled)
82
CO Line Group 2
83
CO Line Group 3
84
CO Line Group 4
85
CO Line Group 5
86
CO Llne Group 6
87
CO Line Group 7
88+[YY]
All CO Line Groups
(CO Line Off-Net Fwd)
9
LCR or CO Line Group 1 (if LCR disabled)
0
Attendant
#O
Group Call Pick Up (Key and SLT)
#43+[c]
Call Park Pickup (Key and SLT)
#5
Universal Day/Night Answer
[SPEED]+[W] Speed Dial Access
(09-19 Station) (20-99 System)
[SPEED]+[f] Save Number Redial
[SPEED]+(#] Last Number Redlal

XXX = Intercom Station Numbers
YY = Speed Dial Bin numbers
ZZ = Personalized Messages
BB = button Number
U = ACD” (O-15) or UCD (O-7) Group Number
C = Call Park Location O-7
H = Hunt Group Number O-7
V = Voice Mall* Group Number O-7
P = External Page Zone Number (l-2)
l

Features available with optional software.

Table 7-l: Digital Attendant Numbering Plan
Issue 1

- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

DIGITAL ATTENDANT OPERATIONS
Attendant Unavailable (Alternate Position)

Attendant Unavailable (Alternate Position)
gg+:.
- .-..;_

This feature lets attendant stations have a button that places their station in an unavailable mode. When the
station is in the unavailable mode, the next attendant station receives incoming and dial 0 calls. All other
available attendants receive recalls. This feature is based on the three programmed attendant stations.
1

The first programmed Attendant presses the pre-programmed* Unavailable flexible
button,

or
Dials the Attendant Unavailable code [607] on the dial pad. The LED on the flexible
button lights solid, if programmed. Recalls and dial 0 calls that were ringing at the first
Attendant station now ring at the second. If the second Attendant places their phone in
unavailable, the third Attendant takes recall and dial 0 calls.
2

When the first Attendant presses the pre-programmed* Unavailable flexible button
again,

or
Dials the Attendant Unavailable code [607] on the dial pad again. The LED on the flexible
button, if programmed, extinguishes. The first Attendant resumes normal operation and
the second Attendant does not receive recalls or dial 0 calls.

Conditions:
+ This feature lets the programmed attendant stations receive attendant recalls and dial 0 calls only. No
other attendant type functions are given to this station when the station is in the attendant mode.
o If Attendant A (first programmed) is available, incoming, recalls, and dial 0 calls are directed to this
station regardless of other attendant stations status.
o The special ring mode can be set so the alternate attendant does not receive an incoming CO ring
until the main attendant places their phone in special and unavailable modes.
+ If all attendants in the system are unavailable, no attendants are available for internal/external
callers.
o Recalls are directed to all programmed available attendants.
o If only one attendant is programmed in the system, and that attendant is unavailable, users dialing
zero hear an error tone.

If your system is programmed for System Hold Preference, press HOLD button once for
System Hold and twice for Exclusive Hold.

If your system is programmed for Exclusive Hold Preference, press HOLD button once
for Exclusive Hold and twice for System Hold.

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

issue 1

- December 1998

DIGITAL ATTENDANT OPERATIONS

7-6

Call Park

Call Park
To place an outside call in park and consult with, page, or call an internal party:
While connected to an outside line:

,-.c_..._
,._..__
.
., _
.._

Press TRANS button. The caller is put on hold.

Dial parkin,g location (430 to 437). Confirmation tone is heard.

If you hear busy tone, press TRANS twice and dial another parking location.

Retrieving a Parked Call:
1

Lift handset or press ON/OFF button.

Press the [#I button.

Dial parking location (430 to 437) where the call was parked.

CO Lines Off -Net Forward - Incoming (via Speed Dial)
Lets the first attendant station forward incoming CO calls to an off-net location.
In a speed dial bin, store the number of the off-net location where calls are to forward. Follow instructions
provided for storing station or system speed dial numbers.
I

Dial [603] on the dial pad,
or
Press pre-programmed* CO Off -Net Forward button.

Dial the CO group access code of the group to be forwarded,
or
Press the CO Line button for an individual CO Line for Off-Net forward.

[81] = CO Group 1
[82] = CO Group 2
[83] = CO Group 3
[84] = CO Group 4
[SS] = CO Group 5
[Sb] = CO Group 6
[87] = CO Group 7
[88] = All CO Line
3

Dial the speed bin number that contains the number where calls are to forward.
Confirmation tone is heard.

issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

I .-’ - .

DIGITAL ATTENDANT OPERATIONS
Day/Night/Special Mode

Canceling Off-Net Forwarding
I

Dial [603] on the dial pad,
or
Press pre-programmed* CO Off -Net Forward button,

Dial the CO group access code,
or
Press the CO Line button.

Dial [#] on the dial pad. Confirmation tone is heard.

Conditions:
+

When CO lines are off-net forwarded, these lines will display unique flash rates at the attendant
station.
*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table 5-3:Fle.x Button Programming
Codes, Chapter 5, page 5-44.

Day/Night/Special Mode
Any designated attendant can place the system into Night Service by:
1

Pressing the pre-programmed Night Service button (DND by default) once, activates the
night mode (LED solid). Pressing the DND button again, activates the special mode (LED
flashes @ 240 ipm).

The DND button (by default) acts as a toggle in this manner, starting in the day mode,
night mode, and special mode.

Directory Dialing
Directory dialing allows station users to obtain a directory of station users and have the system dial the
extension that is currently displayed. The Triad-S system provides locations for up to 200 names.
Directory dialing also lets users program a name with a speed dial bin for later locating a speed dial number,
When prompted, the system displays the name associated with a speed dial number on the LCD display. The
user may then have the system dial the number.
$‘?$4

Directory dialing enables users to associate a name with an entry in the local number/name translation table.
When prompted, the system displays the name associated with the table on the LCD display. The user may
then have the system dial the number.

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e I - December 1998

DIGITAL ATTENDANT OPERATIONS

7-8

Directory Dialing

The Directory Dialing list may be programmed and maintained at the first assigned attendant station.
However, this admin routine lets the system programmer maintain the list locally (at Attendant) or
remotely via modem access.
Directory dialing may also be used to transfer a call from one station to another.
To view the directory list:
I

Dial the Directory List dial code [680] on the dial pad,
or
Press the pre-programmed* flex button programmed as a directory dialing button.

Press a button on the key pad, once, twice or three times, that represents the letter of
the alphabet to begin viewing the list of names (i.e., when 2 is first pressed, it produces
names beginning with A. When 2 is pressed a second time, it produces names beginning
with 6. Pressing 2 a third time produces the names beginning with C). The alphabet is
represented on the key pad as shown in Figwe52:Key
Ptid - DialBy Name, Cbapter5, page
5-33. Also refer to Figures-3:Key Pad - Directory Dialing Cbapter5j page 5-34

Names beginning with the letter chosen display on the LCD display.
If there are no names in the Directory List beginning with the desired letter,
a name with the next higher letter displays on the LCD display.

Dial [4+] to scroll up (next entry) through the list,
or
Dial [#] to scroll down (previous entry) through the list,
or
Press another key to view the list for a different letter of the alphabet.

When the desired name displays on the LCD, press the SPEED button to automatically
dial the destination station or outside phone number (via speed dial).

Conditions:
+ If the desired party is an intercom station, that station is signaled according to their intercom
selector switch (SLT stations tone ring).
+z+ If the desired party is associated to a speed dial bin, the system selects a CO line and dials the
number programmed into the speed dial bin. Call progress tones are then heard.
To Transfer a Call using Directory Dialing:
While on a call:
1 Press the TRANS button.

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

. .-

:
7-Q

DIGITAL ATTENDANT OPERATIONS
Directory Dialing

Dial the Directory Dial Code [680] on the dial pad,

or
Press a pre-programmed* flex button programmed for directory dialing,
3

Press the SPEED button to automatically dial the destination station.

Hang up to complete the transfer.

Culls may be transferred to inter& stations on/y. An otternpt to trunsfer
u cull of f-net (via u Speed dial bin) results in the cull recalling upon going
on-hook.

Programming
Directory dialing allows station users to obtain a station users directory and have the system dial the
extension currently displayed. The Triad-S system provides locations for up to 200 names.
Directory dialing also lets users program a name with a speed dial bin for later locating a speed dial number.
When prompted, the system displays the name associated with a speed dial number on the LCD. The user
may then have the system dial the number.
Directory dialing enables users to associate a name with an entry in the local number/name translation table.
When prompted, the system displays the name associated with the table on the LCD. The user may then have
the system dial the number.
The Directory Dialing list may be programmed and maintained at the first assigned attendant station.
Directory dialing may also be used to transfer a call from one station to another.
Method One:
To enter, edit or erase names that appear in the Directory List for stations or speed dial numbers:
8 Dial the Directory List program code [693] on the dial pad. The HOLD button is lit. The first entry
(000) in the Directory List displays on the phone as follows:
DIR LST AAA BIN/KM: XXX
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn

AAA = Directory List entry number (000-199)
XXX = Station Number, System Speed Dial bin Number, or Local Number/Name Translation Table
number
nnn = Programmed Name (blank if none)

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

DIGITAL ATTENDANT OPERATIONS
Directory Dialing

To Select a different entry in the Directory List:
1

Enter the 3-digit (000-199) entry number on the dial pad,
Of

Dial [%] to scroll up (next entry) through the list,
Of

Dial [#] to scroll down (previous entry) through the list.
2

Press the TRANS button to select the entry.

To Enter or Change the current name shown on the display:
1

Press the MUTE button.
Enter the name (up to 24-characters) by using keys on the dial pad as shown inFi,we52:Kq Pud - Dial By Name, Chpter 5, puge 5-33 and using the key pad codes listed in Table

5-5:Other Key Pad Codes, Chapter 5, page 5-65.
3

Press the SPEED button when finished. Confirmation tone is heard and the display
updates.

Press HOLD, use [%] or [#] to scroll to next entry.

To enter the intercom number to associate with the name:
1 Press the TRANS button.
2

Enter the 3-digit station intercom number.

Press the SPEED button to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard and the display
updates.

Press HOLD, use [X] or [#] to scroll to next entry.

To clear an entry:
I

Select the desired entry using the Method One procedure.

Press the FLASH button to erase the entry.

Press the SPEED button. Confirmation tone is heard and the entry is erased.

Method Two:
This method may be used to enter names associated with the Local Number/Name Translation Table only.
et* Dial the Directory List program code [693] on the dial pad. The HOLD button is lit. The first entry
(000) in the Directory List displays on the phone as follows:
DIR LST AAA BIN/ICM: XXX
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn

AAA = Directory List entry number (000-199)

I s s u e 7 - December 1998

S JARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

DIGITAL ATTENDANT OPERATIONS
Directory Dialing

a=..
,T
I...‘Z.-. \,fy
;-y,6.

XXX = Station Number, System Speed Dial bin Number, or Local Number/Name Translation Table
number
nnn = Programmed Name (blank if none)
To Select a different entry in the Directory List:
1

Enter the 3-digit (000-199) entry number on the dial pad,
or
Dial [+K] to scroll up (next entry) through the list,
or
Dial [#] to scroll down (previous entry) through the list.

Press the TRANS button to select the entry.

To enter a name along with a local number/name translation table number:
1 Press the TRANS button.
2

Dial the 3-digit local number/name translation table number (600-799) that represents
the telephone number.

Press the SPEED button. Confirmation tone is heard and the entry is stored.

Press HOLD, use [+!+I or [#] to scroll to next entry

To Enter or Change the current name shown on the display:
1

Press the MUTE button.

Then enter the name (up to 24-characters may be entered) by using keys on the dial pad
as shown in Figure52:Key Pad - Dial By Name, Chapter5, page533 and using the key pad
codes listed in Table 5-5:Other Key Pad Codes, Chapter5, page565. The display updates as
the name is entered.

Press the SPEED button when finished. Confirmation tone is heard.

Press HOLD, use [%] or [#] to scroll to next entry.
The Local Number/Name Translation Table can be used to enter
additiond
speed dial numbers used for directory dial or dial by name. The name
entered into the local number/name translation table is irrelevant when
used with directory dialing and dial by name. Note that the numbers entered
into this table are limited to 14 digits and are covered by to// restriction
rules.

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

Issue I- December 1998

7-12

DIGITAL ATTENDANT OPERATIONS
Directory Dialing

Method Three:
This method may be used to enter names associated to a system speed dial bin only.
o Dial the Directory List program code [693] on the dial pad. The HOLD button is lit. The first entry
(entry 000) in the Directory List then displays on the phone as follows:
DIR LST AAA BIN/ICM: XXX
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn

AAA = Directory List entry number (000-199)
XXX = Station Number, System Speed Dial bin Number, or Local Number/Name Translation Table
number
nnn = Programmed Name (blank if none)
To Select a different entry in the Directory List:
1 Enter the 3-digit (000-199) entry number on the dial pad,
or
Dial [+I+] to scroll up (next entry) through the list,

Dial [#] to scroll down (previous entry) through the list.
2

Press the TRANS button to select the entry.

To enter a name with a system speed dial bin:
1 Select the desired entry using Method Three procedure.
2

Dial the system speed dial bin location (20-99).

Press the SPEED button. Confirmation tone is heard and the entry is saved.

Press HOLD, use [X] or [#] to scroll to next entry.

To enter or change the current name shown in the display at this point:
1 Press the MUTE button.
2

Enter the name (up to 24 characters may be entered) by using keys on the dial pad as
shown in Figure5-2:Key Pad- DialBy Name, Chapter5,page5-J.jd
and using the key pad
codes listed in Table5-5:Other Key PadCodes, Chapter5,page5-65.

Press the SPEED button when finished. Confirmation tone is heard and the display
updates.

Press HOLD, use [+I+] or [#] to scroll to next entry.

I s s u e 1 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

DIGITAL ATTENDANT OPERATIONS
ICLID Unanswered Call Management Table

ICLID Unanswered Call Management Table
An Unanswered Call Management Table with 100 entry capacity for the Triad-S system is maintained. The
calling number/name information pertaining to any unanswered call is placed in this table at the time the
system determines the call was abandoned.
This table may be accessed from any station display phone so that the unanswered calls may be reviewed and
handled by the end user. Upon entry into the review process, the functions available to a phone are:
Function

3. Step to next table entry.

HOLD

4. Delete this table entry.

FLASH

5. Exit table review function.

ON/OFF

6. Step to previous table
entry.

TRANSFER

17. Call Back.

1 SPEED

Table 7-2: ICLID Unanswered Call Management

Messages - Custom
This feature lets the system administrator enter up to ten custom messages for use by system station users.
These messages may be specified and customized by the customer on a system-wide basis.
The system administrator (Station 100) programs the ten custom messages at the first attendant station as
follows:
1

Dial the Custom Message program code [694] on the dial pad.

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

‘-

.I.

DIGITAL ATTENDANT OPERATIONS

Messages - Custom

The following message is shown on the display phone:

ENTER MSG NO
MMM DD YY
2

HH:MM am

Enter the Z-digit message bin number [21-301.
Then the following display is shown after the bin # has been selected.

mmmmmmmmmm...
ENTER MSG:
Enter the custom message using the dial pad keys to enter the letters as shown inFigure
5-2:Key Pad - Dial l?y Name, Chapter 5, page 5-33. For key pad codes, refer to Table 55:Otber Key Pad Codes, Chapteci, page 5-65.
Up to 24 alphanumeric characters may be entered for the custom message (this represents 48 digits
entered).The actual characters display as the digits are being entered while programming the messages.
The attendant must go idle after programming a message before another message may be programmed.
3

The user then presses the HOLD button to enter the message and confirmation tone is heard.

Conditions:
The telephone receiving the message or programming must be a display telephone.
Key telephones and SLTs can leave a message. SLTs are notified that they left a message with a
warning tone when going off-hook.
Incoming and outgoing calls are not inhibited with a message displayed.
When a message is displayed by a key telephone, the DND button LED flashes at the 15 ipm rate.
When DND is invoked on the telephone, the message is canceled.
Message Access (with a desired message) may be assigned to a flex button.
Message status is stored in a battery protected memory area for retention across a power failure or
system reset (soft or hard).
The Message Access function is assigned to a station flex button in database administration.
A station user may store any of the available messages under a flex button assigned as a Message
Access button.
The ten Custom Messages display in a similar fashion as Canned messages. The idle station display
shows the message that was activated at the station and a calling station receives the STA XXX or
name-in-display followed by the programmed custom messages.
This feature is not available for use at attendant stations.

ksue I- December IQ98

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

I ~.

DIGITAL ATTENDANT OPERATIONS

7-15

Outgoing Access - Attendant Disable

Outgoing Access - Attendant Disable
The attendant station can disable CO lines, preventing outgoing CO calls,
1

Lift handset or press ON/OFF button.

Dial 16021 on the dial pad. Confirmation tone is heard.

Press the line button(s) of the CO Line(s) to disable. Confirmation tone is heard and the
CO Line button(s) LED is flashing.

To reactivate the CO Line(s), repeat the steps to disable it.

Override
If Attendant Override is allowed, Attendant(s) stations may override or call stations that are busy or in Do Not
Disturb.
If the Attendant calls a station that is busy on a CO call and wishes to alert them of a waiting call:
1

Press the pre-programmed* ATTN OVERRIDE button [601]. Three short tone bursts are
presented to the called party.

After five (5) seconds, the station’s CO line is automatically placed on hold and the
Attendant is cut-through.

If the Attendant calls a station that is in Do Not Disturb mode and wishes to alert them of a call:
o Press the pre-programmed* ATTN OVERRIDE button. The station is signaled with a Camp-On tone.
*A Flex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Table 5-3:Flex Button Programming
Codes, Clya# ter 5, page 5-44..

Outside Call 1 Lift handset.
2

Press slow flashing outside line button. (If your telephone is programmed with Preferred
Line Answer, you may answer an outside line by lifting the handset.)

Outside Call - Place
1 Press outside line button. ON/OFF button LED lights and dial tone is heard.
2 Dial desired party.
3

When called party answers, lift handset to converse or use speakerphone

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

Issue I- December 1998

DIGITAL ATTENDANT OPERATIONS

7-16

Recall

Recall
When an outside line remains on hold for an extended time period, a real1 ring is heard.
1

Press outside line button flashing at a very fast rate.

Lift handset to converse.

‘i :F---

Conditions:
$.

Recall does not apply to intercom calls placed on hold.

Release Button
Lets the station user disconnect calls while off-hook (on handset, not speakerphone), speeding up call
handling time.
While off-hook (on handset, not speakerphone) on an intercom call, transfer sequence, page
announcement or CO call:
9

Press the pre-programmed* RELEASE button to terminate intercom call, transfer sequence, page
announcement or CO call.

*AFlex Button must be programmed for this feature to operate. Refer to Tuble5-3:FZexButton Programming
Codes, Chapter 5, page 5-44.

Ring Mode
Conditions:
+ The three attendant stations can invoke or remove this mode. When one attendant station activates
this mode, other attendant stations have their DND button lit accordingly.
*$ Each CO line has a special mode ring assignment associated with it. Up to 10 stations per CO line
may ring in the special mode.
$3 This feature overrides the day/night scheduler feature.

Setting System Time and Date
Must be set by the first programmed attendant.
1 Dial [692] on the dial pad. Confirmation tone is heard.
2

Enter date and time as follows:

YYMMDDHHMM
issue 1

- December 1998

“., -:_
;:--..;..::

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

DIGITAL ATTENDANT OPERATIONS
Software

(?&

Version Display

IY = year 00-99
MM = menthol-12
DD = day 01-31
HH = hour 00-23
MM = minute 00-59
When the correct number of digits are entered, confirmation tone is heard. Pressing the ON/OFF button to
OFF updates the display.

Software Version Display
The current system software can be viewed by the first programmed Attendant. This display shows the
version number and the level of software in english.
At the first Attendant station:
+z+ Dial the S/W Display code [605] on the dial pad. The top line of the LCD continues to show the same
data as it currently displays, while the bottom line of the LCD shows the following in place of the
time/date information:
STARPLUS BASIC
STARPLUS VOICE MALL
STARPLUS ACD
Conditions:
*:a The station must be an LCD type to view the information,

Speed Dial - System Storing
System Speed numbers must be entered by the first programmed attendant. If no attendant is specified,
enter at Station 100.
1
2
3

Press SPEED once, then press a desired outside line key or select an outside line
automatically by pressing the SPEED button a second time.
Dial the System Speed bin location (20-99).
Dial telephone number.
Press the SPEED button.

5 Hang up.

STARPLUS Triad-S

Product Description Manual

Lss~~e I- December 1998

DIGITAL ATTENDANT OPERATIONS

7-18

Speed Dial - System Storing

Pressing the TRANS button during number entry initiates a Pulse-To-Tone switchover. Pressing the HOLD button during number entry inserts a Pause. Pressing the
FLASH key inserts a Flash into the speed number.

b. Pressing the TRANS button as the first entry in the speed bin inserts a no-display
character causing the numbers stored in the bin not to display on the Digital Terminals
when the bin is accessed.

Speed Bin numbers 60-99 are not monitored by Toll Restriction.

issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

The display is arranged into an upper and lower field. The upper field displays the current activity of the
telephone. The lower field is divided into two sections. The left section of the lower field displays the date,
speed bin number, connected intercom station or outside line number. The right section of the lower field
displays the current time or elapsed time on an outside call. The following table shows what displays on the
LCD displays based on the function performed.
FUNCTION

CALLING STATION
DISPLAY

Manually dialing
outgoing calls

Recalling line
from Hold

]]

CALLED STATION DISPLAY

ppyq
Recalling line
from another station

* Features available with optional software

Table 8-l: Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD)

issue 7 - November 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

8-2

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAYS
INTRODUCTION

FUNCTION

CALLING STATION
DISPLAY

Connected to an
incoming CO line

CALLED STATION DISPLAY

-1

,,<< - 1:.
::‘A ,:
,...

~lil
Intercom Call
)I/1

Conference

4111

11
Internal Page
~~1

External Zone Page

pi-z=zq

and
External All Call Page

* Features available with optional software

Table 8-l: Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD)

issue 1

- November 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product

Description Manual

:
8-3

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAYS
INTRODUCTION

FUNCTION

CALLING STATION
DISPLAY

CALLED STATION DISPLAY

All Call Page

Meet Me Page

CALL FROM XXX
MMM DD YY
HH:MM am

CALL TO XXX
MMM DD YY

HH:MM am

Station Call Forward
(Originating Station)
(Name in Display)

Station No-Answer
Call Forward
(Originating Station)

BSY/NA FWD TO STA XXX
Station Busy/NoAnswer Call Forward
(Originating Station)

MMM DD YY

HH:MM am

BSY/NA FWD TO ..(name)..
MMM DD YY

HH:MM am

* Features available with optional software
Table 8-1: Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD)

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

I s s u e I - November 1998

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAYS

8-4

INTRODUCTION

CALLING STATION
DISPLAY

FUNCTION

Station Busy
Call Forward
(Originating Station)

CALLED STATION DISPLAY

-cc
1

44
Forwarded Call
(Name in Display)

Forwarded Intercom
Call
Station Forward to
Voice Mail Group
(Station Idle)
Station Forward to
ACD* or UCD Group
(Station Idle)

pg-G&-q/

y/
51

Preset Forward

Station call to
Station Forwarded to a
Voice Mail Group *
* Features available with optional software
Table 8-l: Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD)

Issue I- November 7998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

LIQUID CRY S-I-AL DISPLAYS

8-5

INTRODUCTION

FUNCTION

CALLING STATION
DISPLAY

CALLED STATION DISPLAY

(1
Call Pick Up
pi5zzTq\

Exclusive Hold

~~~
Do Not Disturb
MMM DD YY

HH:MM am

Outside Line Transfer

Message Waiting
* Features available with optional software

Table 8-l: Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD)

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue I- November 1998

.._-.

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAYS

8-6

INTRODUCTION

FUNCTION

CALLING STATION
DISPLAY

CALLED STATION DISPLAY

Reply to a
Message Waiting

Programmed Flash
Command (F)

Programmed Pause
Command (P)
Programmed
Pulse-To-Tone
Switchover (S)

CO Line Queuing

Hunt Groups

* Features available with optional software
Table 8-1: Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD)

I s s u e 1 - November 7998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAYS

8-7

INTRODUCTION

FUNCTION

CALLING STATION
DISPLAY

CALLED STATION DISPLAY

-j7iisEq~
ACD* or UCD Groups
-1

Ringing CO Lines

FFitl;ayeSecurity

Station Forwarding
Off-Net

Call to Station
Forwarded Off -Net
(before and after a call
is answered)

~~
LINE XXX

HH:MM:SS

Calls in Queue
(Supervisor)

Calls in Queue
(Using Dial Code)
ACD* or UCD

Unavailable Mode
~~;p~;~)

* Features available with optional software
Table 8-l: Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD)
STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e I- November 1998

LIQUID

8-8

CRYSTAL

DISPLAYS

INTRODUCTION

FUNCTION
Station call to
Voice Mail Group
Pilot Number

CALLING STATION
DISPLAY

CALLED STATION DISPLAY

CALL TO VOICE MAIL
MMM DD YY
HH:MM am

Dial By Name

Off-Hook Voice Over
(OHVO)

ANNOUNCE TO STA XXX
MMM DD YY
HH:MM am

Executive Override

MONITORING STA XXX
MMM DD YY
HH:MM am

Voice Mail* Transfer
with ID Digits

ANNOUNCE FROM STA XXX
MMM DD YY
HH:MM am

CALL TO VOICE MAIL
MMM DD YY
VIA XXX

Repeat Redial
RPT REDIAL CALLBACK:
MMM DD YY
HH:MM pm

Call Coverage Station
After call is answered
at coverage station.

CALL TO STA XX
MMM DD YY
HH:MM am
CALL TO STATION XXX
FROM STA YYY HH:MM am

* Features available with optional software
Table 8-l: Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD)

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAYS

8-9

INTRODUCTION

FUNCTION

CALLING STATION
DISPLAY

CALLED STATION DISPLAY

Name/Number Display
at Idle

Scrollable Canned
Messages

ACD* Transfer Display

ACD* Overflow Station
receives an Overflow
Call

Answering Machine
Emulation: When a call
rinogiethe station in ring
Answering Machine
Emulation: When station
monitors caller in VM.
* Features available with optional software
Table 8-l: Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD)

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue I- November 7998

I -.- .

. . . . .-...

8-10

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAYS
INTRODUCTION

I s s u e I - November 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

c$$

General Description

TheSTARPLUs Triad4Pf is a digital telephone system designed to meet the needs of small size business
offices, The system incorporates state-of-the-art digital technology for command and voice switching utilizing
a Pulse Code Modulation/Time Division Multiplexing switching matrix. The system achieves flexibility by
employing a universal card slot architecture with Basic and Expansion cabinets. These cabinets house plugin circuit boards that support different types of telephone instruments.
The system begins at a 3-line, g-station capacity and can expand to a maximum configuration of a 12-line,
32-station capacity. Expansion is accomplished in 3-line, S-station increments. The system supports
proprietary digital terminals or standard touch tone 2500-type terminals.

Basic Key Service Unit (BKSU)
The Triad-S Basic Key Service Unit (BKSU) is a wall mountable cabinet that houses the following:
+ Main CPU board
+ System ROM
0 System RAM
+z+ Power supply
+ Circuitry to support two 3x8 boards and the expansion cabinet with two 3x8 boards
Thus, the maximum capacity of the BKSU is 6 CO lines and 16 stations (8 digital and 8 digital or SLT). Every
BKSU supports three loop start CO lines and eight standard digital station interfaces from the factory.
The BKSU also has these standard features:

.,..,..-6;._,
-_Y-y’;
1..
c- ::’.-

e
Q
+
+
+:b
0

1 Program Module Unit (PMU) that provides system software (sold separately)
1 DTMF Receiver (for DIWSLT applications)
2 Programmable relays with dry contacts rated at 24V DC, 1 amp
1 External Page Port
Battery Backup for System Database
i Music Input (MOHBCM)

The BKSU main board can accept the following modules:
I s s u e I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

Q-2

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Expansion Key Service Unit (EKSU)

.:.

1 Miscellaneous Service Unit (MIS@ that provides two RS232C/9 pin ports and second music
source circuitry
9 1 Modem Unit (MODU, 9600 baud modem) for remote administration
+ 1 4 Circuit DTMF Receiver (DTMF-A) provides 4 DTMF receivers
6 1 3x8 CKIB or 3x8 CSIB (one CKIB installed in every BKSU standard)
A number 12 AWG copper wire should be used to ground between the ground source and the BKSU (25 feet
maximum). Attach this wire to the ground lug on the lower right side of the BKSU.

Expansion Key Service Unit (EKSU)
The Triad-S Expansion Key Service (EKSU) is a wall-mountable cabinet that houses the circuitry to support
two 3x8 boards. The EKSU mounts directly above the BKSU. The EKSU has cables that connect power and
digital communications form the EKSU to the BKSU.
The EKSU can provide six additional CO lines and sixteen station growth that takes the system to it’s
maximum configuration of twelve CO lines and 32 stations.
The EKSU contains one expansion interface board (EIB) which includes power supply and connector
interface buses. A number 12 AWG copper wire should be used to ground between the ground source and
the BKSU (25 feet maximum). Attach this wire to the ground lug on the right side of the EKSU.

Peripheral Boards
Three 8 CO Line and Eight Digital Station Board (CKIB)
This board provides three loop start CO line interfaces and eight Digital Key Telephone interfaces. This
board can be installed in the BKSU or EKSU. If all CKIB boards are installed in the BKSU and EKSU, the
system capacity is 12 CO lines and 32 digital stations.
The CO line interfaces are brought out on the right side of the BKSU/EKSU utilizing RJll connectors. The
digital station interfaces are brought out utilizing a 50-pin amphenol connector on the left side of the
BKSU/EKSU.
The station interface for stations loo-107 also provides the wiring interface for the additional features that
require input/output connections. These features are music sources, relay connections, and external page
connections.

I s s u e 1 - December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Optional Boards

Three 8 CO Line and 8 Single Line Station Board (CSIB)
This board provides three loop start CO line interfaces and eight Single Line Telephone interfaces. These
interfaces support 2500 touch tone telephone instruments and/or voice mail interfaces. This board can be
installed in the BKSU or EKSU. A maximum of three CSIBs may be installed between the BKSU/EKSU to
provide a maximum of 24 single line interfaces.
The CO line interfaces are brought out on the right side of the BKSU/EKSU utilizing RJll connectors. The
digital station interfaces are brought out utilizing a 50-pin amphenol connector on the left side of the
BKSU/EKSU.
The CSIB can accept the optional Message Wait Unit (MSGU) to provide message wait lamp capability to the
eight instruments attached.

Optional Boards
Miscellaneous Service Unit (MISU)
This board provides two RS232C interfaces for system programming, caller ID, and SMDR applications. The
board also contains a second music source to increase the music channels in the system from one to two.
The board installs in the BKSU.

Modem Unit (MODU)
This board provides a 9600 baud modem for remote system programming. The modem is accessed by
dialing station 499.

Message Wait Unit (MSGU)
This board provides message wait lamp capability to the eight attached SLT instruments. This board is
installed on the CSIB. Each CSIB may have one MSGU installed.

DTMF Receiver Unit (DTMF-A)
This board provides four DTMF receivers for CSIB use and should be installed any time a CSIB board is
installed in the system. The BKSU supports one DTMF-A unit.

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue I- December 1998

Q-4

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Optional Boards

Basic

KSU

EKSU
g,:.;?; ‘,
I..::
. . . . . ;:
--.

I
CKIB

CSIB

DTMF4-A

MISB

MODU

CKIB

CSIB
I

MSGU

Figure 9-1: Starplus

BKSU Caoacity
CO/PBWCentrex
Lines:
Station:
Digital Terminal:
Single Line Telephone:
BKSU + EKSU Capacity
COlPBWCentrex
Lines:
Station:
Digital Terminal:
Single line Telephone:

Triad-S System

6 lines maximum (3 per CKIBESIB board)
16 maximum (8 per CKIB board)
8 maximum (8 per CSIB board)
12 lines maximum
32 maximum (8 per CKIB board)
24 maximum (8 per CSIB board) (
(System max: 12 lines, 8 digital telephones, 24 SLT)

DTMF Receiver

Basic: 1 each
With DTMF4-A: 5 (Provides 4 additional services)

DTMF Sender

Unlimited

l/O Ports

2 maximum with MISU

Conference
Circuit:
Parties:

5 conference per system
8 parties per conference (5 of the 8 can be external)

DISA Circuit

12 CO lines may be programmed simultaneously

Attendants

Up to 3 stations can be designated as attendants
Table 9-l: Digital System Capacity

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Optional Boards

Digital DSS/DLS Units

8 maximum - each DSWDLS unit requires 1 station port
and reduces station capacity by 1. DSWDLS maps may not
be duplicated at a station. One station may have up to
three DSWDLS units associated with it.

Loop Supervision Disconnect

700 msec. duration - CO or Internal Call to SLT

Paae Zones
Internal Paging:
External Paging:
(One/Two Way)

4 maximum - software controlled
1 maximum

Hunt Groups
Groups:
Members:
Types:

Software supports up to 8 groups
Software supports up to 8 stations in each group
Station or Pilot Hunting

Voice Mail Groups
Groups:
Members (Ports):
Integrated Method:
VM Message Wait:
VM Disconnect Signal:

Software supports up to 8 groups
Software supports up to 8 stations
In-band signalling (DTMF)
Programmable 12-digit (DTMF) string
If no digits are programmed, 15 seconds of silence
followed by busy tone

ACD Groups
Groups:
Members:
RAN Announcements:
Calls in Queue:

Software supports up to 16 groups
Software supports up to 16 stations in each group
Eight RAN Announcements per system, 3 per ACD group
All CO lines may be queued for an ACD group

UCD Groups
Groups:
Members:
RAN Announcements:
Calls in Queue:

Software supports up to 8 groups
Software supports up to 8 stations in each group
Eight RAN Announcements per system, 3 per UCD group
All CO lines may be queued for a UCD group
Table 9-l: Digital System Capacity

AC Input to Power Supply

117 VACkl 0%, 60Hz single phase

Power Consumption

74 watts

1 Power Supply Fuse - AC Input

1lA/250V

Table 9-2: Electrical Specifications

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

issue I- December 1998

Q-6

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Optional Boards

Longitudinal Balance

60 dB from 200 Hz to 1,000 Hz
40 dB from 1.000 Hz to 40,000 Hz

Idle Channel Noise

Less than 15 dBrnc0 for all connections

Cross Talk Attenuation

Greater than 80 dBm Station to CO and
Station to Station

Single Frequency Distortion
300 Hz - 3,400 Hz

Station to CO and Station to Station:
Better than 2.0% or 34 dB for an output
Level - 30 dBm to 0 dBm

Ringing Sensitivity

16 Hz to 30 Hz at 40 Vrms minimum
03 Hz to 67 Hz at 50 Vrms minimum

CO Line Signaling - DTMF

Frequency pair at -5 dBm f 0.5 dBm
Frequency tolerance f 1.5%

CO Line Signaling - Dial Pulse

10 PPS

Input Level

+I 0 dB maximum

Music Source
Music on Hold/Background Music Input

600 ohm input at 0 dBm maximum from music
source

Contact Rating
Multipurpose Relay

1 amp @ 24 V DC (two on MBU board)

External Paae Port
Output Impedance
Output Power without Compression

600 ohm @ 0 dBm
5 milli-watt maximum

CSA File Number (NRTUC)

LR85633
Table 9-2: Electrical Specifications

Operating Temperature

328 to 104s F

Optimum

60~ to 80s F

Temperature

Storage Temperature
IRelative Humidity
Heat Dissipation (BTU)

-4Oe to 140e F

0s to 40s C
15s to 26s C
4s to 60e C

15% to 90% non-condensing
1481 BTU/Hour
Table 9-3: Environmental Specifications

Issue 1 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

Q-7

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Optional Boards

Digital Terminals

Maximum length of station loop:
1,000 feet of 24 AWG (2 wire, inside wiring,
twisted cable)

Single Line Telephones

2,000 feet of 24 AWG
Table Q-4: Loop Limits

DTMF Dialinq
Frequency Deviation
Rise Time
Duration of DTMF Signal
Interdigit Time

* 1.5%
5 msec
70-100 msec
100-130 msec

Pulse Dialing
Pulse Dialing Rate
Pulse Break/Make Duration

10 PPS
60140 or 66133
I

Loop start, 600 ohm, current sensing

CO Type
I

Table Q-5: Dialing Specifications

System Port Specification, Facility Interface and Service Order Codes
Ringer Equivalent
Number (REN)

lnterf ace Card

Facility Line
lnterf ace
I

1.3 B

Loop start

Jack Type
I

02LS2

RJIIC

Table Q-6: Trunk Ordering Information: Public Network Lines

Item

&P..”
6Iii

Height

Width

Depth

Weight

Triad-S Basic Key Service Unit

13.6 in

10.85 in

4.9 in

5.3 Kg

Triad-S

13.6 in

10.85 in

4.9 in

4.6 Kg

Expansion Key Service Unit

Table Q-7: Physical Dimensions and Weight

TARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue I- December 7998

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Optional Boards

Memory
Programmable Read-Only Memory (EPROM)
Random Access Memory (RAM)

1 Megabyte
384 K expandable to 640 K

Telephone Transmitter

Electret mic compatible

CO/PBWCentrex
Paths
Basic KSU
Basic KSU + Expansion KSU
Intercom Paths

316 CO/PBX/Centrex talkpaths (nonblocking)
12 COlPBXlCentrex talkpaths (non-blocking)
Non-blocking

Music Channels
Music On-Hold/Background Music

2 channels with optional MISU per system (1
MOH, 1 BGM [different sources])
Additional music channels available through
CO lines. Connections up to 8 maximum
optional. Talk battery required.

Account Codes
Number of Digits Per Account Code
Number of Account Codes - Unverified
Number of Account Codes - Verified

Up to 12 unverified digits
Unlimited
250 account codes

Dialina Memory
Station Speed Dialing
System Speed Dialing

20 bins per station (24 digits)
80 bins per system (24 digits)
Table

Issue I- December 1998

Q-8:

Miscellaneous

Specifications

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Q-Q

Optional Boards

Type of Signal

Frequency

I
I

Signal

Duration

)

Single Line Signals:
Incoming CO Line

20 Hz 90 VAC

.8 o n I 2.8 off repeated

Intercom Tone Ringing

20 Hz 90 VAC

.2 on I .4 off I .6 on I 3.0 o f f
repeated

Transferred CO Line

20 Hz 90 VAC

.8 on I 2.8 off repeated

CO Line Recall

20 Hz 90 VAC

.8 on I .2 off I .2 on I .2 o f f

ICO Queue Call Back
/Single

20 Hz 90 VAC

I I set on I 2 set off repeated I

Line Confidence Tones:

Intercom Ringback

440+480

( .8 on I 2.8 off repeated

Transferred CO Line

440+480

I .8 on 12.8 off repeated

440

.8 on I 2.8 off repeated

Call Announce
Busy Tone

480+620

.5 on I 5 off repeated

Error Tone

480+620

.2 on I .2 off repeated

Intercom Dial Tone

350+440

Steady

DND Tone

350+440

.4 on I .4 off I .2 on I .2 off I
.2 on repeated

Paging Confirmation Tone

350+440

1 set on

(Conference Time-out Tone

440
350+440

Confirmation Tone

I Programmable Steady Tone I
.8 on I .8 off 3 bursts

Table 9-9: Single Line Audible Signals

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

Issue I- December 1998

Q-IO

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Optional Boards

Feature / Function

Flash Rates

LED Color

Incoming CO Ringing

30 ipm flash

Red

Transferred CO Ringing

120 ipm flash

Red

CO Line Recalling

480 ipm flutter

Red

System Hold

60 ipm double wink

Red

1 Exclusive Hold (I-Hold)

II20 ipm flash

1I-Hold (system)

I60 ipm wink

Green

CO Line Queue Call Back

480 ipm flutter

Red

CO Line in Use

On steady

Red

CO Line Idle

Off

Exclusive Hold (other sta) tions)

steady

Red

Table 9-10: Digital Station Visual Signals
Feature / Function

- CO Line Buttons

Flash Rates

LED Color

Off-Hook (busy)

On steady

Red

Incoming Intercom Ring

120 ipm flutter

Red

Call Announce (H or P mode)

Steady

Red

I Message Waiting Call Back

) 120 ipm flutter

Red

(Station in Do Not Disturb

( 60 ipm double flash

Red

I Camp On (by station)

II20 ipm flutter

(Automatic Call Back

( 120 ipm flash

Red

60 ipm flash

Red

Station Unavailable (ACDAJCD)

Table 9-11: Digital Station Visual Signals

Issue 1 - December 7998

- DSS / BLF Buttons

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Optional Boards

Feature / Function

Flash Rates

LED Color

Call Forward (active)

30 ipm flash

Red

Message Wait (active)

Steady

Red

Camp On (active)

120 ipm flash

Red

120 ipm flash

Red

480 ipm flutter

Red

Call Back (active

- initiator)

CO Line Queue (active)
1 DND (active)

( Steady

Red

1Mute

1Steady

Red

(On/Off

I Steady

Red

Steady

Red

Conference
Speed (moment on until bin address dialed)
Personalized Messages

( 15 ipm flash

Red

Tone Intercom Call (hold button)

15 ipm flash

Red

Loop

same as CO

Green / Red

Pool

same as CO

Green / Red

Transfer

None
Table 9-12: Digital Station Visual Signals

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product

Description Manual

None
- Feature / Function Buttons

issue I- December 1998

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

9-12

Optional Boards

Feature / Indication

Sound in HZ

Occurrence / Cadence

incoming CO Line

User selectable *

.8 on I 2.4 set off repeated

Intercom Tone Ringing

User selectable *

.4 set on I .4 set off I .4 set on I2 set
off repeated

Intercom Call Announce (H
and P)

935

.2 set on / .2 set off 2 bursts

Transferred CO Line

User selectable *

.8 set on 12.4 set off repeated

CO Line Recall

1User selectable *

Message Waiting Call Back

/ .2 set on I .6 set off repeated
.4sec on l.4sec off I.4 set on I.2 set
off repeated

User selectable *
I

Queued CO Line Call Back 1User selectable *
I

Camp On

1.2 set on I .6 set off repeated
I

935

.2 set burst

* Only one tone can be selected by a station at a time. This tone is used for all signaling that
uses the User Selectable tone.
Table 9-13: Signals to Called Stations (Digital Station)

Sound in Hz

Feature / Indication

1215l1417

Incoming Ring Back Tone
I Intercom Call Announce
(busy Tone
Error Tone
Intercom Dial Tone

I
I
I
I

Occurrence / Cadence
5 set on I 2.5 set off repeated

935

.2 set on / .25 set off 3 times

701

( .5 set on I .5 set off repeated

701

I .25 set on I .25 set off repeated

420

I Continuous

DND Tone

701

Paging Confirmation T o n e

935

1 second burst

Conference Time-out Warning
Tone

420

1 second burst

Programming
Tone

1471

1 second burst

1471

.25 set on I .25 set off 6 times

735

.5 second burst

Confirmation

I Programmed Error Tone

/Call Waiting

I
I

.2 set on I .2 set o f f 3 times, pause,
repeated

Table 9-14: Signals to Calling Station (Digital Station)
issue 1 -December1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

9-13

Optional Boards

VM Condition Action

Sound in
Hz

Tone Received

Occurrence / Cadence

Off Hook

Internal dial tone - no
stutter tone

350 I440

Continuous

Calls an Internal Station
(idle)

Ring back tone

440 I480

1 set on I 3 set off
repeated

Initiate a Transfer (hook- Internal dial tone (no
stutter tone)
flash)

350 I440

Continuous

Calls an Internal Station busy
Call back not allowed

Busy tone

4801620

;Zlk an Internal Station -

Busy tone

4801620

.5 set on I .5 set off
repeated

Calls an Internal Station programmed I not
equipped

Busy tone

4801620

lsecon l.5sec off
repeated

Calls an Internal Station not programmed I not
equipped

Reorder tone

4801620

1 set on 1.2 set off
repeated

Dials Invalid Digit I FA
Code I station

Reorder tone

4801620

.2sec on I.2 set off
repeated

Calling Party
Disconnects (internal or
external call)

Silence or disconnect
digits

.5 set on I .5 set off
repeated
I

Continuous or as
programmed

Table 9-15: Voice Mail Confidence Tones

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Digital

Station

Instruments

Digital Station Instruments
8-Button Enhanced Digital Terminal
The Triad-S Enhanced 8-Button Digital Terminals are fully modular instruments with five fixed feature
buttons and eight buttons that can be flexibly assigned as CO/PBX/Centrex lines, Station DSS, or
feature/function buttons. This telephone also features an integrated speakerphone, call announce with
handsfree intercom, a volume control button, and long life LEDs.

Figure 9-2:

I s s u e 1 - December 1998

STARPLUS

Enhanced (8-Button) Digital Terminal

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Digital Station Instruments

12-Button Executive Digital Terminals
The Triad-S Executive 12-Button Digital Terminals are fully modular instruments with 11 fixed feature
buttons and 12 buttons that can be flexibly assigned as CO/PBX/Centrex lines, Station DSS, or
feature/function buttons. This telephone also features an integrated speakerphone, call announce with
handsfree intercom, a volume control bar, and long life LEDs.

Figure 9-3: Triad-S Executive

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

(la-Button) Digital Terminal

Issue I- December 1998

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

9-16

Digital Station instruments

24-Button Executive/Enhanced Digital Terminals
The STARPLUS ExecutivelEnhanced 24-Button Digital Terminals are fully modular instruments with 11
fixed feature buttons and 24 buttons that can be flexibly assigned as CO/PBX/Centrex lines, Station DSS, or
feature/function buttons. This telephone also features an integrated speakerphone, call announce with
handsfree intercom, a volume control bar, and long life LEDs.

,
7
: ; (
.
.‘:
‘. ; : :
. ..-:.

Figure 9-4: Triad-S Executive (24-Button) Digital Terminal

,i . .
! .; ._:;
r-i
I.
I:. ,..L1,
.i

~l~i~l~l~l~~~
issue 7 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

SYSTEM CONFlGUFtATlON
Digital

Station

Instruments

Digital DSWDLS Console
..I. .‘I
_&>”
:.; .&3
e

The station port used for a DSS/ DLS Console can be assigned as a Direct Station Select or Direct Line Select
depending on customer need. All forty-eight (48) buttons on the unit can be assigned as DSS, or flexible
buttons. Refer to Figure 4--I:DSS Console Map #I, Chapter 4, page 4-5 for an explanation of the mapping
options.

Figure 9-5: Triad-S Digital

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

DSWDLS Console

issue I- December 1998

9-18

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Digital

I s s u e I - December 1998

Station

Instruments

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

Introduction
This specification provides the functional and implementation definition for the addition of the ICLID feature
to the STARPLUS Triad-SThf Digital Key Telephone System.

System

Configuration

The following illustration depicts the configuration presumed for the implementation of the ICLlD feature for
the system. The phones are presumed to be in an ACD or UCD group in order to allow proper operation with
the system.

STARPLUS
KSU

CO LINES
RS232

ICLID
Int;xf;ce

ICLID
‘nt&?c

RS232
SERVER

LAN

Figure A-l: CTI System Configuration

Issue I- December 7998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

ICLID GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A-2

Functional Performance

Functional Performance
The ICLID (Incoming Calling Line IDentification) feature has been added to the Triad-S system as a first
step in providing it generally. The key system operation of this feature is dependent on the feature first
being activated from the central office so that the numbers of the calling party will be delivered over the
individual tip and ring of the CO lines during the first silent interval between ringing.
The features implemented are:
1 Display of calling number/name on initial ring-in of a line on the display keysets.
2

Recording of incoming call number/name on the SMDR printout.

Management of an “unanswered call” table from a display phone with appropriate
privilege level to allow tracking of unanswered calls for statistical information and
return call management.

Local translation of incoming numbers to names according to a table of number/name
equivalences which can be administered by the system.

Calling Number/Name Display
This feature is intended as the basic offering of the ICLID service when associated with the Triad-S system.
Essentially, whenever an incoming call is received at the system, the number received along with the
ringing signal will be stored in the line control tables and used at various points in the processing of the call.
The primary function will be that the calling number will be displayed (if available) at any point at which
the “LINE RINGING” is displayed in the system.
If 2 lines are ringing in at the same time, the display will show the oldest line
information. After 1 of the lines is answered, the display will show the
information on the unanswered line.

In addition, with the availability of the calling name feature, if the calling name is provided, the system will
deliver that to the display instead of the calling number.
The specification for this feature is that the system will display its “LINE RINGING” message as normally
implemented and alter that display to the calling number/name if the information is made present on the
line. This will allow the normal operation of the system when ICLID information is not presented or the
device which intercepts it and provides the information to the KSU is missing or failed.

Issue 1

- December 7998

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

, ‘7,: :.
,.. . ...,_.
. . _,
. . . . ...”
‘<.>-c’

ICLID GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A-3

Functional Performance

bbbbbNNNNNNNNNNNNNNbbbbb
OR

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
If the culling name is available, the display will be shown as above where X... represents the internal table
storage of the calling name. Note that although the Central Office delivery of the calling name is 15characters, the internal table used to store the name for translation of a received number is 24-characters in
width. If the Central Office delivers a name, it will be positioned left justified in the 24-character field on the
display. Note that if a number is received which matches a number/name translation, the translated name
will be used and the name delivered from the Central Office will be effectively discarded.
If no name is available from the Central Office or a translation table the delivered number will be displayed
as the repeated character N (14 characters).

Incoming Number/Name SMDR
As with the above feature implementation, the intent is that the system operate normally in the absence of
ICLID information or the failure of the ICLID equipment. If the information is present at the time that an
SMDR record is generated for a call, it will alter the content and format of the SMDR output record.
If the calling number is available, the number will be output in the SMDR record in the same location as the
dialed number is located in the outgoing calls.
If the calling name is present, an additional line will be output in the SMDR identifying the name. This record
will immediately follow the normal SMDR record. The normal SMDR record will include an indicator which
identifies that a following record with name identification is present.
Unanswered calls will be recorded on the SMDR as a system option to allow the identification of callers for
statistical and call-back purposes. These calls will be identified with an indicator in the SMDR record.

Unanswered Call Management
iC,$<
:;..:;
$,:‘,>

An Unanswered Call Management Table with 50 entry capacity for the Triad-D systems are maintained in the
system, The calling number/name information pertaining to any unanswered call will be placed in this table
at the time the system has determined that the call has been abandoned. This table may be accessed from
any station display phone so that the unanswered calls may be reviewed and handled by the end user.

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

A-4

ICLID GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Functional Performance

Local Name Translation
An administrable table provides a local translation from a received calling number to a name. This table
can be administered by the customer from the attendant console location, In cases of conflict between the
name delivered from the CO and that in the local translation table, the local translation table shall rule, 200
entries are provided for the Triad-S systems.

,.-: . . I
,‘Y:
L:-.--.
\
I .-.:.; .: :
‘-r. I ..:,

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

1TRIAD-ST” Basic KSU (BKSU)

5000-00

TRIADWgl Expansion KSU (EKSU)

5002-01

DSS Console (Off-White)

TR901 O-08

DSS Console (Burgundy)

TR901 O-60

DSS Console (Charcoal)

TR901 O-71

8-Button Basic (Off -White)

TR901 l-08

8-Button Basic (Burgundy)

TR901 l-60

8-Button Basic (Charcoal)

TR901 l-71

24-Button Enhanced (Off-White)

TR9013-08

24-Button Enhanced (Burgundy)

TR9013-60

24-Button Enhanced (Charcoal)

TR9013-71

12-Button

TR9014-08

Executive (Off-White)

12-Button Executive (Burgundy)

TR9014-60

12-Button Executive (Charcoal)

TR9014-71

24-Button

TR901508

Executive

(Off-White)

24-Button Executive (Burgundy)

TR9015-60

24-Button Executive (Charcoal)

TR9015-71

CTI Connector Box

9020-00

Caller Identification Interface Unit (TCI)

1480-00

’ 9600 Baud Modem (MODU)

5030-30

4-circuit DTMF Receiver Unit (DTMF-A)

9033-l 0

3 CO line x 8 Circuit Digital Telephone Interface Board (CKIB)

5032-00

3 CO line x 8 Circuit Single Line Interface Board (CSIB)

5033-00

Message Wait Unit (MSGU)

5033-l 0

Miscellaneous Interface Service Unit (MISU)

5035-00

Table B-l

Issue 1

- November 1998

: STARPLUS TRIAD-STM Part Numbers

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

B-2

I s s u e 7 - November 1998

PART NUMBERS

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

Table C-l : System Parameters

Issue I- November 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

c-2

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

PROGRAM
CODE

_-.
.5
I
,.-.

..-.-,
-.._,-

. ..-_
_-.
,.,.
I._.
,.,
,.-,_

FLASH
02

FLASH
05

Table C-l : System Parameters (Continued)

Issue I- November 7998

S JARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

FLEX
BTN

PROGRAM
CODE

FUNCTION

c-3

FORMAT

CUSTOMER
DATA

DEFAULT

SYSTEM FEATURES 2 PROGRAMMING
1 Privacy Release Tone Option 1Disabled/
1
I
I Enabled
I Disabled
3 1Distinctive CO Ringing
/Enabled
Verified Account Code
Disabled/
3
Enabled
Call Forward Display
Disabled/
4
Enabled
External Day Ring
Disabled/
5
Enabled
Overflow Station Forward
Disabled/
6
Enabled
Direct Transfer Mode
Disabled/
7
Enabled
Station ID Lock
Disabled/
8
Enabled
LCR Call Progress
Disabled/
9
Enabled
One-Touch Recording
Disabled/
10
Warning Tone
Enabled
Ringback on Transfer
Disabled/
11
Enabled
I
I
4

I ’

I G I

FLASH
06

1
1
I
)

_ , , j
tnaotec
l---L,tllaulel Ll
Disablea
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled

Table C-l : System Parameters (Continued)

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e I- November 1998

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

c-4

PROGRAM
CODE

FLASH
07

Table C-l : System Parameters (Continued)

Issue I- November 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

c-5

PBX DIALING CODES
EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY

Table C-l : System Parameters (Continued)

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

issue

1 - November 1998

C-6

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

Table C-l : System Parameters (Continued)

Issue I- November 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

PROGRAM
CODE

FLASH
22

FLEX
BTN

FUNCTION

c-7

FORMAT

WEEKLY NIGHT MODE SCHEDULE
Automatic/Manual Operation 1 Auto/Manual
Day of Week Programming
08:0017:oo
A+##-####
Day of Week Programming
08:0017:oo
####-####
Day of Week Programming
08:0017:oo
####-####
Day of Week Programming
08:0017:oo
##I##-####
Day of Week Programming
08:0017:oo
####-####
Day of Week Programming
08:0017:oo
#I###-####
Day of Week Programming
08:0017:oo
#I###-####

CUSTOMER
DATA

DEFAULT

Manual

(O-4)
(5-6)
(O-4)
(5-6)
(O-4)
(5-6)
(O-4)
(5-6)
(O-4)
F-6)
(O-4)
(5-6)
(O-4)
(5-6)

Table C-l : System Parameters (Continued)

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

issue I- November 1998

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

023

123

060

160

024

124

061

161

025

125

062

162

Table C-2: Directory Dialing Defaults (FLASH 23)

issue 7 -November 1998

STARPLUS triad-SProductDescriptionManuol

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

C-Q

086

186

123

223

087

187

124

224

088

188

125

225

Table C-2: Directory Dialing Defaults (FLASH 23) (Continued)

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

issue I - November 1998

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

c-10

Table C-2: Directory Dialing Defaults (FLASH 23) (Continued)

Issue 1

- November 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

C-II

Table C-2: Directory Dialing Defaults (FLASH 23) (Continued)

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue I- November 1998

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

Table C-3: Hunt Group Parameters (FLASH 30)

“”
E

DEFAULT I !z! I
I 1 DIGITS
G
I (12 TMAX.)S INDEX(
/ INDEX N/ D$“,
, N ; D;rN

DEFAULT
1D
2

NEW
M

)

03
04
05

Table C-4: Verified Account Codes (FLASH 31)

issue I- November 1998

TARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

DEFAULT
INDEX
D/N

NEW
cos

C-13

DEFAULT
DIGITS (12 MAX.)

INDEX

DIN

NEW
cos

DIGITS (12 MAX.)

DIN

Table C-4: Verified Account Codes (FLASH 31) (Continued)

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue I- November 1998

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

c-14

DIGITS (12 MAX.)

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

Table C-4: Verified Account Codes (FLASH 31) (Continued)

Issue 1 -November 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S ProductDescripfionManual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

DEFAULT
INDEX
DIN

NEW
cos

C-15

DEFAULT
DIGITS (12 MAX.)

INDEX

DIN

1 161

139

171

140

172

141

173

142

174

143

175

NEW
cos

DIGITS (12 MAX.)

DIN

Table C-4: Verified Account Codes (FLASH 31) (Continued)

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e 7 - November 1998

C-16

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

EW
-^ I

DIGITS (12 MAX.)

/ DEFAULT 1 ”

DlGlTS(12 MAX.1 /

;t‘:-Z.
. . ;-.
h . . ..-.,./
.,-_.
‘; --:,: .,.,

Table C-4: Verified Account Codes (FLASH 31) (Continued)

Issue 1 - November 1998

S JARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description

Manual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

NEW
cos

DEFAULT

INDEX

DIGITS (12 MAX.)

c-17

INDEX

DEFAULT

NEW
cos

DIGITS (12 MAX.)

1
1
1
1

218
219

1
I

249
I

220

221

222

Table C-4: Verified Account Codes (FLASH 31) (Continued)

STARPLUS Triad-S

Product Description Manual

I s s u e I- November 1998

..‘..

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

C-18

DIGITS (12 MAX.)

Table C-4: Verified Account Codes (FLASH 31) (Continued)

I s s u e I- November 1998

ST~RPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

c-19

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

CO LINE PORT NUMBER

PGEI
BTN

DATA FIELD

400 ms

t Line Grouo Proarammina
Class of Service
Programming
CO Line Ringing
Assignments
CO Line Identification
Display
co1 :

1 Ah3

I co2:
co3:

Al9
All 0

Line XX
Line XX
A/11

Line XX
Line XX
Line XX

I co7:
C08:
Trunk Direction

Line XX
Line XX
A/l 2

Display Ring Assignments
PAGE A

All3
19

Transmit Volume Option
Preset Call Forward
Destination
Preset Forward Voice Mail

B/i

Universal Day Answer
Music-On-Hold

Line XX
Line XX

co4:
I co5:

1Ring Tone

Sta 100

Refer to CO Line Ringing Assignments

Bothway
DTMF
Page “A” i:; selected by pressing I \GE

B/2

B/3
B/4
B/5
1 B/6

flex itie button. 1

None
None
Disabled
Channel
00

Table C-5: CO Line Programming (FLASH 40)
STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e 7 - November 7998

c-20

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

Table C-5: CO Line Programming (FLASH 40)

FLEX
BTN

FUNCTION

Dial Pulse Parameters

FORMAT
60140,

66133

DEFAULT

CUSTOMER
DATA

60/40

Table C-6: Miscellaneous CO Parameters & Timers (FLASH 41)

Issue 1

- November 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

T
T

CO LINE(S)
Y
P
E

c-21

STA

NUMBER
TO
CO LINE(S)
TYPE:
NUMBER
T
CO LINE(S)

TYPE:

TYPE:
NUMBER
Button #ll = Enter Ringing Assignments
Button #17 = Display Ringing Assignments
Ringing

Assignments:

0 = No Ringing (unassigned/to delete a station)
1 = Day Ringing (D)
2 = Night Ringing (N)
3 = Day/Night Ringing (DN)
4 = Special Only (S)
5 = Day/Special (DS)
6 = Night/Special (NS)
7 = All Modes - Day/Night/Special (A)
Table C-7: CO Line Ringing Assignments (FLASH 40)

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e I - November 1998

c-22

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

1. Route 000 in the ICLID Ringing Assignment Table is used as the intercept route. Calls to
numbers not contained in the DID table will follow Route 000. If Route 000 is defaulted to
“none”, the call will follow Route 001.
2. Route 001 in the ICLID Ringing Assignment Table is used for Busy calls. If Route 001 is
defaulted to “none”, the caller is given a busy tone. Calls to busy stations (i.e., without an
available Loop or CO button) will follow Route 001.
Table C-8: DIDACLID Default Ringing Assjgnments (FLASH 43)

I s s u e 1 - November 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

C-23

.-.. .
- . ^^^. . . .^. .- -. . * .
Koute uuu In tne IGLIU Klnglng Hsslgnment I able IS used as the intercept route. Calls to
numbers not contained in the DID table will follow Route 000. If Route 000 is defaulted to
“none”, the call will follow Route 001.
2. Route 001 in the ICLID Ringing Assignment Table is used for Busy calls. If Route 001 is
defaulted to “none”, the caller is given a busy tone. Calls to busy stations (i.e., without an
available Loop or CO button) will follow Route 001.
>

Table C-8: DID/ICLID Default Ringing Assignments (FLASH 43) (Continued)

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

Issue I- November 1998

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

C-24

I s s u e I- November 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

CUSTOMER

DATABASE

09 1

092

C-25

PROGRAMMING

1
I

None

124

124A

None

125

125A

093

None

126

126A

094

None

127

127A

095

None

128

-I 28A

096

None

129

129A

097

None

130 1

098

None

131

13OA
I

13lA

1
I

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

i s s u e I - November 1998

C-26

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

I s s u e 1 L November 1998

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

C-27

163

163A

196

196A

164

164A

197

197A

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

Issue I- November 1998

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

C-28

DESTINATION

ASSIGNMENTS

DESTINATION

216

216A

243

243A

217

217A

244

244A

ASSIGNMENTS

I s s u e I- November 1998

S TARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

222
2

224

c-29

222A

249

249A

223A

250

250A

224A

251

251A

STARPLUS

Triad-S

Product Description Manual

Issue I- November 1998

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

Issue I - November 1998

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

LCR Class of Service (COS)

Al9

Off-Hook Preference Programming

All 0
All 1

Flexible Button Programming
Keyset Mode

c-31

00 (Keyset)
Refer to Flexible Button Proarammina Chart

E%~

Voice Mail ID Translation

Page “B” is selected by pressing PAGE B flexible
#
~ 24 1
*Features available with optional software.

700-131

Table C-9: Station Programming (FLASH 50)

STA#

PORT#

STA#

PORT#

Table C-10: Button Assignments (FLASH 50)

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue I- November 1998

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

C-32

Refer to Table C-10: Button Assignments (FLASH 50) to assign a function to each flexible button.
Defaults:
Q Buttons 1 thru 12 are assigned as Stations 100 thru 111,
* Buttons 13 thru 18 are assigned as CO Lines 01 thru 06,
+ Buttons 19 is assigned as a Loop button,
+z+ Button 20 is assigned as a Pool Group button,
o Buttons 21 thru 24 are flexible buttons with features assigned to them.

.‘,
_

.._

Where:BB = Button Number (01-24)
9 LLL = CO Line Number (001-012)
3 G = Line Group (l-7)
KEY STATION BUTTON PROGRAMMING:
1

To assign a button as a Flexible button (user programmable) enter:
BB [0] HOLD

To assign a button as a CO Line button, enter:
BB [I] LLL HOLD

To assign a button as a Loop button, enter:
BB [2] HOLD

To enter a button as a Pooled Group button, enter:
BB [3] G HOLD

To enter a button as a Feature button, enter:
BB [4] [XXX] HOLD

To unassign a button, enter:
BB [#] HOLD

SLT ENTRY: (Off-Hook Preference)
o When an SLT is being assigned for Off-Hook Preference, enter:
01 [ 1) LLL HOLD for a specific CO Line,
+3 or
01 [3] G HOLD for a CO Group Access.
,

Table C-l 0: Button Assignments (FLASH 50)

~l~l~l~l~l~i~l~~
I s s u e 1 - November 1998

S JARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

c-33

Programmed from the first Attendant Station.
BIN#

TELEPHONE NUMBER

BIN #

TELEPHONE NUMBER

Monitored by Toll Restriction (COS)

35
36

55
56

37
38
39

57
58
59
Table C-l 1: System Speed Dial Numbers

STARPLUS Triad-S

Product Description Manual

issue

1 - November 1998

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

c-34

Programmed from the first Attendant Station.

Table C-l 1: System Speed Dial Numbers (Continued)

Issue 1

- November 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

c-35

Table C-12: ACD Group Parameters

TARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

issue I- November 1998

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

C-36

nnouncemen
*Features available with optional software.

Table C-l 2: ACD Group Parameters (Continued)

Issue 1 - November 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

c-37

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

PROGRAM
CODE

FLEX
BTN

ALT
(9)

FUNCTION
ACD*

ACD Group 0 (558)
ACD Group 1 (559)
ACD Group 2 (560)
ACD Group 3 (561)
A C D G r o u p 4 (562)

A C D Wrap-up Timer

2
3
4

OVR
(10)

RAN
(11)

sup”
(14

STATIONS
(Up to 16)

GROUP PROGRAMMING

FLASH
64

1 4 ( A C D CIQ Threshold
*Features available with optional software.

ACD* T I M E R S
000-999
00-99

004

Table C-12: ACD Group Parameters (Continued)

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

issue I- November 1998

C-38

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

Table C-13: UCD Group Parameters

/ . .
; “.
:,
, :- .-.
!I ‘. .::: : .:

issue I- November 1998

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

c-39

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

PROGRAM
CODE

FLEX
FUNCTION
BTN
VOICE MAIL IN-BAND SIGNALING
( Voice Mail Outpulsing Table 0
1

OUTPULSING
DIGITS

PI
1j Prefix;,; P7 1
Suffix

Voice Mail Outpulsing Table 1

None

Prefix

[l]
3

L or R

Voice Mail Outpulsing Table 2

Suffix S
[0] Prefix
[l] Suffix

FLASH 66

Table C-l 4: Voice Mail Group Parameters

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue I- November 1998

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

c-40

PROGRAM
CODE

FLEX
BTN
FLEX
BTN

FUNCTION

ALT

FUNCTION

RTV

EXTENSIONS
DEFAULT

VOICE MAIL IN-BAND FEATURES
Voice Mail In-Band Digits
1
FLASH 67 - 2
Voice Mail Transfer/Forward
3
VM Broker

Enabled
Enabled
Enabled

Table C-l 4: Voice Mail Group Parameters

I s s u e 1 - November 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

c-41

Table C-15: Mailboxes (FLASH 68)
STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

issue

1 - November 1998

_..

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

C-42

440

Table C-15: Mailboxes (FLASH 68) (Continued)

I s s u e I- November 1998

STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

440

c-43

123

440

Table C-15: Mailboxes (FLASH 68) (Continued)
STARPLUSTriad-S

Product Description Manual

issue 7 - November 1998

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

c-44

INDE

ID DIGITS

440

129

440

130

440

131

440

Table C-15: Mailboxes (FLASH 68) (Continued)

Issue 1 - November 1998

S JARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

?
. ..2.’
~; -:i
. . yyy
t&L.

155

440

188

440

156

440

189

440

Table C-15: Mailboxes (FLASH 68) (Continued)
STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e I- November 1998

C-46

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

IITS

INDEX

1G R O U

163

440

196

440

164

440

197

440

p I

ID DIGITS

Table C-15: Mailboxes (FLASH 68) (Continued)

I s s u e 1 - November 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

c-47

INDEX

)

GROUP

198

440

227

440

199

440

228

440

200

440

229

440

201

440

202

440

203

440

204

440

ID DIGITS

1 GROUP

INDEX

I
I

205

440

206

440

207

440

208

440

230

440

231

440

232

440

233

I
I

440

234

440

235

I 440
440

237

440

I
I

236

209

440

238

440

210

440

239

440

211

440

240

440

212

440

241

440

213

440

214

440

215

440

216

440

217

440

218

440

219

440

220

440

221

440

222

440

I
I
I
I

I
243I
244I
242

245
246

250
251

440
440
440
440

ID DIGITS

I
I

I
I
I

I
I

440

440
440

Table C-15: Mailboxes (FLASH 68) (Continued)
STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e I - November 7998

C-48

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

Table C-15: Mailboxes (FLASH 68) (Continued)

Issue 7 - November 7998

JARPLLJS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

c-49

Table C-16: Exceptions (FLASH 70)

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e I- November 1998

c-50

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

Special Table 1

Special Table 2
Area Code:

Area Code:

mice c;oaes

OFFILECODES

Special Table 3

Special Table 4
Area Code:

Home Area Code:

Off ice Codes

OFFICE CODES-I

Table C-l 7: Exceptions (FLASH 70)

Issue 1

- November 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

c-51

COLINEGROUPS
1

Table C-l 8: Least Cost Routing (FLASH 75)

START TIME

DEFAULT TIME

0800

1700

2300

####

CHANGED TIME

Table C-l 9: Daily Start Time

TOLL INFORMATION ROUTE LIST TABLE

DEFAULT
00

Table C-20: Weekly Schedule

S TARPLLJS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue I- November 7998

c-52

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

1 + 10 DIGITS
LD TOLL
ROUTE

7 DIGIT

LOCAL
ROUTE

1+7 DIGITS
TOLL ROUTE

DEFINED BY
DEFAULT

Issue 1

- November 7998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

c-53

Table C-21 : Route List
STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manua/

Lssoe I- November 1998

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

c-54

Table C-21 : Route List

Issue 1

- November 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

INSERT
03

c-55

PI
POST

DELETE

PI
(PW
[l] PRE

INSERT
04

PI
POST

DELETE

PI
0’ W
[l] PRE

INSERT
05
DELETE

PI
POST

WI
PW
Table C-22: Insert/Delete

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

Issue I- November 1998

C-56

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

TABLE

DIGITS DIALED
[l] PRE
INSERT

PI
1 P&T

WI
0-E)

DELETE

[l] PRE
INSERT

POST

PI
PW

DELETE

[l] PRE
INSERT

POST

DELETE

PI
0-E)

Issue 1 - November 1998

S JARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

TABLE

c-57

DIGITS DIALED
[l] PRE 1
INSERT

PI
POST

DELETE

PI
PW
[l] PRE

INSERT
13

PI
POST

DELETE

PI
6-3
[l] PRE

INSERT
14

PI
POST

DELETE

PI
0’ W
[l] PRE

INSERT
15

PI
POST

DELETE

WI
PW
[l] PRE

INSERT
16

POST
DELETE

PI
PW
[l] PRE

INSERT
17

PI
POST

DELETE

PI
PW
Table C-22: Insert/Delete

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

/ssue I - November 7998

C-58

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

TABLE

DIGITS DIALED
[l] PRE
INSERT

PI
POST

PI
0-E)

DELETE

[l] PRE
INSERT

POST
DELETE

PI
VW

I
Table C-22: Insert/Delete

1
Table C-23: 3-Digit Area/Office Code Route List

issue 1 - November 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

c-59

Table C-23: 3-Digit Area/Office Code Route List

STARPLUS

Triad-S Product Description Manual

I s s u e I- November 1998

C-60

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

Table C-24: B-Digit Area Code/Routing
Issue 1 - November 7998

STARPLUS Triad-S Product Description Manual

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

AREA CODE

ROUTE

C-61

Table C-24: 6-Digit Area Code/Routing

7
8
9

17
18
19

20
Table C-25: 6-Digit Office Code

STARPLUS Triad-S

Product Description Manual

I s s u e I - November 1998

C-62

Issue 1 - November 1998

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING

STARPLUS

Triad-S

Product Description Manual

Installation Manual
Issue 1
December 1998

Part Number: 5050-12

STARPLUS TRIAIXP is a registered trademark of VODAVI Communications Systems, Inc.
TRIADTM is a Registered trademark of VODAVI Communications Systems, Inc.

i. . :.:;.;.:

Table of

Contents

Introduction
Purpose.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Regulatory Information (U.S.A.) . . . . . . .
Telephone Company Notification ,
Incidence of Harm . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changes in Service . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Limitations . . . . . . .
Hearing Aid Compatibility . . . . . . .
UWCSA Safety Compliance . . . . . .
Notice of Compliance . . . . . . . . . .
Toll Fraud and DISA Disclaimer . . . . . . .

. .

2 Installation
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-1
Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . * .
. *
* .
. .2-l
General Site Considerations , , , , ,
. .
. .
. .2-l
Backboard Installation . . . . . . . . .
. .
. *
. .2-2
Verify On-Site Equipment . . . . . . .
. .
. .
. .
, .2-2
KSU Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .
. .
. .
. .2-3
Mounting the Basic KSU . . . . . . . ,
. . . .
* .
. .2-3
Mounting the Expansion KSU (EKSU) . . .
. .
. .2-5
Battery Charging Unit (BCU) Installation
. . . .
* .
. .
. .2-8
KSU Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , ,
. .
. .2-8
Power Line Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . .
. .2-9
Lightning Protection , . , , , , , , , , . . . , , , , .
. .
. .2-q
KSU AC Power Plug . . . . . . , , . . . . , , , . . , ,
. *
. -2-q
PCB Installation . . . . . . . . , . , . , , , . , , , , . . , . , .
. .
. .2-9
PCB Handling and General Installation , , . * .
. .2-9
BKSU and Main Board Assembly . . . . . , , . . , . . . ,
. .
.2-10
Modem Unit (MOD@ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .
.2-10
Miscellaneous Interface Unit (MISU) Installation ,
.2-12
DTMF4-A Unit . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . , .
. .
.2-14
Message Wait Unit (MSGU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , , .
. .
.2-15
CKIB/CSIB Installation . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . , , , , , . . .
.2-16
.

CKIB/CSIB Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Keyset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Line Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wall Mounting the Digital Key Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headset Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Caller ID Interface Unit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ICLID Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/OPorts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CO Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.2-17
* 2-20
-2-20
-2-20
.2-21
-2-23
.2-23
-2-24
.2-24
-2-24
.2-24
.2-24
. * . , .2-25

. *
. .
. .

3 System Check-Out
Introduction .............................................................
Preliminary Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PowerUpSequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Programming and Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telephone and Terminal Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KeysetSelfTest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyset LCD/LED Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyset Button Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSSLED/ButtonTest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Telephones/Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SingleLineTelephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSS/DLS Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COLineCardFunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SystemFunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GeneralOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Maintenance Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ExitMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I s s u e I- December 7998

..3- 1
.3-l
..3- 1
4-1
. . . * 4-l
. . . . 4-2
. . . . 4-2
. . * . 4-2
. . . . 4-3
. . . . 4-3
. . * . 4-4
. * . , 4-5
. . * . 4-5
. . . . 4-6
. . . . 4-6
. . . . 4-7
. . . * 4-7
. . . . 4-7
. . , . 4-7
. . . , 4-8
*

hllnlmll5lll5lll5lll5ll~~
STARPLUS Triad-S hstallation Manual

System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event Trace Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTMF Receiver Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote System Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GeneralOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Help Menu (?) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dump Memory Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event Trace Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify Memory Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit the Monitor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

*
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
*
.

.
.
.
*
.
.

. .
. .
. .

.
.
.
*

.
*
.
*

. .
. .

. .4-9
.4-10
.4-11
.4-11
.4-12
-4-12
-4-12
.4-13
.4-13
.4-14
.4-16
-4-16

Lslllrrllmlmlmll5llml~L
STARPLUS Triad-S /nsta//afion

Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

List of Figures
BasicKSU.......................................................................24
Basic KSU Mounting Holes and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-5
ExpansionKSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..2- 6
BKSU and EKSU Mounting Holes and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-7
BKSUDipSwitches.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..2-10
Modem Unit (MOD@ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-11
Miscellaneous Interface Unit (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-13
DTMF4A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-14
MessageWaitUnit(MSGU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-15
CKIBBoard.....................................................................2-1
6
CSIB Board with MSGU Mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-17
Digital Station Jack Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-20
Single Line Telephone Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-2-20
Digital Key Telephone Wail Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-22
Caller ID Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-23
Maintenance Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-4-S
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-9
CO / Station Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-10
HelpMenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.,.4-l 3
Trace Mode Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-14
EnableEventTrace...............................................................4-1
5
EventTrace.....................................................................4-1
6

Issue I- December 1998

l!Lmm5llrnlmlmil5ll~~
STARPLUS Triad-S hstallafian Manual

x.-. . .
i:<: \
:...- :.;v,. :
,..
. . . :. ”
i’-..;-.

List of Tables
MISU Dip Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CKIB/CSIB Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMDR Printout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Telephones/Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Line Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSS/DLS Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CO Line Loop Start Board (CKIB/CSIB Board) . . . . . . .
System Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

STARPLUS

Triad-S Installation Manual

. * . .

. .

.....................

. . . .

.....................
.....................

. . . .

......................

. . . . . .

......................

. . . *

* .

......................

. * . .

. *

......................

. . . * . .

......................

. . *. . .

......................

* * . . . .

......................

. . . .

2-12
2-18

2-26
3-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-6

l5m5llmlml~lml~l~L
Issue 7 - December 1998

issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS

l5lll5lll5lll5lils;rll5llGil~
Triad-S Installation Manual

Purpose
This manual provides the information necessary to program, install, operate and maintain the STARPLUS
Triad-S”” systems.

Regulatory Information (U.S.A.)
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has established rules that allow the direct connection of
the STARPLUS Triad-S systems to the telephone network. Certain actions must be undertaken or
understood before the connection of customer provided equipment is completed.

Telephone Company Notif ication
Before connecting the STARPLUS Triad-S system to the telephone network, the local serving telephone
company must be given advance notice of intention to use customer provided equipment, and must be
provided with the following information:
Q The telephone numbers to be connected to the system.
-+ Triad-S system information:
o The Ringer Equivalence Number also located on the KSU: 1.3B
8 The USOC jack required for direct interconnection with the telephone network: RJl 1C
FCC Registration Numbers:
+

For systems configured as a key system: (button appearances)
DLPKOR-24039~KF-E
o For systems configured as a hybrid system: (dial access codes)
DLPKOR-24026-MF-E

l-2

Introduction
Regulatory Information (U.S.A.)

~l~l~l~l~~l~ltRI1Ei(lLi;lllsll~llr?ll~l~l~l~l~lIsll~l~l~llsrlll+lilsll~l~l~lLnlIs;ll~l~L

Changes in Service
The local telephone company may make changes in its communications facilities or procedures. If these
changes affect the use of the STARPLUS Triad-S system or compatibility with the network, the telephone
company must give written notice to the user to allow uninterrupted service.

Maintenance Limitations
Maintenance on the STARPLUS Triad-S system must be performed only by the manufacturer or its
authorized agent. The user may not make any changes and/or repairs except as specifically noted in this
manual. If unauthorized alterations or repairs are made, any remaining warranty and the software license
for the system will be voided.

Hearing Aid Compatibility
All STARPLUS Triad-S digital terminals are Hearing Aid Compatible, as defined in Section 68.3 16 of Part 68
FCC Rules and Regulations.

UL/CSA Safety Compliance
The STARPLUS Triad-S system has met all safety requirements and was found in compliance with the
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1459. This system is authorized to bear the “NRTLK” marking.

Notice of Compliance
The STARPLUS Triad-S system complies with rules regarding radiation and radio frequency emissions by
Class A computing devices. In accordance with FCC Standard 15 (Subpart J), the following information
must be supplied to the end user:
‘This equipment generates and uses RF energy and if not installed and
used in accordance with the Instruction Manual, may cause interference
to Radio Communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class A computing device, pursuant to Subpart J of Fart 15 of
the FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection
against such interference, when operated in a commercial environment.
Operation of this equipment in a res~dentlal area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user, at his own expense, will be required to take
whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.’

l5lllnlmlmlmlmlmlqL
I s s u e I- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S Installation Manual

,--::;.

‘._.

Toll Fraud and DISA Disclaimer
“While this device is designed to be reasonably secure against intrusions from fraudulent callers, it is by no
means invulnerable to fraud. Therefore, no express or implied warranty is made against such fraud
including interconnection to the long distance network.”
“While this device is designed to be reasonably secure against invasion of privacy, it is by no means
invulnerable to such invasions. Therefore, no express or implied warranty is made against unlawful or
unauthorized utilization which results in the invasion of one’s right of privacy.”
Vodavi has made every reasonable effort to ensure that this product works in most business environments.
However, there may be some environments (RF1 and EFI) in which this product may not work properly. In
such cases, it is the responsibility of the installer to take the necessary actions to correct the situation,
This product is tested and found to be Year 2000 compliant. Vodavi shows 00 as the year in SMDR output and
on LCD displays.

hllsill5lltsllmmll5lll5il
STARPLUS Triad-S

hstallation Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

:. .._ I.:.

. .

I s s u e I- December 1998

hlmll5llmlmlrlmll5ll
Installation Manual

STARPLUS Triad-S

As with any sophisticated communications device, installation of the STARPLUS Triad-S system requires the
care and forethought of a competent technician. To assure easy servicing and reliable operation, several
factors must be considered when planning the system installation. The installation proceeds in these major
steps:
0 Site Preparation
9 KSLJ and Power Supply (PS) Installation
o PCB Installation
4 System Wiring
4 Keyset and Terminal Installation
4 Basic Installation Check-Out
4 System Programming and Verification
Installing the STARPLUS Triad-S system is quick and efficient if these installation instructions are followed.

Site Preparation
General Site Considerations
The first step is to locate an acceptable site for the common equipment (KSUs, boards, etc.). When locating a
mounting site for the KSUs, the following points must be considered:
4

4
4

KSLJs are designed for wall mounting and should not be mounted directly to a masonry or
plasterboard wall. It is recommended that a l/2 inch plywood backboard be firmly mounted to the
wall, and the KSU and MDF be mounted to the backboard.
The location must have access to a dedicated 110 Volt AC (2 lo%), 60 Hz, single-phase circuit with
a circuit breaker or fuse rated at 15 amps. A 3-wire parallel blade grounded outlet should be within
approximately 6 feet of the lower left rear of the BKSU mounting.
The location must have access to a good earth ground, such as a metallic cold water pipe without
non-metallic joints. The ground source should be located as close as possible to the system.
The system should be located in an area that is well ventilated with a recommended temperature
range of 68"-78" F and a relative humidity range of 5-60% (non condensing),

+ The system should be located within 25 feet of the telephone company’s termination point. Also,
the location should be within the prescribed station loop lengths for all keysets and terminals. If
existing cabling is used, its location and conduits should be considered. Station wiring should be in
the building. Station ports are not designed for installation outside of the building.
e Protection from flooding, flammable materials, excessive dust and vibration.
4
The site should be away from radio transmitting equipment, arc-welding devices, copying machines
and other electrical equipment capable of generating electrical interferences,
4
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference. In which case the
user, at his own expense, is required to take any necessary measures to correct the interference.

Backboard Installation
A wooden backboard is recommended for ah installations and must be installed when the location has
masonry or plasterboard wails. A l/2 inch plywood material is sufficient for most installations. The
backboard should be mounted at a convenient height, about three feet above the floor and be bolted in
various places to distribute the weight of the system.
Space should be available on the bottom side of the backboard for the MDF cabling and for optional
equipment such as a music source, battery backup, etc. It is recommended that the location of each major
item be roughly sketched on the backboard as an installation layout.

Verify On-Site Equipment
Once the equipment installation site is identified and a dedicated AC outlet, earth ground, and lighting and
ventilation are available, verify that all equipment required is on-site and was not damaged during
shipment, Unpack the KSUs to assure there is no shipping damage. Note that a mounting template is
packed with the BKSU; this template is required later in the installation. Check that the type and quantity of
boards received is correct and optional equipment and a Power Line Surge Protector are on-site. Do NOT
unpack the individual boards at this time.
If any equipment is damaged or missing, notify the appropriate personnel to correct the situation,

Eillnlir;rlml~ll.5ll~lmL
Issue 7 - December 7998

STARPLUS Triad-S Insfallafion Mot-ml

Installation

KSU

2-3

Installation

KSU Installation
The STARPLUS Triad-S system consists of a Basic KSU (BKSU) cabinet,
., .I-f
“:-?>’ Mounting the Basic KSU
c
The Basic KSU consists of a plastic cover, a metal base frame designed for wall mounting. Before installing
BKSU on the wall, two wall mounting plates that are assembled in the bottom side of the BKSU, must be
extended for mounting. The KSU must NOT be mounted on a masonry or dry-wall surface; a wooden
backboard is required.
A mounting template is included with the BKSU. This template can be used to drill pilot holes for mounting
screws. Please note that the template provides screw hole locations for the BKSU and EKSU.
The BKSU is mounted with three #10 or larger, 1 l/2 inch or longer screws. Drill pilot holes in the three
locations marked, insert the screws and tighten leaving about l/2 inch exposed,

STARPLUSTriad-S

installation

Manual

hlllmmll5llml~l~lml
I s s u e 7 - December 1998

Figure 2-l:

issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S Basic KSU

klll5llmlinlml~ll5ll~~
STARPLUS Triad-S hstallation Manual

Figure 2-2:

STARPLWS

Triad-S Basic KSU Mounting Holes and Installation

Mounting the Expansion KSU (EKSU)
The Expansion KSU consists of a plastic cover, a metal base frame designed for wall mount installation. The
EKSIJ contains a power transformer and expansion interface board (EIB). The EKSU MUST be mounted
above the BKSU. Before installing the BKSU on the wall, the wall mounting plate that is assembled in the
bottom side of the EKSU, must be extended for wall mounting and the fastener provided with the EKSU must
be assembled with the EKSU. After positioning the EKSU above the BKSU, mark the location of the two screws
to mount the BKSU. The EKSU must NOT be mounted on a masonry or dry wall surface; a wooden backboard
is required.
hllnllr;llmtlmllmal
STARPLUS Triad-S

hstallation Manual

I s s u e 1- December 1998

2-6

Installation
Mounting the Expansion KSU (EKSU)

The EKSU is mounted with two #lo or larger, 1 ‘/z inch or longer screws. Drill pilot holes in the two
locations marked, insert the screws and tighten leaving about ‘/z inch exposed. Mount the
Expansion KSU on the screws and tighten the screws securely,
Interconnection is achieved via an amphenol type connector and power cable. The amphenol connector is
included and connects the EKSU to the BKSU on the right side through connectors labeled EXP. Refer to
Figure 2-j: STARPLUS Triad-S I&par&on KSU.
4

Figure 2-3:

STARPLUS

Triad-S Expansion KSU

hllnlmllnlmlKllmll5l~
I s s u e I- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S lnstallafion

Manual

0
0

Figure 2-4:

STARPLUS

Triad-S BKSU and EKSU Mounting Holes and Installation

hll5llmImllnlmlml~L
STARPLUS

Triad-S Installation Manual

Issue I- December 7998

Installation

2-8

Battery Charging Unit (BCU) Installation

Battery Charging Unit (BCU) Installation
The BCU provides power for the system during a power failure. The BCU connects to the Triad-S via the
connector on the bottom of the BKSU. The external gel cell batteries must provide 24V DC. This is generally
accomplished by connecting two 12 volt batteries in series. The BCU provides charging current to the
batteries during normal AC power operation at a maximum of about 0.5 amp. During battery operation, the
BCU discontinues battery operation if AC power is restored or the battery voltage is too low to maintain
proper system operation.
The time the system operates on batteries is dependent on several elements, including: battery charge state,
condition of the batteries, capacity of the batteries, and the system size (number of station ports). The
following chart gives the approximate backup time in ampere hours for two system sizes and different
battery capacities.

KSU Grounding
To ensure proper system operation and for safety purposes, a good earth ground is required. A metallic
COLD water pipe usually provides a reliable ground. Carefully check that the pipe does not contain
insulated joints that could isolate the ground. In the absence of a COLD water pipe, a ground rod or other
source may be used.
A #12 insulated AWG or larger copper wire should be used between the ground source and the KSU (BKSU
and EKSU, respectively). The wire should be kept as short as possible (recommended 25 feet or less).
1

Remove about 1 112 inches of insulation from both ends. Attach one end of the wire to
the Ground Lug on the lower side of the Basic and on the lower side of the Expansion
KSU by inserting the wire under the lug screw, then tighten the screw securely.

Attach the other end of the wire, as appropriate, to the ground source.

Take a DC resistance reading and an AC volt reading between the chassis ground point
(cold water pipe) and AC ground (third wire AC ground). The limit is 5V AC and 5 Ohms
DC resistance. If a higher reading is obtained, choose a different chassis ground point
and repeat this step until a suitable ground point is found.

Issue I- December 7998

lmmlk!iiwll~ll5llml~l
STARPLUS Triad-S installation Manual

Power Line Surge Protection
The AC outlet should be equipped with a power surge protection device or UPS. Systems using such devices
are more resistant to damage from power line surges than unprotected systems. Power line surges often
occur during normal operations and during violent thunderstorms,
Installation of a surge protector meeting the specifications described in the following paragraph may prevent
or minimize the damage resulting from power line surges.
The isolation transformer/surge protector should be: 15 amp self-contained unit that plugs into a standard
grounded 117V AC wall outlet. The wall outlet must be designed to accept a 3-prong plug (two parallel blades
and a ground pin). The protector should be fast and capable of protecting transients greater than 200 volts.

Lightning Protection
The system provides secondary protection per UL 1459 specifications. Primary protection circuitry is the
installer’s responsibility and should be installed per the National Electric Code ( NEC).

KSU AC Power Plug
Before plugging the KSU power cord into the AC source (grounded, 3-prong AC outlet required), verify that
the power switch of the BKSU is off.
+

Plug the KSU power cord into the AC outlet and turn the power switch on, The red LED on the MBU
illuminates.

PCB Installation
PCB Handling and General Installation
DO NOT install or remove any boards with power applied.

Power must be turned off prior to installation or removal of the PCBs. The system cards contain digital
circuitry which are extremely reliable, but can be damaged by exposure to excessive static electricity, When
handling PCBs, a grounded wrist strap should be used to protect the boards from static discharges. Also, use
common sense when handling PCBs. For example, do not place a PCB in locations where heavy objects
might fall on the PCB and damage components.
S JARPLUS Triad-S hsfallafion Manual

hll5lllsm!a~ll5llmlml
Issue 1 - December 1998

Installation

2-10

BKSU and Main Board Assembly

BKSU and Main Board Assembly
The MBU is installed in the BKSU at the factory before the shipment. The MBU contains a lithium dry cell to
maintain memory and real-time clock functions. The battery is soldered to the MBU and connected to the
circuitry by an ON-OFF dip switch (SW2). Make sure the dip switch SW2 is ON before database
programming.
Before programming the system, switch 1 (SWl) should be placed in the ON position and powered off and
on to initialize the system database to default. Once the database is initialized, switch 1 (SWl) should be
placed in the OFF position to protect the database. Shown below is the dip switch position functions:
MBU PC6 Dip Switch
Position
Marking

Function

SW1
I

OFF

Flush the database
I

Retain the database
I

Figure 2-5: BKSU Dip Switches

The MBU may be equipped with 3 daughter boards: MODU for modem access to the system, DTMF-4A for
DTMF receiver expansion up to five, and a MISU for two serial ports and a second music source.
Software for the system is contained on two chips labeled Ul and U2 in the Program Module Unit (PMU)
module.
The MBU provides miscellaneous features:
o One external page port that is connected to transformers, providing a 600 ohm impedance.
+ One music input that is connected to transformers, providing a 600 ohm impedance.
9 ‘Rvo independent dry relay contacts rated at 1 amp, 24V DC.
o A DTMF receiver.
These features are provided through the amphenol connector on the front edge of the CKIB installed in the
first slot of the BKSU. These features are controlled by system software.

Modem Unit (MODU)
The Modem Unit provides an asynchronous modem for access to the system database and remote
maintenance. The module is optionally installed on the BKSU (MBU) and includes a 9600 baud modem.

issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS

hll!cFlllinlmr~lmll5lll5ll
Triad-S Installation Manual

The modem may be accessed from any station or CO. The MODU port is independent of the MISU RS232C
ports, enabling system database access, etc., without interrupting the SMDR output.
To install the MODU:
1

Using a grounding strap, unpack the MODU from its anti-static bag in the packing box.

Locate the CN6 connector (outlined) on the MBU.

Locate the CNI connector on the MODU.

Position the MODU so the CNI matches with CN6 on the MBU.

Push the MODU onto its connector, making sure it is properly seated.

Match the screw hole on the MODU PCB bracket with the screw hole on the base frame.

Insert a screw and tighten the screws securely.

Figure 2-6: STARPLUS

Triad-S Modem Unit (MODU)

This completes the MODU installation.

STARPLUS Triad-S lnstallafion

Manual

hll5llmlmll5llmlmlmL
Issue I- December 1998

Installation

2-12

Miscellaneous Interface Unit (MISU) Installation
Inllnl~llnl~l~l~l~~~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~~~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~~

Miscellaneous lnterf ace Unit (MISU) Installation
The Miscellaneous Interface Unit (MISU) contains the second external music source (MOH/BGM) and two
serial ports.
To install the MISU:
I

Using a grounding strap, unpack the MISU from its anti-static conductive bag in the
packing box.

Locate the CN15 connector (outlined) on the MBU.

Locate the CN3 connector on the MISU.

Position the MISU so that CN3 matches CN15 on the MBU.

Push the MISU onto it’s connector making sure it is properly seated.

Match the screw hole on the MISU PCB bracket with the screw hole on the base frame.

Insert a screw and tighten the screws securely.

The MISU has an eight position dip switch. The table below lists the functions of each switch.

“f”‘“,,
2

Not used

A.‘.
:L.,;-.:
.:‘:. ..,
.:..y:.: i

OFF: Do not display start-up status
8

Not used

Table 2-1: MISU Dip Switches
killmlmllnll5ll~lmlmL
I s s u e 7 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S

hstullation Manual

2-13

Installation
Miscellaneous Interface Unit (M&U) Installation

Figure 2-6:

STARPLUS

Triad-S Miscellaneous Interface Unit (MISU)

This completes the MISU installation.

STARPLUS Triad-S

Installafion

Manual

l5llmlmlmll5llmlmll5il
issue I- December 1998

DTMF4-A Unit
The DTMF4-A provides the additional four DTMF receivers that may be used for detecting the DTMF signal
from the single line telephone port or central office line.
To install the DTMF4-A:
1

Using a grounding strap, unpack the DTMF4-A from its anti-static conductive bag in the
packing box.

Locate the CN13 and CN14 connectors (outlined) on the MBU.

Locate the CONN5 and CONNG connectors on the DTMF4-A.

Position the DTMF4-A so CONN5 and CONNG match CN13 and CN14 on the MBU.

Push the DTMF4-A onto its connector making sure it is properly seated.

Figure 2-7: STARPLUS Triad-S DTMF4-A

This completes the DTMF4-A installation.

issue 1

- December 1998

STARPLUS

l5lll5ll~lmlsllmlmlml
Triad-S Installation Manual

2-15

Installation
Message Wait Unit (MSGU)
r;nllnl~llnllnllsrllslllnlInl~l~l~l~Lnl~l~l~~~i~l~l~ILSII~i~1~114ll~lLfll~i~l~11511

Message Wait Unit (MSGU)
The Message Wait Lamp Relay Control (MSGU) provides message wait lamp relay control for message lamp
--_
;*-.. : ” single line telephones. The MSGU board mounts on the CSIB as a daughter-board-type arrangement. The
fg? CSIB interfaces with mechanical 9OV AC ringers and 95V DC lights on 2500~type phone sets,
To install the MSGU:
1

Using a grounding strap, unpack the MSGU module from its anti-static conductive bag in
the packing box.

Locate the CNI and CN2 connectors on the MSGU module.

Locate the CNl and CN2 connectors on the CSIB (outlined).

Position the MSGU module so CNI and CN2 match CNI and CN2 connectors on the
CSIB, respectively.

Push the MSGU module onto these connectors making sure it is properly seated.

Figure 2-8: STARPLUS

Triad-S Message Wait Unit (MSGU)

This completes the MSGU module installation,

STARPLUSTriad-S

hstdation Manual

l5llmlmlmllnlml~l~l
I s s u e I- December 1998

CKIBESIB Installation
There are two types of expansion boards available: CKIB and CSIB. These boards include 3 loop start CO line
interfaces and 8 digital key telephone interfaces (MB), or 3 loop start CO line interfaces and 8 single
line telephone interfaces (CSIB).
To install the CKIWCSIB:
I
Using a grounding strap, unpack the CKIB/CSIB from its anti-static conductive bag and
six standoffs from the auxiliary bag in the packing box.
2
Unscrew the six screws from the CKIB/CSIB installed in the first slot of the BKSU or
EKSU.
3
Insert the standoffs to secure the first card to the BKSU or EKSU.
4
Position the CKIB/CSIB on the six standoffs so the screw holes match.
5
Insert the screws and tighten them securely.
6 Connect the flat cable with the MBU in the BKSU or the EIB in the EKSU. The
CKIB
cable is labeled CN4; the CSIB cable is labeled CN5.

Figure 2-9: STARPLUS

Triad-S CKIB Board
i5ilml~ll5ll~l~l~l~~

Issue I - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S installation

Manual

Figure 2-10: STARPLUS

Triad-S CSIB

Board with MSGU Mounted

Each CKIB or CSIB has 3 loop start CO line interfaces. The loop start CO/PBX lines are connected to RJ-11
connectors on the right side of each board.
This completes the CKIB/CSIB installation.

CKIB/CSIB Wiring
There is one 50-pin female amphenol connector on the left side of the board. This enables the system to be
cabled to the main distribution frame (MDF). A 25-pair telephone cable must be prepared with mating
connectors to extend the interface circuits to the MDF. The cables should be routed through the cable clamps
at the bottom of the KSU to the MDF. These cables are terminated on industry standard 66MI-50 type punch
down blocks. It is recommended that 66MI-50 split blocks with bridging clips be used to simplify
troubleshooting and to quickly isolate any faults.

STARPLUS

Triad-S Installation Manual

Lnll5llmlmlml5llml~l
Issue I- December 1998

_..

k!iwlllsll~Iulml~l~L
Issue I- December 7998

STARPLUS

Triad-S Installation Manual

Table 2-2: CKIBESIB Wiring

Wiring for External Page, MOH/BGM, and Relay Is available only
at the first boardposition of the BKSU.

JARPLUS

Triad-S /nsta/lation

Manual

lslrl5lllsw5llmlmlmlml
issue I- December 1998

2-20

Installation
Station Wiring

Station Wiring
The following provides details on the interconnection of each type station interface board and station jack.
\
,.*,,,:.-., . ..I_....-.
..I_..
: .” 2. :

Only the first pair (green, red) on the jack should be connected
to the KSU. No other pairs should be connected.

Digital Keyset
Wiring from the CKIB to the station jack requires single pair cable (2 or 3 pair is recommended). Digitized
voice, signaling and battery are sent over this pair.

BK@

Figure 2-11: STARPLUS Triad-S Digital Station Jack Wiring

Single Line Telephone
The CSIB is wired to SLT devices with single pair cabling to provide talk battery, voice and signaling to and
from the SLT.
vr (GREEN)
VR (RED)
-f,G R

Figure 2-12: STARPLUS Triad-S Single Line Telephone Wiring
t!5llisll~il5lll5lll5lll5ll~L
Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S lnstallafion

Manual

2-21

Installation
Wall Mounting the Digital Key Telephone

Wall Mounting the Digital Key Telephone
To wall mount the digital key telephone, it is necessary to use the wall mount bracket and a standard type
1’1-Y: ^ jack designed for 630-type wall hanging applications. See Figure 2-13: Digital Kq Telephone Wall
6“L? Mounting on the following page.
I

Remove the handset from the cradle and locate the plastic retainer in the bottom of the
hook-switch well area.

Push the plastic retainer slowly upward until it is free.

Locate the tab on the plastic retainer, making sure it is toward you, then place it back into
its holder.

Slide the plastic retainer all the way down into its channel. Part of the retainer remains
above its holder to hold the handset secure for the wall mount configuration.

Turn the telephone over and unplug the line cord. If the cord is not plugged into the wall
jack assembly, reroute the line cord through the access channel on the top of the
telephone. If the line cord is plugged into the wall jack assembly, run the line cord through
the hole provided and plug it into the connector on the back of the telephone.

Line up the hooks on the top and bottom of the wall mount bracket so they can engage
with the slots cut into the bottom of the telephone base. Insert the bottom hooks first.

“I

Slide the mounting bracket slowly downwards until the top tabs slide into the top slots.
and snap into place.

Match the two key hole slots on the base plate with the lugs on the 630-A type jack and
align the modular connector, then slide the telephone into place.

Place the handset onto the retainer.

/
\

~lurllli;llurll~ll5lllN!zli
STARPLUS

Triad-S hstallation

Manual

Issue I- December 1998

/; ‘,
.,-..
.j --.,
.-._ .i. ..
._...
. ._

Mounting Bracket Tabs

Wall Mounting Holes

Figure 2-13: Digital Key Telephone Wall Mounting

The telephone is now ready to use.

:.71 :. ‘4
.

kal~~m~~~~~~~w~1
Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S hstallation Manual

2-23

Installation
Headset Installation

Headset Installation
The STARPLUS Triad-S digital key telephones were designed to operate with industry standard electret mic
compatible modular headset adapters and operator headsets.
To modify a STARPLUS Triad-S digital key telephone to support an external headset:
1

Plug the headset adapter cord into the vacant handset jack on the key telephone base.

Plug the telephone handset cord into the headset adapter box where indicated by the
headset manufacturer’s instructions.

Refer to Station Programming in the System Programming manual for instructions on enabling headset
operation. After programming, the station can enable or disable headset mode by dialing a code, When
headset mode is active at the station, the ON/OFF button controls the on-hook or off-hook status.
Additionally, while headset mode is active, features such as on-hook dialing and hands free speakerphone
operation become inoperable.

Caller ID Interface Unit Installation
The Caller Identification Interface Unit receives the data from the telephone company and sends the data, in
ASCII RS-23X format to the KSU.
To connect the cable port (9081-00) :
1

Select the correct RS-232 cable.

Connect one end of the cable on the desired MSIB I/O port (1 or 2).

Connect the other end to the 1480-00 l/O port marked RS232.

Figure Z-14: Caller ID Cable Connections illustrates the connections for the TCI Caller ID Interface Unit,

Triad-S MISU
KSU O-Pin
Female

r--l3

1480-00 O-Pin
Male

Figure 2-14: Caller ID Cable Connections
STARPLUS

Triad-S

hsfdafion

bkm./a/

hllnlml1nlmlml~lml
I s s u e I- December 7998

Switch Settings
Sl dip switches select the signaling protocol of the RS-232 OUT connector to assist in matching signals from
the 1480-00 with those of the DTE device. S2 dip switches control two major functions:
9
o

Switches l-5 configure the 1480-00 to the DTE device for baud rate, data bits, and parity,
Switches 6-S select the unit number for the 1480-00 when multiple units are connected in series, If
a single unit is used, switches 6-8 are set for Unit # 1,
Set the switches on the 1480-00 as follows:

12345678

Programming Caller ID
ICLID Enable
1 Verify the programming for ICLID enable, +4+%3226, Flash 56.
2

Press Button [I].

Dial [I ] on the keypad and press HOLD.

I/O Ports
1

Verify the programming for the I/O ports, +M3226, Flash 15.

Select the I/O port, Button 1, 2 (SIUI, SIU2).

Dial [5] on the keypad and press HOLD to select 2400 baud.

CO Lines
i

Verify the programing for the CO lines, WK3226, Flash 40.

Enter the CO line range for the Caller ID Unit.

3 Press HOLD.
4

Press Button [21] (Page C).

Press Button [2], ring delay timer.

6
7

Enter 04 (minimum) and press HOLD.

..I

Reset the system and Caller ID Unit.

Issue I- December 1998

L1 _..
_ :i
. _..
.\ “.

l!ifikll~lmlwl~lml~~
STARPLUS Triad-S lnstallafion Manual

SMDR
The SMDR feature provides detailed records of all outgoing and/or incoming, long distance only or all calls,
The SMDR Qualification Timer determines the time needed to determine a valid SMDR call for reporting
purposes. By default, this timer is set to 30 seconds and is variable from 00-60 seconds in one second
increments. This feature is enabled or disabled in system programming. By default, SMDR is disabled and set
to record long distance calls only. A printout format of 80 characters maximum or 30 characters maximum
may be selected in system programming. The standard format is 80 characters per line. A 30 character
format generates three lines per message. If the SMDR feature is enabled, the system starts collecting
information about the call as soon as it starts and terminates when the call ends. If the call was longer than
30 seconds, the following information is printed (see next two pages) :

l5lllslll!illmll5llmlml~i
STARPLUS

Triad-S installation

Manual

issue 7 - December 1998

30 character format selected:
123456789L23456789il23456789i

AAA BB HH:MM:SS HH:MM MM/DD/YY(CR)(LF)
HCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC;;W;CCC;;K;cR>GGGGGGGGGGGG
STA CO TOTAL
116 08 0O:OZ:OO 14:13 05/11/90(CR)(Lt-)
0123456789012345678901234(CR~~LF)
123456789012(CR)(LF)

_ _ _. . .
-.-_.
F .-. . .
‘:=; -

80 character format selected:
123456789~123456789~123456789~123456789~123456789~123456789~123456789~123456789~
AAA BB HH:MM:SS ;;Hz;: MM;;;;YY W;CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
GGGGGGGGGGGG (CR)(LF)
STA CO TOTAL
ACCOUNT CODE< >< XOST
116 08 0O:OZ:OO 14:13 05/11/90 0123456789012345678901234 123456789012(ER)TLF)

80 character format with Call Cost

Displav

feature enabled:

-4
123456789~123456789~~23456789~1234567890123456789~123456789~123456789~123456789~
AAA BB HH:MM:SS ;;Wly MM;;;;YY K;f;;CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
GGGGGGGGGGGG (CR)(LF)
STA CO TOTAL
ACCOUNT CODE<->+>COST
116 08 0O:OZ:OO 14:13 05/11/90 0123456789012345678901234
123456789012<~>000.0O(CR)(LF)

BO character format for DISA Calls:
123456789~123456789~123456789~123456789~123456789~1234567B9~123456789~123456789~
4A BB HH:MM:SS W&l MM;;K&YY tW;;CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC GGGGGGGGGGGG (CR)(LF)
TOTAL
3STA
4 0CO
1 00:02:00
14:13 05/11/90 I
ACCOUNT CODE+>+~COST
31 04 00:04:54 14:15 05/11/90 10123456789012345678901234123456789012~~~000.00(CR)(LF)

ICLID

30 character format selected:

123456789h23456789;1234567B9;
STA CO TOTAL
START
DATE
100 01 00:00:19 09:32 10/24/94(CR)(LF)
1
602.443-6000(CR)(LF)
123456789012
**(CR)(LF)

Table 2-3: SMDR Printout

l5lllslllrll~lisnl~l~l~~
issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S installation

Manual

ICLID 80 character format selected:
ACCOUNT CODE<-><-XOST
STA CO TOTAL
100 01 00:00:36 04:37 06/19/92 11-602-443-6000
**(CR)(LF)
**VODAVI
(CR)(LF)
**
01 0O:OO:OO 04:38 06/19/92 Ul-602-443-6000
**VODAVI
(CR)(LF)
AAA = Station originator or Trunk on DISA and Off-Net (CO Line) calls,
BB = Outside line number
HH:MM:SS = Duration of call in Hours, Minutes and Seconds
HH:MM = Time of day (start time) in Hours and Minutes
MM/DD/YY = Date of Call
H = Indicates call type:
I = Incoming*
0 = Outgoing
T = Transferred*
U = Unanswered calls for ICLID SMDR call records
CC = Number dialed
&-*
..GG = Last Account code entered (optional)
ccij = Carriage return
(LF) = Line Feed

Table 2-3: SMDR Printout

wi5ll~l~ll=iill5ll~ll5il
STARPLUS Triad-S lnstallafion

Manual

Issue I- December 1998

Issue 7 - December 1998

Inll57l~ll5ilinl~ll5Ill5l~

STARPLUS Triad-S Installation Mutx~al

Prior to actual power up and initialization, check out the STARPLUS Triad-S System to avoid start up delays
or improper loading. A step-by-step checklist is provided for this purpose.

Preliminary Procedures
1 Make sure the Basic Key Service Unit (BKSU) is properly grounded to cold water pipe or
earth ground.
2

Verify that all expander modules are firmly seated onto their connectors.

Inspect the MDF for shorted wiring and improper polarity that would affect the Digital
Terminal or DSS console.

Make certain the lithium battery switch (SW2) on the MBU of the BSKU is set to the ON
position to enable the battery backup option.

Make sure the MDF cables connected to the KSU are secure and are plugged into the
correct position.

I ’
\

Power Up Sequence
The power up sequence involves 1) the proper application of AC power to the system and 2) defaulting the
system. A successful power up is assured if the installation checklist is followed.
1

Plug the AC power cord of the Key Service Unit into the dedicated 117V AC outlet.

Remove the BKSU cover, set SW1 on the MBU to the ON position. Set (SW2) (BATT) to
the ON position.

Turn the power switch of the KSU to ON.

Set (SWI) on the MBU to the OFF position to retain changes to the database.

The system is ready for programming. If problems occur, refer to Section 4,
Maintenance and Troubleshooting.

Table 3-1: Power Supply Tests

I s s u e I- December 1998

STARPLUS

mml5lll.5llu;il~lmll5l~
Triad-S Installation Manual

Introduction
This section is provided as a guideline in isolating and resolving functional problems that may be
encountered as a result of improper use or component failure of the STARPLUS Triad-S systems, Other
failures, such as no dial tone from the central office, must also be considered as an overall troubleshooting
procedure.

System Programming and Verification
System operation should be verified as per the programmed customer database once all customer database
programming was completed. A hard copy of the customer database can be printed from the system and
should be kept on-site and up to date for future reference.
System must be initiuhzed before the customer
database is programmed.

The STARPLUS Triad-S systems are highly-featured digital switches and, as such, feature activation can
sometimes be mistaken for improper operation. First, verify all programmable features are enabled for the
phone or function in question. Then compare the suspected improper operation with the feature operation
description to determine which feature is causing conflict. Be aware that some features can override others
and take precedence in operational priority. Then make the necessary programming changes in customer
database programming to acquire the desired operation.
If feature operation is not the cause of the suspected problem, then general troubleshooting procedures
should be employed. A basic guideline for determining the cause of a reported problem is given below:
I

Verify that system programming is correct and that the suspected feature, circuit or
function was enabled in programming.

Check the installation cabling/wiring and connectors for cuts, shorts or loose
connections.

By verifying correct operation for each segment of the installation and system, the source of the problem is
isolated and can thereby be identified and resolved.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

4-2

Telephone and Terminal Troubleshooting
IRl~liritllFlml~l~~~~~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~i~l~l~l~l~i~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~i~l~l

Telephone and Terminal Troubleshooting
This section discusses general functions on a variety of key telephones and terminals available for use on
the system. It is assumed that basic troubleshooting skills in the identification and resolution of basic
problems are already possessed (e.g., static/noise heard on conversation, one phone only; Replace worn
handset cord).

Keyset Self Test
The STARPLUS Triad-S system contains a test mode feature that supports the off-line testing of digital
keysets and DSS units. The term off-line means that the unit under test is operationally disconnected from
the switch during the test operation. Keysets not under test continue to operate in the normal manner.
Tests are provided to verify the keyset and DSS LED, LCD, and keyboard button operations.
1

The test mode is entered by taking a keyset’s handset off hook.

Press the SPEED button and dial [7#] on the dial pad. This disconnects the keyset from
the system and brings up the Test Mode Menu on the keyset’s LCD. The test mode is
exited by putting the handset back on hook. This reconnects the keyset to the system.

Test Mode Menu: The menu allows the operator to select a test mode by pressing the mode number at the
dial pad. The operator can always return to the main test menu by pressing [##I.
SELECT l:LCDLED 2:KEYBTN
3: DSSBTN

Keyset LCD/LED Test
This test outputs a series of continuously repeated LCD string messages to LCD lines 1 and 2. The set of
strings consists of the letters A through X and a through x. The next set of strings are:
PICKUP TRUCK SPEED ZONE!
*** STANDING BACK ***
4

The strings are alternately displayed on lines 1 and 2 of the LCD display,

Issue I- December 1998

kilmlk.!m5ll~lmll5lll5l~
STARPLUS Triad-S Installation Manual

Keyset Button Test
1

Pressing a keyset button turns on the LED and displays an LCD message identifying the
button number.

PRESS KEYSET BUTTONS
<---------DIGIT1
a

Each time the selected button is pressed it sequences through the table of flash rates
available.

Button

ipm

TYPO

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14

On
30
60
60
240
240
480
480
15
120
120
30
480
480

Steady
Flash
Flash
Double Wink
Flash
Flutter
Flash
Flutter
Flash
Flash
Flutter
Double Flash
Double Wink
Double Flash

Table 4-1: Flash Rates
3

Pressing dial pad keys display an LCD message that indicates which digit was pressed.
Pressing the H-T-P switch from one position to another causes the word H-POS,
T-POS, or P-POS to display.

LEDs can be tested independently of the KEYS by pressing the flex LED button.

DSS LED/Button Test
When the DSS test is selected and a DSS test is invoked, ALL DSS units associated with the keyset are placed
in the test mode.
PRESS DSS BUTTONS
<--mm -I----hll5llI5llWl5llkll~l~l

JARPLUS Triad-S lnsfallafion Manual

Issue I- December 1998

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

4-4

Keyset Self Test
Inl~llr;lllsllll~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l

If no DSS unit is associated with the keyset, the keyset display indicates NO DSS. The DSS LED test causes all
the LEDs to light steady. All LEDs remain lit steady until a DSS flex button is pressed. Pressing a DSS button
turns on the DSS button LED and displays an LCD message on the associated keyset identifying the DSS
button number (01 to 48). In addition, it turns off the previously selected flex LED.
PRESS DSS BUTTONS
BTNOl

<----W-B- --

Conditions:

Test mode interrupts the normal operation of a keyset or DSS.

Key

Telephones/Terminals

The following actions apply to multi-line key telephones:

Symptom

Action

No power to keyset

Verify that keyset is connected to correct
type of station card.

No handsfree answer-back on
intercom

On digital keysets, the mode of intercom
answer is programmable.

CO line/station button will not access
CO line/station

Check flexible button programming for that
button.

Speakerphone does not work

Check station programming for
speakerphone enable.
Verify phone is a speakerphone model.

Cannot call another intercom station

Check off hook preference programming.

No camp-on signals or override to
phone

Check station programming for override
enable

Table 4-2: Key Telephones/Terminals

I s s u e I- December 7998

l!iwilll5llmllsll~llsll~l
STARPLUS Triad-S lnstullation Manual

Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Keyset

Self Test

Single Line Telephones
The following applies to all 2500 type single line telephones connected to the system,

Symptom

Action

Phone will not dial out

Verify correct SLT type programmed in
station identification. Verify line group
access programming.

No ringing to phone

Check CO line ringing assignments in
programming.

Message waiting lamp does not work

Check station ID assignment in programming.
Make sure the MSGU is installed on the
CSIB.

Cannot call another intercom station

Check off hook preference programming.
Put all unused CO lines in a CO line group not
currently being used.

Table 4-3: Single Line Telephones

DSWDLS Console
The following applies to DSS/DLS Consoles:
Symptom

Action

Buttons on DSSlDLS do not function
as labeled

Check station identification assignment in
programming for correct DSS map
assignment.

Pressing buttons on DSS does not
activate keyset

DSS must be assigned to keyset in station ID
programming.

No power

Verify unit is connected to the correct type
station board (digital or electronic).
Table 4-4: DSS/DLS Console

Lr;lltf;llmImlml~lmlml
STARPLUSTriad-S

/nstallation

Manual

lssoe I- December 1998

. . .

4-6

Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CO Line Card Functions

CO Line Card Functions
The system can be equipped with either a CKIB or CSIB line interface card. Each card type contains three (3)
Loop Start CO lines.
Symptom

Action

3 loop start CO lines on the system
do not work

Check or change card. Check CO line
demarcation.

CO line(s) does not ring

Check CO line ring assignment in
programming.

Noise or cross-talk on the line

Check CO line at demarcation for cross-talk.
Check with different card at different
station.

Table 4-5: CO Line Loop Start Board

(CKIBESIB Board)

System Functions
The following functions are related to system resources and the common equipment boards controlling
them.
Symptom

Action

Basic KSU and MBU

Complete system failure

Verify that power switch is on, power cord is
plugged in. Check power LED on MBU (left
edge of card). Verify PMU was installed with
software.

Any correctly activated feature does
not work properly

Check system programming related to
specific feature.

Loss of system intercom dial tone
and call processing tones

Check off hook preferences, headset mode,
and verify on another telephone.

Loss of customer database
programming

Verify status of initialization switch,
database backup battery connection,
battery voltage, and system programming.

Customer database cannot be
programmed

Verify that no one else is accessing
database programming. Check RS232 cable
and verify programming was performed
from Station 100.

Table 4-6: System Functions
Issue I- December 1998

Isrlmlml~ll5lll5llmll5lL
lnstollafion Manual

STARPLUS Triad-S

. A.
.:-7:‘.‘.
:z::.
. . . .-

Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Remote Maintenance

Symptom

Action

Modem Unit (MODU)
1

Cannot access system database
programming remotely

Miscellaneous lnterf ace Board

Verify modem installation and programming.
Check modem baud rate.

(MISU)

Music Channel 2 is not functioning

Verify MSU is installed and check music
source.

Cannot communicate with external
devices

Check the baud rate programming and the
COMM port selection and cable.

DTMF Receiver Unit (DTMF-A)
1

DTMF single line telephones cannot
dial out

Verify DTMF-A is installed.

Table 4-6: System Functions

Remote Maintenance
General Overview
The Remote Maintenance feature allows authorized personnel to survey system, slot configuration information
and programming. This can be done through the optional modem or data terminal connected via the ~~-232~
port on the optional MISU Module. The commands are entered from a keyboard and are limited to those listed.

Overview of Maintenance Commands
There are four basic commands available in the Remote Maintenance feature. All commands begin with a
single character, followed by a space, another character and an optional digit or digits. All commands are
terminated with the [Enter] key.

Maintenance Password
The Maintenance feature, like Programming, is enteredvia a six-character alphanumeric string. The password
prompt is given by pressing [Enter] at the device connected to the RS232 port. After the prompt displays, enter
the password, then press [Enter]. Proper entry of the password displays the maintenance prompt. The
Maintenance password is: {CONFIG]

STARPLUS Triad-S

hstallation Manual

hli5il~lmlmlml~iml
issue 1 - December 1998

4-a

Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Remote Maintenance

I;ri(llsli~llFllll~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~~l~l~l~~~l~l~~~l~l~l~L

Exit Maintenance
The Exit command terminates the current Maintenance feature session. The Exit command format
is: maint>X

Figure 4-l: Maintenance Help Menu

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS

l5lll!zllmlmlmlmll5il~~
Triad-S Installation Manual

I .-

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

4-9

Remote Maintenance
~llrrltnll~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~i~l~l~i~l~l~l~l~i~l~i~l~l~~

System Configuration
Figure 4-2: System Configuration is a configuration of the STARPLUS Triad-S system and displays what is
SF,
.
printed
when:
.<’ ;
6
;: -2
6 The installer enters DS at the maint> prompt.

Figure 4-2: System Configuration

Where:
o Column 1 lists the card slot.
+ Column 2 lists card type of that card slot.
+ Column 3 lists card status:
00s status can indicate the entire card is out of service, or a specific station is not installed or
installed but not operational.
INS status can indicate a specific station is installed and operating correctly.
* Column 4 lists card options.
+ Column 5 lists firmware version of card.

STARPLUSTriad-S

hstallation Manual

hlk5lllnl~lill5ll~l~l
I s s u e I- December 7998

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

4-10

Remote Maintenance

Inl~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l

Station Configuration
Figure 4-3; Station Conjguration illustrates what is printed out when:
+

The installer enters DSl

Figure

at the maint> prompt

4-3: Station Configuration

Where: Stations
Column 1 lists the station number.
Column 2 indicates station type (keyset, DSS, SLT).
Keyset - ID 0 = Key station
DSS/DLS - ID 1 = DSS Map 1
SLT-ID 5 = SLT
SLT w/Lamp -ID 6 = SLT with Message Waiting
Column 3 indicates status:
00s status can indicate the entire card is out of service, or a specific station is not installed or
installed but not operational.
INS status can indicate a specific station is installed and operating correctly,
Column 4 indicates if the station has an LCD Display.

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S installation

Manual

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

4-11

Remote Maintenance
lslllnlIsrllnl~lmlmltsjllnllnlrs;ilsllllstllnllnllnlrnlirllInllnllnllnlLE;i(~l~llslllfllL41l~llflllsilllEitL

Event Trace Buffer
The Event Trace Buffer is used to store and dump event traces (up to 30) that occur just prior to a
';.%
_- .-.-.: STARPLUS Triad-S system soft or hard restart. These can then be reviewed by authorized personnel to aid in
c
“:‘1;’ system troubleshooting.
The basic format for the commands are:

i.
\_

T -displays the current status of the Event trace buffer
T 0 -turns the Trace buffer OFF.
T 1 -turns the Trace buffer ON to record events prior to a soft system reset,
T 2 -turns the Trace buffer ON to record events prior to a hard system restart.
T 3 -turns the Trace buffer ON to record events prior to either a soft reset or a
hard system restart.
4 d E -dumps Trace Events stored from last system reset (soft or hard),
4 d< space> b - permits maintenance personnel to determine the busy status of all the
busy keysets and CO Lines in the system, including the Tl lines,
4 RC space > SXXX -permits a specific station to be reset.
4 R< space > CXX - permits a specific CO Line to be reset.

DTMF Receiver Trace
The CONFIG utility to allow technicians to take specific DTMF receivers in/out of service. This is useful for
troubleshooting DTMF receiver problems to isolate a specific DTMF receiver that may be faulty.
+

Connect a PC with communication software to the I/O port 1 on the MISU. At the ENTER PASSWORD
prompt type CONFIG and press [ENTER].
The basic format for the commands are:
o

:_.cs.LcI-.,. .
--‘-.c-;:
e

dr - to display the status of all DTMF receivers in the system. The display
shows the receiver number, cabinet location, card slot location, receiver status, and state of the
receiver.
To make a receiver busy:
d< space>rX?i - Where XX is the specific receiver number to make busy,
To make a receiver available:
4

d< space>rXX - Where XX is the specific receiver number to make available.

S JARPLUS

Triad-S /nStCl//Utio/l hhX/U/

Lnll5llml~lmlmll5lll5ll
I s s u e I - December 1998

4-12

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Remote System Monitor
~lilll;nl~ltnl~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~i~l~l~l~l~l~L

Remote System Monitor
General Overview
The Remote System Monitor feature provides access to the installed system for diagnostic purposes, These
capabilities benefit service personnel enabling them to support the end user. Different levels of access, via
password, allows authorized personnel to trace, monitor and upload critical information directly from the
STARPLUS Triad-S system. This provides a more accurate means of acquiring system information that
leads to a quick resolution of problems that may occur. This is all done without interfering with ongoing call
processing or normal system operation, and in many cases may be performed without a site visit. The
optional 9600 baud modem is used for remote access.
Capabilities allowed and reserved for this high level troubleshooting in addition are:
o Monitor Mode
o Enable and Disable Event Trace
e Dump Trace Buffer (up-load)

Monitor Password
The Monitor feature, like Maintenance, is entered via a six-character alphanumeric string. The password
prompt is accessed by pressing the [Enter] key at the PC connected to the MISU. After the prompt displays,
enter the password, then press [Enter]. Proper entry of the password results in the man> prompt. The
Maintenance password is: { ETRACE}
The remote monitor feature is intended for use
guidance and instruction by authorized personnel
Technical Support. Cufe and caution must be
using this feuture us permanent damage to the
ture can occur.

I s s u e I - December 1998

on/y under the
from
VODAVI
observed when
softwure struc-

r!!iIllsllslmlmlrlmll5iL
STARPLUS Triad-S hstallation Manual

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

4-13

Remote System Monitor
Lnllnlinli?nl~llnllnr~sillsllInl~llnlinilnllnlll~~~l[nl~l~llsrllr;l~l~l;rlln~~l~l~l~l~l~~

Help Menu (3)
A convenient Help Menu is provided by typing [?I, then pressing [Enter]. The following displays:

Figure 4-4: Help Menu

Dump Memory Data
Three options allow the memory structure to be dumped for viewing. The three options are entered as
follows:
c [c] -Dump CO Line memory structure
s [s] -Dump Station memory structure
d [a] [a] -Dump a memory address structure
The data obtained from these commands is in hexadecimal format and is used primarily for manufacturerlevel support.
[ctq + c uborts t/w Dot0 Dump und returns to the
man> pomp t.

STARPLUS

Triad-S installation Manual

lmkilll5lll5ilill5llmlml
Issue I- December 1998

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

4-14

Remote System Monitor
~lnllnllnlLslllsl~ls(l~1~1~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l~l1411~1~lUill~l~l~l~ill~lLnllsll~lisll

Event Trace Mode
The T command enables and disables the STARPLUS Triad-S system Trace mode. While the trace mode is
enabled events for the trace desired displays on the monitor, printer or PC connected to the STARPLUS
Triad-S system. To view the current status of the trace mode type [T] at the man> prompt, the
following screen displays:

Figure 4-5: Trace Mode Status
1

To enable an Event Trace, type t (space bar).

Indicate type of trace desired [d], where d is determined as follows:

B = Board event trace (traces events associated with PCB)
M = Miscellaneous State event trace
P = Pulse Coded Modulation (PCM) traces events associated with voice communications.
C = CO Line (LCOB) States (traces events associated with CO Line activity)
S = Station (STA) States (traces events associated with Station activity)
E = Error Messages (traces error messages)
Q = Queue (QUE) Events (traces queuing events, i.e., DTMF receiver, UCD, LCR, etc.)
D = Device Command (traces commands to peripheral devices).

I s s u e 7 - December 7998

l5llmll5llmllnlmlml~~
STARPLUS Triad-S hstallation
Manual

.- .

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

4-15
Remote System Monitor
lnllrrllmltsrllnll;ill~llnl~lI;rll;r(l~l~lllill~l~l~l~ltjtltnl~llnlIrill~lLsll~l~l~lI;ill~l~llsl~
3

Enter the specific board, CO line or Station number of the trace desired or type [all], if
all boards, CO lines or Stations events are desired.

= CO Line port
loo-131 = Station location
All = All Boards, CO lines or Stations
001-012

Press [Enter] to enable the trace. A screen similar to the following displays:

Figure 4-6: Enable Event Trace
5

To disable or turn off a particular trace mode, do not enter a specific board, CO Line or
Station Number (i.e., ts to disable station event trace).

To have event traces displayed on the screen, you must first exit the MONitor mode by typing x at the man>
prompt. After you exit the event(s), the trace begins as shown in Figure 4-7: Event Truce on the following
pageUnless instructed by personnel at Vodavi Technical Support, do not leave
the trace mode enabled for extended time periods. The system dumps the
requested event(s) trace which may use up paper or fill memory buffers on
the collecting device. It is recommended that the trace events be
disab/ed
(turned off) for all event(s) traces before leav/ng the system site unless
otherwise instructed by Technical Support.

brllurllr5WiWilll!5lll5llurii
STARPLUS

Triad-S Installation Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

4-16

Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Remote System Monitor

The Modify Memory Command is for engineering use only.
Use of this command can alter or damage the Triad-S System operating

database which can result in system malfunction.

If this occurs, it is necessary

to power the system down and re-initialize the database, then complete/y
reprogram the customer data.

Exit the Monitor Mode
The Exit command terminates the current Monitor enable/disable session. If Event(s) Trace was or is still
enabled, event records display only after exiting the MONitor mode. The Exit command format is: man> X
sta 100: StateSta 100: StateSta 100: StateSta 100: StateSta 100: StateSta 100: Statesta 100: statesta 100: statesta 100: statesta 100: StateSta 100: StateSta 100: Statesta 100: statesta 100: StateSta 100: StateSta 100: StateSta 100: StateSta 100: Statesta 100: Statesta 100: Statesta 100: Statesta 100: stateState-

DIAL-TONE. Evt- Dial Pad (25).
Data-7
DIALING, F&z= Dial Pad (25).
Data-5
DIALINQ, Evt- Int Page (69).
Data-S
PAGING, EvtDial Pad (25).
Data-3
PAGING,
Evt- Dial Pad (25).
Data-9
PAQING, E"t- Dial Pad
(25).
Data-5
PAGING, Evt- Dial Pad (25).
Data-S
PAGING, Evt- Dial Pad (25).
Data-7
PAGING, Evt- Dial Pad (25).
Data-4
PAGING,
Evt- Dial Pad (25),
Data-3
PAGING, Evt- Dial Pad (25),
Data-9
PAGINGS,
Evt- Dial Pad (25).
Data-9
PAGING, Evt- Dial Pad
(25). Data-9
PAGING,
EWt- Dial Pad (25).
Data-7
PAGING, Evt- Dial Pad (25,.
Data-11
PAGING,
Evt- Dial Pad (25).
Data-3
PAGING, EvtDial Pad (25).
Data-2
PAGINQ, Evt- Page T/O (150). Data-0
MISC-TONE. Evt- Dial Pad (25).
Data-4
PISC-TONE,
Evt- Dial Pad (25).
Data-9
MISC-TONE, Evt- Key Data
(26).
Data-32
MISC-TONE, Evt- Man Key (145). Data--l
MISC-TONE, Evt- On Hook (17).
Data-O

Figure 4-7: Event Trace

I s s u e 7 - December 7998

i.5ilinllr;lllnl~l~ll5ll~l”
installation Manual

STARPLUS Triad-S

System Programming Manual
issue 1
December 1998

Part Number: 5050-13

0 1998 VODAVI Communications Systems, Inc.
All Rights Reserved

This material is copyrighted by VODAVI Communications Systems. Any unauthorized reproductions, use or disclosure of this material, or any part thereof, is strictly prohibited and is a
violation of the Copyright Laws of the United States (17 U.S.C. Section 101 et. seq.).
VODAVI reserves the right to make changes in specifications at any time and without
notice. The information furnished by VODAVI in this material is believed to be accurate and
reliable, but is not warranted to be true in all cases.
DvxpLY@*IS a Registered trademark of VODAVI Communications Systems, Inc.

STARPLUS'" is a Registered trademark of VODAVI Communications Systems, Inc.
Triad4Ph*

is a Registered trademark of VODAVI Communications Systems, Inc.

_
i

;,:.;. :
2’
-_ .’ ’

Customer Database Programming

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Mode Entry (Key Station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Mode Entry (Data Terminal or PC) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Data Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Database Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Database Upload/Download Routine .. : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upload/Download through Remote Administration , .
2

. .

.
. .
. *

System Parameters Programming

Sys tern Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Hold Recall Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exclusive Hold Recall Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attendant Recall Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Recall Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preset Forward Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forward / No Answer Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PauseTimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Park Recall Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conference / DISA Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paging Time-out Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CO Ring Detect Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLT DTMF Receiver Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Wait Reminder Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLT Hook Flash Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLT Hook Flash Debounce Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMDR Call Qualification Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Call Back Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reminder Ring Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Release Guard Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inter-Digit Time-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional System Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repeat Redial Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STARPLUS

2-l

...............

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-3
2-4
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-9

...............

..............

2-10
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13

.............

.............
.............
.............
.............
.............

2-13

2-14
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
.............

Triad-S System

Programming Manual

Attendant Display Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
,2-17
Call Coverage Ring Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-18
Modem Answer Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-18
Pulse Dial Inter-Digit Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-19
DTMF On/Off Time Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
,2-19
System Features 1 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-20
Attendant Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
,2-22
Hold Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-22
External Night Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-23
Executive Override Warning Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-23
PageWarningTone....................................................2-2
4
Least Cost Routing (LCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-25
Account Codes - Forced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
,2-26
GroupListening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..2-2 6
IdleSpeakerMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..2-2 7
Call Cost Display Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-27
Music On Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-28
Call Qualifier Tone Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-28
System Features 2 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-29
Distinctive CO Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-32
Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-32
Call Forward Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
,2-33
ExternalDay Ring.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..2-3 4
Overflow Station Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-34
Direct Transfer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
,235
StationIDLock.......................................................2-3
5
LCRCallProgress.. .................................................
..2-3 6
One-Touch Recording Warn Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
,2-37
RingbackonTransfer..................................................2-3
7
Programmable Flash Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
,2-38
Incoming CO Line Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-40
Incoming Intercom Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-40
Call Forward Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-41
Message Wait /VM Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
,2-41
Message Callback - DSS / BLF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-42
DoNotDisturb-DSS/BLF
.............................................
2-42
AutoCallback-DSS/BLF
.2-43
.............................................
UCD Available / Unavailable - DSS / BLF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-43
kx~e I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

iii

TransferCORinging
RecallCORinging

.................................................
...................................................
QueuedCORinging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exclusive Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In-Use Hold (I-Hold) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Camp-OnButton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CallbackButton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LineQueueButton.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do Not Disturb Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intercom Hold Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Parameters Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leading Digit Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leading Digit Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Centrex Digit Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four-Digit Voicemail ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOH Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attendant Station Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PBX Dialing Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Executive / Secretary Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On-Board Relay Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Baud Rate Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port#1,#2,#3BaudRates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AccessCodes.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISAAccessCode
...................................................
Database Admin Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMDR Enable / Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Long Distance /All Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character Print Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BaudRateDisplay.....................................................2-6
SMDR Port Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weekly Night Mode Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic /Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Day of Week Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directory Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

..2-4 4
..2-4 5
..2-4 5
.2-46
.2-46
.2-47
..2-4 7
..2-4 8
..2-4 8
.2-49
.2-49
.2-50
.2-52
.2-53
.2-54
,254
.2-55
.2-55
.2-56
.2-57
,2-57
.2-58
,259
.2-59
..2-6 0
..2-6 1
.2-61

-2-62
.2-62
.2-63
.2-63
4
.2-64
.2-65
.2-65
.2-66
.2-66

I s s u e I- December 1998

HuntCroups..............................................................Z-7
Hunt Group Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station / Pilot Hunting Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verified Account Codes Table/Traveling Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local Number / Name Translation Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3

0
.2-70
.2-71
.2-72
.2-74

CO Line Attribute Programming

Page A Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTMF /Dial Pulse Programming . . , ,
CO / PBX Programming . . . . . . . . . . .
. *
Universal Night Answer (UNA) . . . . . .
* .
. .
DISA Trunk-to-Trunk (Per CO Line) .
. .
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Supervision Programming . . . . .
DISA Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .
Line Group Programming . . . . . . . . .
* .
Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CO Line Ringing Assignments . . . . . . .
CO Line Identification Display . . . . . .
Trunk Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Ring Assignments . . . . . . . . . .
Page B Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmit Volume Option . . . . . . . . . .
Preset Call Forward Destination . . . . .
Preset Forward Voicemail ID . . . . . . .
Universal Day Answer (UDA) . . . . . . .
Music On Hold (per CO Line) . . . . . .
. .
Distinctive Ringing (per CO Line) ....
. *
Page C Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ring Delay Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reseize Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guard Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preset Forward Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous CO Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . .
* . .
Dial Pulse Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . .

I s s u e I - December 1998

. *
. .
. .
. .

. .

. *
. .
. .

. .

. *

. .
. .
* .

. .
8.
. .
. .

3-l
........................ 3-2
........................ 3-2
........................ 3-3
........................ 3-3
........................ 3-4
........................ 3-5
........................ 3-6
......................... 3-7
........................ 3-7
........................ 3-9
....................... 3-10
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
....................... 3-14
....................... 3-15
....................... 3-16
....................... 3-17
....................... 3-17
....................... 3-1s
....................... 3-18
....................... 3-20
........................

.......................

........................

3-21
3-22
3-22

3-23
........................ 3-23
........................ 3-24
3-25
........................

. **

STARPLUS

........................

Triad-S System Programming Manual

- b ::
L. I,’
6,:,-

7.
:.;;+.:t
-.N”./e. S.;ds-1
c

Station Attributes Programming

Page A Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-l
ProgrammingSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..4- 1
Description...........................................................41
PagingAccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
...4- 2
DoNotDisturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..4- 3
Conference Enable / Disable (Per Station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-3
Executive Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-4
Privacy (Per Station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-5
System Speed Dial Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-6
LineQueuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..4- 7
PreferredLineAnswer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..4- 7
Off-Hook Voice Over (OHVO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-4-S
CallFonvarding........................................................48
Forced Least Cost Routing (LCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-4-5,
ACD Supervisor Monitor with Barge-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-9
Executive Override Blocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-10
CO Line Ringing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-l 1
Name / Number Display at Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-12
PageBIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.,.4-l 2
Programming Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-12
Description..........................................................4-1
3
Station Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-14
Station ID for DSS / DLS Console with Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-14
SLTStationID........................................................4-1
6
SLT with Message Waiting Lamp Station ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-16
Station Day Class of Service (COS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-17
Station Night Class of Service (COS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-4-18
Speakerphone / Headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-19
PickupGroup(s)......................................................4-2
0
PagingZone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..4-2 0
Preset Call Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
,4-2 1
COLineGroupAccess..................................................4-2
2
LCR Class of Service (COS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-23
Off-HookPreference.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..4-2 3
FlexibleButton.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..4-2 4
KeysetMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..4-2 9
Voicemail ID Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-30
STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

issue I - December 1998

Display Flexible Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cordless KTU Feature Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5

i i .,
,.:

ICLID Route Programming

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling Number / Name Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Incoming Number/Name for SMDR Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unanswered Call Management Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ICLID Ringing Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description...........................................................5View ICLID Ringing Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description...........................................................5ICLIDFeatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable/Disable.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NameinDisplay.......................................................5Baud Rate Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PortAssignment.......................................................56

.4-30
.4-33
..5- 1
.5-l
,5-2
,5-2
.5-3
.5-3
4
,5-5
6
..5- 6
.5-6
..5- 7
7
,5-8
8

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

ACDGroupProgramming.....................................................6- I
Programming Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.6-I
Description...........................................................6I
Alternate ACD Group Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.6-2
ACD Overflow Station Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.6-3
ACD Recorded Announcement Assignment(s) (RAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
ACDSupervisor........................................................65
ACD Auto Wrap-Up Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.6-5
ACD CIQ Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.6-6
ACD Station Assignment(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.6-6
View ACD Station Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(6-8
ACDTimers................................................................68
Programming Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.6-8
Description.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..6- 9
ACDRingTimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..6- 9
ACD Message Interval Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.6-IO
ACD Overflow Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.6-IO
Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

~ .1 - ’

vii

ACD No-Answer Recall Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACD No-Answer Retry Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guaranteed Message Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACD Announcement Tables (RAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PC / ACD Interface Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable / Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trace Port Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Baud Rate Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACDGroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alternate ACD Group Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACD Overflow Station Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACD Recorded Announcement Assignment(s) (RAN) . , ,
ACD Supervisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACD Auto Wrap-Up Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACD CIQ Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACD Station Assignment(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View ACD Station Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7

. .
. .
. .

Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)

UCD Group Programming . . . . . . . . . , . , , , . . . , ,
Programming Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , .
Description , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , , .
Alternate UCD Group Assignment . . . , , . . . .
UCD Overflow Station Assignment . . . . . , , .
UCD Announcement Assignment(s) (RAN) .
UCD Auto Wrap-Up Timer . . . . . . . . , , , , . . .
UCD Station Assignment(s) . . . , . , , , , . . . .
UCD Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . , , , . . . . .
Programming Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , , .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , , .
UCD Ring Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . .
UCD Message Interval Timer . . . . . . . . . . , , .
S

.6-11
.6-12
.6-12
.6-14
.6-14
.6-15
96-15
.6-15
.6-15
.6-16
.6-16
.6-17
.6-17
.6-17
.6-1s
.6-19
.6-19
.6-20
. . .6-21
. . 36-22
.6-22
.6-23
* . . . .6-24

JARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

. * . . .
. . * . . .
. .
. .
. .

. *
. *
. .

.7-l

.7-l
.7-l
17-2

. .

. *
. .
. .

. .

.7-3
.7-3

. *
* .

.7-4
.7-4
.7-6
.7-6
.7-6
-7-6

. .

. .
. .

* 7-7

I s s u e I - December 7998

...
VIII

UCD Overflow Timer . . . , . . .
UCD No-Answer Recall Timer
UCD No-Answer Retry Timer
UCD Announcement Tables (RAN) .
Programming Steps . . . . . . ,
Description . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . .

. .
*
*
.
.

. .
. .
. *

* *... *.,,,..
. . . . ...*....

7-8
7-8

.
.
. . .
* . .

8 Voicemail Groups

Voicemail Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description...........................................................8Alternate Voicemail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leave Mail Index Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retrieve Mail Index Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station Assignment(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voicemail Outpulsing Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voicemail In-Band Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voicemail Disconnect Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voicemail In-Band Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description...........................................................8Voicemail In-Band Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voicemail Transfer / Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voicemail Broker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voicemail Index Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.8-l
.8- 1
1
.8-2
.8-3
.8-3
,8-4
,8-5
.8-5
.8-7
.8-8
.8-8
8
.8-8
.8-9
.8-9
.8-10
.8-l1

9 Exception Tables

Exception Tables Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . , . . , , . . , , . . . , . . . ,9-l
RELATED ITEMS TO TOLL RESTRICTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
CO/PBXLines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-3
Forced Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
SLT DTMF Receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . .9-3
LCR Versus Toll Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . .9-4
Toll Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . .9-4
Entering Toll Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
Allow Table . a. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
DenyTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-8
I s s u e I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

SpecialTable..........................................................9Display Toll Table Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9
.9-l 1

::-:z 10 Least Cost Routing
ye.-

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , ,
LCR Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LCR Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,
Programming Steps . . . . . . . . . . .
3Digit Area / Office Code Table . .
6-Digit Office Code Table . . . . . . ,
Exception Code Table . . . . . . . . . ,
Route List Table . . . . . . . . . . . , , ,
Insert /Delete Table . . . . . . . . . . .
Daily Start Time Table . . . . . . . . .
Weekly Schedule Table . . . . . . . , .
LCR Routing for Toll Information ,
Default LCR Database . , . . . . . . . .

. .10-l
. *10-l
. . lO-4
. -10-4
. .lO-5
. .10-6
. .lO-7
. .lO-7
.lO-10
-10-12
.lO-13
*10-14
-10-15

. *
. .
. .

.
.
.
*

.
.
.
.

11 initialize Database Parameters

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , .
Programming Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,
Initialize System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,
Initialize CO Line Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initialize Station Attributes . I. . . . . . . . . . . . ,
Initialize CO / Station Port Parameters . . . . , . .
Initialize Exception Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . ,
Initialize System Speed Numbers . . . . . . . . . . ,
Initialize LCR Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , , , , .
Initialize ICLID Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . ,
Initialize Directory Dialing Table Parameters . .
Initialize Hunt Group Parameters . . . . . . . , , , ,
Initialize ACD / UCD Group Parameters . . , , , ,
Initialize Voicemail Group Parameters . . , . , , .
Initialize Verified Account Code Table . . . . . . . ,
System Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

. .

*
*
.
.

. .
. *

*
.
.
.

. . . . . , ,
. . . . . . . . ,

11-l
*. . . . 11-l
. . *. . 11-l
. . . . . 1 l-2
. **. . 11-8
. . . . 11-10
. ***11-12
. . . , 11-12
. . . . 11-14
. . . . 11-14
. . *911-16
. **. 11-17
. . >. 11-18
. **. 11-19
. . . . 11-21
. . . . 11-22
. . . . 11-23
. . . . .

I s s u e I- December 1998

12 Print System Database Parameters

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Database Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print CO Line Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Station Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print CO /Station Port Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Exception Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print System Speed Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print LCRTables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Entire System Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print ICLID - DID Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Directory Dial Table Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Hunt Group Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print ACD / UCD Group Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Voicemail Group Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AbortPrinting.......................................................12-4

I s s u e 7 - December 1998

..12- 1
.12-l
.12-2
.12-5
.12-7
.12-9
,12-10
,12-12
.12-13
.12-26
.12-27
12-31
.12-33
,12-34
la-35
,123
1

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Data Terminal Program Codes Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Button Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HookSwitchActivity...............................................................2-1
LCRFlowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Daily Start Time and Weekly Schedule Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Daily and WeeMy Start Time Table . . . . . . . .
* .
LCR Toll Information Routing Program Form
. .
System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .
CO Line Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Station Attributes
CO /Station Port Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exception Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Speed Numbers . . . . . . . . . .
LCR Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-Digit Table Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . .
ICLID /DID Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .
Directory Dialing Table . . . . . . . . . . .
. .
Hunt Group Parameters . . . . . . . . . .
. .
ACD Group Parameters . . . . . . . . . . .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
Voicemail Group Parameters
DID - TIE Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .
. .
Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . .

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

l-3
l-3
1
..lO- 3
lo-13
1 o-14
1 o-15
12-3
12-6
12-8
1 2-10
12-12
12-14
12-15
12-17
12-29

12-41
12-42
12-44
12-46
12-47
12-49

Issue I- December 1998

xii

Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Timers Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional System Timers Defaults . . . . . . . . . . .
System Features 1 Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Features 2 Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dial Pad Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CO Line Conference Flag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CO Line Privacy Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class of Service (COS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RingingTones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default DID and ICLID Table Entries . . . . . . . . .
Station Privacy Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class of Service (COS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flex Button Codes for Remote Programming , , .
Flex Button Display Designations . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allow / Deny Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LCR Class of Service Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Parameter Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CO Line Attribute Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station Attribute Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CO Port Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station Port Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exception Table Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LCR Table Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ICLID - DID Table Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directory Dialing Table Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hunt Group Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACD / UCD Group Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voicemail Group Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DID - TIE Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verified Account Code Table Defaults . . . . . . . . .

Issue I- December 1998

. .
. *
* .
* .
. .
.
.
.
.
.

. *
* .

.
.
.
*
.

. .

. .
. .

. .

. .
* .
. .

* .
. .
. .

. .
. .
* .
* .

. ,
. .
. ,
. .

* .
. .

STARPLUS

2-15
. * * . 2-20
, . *. 2-29
. . . . 2-38
, *. . 2-68
, . . . . 3-4
. . . * . 3-5
. . . . . 3-8
. . . . 3-18
. . . . 3-29
. . * * . 4-6
* * . . 4-18
. , . . 4-26
. . . . 4-31
. , * * . 9-2
. . . 10-10
. . . . 11-3
. , . . 11-7
* . . * 11-q
. , .ll-11
* . . 11-12
. . * 11-13
. . . 11-15
. . * 11-16
*. . 11-17
* . . 11-18
. . * 11-19
. . . 1 l-20
. . * 11-22
. . 11-23
. . **

Triad-S System Programming Manual

“. ..:-..;-w-,.~Q.
c

.“” Introduction
The STARPLUS Triad-S’” Digital Hybrid Telephone System is programmed to meet each customer’s
individual needs. All programming is done at Station 100 using the digital telephone as the programming
station through an ASCII terminal or PC. The digital display model is required for programming,
When the programming mode is entered, the digital telephone being used no longer operates as a telephone
but as a programming station with all of the buttons redefined. The keys on the dial pad are used to enter
data fields (Program Codes) associated with system, station, and CO line features as well as specific data that
requires a numeric entry. Flexible buttons toggle on or off features, or enable entry of specific data fields,
LEDs and the LCD display provide a visual indication of entered data and their value.
Programming is also performed using an ASCII terminal, or a computer capable of emulating an ASCII
terminal. This form of programming is done locally (on-site) by connecting the terminal directly to the RS23X connector on the Miscellaneous Service Unit (MISU) or is performed remotely (off-site) through the
use of the optional 9600 baud modem. The method and steps to program the system via a PC are identical to
those used when programming from a digital key set. A button to keyboard mapping is provided (see Figure
2-1; Programming Button Mapping) to help minimize familiarization and training time.
The system must be initialized to load default data into memory at the time of installation. If this preprogramming is acceptable to the customer, initialization is all that is needed. Refer to Table Z-1: Dejkdt
values for a listing of all the default values.
When features are programmed, tones are provided to determine if a correct or incorrect entry has been
made. A solid one second tone indicates the data was accepted. An interrupted tone means an error was
made. When this occurs, re-enter the data and information. Until new data is entered and accepted, the
system continues to operate under default or previously entered values.
The system database is updated on a real-time basis as new data is entered, by pressing the Hold button. The
system continues to operate with the current database and is updated with any newly entered or changed
data without interruption to telephone operation or call processing in progress, However, if for example a
station’s attributes are changed while that station is off-hook on an active call, the newly entered data does
not take effect until the station goes on-hook or becomes idle.
When using a PC to program the system, the following chart presents the data terminal characters that are
equivalent to the key set buttons.
issue 1 - December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

Customer Database Programming
Introduction

Some features must have more than one data field programmed for that
feature to work. This information is stated in the ins true tions.

adm>
REMOTE ADMIN KEY DEFINITION
Keyset
Term
Keyset
Term
_ _ _ _ _ _ - _ __ - _ _ - - _
0
0
FLEX 2
W
:
:
FLEX 3
E

1
Keyset

Term

F ~ E x - J - - - a - - - - - - F L E x - i 3 - - - ~ - -

z
7

FLEX
FLEX
FLEX
FLEX

89
*
#
I3
‘

FLEX 910
FLEX 11
FLEX 12
MUTE
HOLD

L
9
*
#
TRANS
FLASH
adm>

45
6
7
8

:
:
I
0P
A
S
!R

FLEX 14
FLEX 15

FLEX
FLEX
FLEX
FLEX

17
16
18
19
20

JH
K
L
:

FLEX 22
2i
FLEX 23
FLEX 24
ON-OFF

s
C
L

Figure 2-l: Data Terminal Program Codes Cross Reference

I s s u e I- December 7998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Customer Database Programming
Introduction

Figure 2-l: Programming Button Mapping

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e I - December 1998

Customer Database Programming

l-4

Introduction

Program
Code

Features

Flex Button

Def auk Value

System Hold Recall Timer

060sec

Exclusive Hold Recall Timer

180sec

Attendant Recall Timer

01 min

Transfer Recall Timer

045sec

Preset Forward Timer

10 set

Call Forward No/Answer Timer

15 set

Pause Timer

2sec

Call Park Recall Timer

180sec

Conference/DISA

10 set

Paging Time-out Timer

15 set

CO Ring Detect Timer

3 (100 ms)

SLT DTMF Receiver Timer

020

Message Wait Reminder Tone

000 min

SLT Hook Flash Timer

10 (1 set)

SLT Hook Flash Debounce Timer

100 ms

SMDR Call Qualification Timer

30sec

Automatic Call Back Timer

03sec

Reminder Ring Timer

00 set

Release Guard Timer

3(300 ms)

Flexible Inter-Digit Time-out

5 set

SYSTEM PARAMETERS
PROGRAMMING
FLASH 01

SYSTEM TIMERS

Timer

FLASH 02

ADDITIONAL SYSTEM TIMERS
* Features available with Optional Software

Table 2-1: Default Values

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Customer Database Programming
Introduction

Program
Code

Features

Flex Button

Default Value

Repeat Redial Timer

60 set

Attendant Display Timer

01 set

Call Coverage Ring Timer

5 set

Modem Answer T/O

25 set

Pulse Dial Inter-Digit Timer

300 ms

Programmable DTMF Time Operation

1 OOms/l OOms

Attendant Override

Disabled

Hold Preference

System

External Night Ring

Disabled

Executive Override Warning Tone

Enabled

Page Warning Tone

Enabled

Background Music

Enabled

Least Cost Routing

Disabled

Account Codes - Forced

Disabled

Group Listening

Disabled

Idle Speaker Mode

Disabled

Call Cost Display Feature

Disabled

Music-On-Hold

Enabled

Call Qualifier Tone Option

Disabled

Barge-In/Privacy Release Tone
Option

Enabled

Distinctive CO Ringing

Enabled

FLASH 05

SYSTEM FEATURES 1
PROGRAMMING

SYSTEM FEATURES 2
PROGRAMMING

FLASH 06

* Features available with Optional Software
Table 2-l: Default Values

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

Issue I- December 7998

Customer Database Programming

l-6

Introduction

Program
Code

Flex Button

Default Value

Verified Account Codes

Disabled

Call Forward Display

Enabled

External Day Ring

Disabled

Overflow Station Forward

Disabled

Direct Transfer Mode

Enabled

Station ID Lock

Disabled

LCR Progress

Enable

One-Touch Recording Warn Tone

Enable

Ringback on Transfer

Disable

Incoming Intercom Ringing

Red 120 ipm
flutter

Call Forward Button

Red Steady On

Message Wait/VM Button

Red Steady On

Message CallBack - DSS/BLF

Reyl;‘Q;;pm

Do Not Disturb - DSSlBLF

Red 60 ipm Dbl
Wink

Auto CallBack - DSS/BLF

Red 120 ipm flash

UCD Available/Unavailable - DSS/BLF

Red 60 ipm Dbl
Wink

Transfer CO Ringing

Red 120 ipm flash

Recall CO Ringing

Red 480 ipm
flutter

Queued CO Ringing

Green 480 ipm
flutter

Features
.I

FLASH 07

FLASH RATES (Programmable)
Incoming CO Line Ringing

* Features available with Optional Software
Table 2-l: Default Values

Issue 7 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Customer Database Programming
Introduction

Program
Code

Flax Button

Default Value

Exclusive Hold

Gree;d;hO ipm

System Hold

Red 60 ipm Dbl
wink

In Use Hold (I-Hold)

Greefraz; ipm

Camp-On Button

Red 120 ipm flash

Call Back Button

Red 120 ipm flash

Line Queue Button

Red 480 ipm
flutter

Do Not Disturb Button

Red Steady On

Intercom Hold Button

Red 15 ipm flash

Leading Digit

2-7

None

Features

SYSTEMPARAMETERS
PROGRAMMING

FLASH 09

Leading Digit 1
Leading Digit 2-7
Leading Digit Option

Disabled

Centrex Digit Length

4 digits

Four Digit Voicemail ID

3 digits

13-18

###

MOH Assignments Channels 3-8
ATTENDANT STATION ASSIGNMENT

FLASH 10

SYSTEM TIME AND DATE

FLASH 11

PBX DIALING CODES

FLASH 12

STA 100
1

YY/MM/DD
HHMM
None

FLASH 13

l-4

None

ON BOARD RELAY PROGRAMMING

FLASH 14

l-2

None

BAUD RATE ASSIGNMENTS

FLASH 15

EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY

PAIRS

* Features available with Optional Software
Table 2-l: Default Values

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e I - December 1998

Customer Database Programming

l-8

Introduction

Program
Code

Features

Flex Button

Default Value

Port #I (MISU)

9600 Baud

Port #2 (MISU)

9600 Baud

Port #3 (Modem)

9600 Baud

DISA Access Code

100

Database Admin Password

3226

SMDR Enable/Disable

Long Distance/All Calls

Long Distance

Character Print Assignment

Baud Rate Display

9600

SMDR Port Assignments

Port #I

Manual (NO)

2-8

O-4 08:00-17:00
5-6 ####-####

Bin/lCM

None

Name

None

Clear

None

1-12

None

Pilot

FLASH 20

ACCESS CODES

STATION MESSAGE DETAIL
RECORDING

FLASH 21

WEEKLY NIGHT MODE SCHEDULE

FLASH 22

Automatic/Manual Operation
Day of Week Programming
FLASH 23

DIRECTORY DIALING

HUNT GROUPS

FLASH 30

Hunt Group Programming
Station/Pilot Hunting Assignment
VERIFIED ACCOUNT CODES TABLE

FLASH 31

Account Code
* I-t$“LLJ,
r--t.,,ra^
mm,-;,“I..,,. ..,;,I. A..G..r,, c?a61..,-rA
es “Y”,,““Ie Wllll “/Jrr”rr”r J”, lWU, e

Table 2-l: Default Values
Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

Customer Database Programming
Introduction

Program
Code

Features

Flex Button

Class of Service

Default Value
##

Delete Code
Erase Digits
LOCAL NUMBER/NAME
TRANSLATION
FLASH 55

TABLE
Route Number

None

Phone Number

None

Name

None

Clear Entry

None

CO LINES ATTRIBUTES
PROGRAMMING
(Press HOLD for entire range)
FLASH 40

Button 19

Page A

DTMF

COlPBX Programming

Universal Night Answer (UNA)

Enabled

DISA CO-to-CO (Per CO Line)

Enabled

Privacy

Enabled

Loop Supervision Programming

400 ms

DISA Programming

None

Line Group Programming

Group 1

Class of Service (COS) Programming

cos 1

CO Line Ringing Assignments

IOOA

CO Line ldentif ication Display

Line XXX

PAGE A INTRODUCTION
DTMF/Dial Pulse Programming

* Features available with Optional Software
Table 2-l: Default Values

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e I - December 1998

I-IO

Customer Database Programming
Introduction

Program
Code

Features

Flex Button

Default Value

Trunk Direction

Incoming/Outgoin
9

Display Ring Assignments

IOOA

PAGE B INTRODUCTION

FLASH 40

Button 20

Page B

5 (0 dB)

Preset Call Forward Destination

None

Preset Forward Voicemail

None

Universal Day Answer (UDA)

Disabled

Music-On-Hold (per CO Line)

Channel 1

Distinctive Ringing (per CO Line)

Transmit Volume Option

PAGE C INTRODUCTION

FLASH 40

Button 21

Page C

Ring Delay Timer

Reseize Timer

200 ms

Guard Timer

0.5 set

Preset Forward Timer

Flash Timer Programming

MISCELLANEOUS CO PARAMETERS

FLASH 41

Dial Pulse Parameters

Button 1
1

60140

STATION ATTRIBUTES
PROGRAMMING
PAGE A INTRODUCTION

FLASH 50

Button 19

Page A

Enabled

Do Not Disturb

Enabled

Conference Enable/Disable (Per
Station)

Enabled

Disabled

Paging Access

Executive Override
* , ,Ze.-.f,,rne
a,rr.il-klr. ,.,;+h Anfinnnl CnFf,.rmrn
lz”L”I~‘3 “Y”,,“U,ci ““,‘,I “prrvrrurGJ”, LYY”,~
Table 2-l: Default Values

Issue 7 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S

System Programming Manual

Customer Database Programming
Introduction

Program
Code

Features

Flex Button

Default Value

Privacy (Per Station)

Enabled

System Speed Dial Access

Enabled

Line Queuing

Enabled

Preferred Line Answer

Enabled

Off -Hook Voice Over (OHVO)

Disabled

Call Forwarding

Enabled

Forced Least Cost Routing (LCR)

Disabled

ACD Supervisor Monitor with Barge-In

Disabled

Executive Override Blocking

Disabled

CO Line Ringing Options

Muted Ring

Name/Number Display at Idle

Name (Enabled)

PAGE B INTRODUCTION

FLASH 50

Button 20

Station Identification

Page B

0 (24-Btn Key
set)
6 (SLT w/o MWt)

Station Day Class of Service

Station Night Class of Service

Speakerphone/Headset

Programming

(Full
Speakerphone)
Pick-Up Group(s) Programming

Paging Zone(s) Programming

Preset Call Forwarding Programming

###

CO Line Group Access

LCR Class of Service (COS)

Off -Hook Preference Programming

00 (Keyset)

* Features available with Optional Software
Table 2-l: Default Values
STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

Issue I- December 1998

I-12

Customer Database Programming
Introduction

Program
Code

Features

Flex Button

Default Value

Flexible Button Programming

None

Key Set Mode

Inactive Mode

Voicemail ID Translation

xxxx
(Station Number)

Display Flexible Buttons

Cordless Key (CKTU) Button

None

ICLID PROGRAMMING
ICLID RINGING ASSIGNMENT(S)

FLASH 43

Next ICLID Route Number

Previous ICLID Route Number

Select Route Number

ICLID FEATURES

FLASH 56

Disable/Enable

No (Disabled)

Name in Display

NAME (Yes)

Baud Rate Display

9600

Port Assignment

Port #I

l-8

None

Alternate ACD Group Assignment

###

ACD Overflow Station Assignment

###

ACD Recorded Announcement

####

ACD Supervisor Programming

###

ACD Auto Wrap-Up Timer (Per
Group)
ACD CIQ Threshold

04 set

AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION*
ACD GROUP PROGRAMMING*

FLASH 60

ACD Groups (550-557)

Page A

* Features available with Optional Software
Table 2-1: Default Values

Customer Database Programming
Introduction

Program
Code

Flex Button

Default Value

Sta 9-16

None

Sta l-8

None

ACD Ring Timer

60 set

ACD Message Interval Timer

60 set

ACD Overflow Timer

60 set

ACD No-Answer Recall Timer

000 set

ACD No-Answer Retry Timer

300 set

ACD Guaranteed Message Timer

05 set

l-8

###

Event Trace Disable/Enable

No (Disabled)

Trace Port Assignment

Port #I

Features
Display Stations

FLASH 61

ACD TIMERS

ACD RAN ANNOUNCEMENT TABLES*

FLASH 62

PClACD INTERFACE TRACE

FLASH 63

Baud Rate Display

9600 Baud
FLASH 64

ACD GROUP PROGRAMMING*
ACD Groups (558-565)

Page A

l-8

None

Alternate ACD Group Assignment

None

ACD Overflow Station Assignment

None

ACD Recorded Announcement

None

ACD Supervisor Programming

None

ACD Auto Wrap-Up Timer (Per
Group)
ACD CIQ Threshold

04 set

Disabled

Display Stations

Sta 9-16

Sta l-8

None

* Features available with Optional Software
Table 2-l: Default Values

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

issue I- December 7998

I’

Customer Database Programming
Introduction

Program
Code

Features

Flex Button

Default Value
..:‘:__

UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD)

/..^.,.
.
:.,
\: :...

UCD GROUP PROGRAMMING

FLASH 60

UCD Groups (550-557)

Page A

l-8

None

Alternate UCD Group Assignment

None

UCD Overflow Station Assignment

None

UCD Announcement Assignment(s)

None

l-8

None

UCD Ring Timer

60 set

UCD Message Interval Timer

60 set

UCD Overflow Timer

60 set

UCD Auto Wrap-Up Timer

04 set

UCD No-Answer Recall Timer

000 set

UCD No-Answer Retry Timer

300 set

1-8

None

Voicemail Groups(440-447)

l-8

None

Alternate Voicemail Group

###

Leave Mail Index Entry

440 = 0

Retrieve Mail Index Entry

440 = 1

Station Assignment(s)

None

UCD Station (550-557)
Assignment(s)

Page B
FLASH 61

UCD TIMERS

UCD ANNOUNCEMENT TABLES (RAN)

FLASH 62

VOICE MAIL GROUPS
FLASH 65

VOICE MAIL PROGRAMMING

VOICE MAIL OUTPULSING TABLE

FLASH 66

* Features available with Optional Software
Table 2-l: Default Values

issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Customer Database Programming
Introduction

Program
Code

Features

Flex Butt01 n

Voicemail In-Band Signaling

Default Value

II
TblO Pre=P7
Suf =None

Tbl 1 Pre=P7
Suf=*

3-7

None

Tb17 Pre=P7
Suf =2

Voicemail Disconnect Table

VOICE MAIL IN-BAND FEATURES

None

FLASH 67

Voicemail In-Band Digits

Enabled

Voicemail

Enabled

Transfer/Forward

Voicemail Broker

Enabled
FLASH 68

VOICE MAIL INDEX TABLE
Voicemail Group

Voicemail ID Number

440

EXCEPTION TABLES PROGRAMMING
TOLL RESTRICTION PROGRAMMING

FLASH 70

Allow Table A Programming

None

Deny Table A Programming

None

Allow Table B Programming

None

Deny Table B Programming

None

Special Table 1 Programming

All Codes Allowed

Special Table 2 Programming

All Codes Allowed

Special Table 3 Programming

All Codes Allowed

* Features available with Optional Software
Table 2-l: Default Values

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e I - December 1998

Customer Database Programming

I-16

Introduction

Program
Code

Flex Button

Default Value

Special Table 4 Programming

Home

Area Code for Special Table 1

Area Code for Special Table 2

Area Code for Special Table 3

Displaying Toll Table Entries

Features

LEAST COST ROUTING (LCR)
PROGRAMMING
FLASH 75

LCR TABLES PROGRAMMING
3-Digit Area/Office Code Table

See LCR Tables

6-Digit Area/Office Code Table

None

Exception Code Table

See LCR Tables

Route List Table

Insert/Delete Table

Daily Start Time Table

Weekly Schedule Table

LCR Routing for Toll Information

Initialize System Parameters

Default

Initialize CO Line Attributes

Default

Initialize Station Attributes

Default

Initialize CO/Station Port Parameters

Default

Initialize Exception Tables

Default

Initialize System Speed Numbers

Default

Initialize LCR Tables

Default

INITIALIZE DATABASE PARAMETERS
FLASH 80

INTRODUCTION

* Features available with Optional Software
Table 2-1: Default Values

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Customer Database Programming
Introduction

Program
Code

Flex Button

Default Value

Initialize ICLID-DID Tables

Default

Initialize Directory Dialing Tbl
Parameters

Default

Initialize Hunt Group Parameters

Default

Initialize ACD*/UCD Group
Parameters
Initialize Voicemail* Group Parameters

Default

Initialize Verified Account Code Table

Default

System Reset

Features

PRINTING SYSTEM DATABASE
PARAMETERS
FLASH 85

INTRODUCTION
Printing System Parameters

Default

Printing CO Line Attributes

Default

Printing Station Attributes

Default

Printing CO/Station Port Parameters

Default

Printing Exception Tables

Default

Printing System Speed Numbers

Default

Printing LCR Tables

Default

Printing Entire System Database

Default

Printing Directory Dial Table
Parameters
Printing Hunt Group Parameters

Default

Printing ACD*/UCD Group
Parameters
Printing Voicemail* Group Parameters

Default

Printing Verified Account Codes

Default

Abort Printing

*Features available with Optional Software
Table 2-l: Default Values
STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

issue I - December 1998

~...

Customer Database Programming

l-18

Introduction

Program
Code

Features
LOAD DATABASE ROUTINE

Flex Button

Default

Value
{:;I::;,
_i2,
_.lLi5.
-..._
z.-. _ -.-._

FLASH 86

Upload database

PC Only

Download database

PC Only

* Features available with Optional Software
Table 2-l: Default Values

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

Customer Database Programming

l-19

Program Mode Entry (Key Station)

Program Mode Entry (Key Station)
Programming is performed at Station 100 (defaults to Port 01) using a 24-button Digital Display Terminal.
Programming is always done at this station regardless of the class of service or which station has been
assigned the attendant(s). Before entering the program mode, the programmer must verify that Station 100
is properly connected.
To enter the program mode:
1

Press the ON/OFF button (optional). LED lights and intercom dial tone is heard.

On the dial pad, press [a] [%I.

On the dial pad, enter [3][2][2][6]*. A confirmation tone is heard.

The ON/OFF button LED is lit. The system is ready to program.

* This is a defaultpassword.

However, it may be changed aper entering programming.

Other telephones connected to the system continue to function normally.

Program Mode Entry (Data Terminal or PC)
A PC terminal connected to the RS-232C port on the MISU or remotely through the optional 9600 baud
modem is used for database programming. When using a data terminal (ASCII or PC capable of emulating an
ASCII terminal) on-site or locally, to program the system:
1

Press on the terminal.

Enter the password [default=3226VODAVl], and press again. Proper entry of
the password results in the ADM> prompt. Proceed with programming referring toFigure
2-I: Data Terminal Program Codes Cross Rqference for terminal characters that represent
the key set buttons. By entering [?] from the terminal, a Help screen displays.

When entering the system remotely via a PC, access to the optional 9600 baud modem is accomplished by
accessing Port 499 through a direct ringing assignment or through DISA or by being transferred to Port 499.

Initialization
The system was pre-programmed with certain features called default data (refer to Table 2-I: Default
Values). These features are loaded into memory when the system is initialized.
The system shouldbe
is corrupted.

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming

initialized when installed or at any time the database

Mcrwal

issue I- December 1998

I-20

Customer Database Programming
Customer Data Worksheets

Use the procedures below to return the system database to default values:
1

Place Switch #l on the BKSU in the ON position.

Turn the power off and on to initialize the system database to the default.

Once the database is initialized, place Switch #I in the OFF position to protect the
database.

Customer Data Worksheets
Before attempting programming, it is strongly recommended that customer data worksheets be prepared
(Refer to Product Desription Manual, Appendix C: Customer Database Programming), These worksheets
should become part of the permanent record of customer programming. Refer to the following sections
when preparing the worksheets.

Database Fields
The data fields set system timers, determine central office line features and Key Telephone features. When
entering CO line data and station data, be sure to enter the exact number of digits specified. The data fields
and features are further described in the following sections.

Database Upload/Download Routine
The Database Upload/Download Routine (Flash 86) provides a maintenance facility which permits the user
to download the database to a PC, when a software change is made or when the system needs to be
initialized and reprogrammed. In addition, the routine facilitates the programming of a database on an inhouse system which is downloaded to a PC and then uploaded to a system in the field. After the system
maintenance is completed, the file saved in the PC can then be uploaded to the system.
All trace modes (SMDR, /CL/D Event, Maintenance Event Traces, etc.)
MUST be turned off before a download is performed!

/s-sue 7 - December 7998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Customer Database Programming
Database Upload/Download Routine

Upload/Download through Remote Administration
1

Connect one end of an RS232C serial cable from the RS-232C connector on the MISU
of the Triad-S System to the desired Comm Port on the PC.
Use a sfraighf-through LB-9 to DB-9 (female to female) cable.

Load a communication software package (i.e., Procomm) into the PC. Make the
necessary changes to the following areas of the communications package. Save these
permanent settings.

Items to Change

Change

PARAMETERS: a + [P]
Baud Rate

9600 Baud, N for Parity,
8 Bits, 1 Stop Bit

SETUP OPTIONS: a + [S]
Protocol Options:
Item A: Echo Locally
Item D: Character Pacing
Item E: Line Pacing
Item F: Pace Character
Item I: CR Translation (upload)
Item J: LF Translation (upload)
Item K: CR Translation (download)
Item L: LF Translation (download)

OFF
0
0
0
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
I

PROTOCOL OPTI ONS
General Protocol Options:
Item C: Abort xfer if CD lost

1NO

Vote: Item C appears in Procomm Plus Version 2.01 or higher.
3

Press on the PC. The following displays:

I
4

44 Digital Hybrid Key-System
Eng. Ver. 1.36-FFFF
DATE: 12/01/98
ENTER PASSWORD:

TIME:

15:37:14
I

Enter the password [default=3226VODAVI], and press again. Proper entry of
the password results in the ADM> prompt. Proceed with programming referring toF@m

STARPLUS Triad-S

System Programming Manual

issue I- December 1998

l-22

Customer Database Programming
Database Upload/Download Routine

2-I: Data Terminal Program Codes Cross Reference for terminal characters that represent
the key set buttons. By entering [?] from the terminal, a Help screen displays.
5

Enter the information on the following screen capture. Continue with the steps that
follow.
44 Digital Hybrid Key-System
Eng. Ver. 1.36-FFFF DATE:
12/01/98 TIME:
15:37:14
ENTER PASSWORD:
admr
ADMIN PROGRAMMING
adm>,
ENTER PROGRAM NO
adm>86
LOAD DATABASE ROUTINE
ENTER BUTTON NUMBER
The HOLD button on
adm>q
a key set is the
UPLOAD DATEBASE
PRESS HOLD +- ;;;eo;st;~ek;;;;;;;
adm>
Press .

On the PC, press to display the Download Protocol screen. Enter X to set the
download file to use X-Modem. This introduces an error correction facility to track
errors and correct them during the download procedure.

Dowload Protocols - 124811648 bytes
X1
Z)
Y)
G)
1
1
1
1
1

XMODEM
ZMODEM
YMODEM (Batch)
YMODEM-G (Batch)
lK-XMODEM
lK-XMODEM-G
COMPUSERVE B-t
KERMIT
SEALINK

A)
R)
T)
M)
W)
I)
1)
2)
3)

Your Selection: (press ENTER

Issue I- December 1998

freeE

ASCII
RAW ASCII
TELINK
MODEM7
WXMODEM
IMODEM
CEXT 11
[EXT 21
CEXT 31

for ZMODEM)

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

l-23

Customer Database Programming
Database Upload/Download Routine

This displays the Receive XMODEM screen on the PC monitor. Enter a path and file
name for the database file and press to begin the download routine.
Receive

XMODEM

Please enter filename:

On the PC, press to begin the download routine. A Confirmation tone is heard
from the communications package after the download is complete and theADM> prompt
displays.

Enter M and press .

10 On the PC, press + . Press to exit Procomm and return to the DOS
prompt.
The downloaded database cannot be changed in the PC. The Upload/Download routine is only a method to save an existing database.
Database changes are made using the remote admin capabilities. Baud
rates on I/O ports are NOT downloaded or uploaded.

The download file contains a series of ASCII strings with a checksum at the end of the string. The checksum
is verified when the system receives the string. An error in the checksum results in rejection of the string. An
error message is sent to the PC when a string is received with an error. The user must watch for no more data
on the screen to determine when the transmission of the download file is complete.
The Database should be inifialized prior to an upload. The system should
then be reset after the upload.

-..G
,yyy-;$
c

Forward and backward compatibility is maintained. If the file uploaded from the PC contains less
information in a string than required by the system database, the system maintains default information in
the area not covered by the string. If the file uploaded from the PC contains more information in a string
than required by the system database, the system ignores the additional information.
To upload an ASCII database file:

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

Issue I- December 1998

Customer Database Programming

l-24

Database Upload/Download Routine

Enter the information on the following screen capture.
44 Digital Hybrid Key-System
Eng. Ver. 1.36-FFFF DATE:
12/01/98 TIME:
15:37:14
ENTER PASSWORD:
adm>
ADMIN PROGRAMMING
adm>,
ENTER PROGRAM NO
adm>86
LOAD DATABASE ROUTINE
The HOLD button on
ENTER BUTTON NUMBER
a key set is the
adm>w
same as the
DOWNLOAD DATEBASE
PRESS HOLD +- kS;szn,;;;e;;yboard.
adm>

On the PC, press to display the Upload Protocol screen. Enter X to set the
upload file to use X-Modem. This introduces an error correction facility to track errors
and correct them during the upload procedure.
Upload

s)
0)
E)
C)
K)
S)

Protocols

- 124811648 bytes free

IODEM (Batch)
YMODEM-G (Batch)
lK-XMODEM
lK-XMODEM-G
COMPUSERVE B+
KERMIT
SEALINK

A1
R1
T)
M)
W)
I)
1)
2)

TELINK
MODEM7
WXMODEM
IMODEM
CEXT 11
CEXT 21
3) [EXT 31

Your Selection: (press ENTER for

Issue I- December 1998

4-l

ASCII
RAW ASCII

XMODEM)

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Customer Database Programming

1-25

Database Upload/Download Routine

This displays the Send XMODEM screen on the PC monitor. Enter a path and file name
for the database file and press and the desired file is uploaded to the system.

Send XMODEM
Please enter filename:

A Confirmation tone is heard after the uploaded is complete and you are returned to the
ADM> prompt.

Enter an M at the ADM> prompt and press .
adm>m
exiting

admin...

TIME: 15:41:04
DATE: 12/01/98
exiting maintenance utility...
s

On the PC, press + . Press to exit Procomm and return to the DOS
prompt.

After the upload procedure is completed, the system MUST be reset for full activation
of the database programming to take effect.

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

Issue I- December 1998

Customer Database Programming
Database Upload/Download Routine

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Programming Steps
If the system is in the programming mode, continue using the program codes. If starting to program here,
enter the programming mode. Refer to Chapter 1: Customer Database Programming.
I

Press FLASH and dial [Ol]. The following message displays:

SYSTEM TIMERS
ENTER BUTTON NUMBER

Description
This section describes the procedures and steps to program system timers in the System Timers
programming area. The buttons on the digital terminal are illustrated on the following page:

issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

System Parameters Programming
System Timers

SYSTEMHOLD
RECALL
*ll
PRESET
FORWARD
+CONFlDlSA
TIMER
119
MSG WAIT
REMINDER
*113
AUTO CALL
BACK TIMER
4#-

Program Flex
Code
Button
FLASH 01

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

EXCL HOLD
RECALL
%l?x2iTl
CALL FWD
NO/ANSWER
%PAGING
TIMEOUT
*-

ATTENDANT
RECALL
#izKEEl
PAUSE TIMER

*m
CO RING
DETECT
4#n
HOOK FLASH
HOOK FLASH
DEBOUNCE
%+*115
REMINDER
RELEASE GUARD
RING
TIMER

Feature

(after

System Hold Recall
Exclusive Hold Recall
Attendant Recall Timer
Transfer Recall Timer
Preset Forward Timer
Call Forward No/Answer
Pause Timer
Call Park Recall Timer
Conf erence/DISA Timer
Paging Timeout Timer
CO Ring Detect Timer
SLT DTMF Receiver Timer
MSG Wait Reminder Tone
SLT Hook Flash Timer
SLT Hook Flash Debounce
SMDR Call Qualification Timer
Auto Call Back Timer
Reminder Ring Timer
Release Guard Timer
Inter-Digit Timeout

TRANSFER
RECALL
$14
CALL PARK
TIMER
*m
DISAISLT
RECEIVER

9112
SMDR CALL
QUALIFICATION
4kEiEKa
INTER-DIGIT
TIMEOUT
%k-

Default
initialization)

060 seconds
180 seconds
01 minutes
045 seconds
10 seconds
015seconds
2 seconds
180 seconds
10 minutes
15 seconds
300 ms
020 seconds
000 minutes
10 (1 second)
010 (.I seconds)
30 seconds
03 seconds (enabled)
00 seconds (disabled)
300 ms
5 seconds

Table 2-l: System Timers Defaults

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

System Parameters Programming

2-3

System Timers

System Hold Recall Timer
Programming Steps
I

Press the SYSTEM HOLD RECALL TIMER flexible button(FLASH 01, button 1). The
following message displays:
SYS HOLD RECALL
060

000-300

Enter a 3-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to 000-300 seconds.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
This timer determines the time before a call placed on System Hold recalls the station placing the hold, If
unanswered by that station, the call recalls the attendant. By default, the System Hold Recall Timer is set for
60 seconds and is variable from 000-300 seconds. An entry of 000 disables the timer and there is no recall.

Exclusive Hold Recall Timer
Programming Steps
1

Press the EXCLUSIVE HOLD RECALL TIMER flexible button (FLASH 01, button #2).
The following message displays:
.
EXC HOLD RECALL
180

000-300

Enter a 3-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to 000-300 seconds,

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
This timer determines the time before a call placed on Exclusive Hold recalls the station placing the Hold. If
unanswered by that station, the call recalls the attendant. By default, the Exclusive Hold Recall Timer is set
for 180 seconds and is variable from 000-300 seconds. An entry of 000 disables the timer and there is no
recall.

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

‘-: :..-.
System Parameters Programming

2-4

System Timers

Attendant Recall Timer
Programming Steps
1

Press the ATTENDANT RECALL TIMER flexible button (FLASH 01, button #3). The
following message displays:

ATND RECALL TIMER
01

00-60

Enter a 2-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to 00-60 minutes.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
This timer determines the time a recalling call rings at the attendant station(s) before the system releases
the line. When a CO Line recalls to the Attendant station and is still unanswered, the system releases the
line at the expiration of this timer and automatically places the line to an idle condition. By default, the
Attendant Recall Timer is set for 1 minute and is variable from W-60 minutes. An entry of 00 causes the
Attendant(s) to ring until answered.

Transfer Recall Timer
Programming Steps
1

Press the TRANSFER RECALL TIMER flexible button (FLASH 01, button #4). The
following message displays:

Enter a 3-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to 000-300 seconds.
TRA;;;ER

RECALL

000-300

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
This timer determines the time a transferred call rings at the station receiving the transfer before it recalls
the station making the transfer. If unanswered by that station, the call recalls the attendant. By default, the
Transfer Recall Timer is set for 45 seconds and is variable from 000-300 seconds. A 000 entry disables the
timer and there is no recall.
I s s u e I - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

System Parameters Programming

2-5

System Timers

Preset Forward Timer
5.. . :_.‘,_,.
yi; 1Programming Steps
e.; :.;:’
e
1 Press the PRESET FORWARD TIMER flexible button (FLASH 01, button #5). The
following message displays:

PRESET FWD TIMER
10

00-99

Enter a 2-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to 01-99 seconds.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
This timer determines the time an outside line rings before being forwarded to a predetermined station. This
entry works with Preset Forward station assignments in Station Programming. More than one station can be
forwarded to the same party.
Initial incoming CO lines follow the Preset Call Forward Timer when
encountering a station in the Forward/No Answer mode.

This timer also governs the time the DISA call rings at a station before returning to intercom dial tone, if not
answered. By default, the Preset Forward Timer is set at 10 seconds and is variable from 01-99 seconds. If
no preset forward destination is programmed, the feature is disabled.

Call Forward / No Answer Timer
Programming Steps
1

Press the CALL FORWARD NO/ANSWER TIMER flexible button(FLASH 01, button #6).
The following message displays:
I

?i*
_ es-L3&.
-'I-i:.
4”
Y

CALL FWD NO ANS

000-600

015

Enter a 3-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to 000-600 seconds.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

STARPLUS Triad-S Sysfem Programming Manual

I s s u e I- December 7998

System Parameters Programming
System Timers

Description
This timer is used when a station in the system specifies that no answer calls be forwarded to another
station. The timer determines how long an intercom or transferred call rings before it is considered a noanswer call. The call then forwards to the designated station for handling. By default, the Call Forward
No/Answer Timer is set for 15 seconds and is variable from 000-600 seconds.

lnifiul incoming CO lines follow the Preset Call Forward Timer when
encountering a station in the Forward / No Answer mode.

Pause Timer
Programing Steps
1 Press the PAUSE TIMER flexible button (FLASH 01, button #7). The following message
displays:
+

PAUSE TIMER
2

l-9
.

Enter a l-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to l-9 seconds.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
This timer determines the length of the pause when programmed for use with speed dialing and LCR Insert
Tables. By default, the Pause Timer is set at 2 seconds and is variable from l-9 seconds. There is no 0
entry. Use of this feature may afect Centrex transfers.

Issue I- December 7998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

System Parameters Programming

2-7

System Timers

Call Park Recall Timer
in-., Programming Steps
:: ”
&IT
I Press the CALL PARK RECALL TIMER flexible button (FLASH 01, button #8). The
following message displays:
CALL PARK TIMER

000-600

180

Enter a 3-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to 001-600 seconds.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
This timer determines the time before a call placed in a call park location recalls the station placing the call
in park. If unanswered by that station, the call recalls the attendant. By default, the Call Park Recall Timer is
set at 180 seconds and is variable from 000-600 seconds. A 000 entry disables the timer and there is no
recall.

Conference / DISA Timer
Programming Steps
1 Press the CONFERENCEIDISA TIMER flexible button (FLASH 01, button #9). The
following message displays:

CONFERENCE
10

TIMER

00-99
.

Enter a 2-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to 01-99 minutes.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

issue I - December 1998

2-8

System Parameters Programming
System Timers

Description
This timer determines the time an unsupervised conference can continue after the initiator of the
conference has exited. By default, the Conference/DISA Timer is set at 10 minutes and is variable from Ol99 minutes. A 00 entry disables the timer and no automatic disconnect occurs.
The Conference Timer also allows the system administrator to control the
time a DISA caller is allowed after establishing o Trunk-to- Trunk call. At
the expiration of the Conference Timer, u tone is presented to both DISA
parties, then one minute later the system automatically releases both
trunks. The Conference Timer does not affect or control a DISA-toStation call.

Paging Time-out Timer
Programming Steps
Press the PAGING TIMEOUT TIMER flexible button (FLASH 01, button #lo). The
following message displays:

PAGING

TIMEOUT

00-60
I

Enter a 2-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to 01-60 seconds.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
This timer determines the maximum length of a page announcement (internal, external or all call). The
system automatically disconnects the page at the end of this time unless the person making the page has
already hung up. By default, the Paging Time-out Timer is set at 15 seconds and is variable from 01-60
seconds. A 00 entry disables the timer and pages are not limited in length. This will a&et use of the Meet
Me Page feature.

issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

System Parameters Programming
System Timers

CO Ring Detect Timer
,f?--,_. Programming Steps
y:2:-7.:
e
1 Press the CO RING DETECT TIMER flexible button(FLASH 01, button #ll). The
following message displays:
CO RING DETECT
3

2-9

Enter a l-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to 2-9 (200 ms to 900 ms).

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
This timer controls the time necessary to detect an outside line ringing into the system. By default, the CO
Ring Detect Timer is set at 3 (300 ms), and is variable from 2-9 (200 ms to 900ms). There is no 0 or 1 entry.

SLT DTMF Receiver Timer
Programming Steps
1 Press the SLT DTMF RECEIVER TIMER flexible button(FLASH 01, button

#12).

The

following message displays:
l

SLT RCVR TIMER
020

005-100

Enter a 3-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to 005-100 seconds.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
Single line telephones require the use of a DTMF receiver when going off-hook and dialing, When SMDR or
toll restriction (via COS assignments) is enabled, a DTMF receiver monitors and screens the SLT digits for the
duration of this timer. By adjusting this timer, the system administrator may free system DTMF receivers
sooner if system SLT traffic is heavy, or provide a longer monitoring period if toll restriction becomes a
problem. Note that when LCR is enabled, the DTMF receivers are released when the expected number of
digits are dialed as entered in the LCR database. By default, the SLT DTMF Receiver Timer is set at 20 seconds
and is variable from 005-100 seconds.
STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

System Parameters Programming
System Timers

Message Wait Reminder Tone
Programming Steps
I

Press the MESSAGE WAIT REMINDER TONE flexible button(FLASH 01, button #13).
The following message displays:
M/WO;;NE TIMER

ooo- 104

b
2

Enter a 3-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to 000-104 minutes.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
This timer determines the time between repeated reminder tones to a key telephone with a message
waiting. Digital Hybrid station users may be reminded of a message waiting on their telephone with an
audible signal presented at a timed interval. By default, the Message Wait Reminder Tone is set at 000
(disabled) and is variable from 000-104 minutes.

SLT Hook Flash Timer
Programming Steps
1

Press the SLT HOOK FLASH TIMER flexible button (FLASH 01, button #I 4). The
following message displays:

HOOK

SWITCH TIME

0520
I

Enter a 2-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to 052.0 seconds in l/l 0
second increments.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
This timer determines how long an SLT user presses the hook switch for it to be considered a valid on hook
(disconnect) request, An on-hook shorter in duration (but longer than the Hook Switch Bounce Timer) is

Issue I- December 1998

TARP1

Us Triad-S Sys tern Programming Manual

System Parameters Programming
System Timers

a Hook Flash (transfer) request. Refer to Figure 2-l. By default, the SLT Hook Flash Timer is set
at 10 (one second) and is variable from 0.5-2.0 seconds.

considered

Some Single Line telephones have a fixed or programmable Flash Timer
(Flash or Tap button). This Hook Switch Timer must be set longer than the
SL T Flash Timer to allow Hook Flash transfer.

SLT Hook Flash Debounce Timer
Programming Steps
1

Press the SLT HOOK FLASH DEBOUNCE TIMER flexible button (FLASH 01, button
#15). The following message displays:

HOOK SWT BOUNCE
010

ooo- 100

Enter a 3-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to O-l seconds in 10 ms
increments.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
This timer determines the time needed to determine a valid on-hook or off-hook condition for single line
telephones. On-Hook or Off-Hook signals that are shorter in duration than this timer are ignored by the
system. Refer to Figure 2-I: &IO/Z Switch Activity. By default, the SLT Hook Flash Debounce Timer is set to
0.10 seconds and is variable from O-l seconds in 10 ms increments. This is a s-digit entry where 010 equals
0.1 seconds.

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

issue I- December 1998

System Parameters Programming
System Timers

System
Response

Hook Switch
Bounce
Timer
0

e= programmable

1 .O

1.5

2.0

TIME

range

(in seconds)

Figure 2-l: Hook Switch Activity

SMDR Call Qualification Timer
Programming Steps
1

Press the SMDR CALL QUAL TIMER flexible button(FLASH 01, button #16). The
following message displays:

SMDR CALL QUAL
30

00-60
I

Enter a 2-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to 00-60 seconds in 1
second increments.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
This feature determines the time needed to determine a valid SMDR call for reporting purposes. By default,
the SMDR Call Qualification Timer is set to 30 seconds and is variable from 00-60 seconds in l-second
increments.

issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

2-13

System Parameters Programming
System Timers

Automatic Call Back Timer
Programming Steps
1

Press the AUTO CALL BACK TIMER flexible button(FLASH 01, button #17). The
following message displays:
AUTO CALL BACK

00-99

Enter a Z-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to 00-99 seconds in 1
second increments.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
This feature invokes a call back anytime a user listens to busy tone for a programmable period of time. By
default, the Automatic Call Back Timer is set for 03 seconds (enabled), and is variable from 00-99 seconds. A
value of 00 disables this timer. An Automatic Call Back does not occur when this timer is disabled.

Reminder Ring Timer
Programming Steps
1

Press the REMINDER RING flexible button (FLASH 01, button #18). The following
message displays:
.
REMINDER
00

RING

00-99

Enter a 2-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to 00-99 seconds in 1 second
increments. A value of 00 disables the timer, therefore the user only receives one ring
burst at the beginning of the call.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
When a CO line rings at a busy station, the call rings at the station using muted ringing. The CO Line Ringing
Option feature enables a user to receive a reminder ring instead of muted ring. This timer provides a
reminder ring every time the timer expires, as long as the incoming CO line remains connected. If the user
continues his present conversation and the CO party does not hang up, the Reminder Ring timer expires and
STARPLIJS Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

System Parameters Programming

2-14

System Timers

the user receives another ring burst. When the key set user ends the existing call, ringing for the CO call
reverts to normal ringing. By default, the Reminder Ring Timer is set to 00 second and is variable from OO99 seconds in 1 second increments.

Release Guard Timer
Programming Steps
Press the RELEASE GUARD TIMER flexible button (FLASH 01, button #19). The
following message displays:

RELEASE
03

GUARD

01-50
I

Enter a 2-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to 01-50 (0.1 to 5.0
seconds)

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
The Release Guard Timer is designed to accommodate variations from one Central Office to another. The
timer is started whenever a CO line is released. If a user attempts to access a CO line before the Release
Guard timer expires, his LED illuminates indicating the CO line was seized, however the CO line is not
seized until the timer expires. The user DOES NOT receive a busy tone, but may get a delayed CO dial tone if
the timer is set to a large value. By default, the Release Guard timer is set for 3 (for 300 ms), and is variable
from 100 ms to 5 seconds.

Inter-Digit Time-out
Programming Steps
1

Press the INTER-DIGIT TIMEOUT flexible button (FLASH 01, button #20). The
following message displays:
INTERDIGIT
05

Issue 1

T/O

01-99

Enter a 2-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to 01-99 seconds in 1
second increments.

- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

System Parameters Programming
Additional System Timers

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
This feature provides inter-digit time-out programming on a system-wide basis and applies to intercom and
LCR calls. DISA, DID. TIE inter-digit time-outs remain unaffected by this timer. By default, the Inter-Digit
Time-out is set for 5 seconds, and is variable from l-99 seconds.

Additional System Timers
Programming Steps
If the system is in the programming mode, continue using the program codes, If starting to program here,
enter the programming mode.
1

Press FLASH and dial [02]. The following message displays:

SYSTEM TIMERS
ENTER BUTTON NUMBER

Description
This section describes the procedures and steps necessary to program additional System Timers in the
Timers programming area.

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e 1 - December 1998

2-16

System Parameters Programming
Additional System Timers

SYSTEM REDIAL
TIMER
#E
PULSE DIAL I/O
TIMER
#15

ATD DISPLAY
TIMER
%lzi!zl
DTMF TIME
OPERATION
#LLic2a

Program
Code

Flex
Button

CALL CVRG
RING TIMER
%lzcLizl

MODEM
ANSWER T/O
+Em

%17

#+n

#kKE

Feature

(after

Def auk
initialization)

Additional System Timers:
FLASH

1
2
3
4
5
6

Repeat Redial Timer
ATD Display Timer
Call Coverage Ring Timer
Modem Answer Time-out
Pulse Dial Inter-Digit Timer
DTMF Time Operation

060 seconds
01 seconds
5 seconds
25 seconds
300 ms
100 ms ON / IOOms OFF

Table 2-2: Additional System Timers Defaults

Repeat Redial Timer
Programming Steps
1

Press the RPT REDIAL TIMER flexible button (FLASH 02, button #I). The following
message displays:

I RPT EAL
2

006-999
I

Enter a 3-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to 006-999 seconds.

issue 7 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

;. -.‘.,;.y:.. :?
,yy.::
.,I . . ;

System Parameters Programming

2-17

Additional System Timers

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
The feature lets a digital key station press a flexible button or dial a code and redial a busy or no-answer
number at specific intervals. The user is signaled via a queue callback indication, The Redial flexible button
flashes at the callback rate of 120 ipm for 15 seconds. If the station does not answer within 15 seconds, the
callback is cancelled. If the station is busy with an internal/external call when the Redial queue callback
occurs, the callback occurs after the user goes on-hook. By default, the Repeat Redial Timer is set for 1
minute (60) and is variable from 006-999 seconds.

Attendant Display Timer
Programming Steps
1 Press the ATTENDANT DISPLAY TIMER flexible button (FLASH 02, button #2). The
following message displays:
ATTENDANT
01

DISPLAY

006-999

Enter a 2-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to 00-99 seconds.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
The Attendant display timer modifies the way in which multiple calls ringing at the attendant station display.
Currently, if two calls are ringing at an attendant station, when the station goes off hook, the first call is
answered. The LCD updates to show the second call that is ringing which sometimes does not allow the
station to view the current call’s LCD information. This timer keeps the current calls’ information on the LCD
for the set time period, then shows any other calls ringing in at the time. By default, the Attendant Display
Timer is set for 1 second and is variable from 00-99 seconds.

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Issue I- December 1998

System Parameters Programming

2-18

Additional System Timers

Call Coverage Ring Timer
Programming Steps
1

Press the CALL CVRG RING TIMER flexible button (FLASH 02, button #3). The
following message displays:
CALLOgOVERAGE

RING

00-99

a
a

Enter a 2-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to 00-99 seconds.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
A ringing Call Coverage button enables the user to place another station under a flex button. For additional
information refer to Chapter 4: Table 4-3: Flex Button Codesfor Remote Programming. When that station
rings with an internal or external call, the DSS button for that station rings or flashes. By default, the Call
Coverage Ring Timer is set for 5 seconds and is variable from 00-99 seconds. A value of 00 results in the
LED flashing but the call coverage station does not ring.

Modem Answer Timer
Programming Steps
Press the MODEM ANSWER TIMER flexible button (FLASH 02, button #4). The
following message displays:

MODEM ANSWER T/O

025-099

Enter a 2-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to 025-099 seconds.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
This timer determines how long the On Board modem provides a carrier tone to a distant modem. If a
connection is not made at the end of this timer, the On Board modem hangs up. By default, the Modem
Answer Timer is set for 25 seconds and is variable from 25-95, seconds.

issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

System Parameters Programming

2-19

Additional System Timers

Pulse Dial Inter-Digit Timer
Programming Steps
1

Press the PULSE DIAL I/D TIMER flexible button (FLASH 02, button #5). The following
message displays:

INT DIGIT PULSE
300

300-600

Enter a 3-digit timer value on the dial pad that corresponds to 300-600 ms.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
This governs the inter-digit time of the Pulse Dial Digits. By default, the Pulse Dial Ring Timer is set for 300
ms and is variable from 300-600 ms.

DTMF On/Off Time Operation
Programming Steps
t

Press the DTMF TIME OPERATION flexible button (FLASH 02. button #6). The
following message displays:

DTMF ON/OFF TIME
100/100

100-999

Enter a 3-digit value (100-999) on the dial pad for the DTMF on and off times.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
This feature lets the installer select the DTMF on/off time on a system-wide basis. This lets the installer
customize the system for certain applications that require more than the standard DTMF time of 100ms on
and 1OOms off. By default, the DTMF Time Operation is set for 100 ms on and 100 ms off.

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

System Parameters Programming
System Features 1 Programming

System Features 1 Programming
Programming Steps
If the system is in the programming mode, continue using the program codes, If starting to program here,
enter the programming mode.
Press FLASH and dial [05]. The following message displays:

SYSTEM FEATURES 1
ENTER BUTTON NUMBER

Description
This section describes the procedures and steps necessary to program System Features in the System
Features programming area. The buttons on the digital terminal are illustrated on the following page:

Issue 1

- December 1998

S J A R P L L J S Triad-S System Programming Manual

System Parameters Programming
System Features 1 Programming

ATTN
OVERRIDE

HOLD
PREFERENCE
*BACKGROUND
MUSIC

QI
PAGE WARN
TONE
*15
GROUP
LISTENING
#%19
CALL QUALIFIER
TONE OPTION
+I#-

Program
Code

%16

IDLE SPEAKER
MODE

Flex
Button
I

EXTERNAL
NIGHT RING
113

EXECUTIVE
OVERRIDE

ACCOUNT
CODES
%
Is

LCR ENABLE

#m
CALL COST
DISPLAY

Default
(after initialization)

Feature
,

MUSIC ON HOLD

System Features 1:
FLASH 05

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
IO
11
12
13

Attendant Override
Hold Preference
External Night Ring
Executive Warning
Page Warning Tone
Background Music
Least Cost Routing
Account Code
Group Listening
Idle Speaker Mode
Call Cost Display Feature
Music On Hold
Call Qualifier Tone Option

Disabled
System
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

Table 2-3: System Features 1 Defaults

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e 7 - December 7998

System Parameters Programming
System Features 1 Programming

Attendant Override
Programming Steps
, : : . :

Press the ATTN OVERRIDE flexible button (FLASH 05, button #I).

Enter a l-digit value (O-l) that corresponds with the following entries:
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled
ATTENDANT OVERRIDE
DISABLED

o-1

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
When this feature is enabled, it lets the attendant override a busy station or a station in DND. By default,
Attendant Override is disabled.

Attendant Override functions ONLY when the Attendant station is QSsigned a flex button designated us Attendant Override.

Hold Preference
Programming Steps
I

Press the HOLD PREF flexible button (FLASH 05, button #2).

Enter a l-digit value (O-l) that corresponds with the following entries:
[0] = Exclusive Hold
[I] = System Hold
HOLDM;RENCE

O-l

t
3

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

Issue 7 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

1 .

: . .

- . .
_
.

: . . ,

, . .
.

. . .

= : .

2-23

System Parameters Programming
System Features 1 Programming

Description
The system may be programmed to have Exclusive or System Hold preferred. If Exclusive Hold is preferred,
the user presses HOLD once for Exclusive Hold and twice for System Hold. If System Hold is preferred, the
user presses HOLD once for System Hold and twice for Exclusive Hold. Refer to System Timer programming
for System and Exclusive Hold recall times. By default, Hold Preference is System Hold.

External Night Ring
Programming Steps
1

Press the EXT NIGHT RING flexible button (FLASH 05. button #3).

Enter a l-digit value (O-l) that corresponds with the following entries:
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled

I
3

EXTERNAL NIGHT RING
DISABLED

O-l
I

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
When this feature is set to yes, it activates external night ring whichproduces a tone that is sent
ouer all externalpage groups. When outside lines are marked UNA, ringing activates a tone over
external paging when an incoming call occurs on those lines during night service. By default, External Night
Ring is disabled.

Executive Override Warning Tone
Programming Steps
I

Press the EXEC OVER WARN TONE flexible button (FLASH 05, button #4).

Enter a l-digit value (O-l) that corresponds with the following entries:
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled
EXEWME;ARNING

STARPLUS

O-l

Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

System Parameters Programming

2-24

S,ystem Features 1 Programming

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
This option enables Executive stations to override and barge-in on other key sets engaged in conversation
on a CO line. Prior to actual cut through of the third party, a warning tone is presented to all parties
notifying them of the barge-in. This warning tone, however, is a programmable option on a system-wide
basis, that either enables or disables the tone. When the tone is disabled, no audible signal is presented to
the parties to signal the barge-in. By default, Executive Override Warning Tone is enabled.

Use of this feature when the Executive Override Warning Tone is disabled
may be interpreted as a violation of federal, state, or local laws, and an
invasion of privacy. Check applicable laws in your area before intruding on
calls using this feature.

A change in volume may occur on the CO line or intercom call after the
barge-in occurs. This feature also affects ACD Supervisor Barge-in warning tone.

Page Warning Tone
Programming Steps
I

Press the PAGE WARN TONE flexible button (FLASH 05, button #5).

Enter a l-digit value (O-l) that corresponds with the following entries:
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled

I
s

PAGE WARNING TONE
ENABLED

o-1
I

Press HOLD to save the entry, A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
Determines whether a page warning tone sounds over the Key Telephone speakers or external paging
speakers, prior to a page announcement. By default, Page Warning Tone is enabled.
issue

1 - December 1998

STARPLUs Triad-S System Programming Manual

2-25

System Parameters Programming
System Features 1 Programming

Background Music
T~::*$.
‘.::”
f&,
;...

Programming Steps
1

Press the BACKGROUND MUSIC flexible button (FLASH 05. button #6).

Enter a l-digit value (O-l) that corresponds with the following entries:
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled
BACKGROUND MUSIC
ENABLED

O-l

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
The system can be programmed to let stations activate their Background Music, in addition to Music-OnHold. A music source must be connected to the BGM/MOH connector on the MISU. By default, the
Background Music channel is enabled.

Least Cost Routing (LCR)
Programming Steps
I

Press the LCR ENABLE flexible button (FLASH 05, button #7).

Enter a l-digit value (O-l) that corresponds with the following entries:
[ 0 ] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled
.
LEAST COST ROUTING
DISABLED

O-l

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
If Least Cost Routing is used, it must be enabled here. Before enabling LCR, refer to the Least Cost Routing
section (Flash 75) and programming tables (Product Description Manual - Appendix C). When the tables are
programmed, you may then enable LCR for the system. After system initialization, a default LCR database is
loaded into the LCR section of memory. By default, LCR is disabled.
STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

Issue I- December 1998

System Parameters Programming
System Features 1 Programming

Account Codes - Forced
Programming Steps
I

Press ACCOUNT CODES flexible button (FLASH 05, button #8) to determine whether
the use of Account Codes is forced or optional.

Enter a l-digit value (O-l) that corresponds with the following entries:
[O] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled
FORCED ACCOUNT CODE
DISABLED

o-1

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
The system can force the use of account codes on all restricted calls. If forced account code option is
enabled, a station’s Class of Service is upgraded to day COSl, night COSl, when the account code is entered.
If forced account code option is disabled, a station’s Class of Service is not upgraded but the account code
continues to be part of the SMDR record. By default, the use of account codes is optional.

Group Listening
Programming Steps
1

Press the GROUP LISTENING flexible button (FLASH 05, button #9).

Enter a l-digit value (O-l) that corresponds with the following entries:
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled
I

GROUP LISTENING
DISABLED
3

O-l
L

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
All digital key terminals have built-in speakerphones. Station users may use the speaker to monitor a call
while using the handset to converse with the outside party. This enables other people in the room to listen
Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

System Parameters Programming

2-27

System Features 1 Programming

to both parties in the conversation. Group listening is unavailable when the station is in the headset mode, By
default, Group Listening is disabled.
y--,
c-2; Idle Speaker Mode
Programming Steps
I

Press the IDLE SPEAKER MODE flexible button (FLASH 05, button #IO).

Enter a l-digit value (O-l) that corresponds with the following entries:
[0] = First digit dialed is Heard (Disabled)
[I] = First digit dialed is Muted (Enabled)
IDLE SPEAKER MODE
DISABLED

O-l

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
The Idle Speaker Mode feature determines whether the first digit dialed is heard over the digital key terminal
speaker. This feature can be enabled or disabled on a system-wide basis. By default, this mode is disabled.

Call Cost Display Feature
Programming Steps
I Press the CALL COST DISPLAY flexible button (FLASH 05, button #ll).
2

Enter a l-digit value (O-l) that corresponds with the following entries:
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled
.
CALL COST DISPLAY
DISABLED

A“
.-.
:-.2:x.i_
pz;
6.
3

o-1

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

STARPLUS Triad-S Sysfem Programming Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

System Parameters Programming

2-28

System Features 1 Programming

Description
The Call Cost Display Feature lets a user view the approximate cost of each call made. This approximate cost
also prints as part of the SMDR record. The Call Cost Display replaces the call duration display when a call is
made using LCR. Cost information is programmable in LCR Flash 75. This enables the user to program four
separate costs based on the time of day. Costs entered in the tables are costs for one minute, however, costs
are calculated using l/lOth of a minute value. These costs are rounded down and based on the call start
time, even if the call extends into a different time period. The SMDR printout contains a cost calculated
using l/lOth of a minute increment, however the station display updates approximately every 30 seconds.
The user must use LCR to get the call cost display. By default, the Call Cost Display feature is disabled.

Music On Hold
Programming Steps
1

Press the MUSIC ON HOLD flexible button (FLASH 05, button #12). This feature
toggles on and off each time the button is pressed. The display updates with each
toggle.
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled
MUSICOOL;;LD

O-l

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
When connected to the system, a music source provides music to all lines on Hold, parked calls,
transferred calls and calls waiting to be answered by Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) or Uniform Call
Distribution (UCD). This feature is allowed or denied on a system-wide basis in programming. By default,
Music-On-Hold is enabled.

Call Qualifier Tone Option

::. 7 ,._.
; ‘.-,
,....
i-l ,... c

Programming Steps
I

Press the CALL QUAL TONE OPTION flexible button (FLASH 05, button #13).

Enter a l-digit value (O-l) that corresponds with the following entries:
[0] = Disabled

I s s u e I- December 1998

S JARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

System Parameters Programming
System Features 2 Programming

[I] = Enabled
CALL QUALIFIER TONE
DISABLED
3

o-1

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
This feature is associated with the ACD Call Qualifier code and determines if a confirmation tone is heard
after the ACD Call Qualifier code is dialed. If programmed, the confirmation tone is heard through the key set
speaker. This feature provides up to four digits for the ACD SMDR reporting functions that are compatible
with the Basic ACD software package. This feature permits entry of up to twelve digits, By default, the Call
Qualification Confirmation tone is disabled.

System Features 2 Programming
Programming Steps
If the system is in the programming mode, continue using the program codes. If starting to program here,
enter the programming mode.
t

Press FLASH and dial [06]. The following message displays:

SYSTEM FEATURES 2
ENTER BUTTON NUMBER

Description
This section describes the procedures and steps necessary to program System Features in System Features
programming area. The buttons on the digital terminal are illustrated on the following page:

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e I - December 1998

2-30

System Parameters Programming
System Features 2 Programming

PRIVACY
RELEASE TONE
*ll
EXT DAY
RINGING

LCR CALL
PROGRESS

CO RING TONE
+ACD/UCD
OVERFLOW
STA FWD
ONE-TOUCH
RCD WARNING

VERIFIED ACCT
CODES
*rs--iq
DIRECT
TRANSFER

CALL FWD
DISPLAY
STATUS
*EzRl

,:-‘
!‘.
..+.:
I .., - .
l..i..
‘.
,...~;-

STATION ID
LOCK

RINGBACK ON
TRANSFER
*ill

1 7

120
7 4

r
Program
Code

Flex
Button

Feature

FLASH 06

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Privacy Release Tone
CO Ring Tone
Verified Account Codes
Call Forward Display Status
External Day Ringing
ACDNCD Overflow Sta Fwd
Direct Transfer
Station ID Lock
LCR Call Progress
One-Touch Record Warning Tone
Rlngback on Transfer

Lssue I- December 1998

(after

Default
initialization)

Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled

Table 2-4: System Features 2 Defaults

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

.;..
,‘. ,,:;
t:.-, : :;;

2-31

System Parameters Programming
System Features 2 Programming

Privacy Release Tone Option
Programming Steps
2

Press the PRIVACY RELEASE TONE flexible button (FLASH 06, button #l). The
following message displays:
BARGEN;iLF;RN

TONE

O-l

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable or disable the conference tone.
[ 0 ] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.
Display stations continue to receive the CONFERENCE display regardless
of the warning tone setting.

Privacy is ensured on all communications in the system. If desired, the user may elect to disable the
Automatic Privacy feature, thus allowing up to seven other stations to join existing CO Line conversations.
Disabling of the privacy feature may be limited by federal, state, or local
law, so check the relevant laws in your area before disabling privacy.

CO Line in Use by Another Station

Station Attempting to
Access CO Line

Privacy Enabled 1Privacy Disabled
I

PrivacvI Enabled

I
Privacy Disabled

I Private
I Private
1 (no cut-through) 1 (no cut-through)

Private
Privacy Release
(no cut-through) (cut-through allowed)

Table 2-5: CO Line Privacy Flag

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

issue I - December 1998

2-32

System Parameters Programming
System Features 2 Programming

Distinctive CO Ringing
Programming Steps
Press the CO RING TONE flexible button (FLASH 06, button #2). The following
message displays:

I
2

CO R&%T;~ES

O-l
I

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the tone ring signal.
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
The tone ring signal that notifies stations of an incoming call can be changed in administrative
programming to provide distinctive ringing on a per CO line basis. A distinctive ring tone can be
programmed for each CO line that rings each station. The system provides 36 different ring patterns that
can be selected for CO lines in the system. By default, Distinctive CO ringing is enabled.

Verified Account Codes
Programming Steps
1 Press the VERIFIED ACCT CODES flexible button (FLASH 06, button #3). The
following message displays:
VERIFIED ACCT CODES
DISABLED
2

O-l
.

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the use of verified account

codes.
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled
3

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

System Parameters Programming

2-33

System Features 2 Programming

Description
-cc..
- -v1.:x.:‘-.
-.z’:
c -

The Verified Account Code/Traveling Class of Service (COS) feature provides tracking of specific calls by
entering a verified, variable length (up to 12-digits) identifier. Each account code can be assigned a day and
night Class-of-Service for determining the dialing privileges allowed by that account code. This lets users
override a restricted station. If the dialed account code matches the Verified Account code table, an intercom
dial tone is returned, otherwise an error tone is returned. SMDR must be enabled for the account code to
print as part of the SMDR record. The Triad-S system allows up to 250 12-digit account codes programmed in
at Flash 31. By default, the Verified Account Codes feature is disabled.

Call Forward Display
Programming Steps
1

Press the CALL FWD DISPLAY STATUS flexible button (FLASH 06, button #4). The
following message displays:

I
2

CALL FWD DISPLAY
ENABLED

O-l
I

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the call forward display option.
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
When call forwarding is invoked, the LCD display normally indicates the call forwarding mode at all times,
This feature is enabled/disabled in administrative programming on a system-wide basis. By default, the
status of the Call Forward display is enabled.

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

issue I- December 1998

2-34

System Parameters Programming
System Features 2 Programming

External Day Ring
Programming Steps
i

Press the EXT DAY RINGING flexible button (FLASH 06, button #5). The following
message displays:

I
2

EXTERNAL DAY RING
DISABLED

o-1
I

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the use of external day ring
option.
[0] = Disabled
[l] = Enabled

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
The system can be programmed so CO lines marked for UDA provides ringing out of the external page ports
when the system is in the Day Mode. By default, External Day Ringing is disabled.

Overflow Station Forward
Programming Steps
I

Press the ACDIUCD OVERFLOW STA FWD flexible button (FLASH 06, button #6).
The following message displays:

6
2

OVERFLOW STA FWD
DISABLED

O-l
4

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the use of this feature.
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
This feature allows ACD/UCD calls reaching the ACD/LJCD Overflow Station to call forward to another station.
This enhancement is allowed or denied on a system-wide basis. Once enabled in programming, an
Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

System Parameters Programming

2-35

System Features 2 Programming

ACD/UCD Overflow station can Busy/No-Answer forward to Voice Mail Groups, ACD/UCD Groups, Hunt
Groups and stations. If the ACD/LJCD Overflow station is busy or does not answer before the no-answer call
timer expires, the ACD/UCD call forwards to the destination, By default, this feature is disabled,

Direct Transfer Mode
Programming Steps
1

Press the DIRECT TRANSFER flexible button (FLASH 06. button #7). The following
message displays:

I
2

DIRECT XFER
ENABLED

O-l

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable this feature.
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
When enabled, supervised transfers (screened transfers) to stations in the handset mode connect calls
directly to the handset. The station user must have a direct appearance of that CO line or a Loop button. This
feature is programmed on a system-wide basis. By default, the Direct Transfer Mode is enabled.

Station ID Lock
Programming Steps
1 Press the STATION ID LOCK flexible button (FLASH 06, button #8). The following
message

displays:
.

STATION LOCK
DISABLED
2

O-l

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the use of this feature.
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

:.
System Parameters Programming

2-36

System Features 2 Programming

Description
This feature enables the installer/programmer to lock the station ID of all extensions on the system. It also
prevents the loss of station programming that results when a different station type is plugged into a port
already designated as another station type. This feature is programmed on a system-wide basis. By default,
the Station ID Lock feature is disabled.
The proper procedure(s) for changing the Station ID with the Station ID Lock feature enabled:
1

Enter programming mode and disable the Station ID Lock feature.

Plug the new device type into the jack. The set is automatically identified.

Enter programming mode and disable the Station ID Lock feature.

Enter programming and perform Station ID programming. (Flash 50, Page B, button #I).
The set is automatically identified.

LCR Call Progress
Programming Steps
1

Press the LCR CALL PROGRESS flexible button (FLASH 06, button #Q). The
following message displays:
LCR ;tUP;OGRESS

O-l

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the use of this feature.
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
This feature enables the installer to select, on a system-wide basis, whether users hear call progress
indications. By default, the LCR Call Progress feature is enabled.

If this feature is disabled, a confirmation tone is given after the last digit is
dialed. The user does not hear the line being seized or the outpulsing of
digits to the Central Office.

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

System Parameters Programming

2-37

System Features 2 Programming

One-Touch Recording Warn Tone
Programming Steps
Press the ONE-TOUCH RCD WARNING TONE flexible button (FLASH 06, button #IO).
The following message displays:
.
\
2

RECORDING WARN TONE
ENABLED

O-l

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the use of this feature.
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
This feature lets the installer enable/disable the One-Touch Recording Warning Tone on a system-wide basis.
By default, the Recording Warning Tone is enabled.
Use of this feature when the One-Touch Recording Warn Toneis disabled
may be interpreted as a violation of federal, state, or local laws, and an
invasion of privacy. Check applicable laws in your area before recording
calls using this feature.

Ringback on Transfer
Programming Steps
1

Press the RINGBACK ON TRANSFER flexible button (FLASH 06, button #ll). The
following message displays:

I
2

RINGBACK ON XFER
DISABLED

O-l

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the use of this feature.
[0] = Disabled (Music)
[I] = Enabled (Ringback Tone)

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

STARPLLJS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

Issue 1 - December 1998

2-38

. -.

System Parameters Programming
Programmable Flash Rates

Description
This feature provides on a system-wide basis music on hold or ringback tone to the CO caller when CO calls
are transferred. Callers currently hear music. By default, the Ringback on Transfer feature is disabled.

Programmable Flash Rates
Programming Steps
If the system is in the programming mode, continue using the program codes. If starting to program here,
enter the programming mode.
1

Press FLASH and dial [07]. The following message displays:
.
SYSTEM FLASH RATES
ENTER BUTTON NUMBER

Description
This section describes the procedures and steps necessary to program the Flash Rates in the Flash Rates
programming area. The buttons on the digital terminal are illustrated on the following page:

I s s u e 1- December 7998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

System Parameters Programming
Programmable Flash Rates

INC CO RING
*n
MSG CBCK
DSS/BLF
%+TRANSFER CO
RING
*
lg
SYSTEM HOLD
%+113
LINE QUEUE BTN
%+-

CALL FORWARD
BTN
%a
%13
AUTO CBCK
DND DSS/BLF
DSS/BLF
116
+#rT---ul
RECALL CO
QUEUED CO
RING
RING
+#k
110
I
In
IN USE HOLD
CAMP-ON BTN
*+%DND BTN
ICM HOLD BTN
%+#Fir-i-l
INC ICW RING

Red LED Flash Rates
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
IO
11
12
13
14

Off
Steady On
30 ipm Flash
60 ipm Flash
60 ipm Dbl Wink
240 ipm Flash
240 ipm Flutter
480 ipm Flash
480 ipm Flutter
15 ipm Flash
120 ipm Flash
120 ipm Flutter
30 ipm Dbl Flash
480 ipm Dbl Wink
480 ipm Dbl Flash

MSG WAIT/VM
BTN
+%n
UCD UNAVL
DSS/BLF
18
2#
EXCLUSIVE
HOLD
+#n
CALLBACK BTN
*m
se

Green LED Flash
Rates
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28

130

Steady On
30 ipm Flash
60 ipm Flash
60 ipm Dbl Wink
240 ipm Flash
240 ipm Flutter
480 ipm Flash
480 ipm Flutter
15 ipm Flash
120 ipm Flash
120 ipm Flutter
30 ipm Dbl Flash
480 ipm Dbl Wink
480 ipm Dbl Flash

Table 2-6: Flash Rates

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

2-40

System Parameters Programming
Programmable Flash Rates

Incoming CO Line Ringing
Programming Steps
1

Press the INC CO RING flexible button (FLASH 07. button #I). The following message
displays:

,cT:.ze>; I>
p:.>:q
. -L..“?‘

INC CO RING
00-28
RED 480 IPM FLUTTER
z

Enter a 2-digit value on the dial pad to correspond to one of the 29 available options.
Refer to the flash rate table.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
The Incoming CO Line Ringing flash rate is the rate at which an Incoming CO li.ne or Loop Button flashes.
This flash rate can be programmed to 29 different options identified in the flash rate table, which enables
the programmer to customize the key system configuration to desired flash rates. By default, the Incoming
CO Ringing flash rate is set for RED 480 ipm Flutter (08).

Incoming Intercom Ringing
Programming Steps
1

Press the INC ICM RING flexible button (FLASH 07, button #2). The following message
displays:
00-28
INC ICM RING
RED 120 IPM FLUTTER

Enter a 2-digit value on the dial pad to correspond to one of the 29 available options.
Refer to flash rate table.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
The Incoming Intercom Ringing flash rate is the rate an Incoming DSS button flashes if you have a DSS
appearance for the calling station. This flash rate can be programmed to 29 different options identified in
the flash rate table. This enables the programmer to customize the key system configuration to desired
flash rates. By default, the Incoming Intercom Ringing flash rate is set for RED 120 ipm Flutter (11).
issue I- December 7998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

,., T_.:I._i:_-..:j .!i
1,

2-41

System Parameters Programming
Programmable Flash Rates

Call Forward Button
,:-.*-.-.
:a‘:..::~T~
CYZ
c-

Programming Steps
1 Press the CALL FORWARD BTN flexible button (FLASH 07. button #3). The following
message

displays:

CALL FORWARD BTN
RED STEADY ON

00-28

Enter a 2-digit value on the dial pad to correspond to one of the 29 available options.
Refer to flash rate table.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
The Call Forward Button flash rate is the rate at which the Call Forward button flashes when any type of
forward mode is used. This flash rate can be programmed to 29 different options identified in the flash rate
table. This enables the programmer to customize the key system configuration to desired flash rates, By
default, Call Forward Button flash rate is set for a Red Steady On (01).

Message Wait / VM Button
Programming Steps
1

Press the MSG WAIT/VM BTN flexible button (FLASH 07, button #4). The following
message displays:
.
MSG WAIT / VM BTN
RED STEADY ON

00-28
.

Enter a 2-digit value on the dial pad to correspond to one of the 29 available options.
Refer to flash rate table.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

:c:.r_..-:.._”..::.i
‘;-“-:. . .,
c-.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Each time the user presses a relay button, the LCD updates with the relay number and the function assigned
to it.
Description
The Triad-S has two relays on the BKSLJ that can be programmed to perform certain functions. These
functions are loud bell, external page control, RAN Start, and CO Line control.
RELAY 1
*n

RELAY 2
%
131

113

Baud Rate Assignments

‘\.

Programming Steps
1 Press FLASH and dial [15]. The first button is lit and ready for programming Port #I.

The

following message displays:

PORT
1

BAUD
9600

Description
The Triad-S System provides outputs such as SMDR or ICLID to the optional RS-232 connectors on the MISU.
PORT #l
PORT #2
MISU 1
MISU 2
%+Eim*12

PORT #3
MODEM
+%13

*lzcIizl

Port #I, #2, #3 Baud Rates
Programming Steps
1 Press the desired PORT # flexible button (FLASH 15, Buttons #l,

#2,or #3) to determine

the port to program.
STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

issue I- December 1998

:
2-60

System Parameters Programming
Access Codes

Enter a l-digit number for the baud rate:
[I] = 150 Baud
[2] = 300 Baud
[3] = 600 Baud
[4] = 1200 Baud
[5] = 2400 Baud
[6] = 4800 Baud
[7] = 9600 Baud

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
Port #l: First RS-232C port on the optional MISU board.
Port #2: Second RS-232 port on the optional MISU board.
By default, Port #l (MISU RS-232C), Port #2 (MISU RS-232) and Port #3 (Modem) baud rates are set for
9600.

Access Codes
Programming Steps
If the system is in the programming mode, continue using program codes. If starting to program here,
enter the programming mode.
1

Press FLASH and dial [20]. The following message displays:

ACCESS'CODES
ENTER BUTTON NUMBER

Description
This section describes the procedures and steps necessary to program Access codes.
DISA ACCESS
CODE
+kn

Issue I- December 7998

ADMIN
PASSWORD
*a

#mIEl

#Fi---m

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

2-61

System Parameters Programming
Access Codes

DISA Access Code
.s3w Programming Steps
.,-z,..“.S
..;&?<..
1 Press the DISA ACCESS CODE flexible button (FLASH 20, button #I). The following
Q’
-...message

displays:
.

DISA ACCESS CODE
100

Enter a 3-digit value (100-999) on the dial pad for the DISA access code.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
This permits assigning a 3-digit access code to the system. Anyone calling on a DISA line must use this code
to gain access to system features, To disable the DISA access code, enter (#) three times. By default, 100 is
the assigned access code. Use of this feature with or without access code can be abused by callers.

Database Admin Password
Programming Steps
-I Press the ADMIN PASSWORD flexible button (FLASH 20, button #2). The following
message
ADMIN
3226

displays:
PASSWORD

Enter a 4-digit value on the dial pad that corresponds with 0000-9999.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
The password used to enter customer database programming can be customized by the programmer. This
lets the system administrator block unauthorized personnel from entering database admin.
Care should be taken when changing the programming password so authorizedpersonnel are not locked out, which couldprevent or delay them from
making necessary programming changes.

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e I - December 1998

2-62

System Parameters Programming
Access Codes

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Programming Steps
1

Press FLASH and dial [21]. The following message displays:

SDR
NO

TPE PNT
LD
80

9";;;

;ORT

To program SMDR features, use the flexible button(s) as defined in the following
procedures.

The ENABLE/DISABLE, TYPE, and PRINT features toggle on and off each time the
button is pressed. The display updates with each toggle.

After all entries are made, Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
The Triad-S System can provide SMDR output to the optional RS-232C connectors on the MISU. When
SMDR is desired, the following system-wide parameters determine how SMDR information is reported.
ENABLE /
DISABLE
#!2ixzl

CALL TYPE
4#12

PRINT FORMAT
*13

BAUD RATE
s&n

SMDR Enable / Disable
Programming Steps
1 Press the ENABLE/DISABLE flexible button (FLASH 21, button #I). This feature
toggles on and off each time the button is pressed. The display updates with each
toggle.
LED ON = SMDR is enabled
LED OFF = SMDR is disabled
2

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

2-63

System Parameters Programming
Access Codes

Description
2.t-::=:.. :s.a
.~~~
c--

A call accounting device can be installed allowing the system to track calls by outside line number, number
dialed, time of day, date, station that placed or received the call, and duration of the call. By default, SMDR is
disabled.

Long Distance / All Calls
Programming Steps
1

Press the CALL TYPE flexible button (FLASH 21, button #2) to determine the type of
calls to record. This feature toggles on and off each time the button is pressed. The
display updates with each toggle.
LED ON = Long Distance is enabled
LED OFF = All Calls is enabled

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
The system can be set to record all outgoing calls or only outgoing long distance calls. Long Distance calls are
defined as beginning with a 1 or 0, or containing eight or more digits. Incoming calls are only recorded if
TYPE is set for all calls. By default, the system records long distance (LD) calls only.

;

Character Print Assignment
Programming Steps
I Press PRINT FORMAT flexible button (FLASH 21, button #3) to determine the print
format of SMDR records. This feature toggles on and off each time the button is
pressed. The display updates with each toggle.
LED On = 80-Character is enabled
LED Off =30-Character is enabled
2

cii

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

252 Description
The system can be programmed to print individual SMDR records in either a l-line 80-character format or a
3-line SO-character format. By default, the l-line SO-character format is selected,

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming

Manual

Issue I- December 1998

2-64

System Parameters Programming
Access Codes

Baud Rate Display
Programming Steps
The SMDR Baud Rate is programmed using Flash 15, Baud Rate Assignments. FLASH 21, button #4
returns an error tone when pressed. The LCD displays the current baud rate based on which port is
assigned to the SMDR Port number.
Description
The Triad-S System provides SMDR output to the standard RS-232C connector on the optional MISU. The
baud rate is displayed as 150, 300,600, 1200, 2400,4800, or 9600 baud.

SMDR Port Assignments
Programming Steps
1

Press the PORT flexible button (FLASH 21, button #5) to determine which port to use
for SMDR information.

Enter a l-digit number for the SMDR Port number:
[I] = Port #l (MISU On-Board RS-232C)
[2] = Port #2 (MISU On-Board RS-232C)

The LCD displays the current baud rate based on which Port number is assigned to the
SMDR Port number.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description

PORT #l: Refers to the standard RS-232C connector on the optional MISU.
PORT #2: Refers to the standard RS-232C connector on the optional MISU.
By default, Port #l is used for SMDR.

issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

System Parameters Programming

2-65

Access Codes

Weekly Night Mode Schedule
Programming Steps
1 Press FLASH and dial [22]. The following message displays:

DAY

END

START

MON 0800 1700

AUTO
YES

Description
The Triad-S System can be programmed so it is automatically placed into and out of night mode. A
programmable weekly time schedule lets the system administrator preset the time the system goes into night
mode, and the time night mode is removed on a daily basis, including weekend operation.
AUTO I
MANUAL

MONDAY

TUESDAY

*lIsci!a

*ELziEl

THURSDAY
%+;:

FRIDAY
116

SATURDAY
St+-

WEDNESDAY

8 IRI
SUNDAY
#lzicil

Automatic / Manual Operation
Programming Steps
1

Press the AUTO/MANUAL flexible button (FLASH 22, button #I). This feature toggles
on and off each time the button is pressed. The display updates with each toggle.
LED On = Automatic Night Mode
LED Off = Manual operation

If no other changes must be made, press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is
heard.
Once enabled, this feature addresses the entire week.

Description
If the system is operated in the automatic night mode the attendant(s) can override the automatic mode by
pressing the night key on the attendant(s) phone. The schedule does not go into effect until the attendant(s)

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Issue I- December 1998

System Parameters Programming
Access Codes

2-66

press the night key again. When the system is placed into night mode, CO line ringing follows the night
ringing assignments and stations are governed by their respective night COS. The default times for
automatic night mode are:
Monday through Friday OS:00 17:00
Saturday and Sunday ##:## ##:##

(Daytime operation 8:00 am to 5:00 pm)
(24-hour night-mode operation)

tt An entry of 0O:OO 23:59 indicates 24 hours of day mode
o An entry of ##;## ##;## directs the system to ignore these days.

Day of Week Programming
Programming Steps
The MONDAY flexible button (Button #2> LED is lit. To change days of the week:
1

Press the appropriate DAY OF WEEK flexible button (FLASH 22, buttons 2-8).

Enter the 8-digit entry to indicate the hour and minutes to end night mode.

Press HOLD to save the entry. (Example: 07301830 [HOLD]) A confirmation tone is
heard and the display updates.

Directory Dialing
Programming Steps
To enter, change, erase or view entries in the Directory Dialing list:
I

Press FLASH and dial [23].The following message displays:

xxx
DIR LST AAA BIN / ICM:
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn

Where:
AAA = Directory list entry number (000-199)
XXX = a station number, a system speed dial bin number, or Local Number/Name
Translation table number
nnn = programmed name (blank if none)

To select a particular list entry:
I

Press Flexible button #20 for a directory list entry.

Dial the 3-digit directory list entry number (000-199).

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUs Triad-S System Programming Manual

System Parameters Programming

2-67

Access Codes
3

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

To scroll through the list:
1

Press the NEXT flexible button (FLASH 23, button #18) to scroll up (next entry)
or
Press the PREV flexible button (FLASH 23, button #19) to scroll backwards (previous
entry).

Description

Directory Dialing enables station users obtain a directory of station users and have the system dial the
extension currently displayed. The Triad-S system provides locations for up to 200 names (000-199).
Directory dialing also lets users program a name with a speed dial bin for use in later locating a speed dial
number. When prompted, the system displays the name associated with a speed dial number so when the
desired name is shown, the user may then have the system dial the number. Directory dialing also lets users
associate a name with an entry in the local number/name translation table. When prompted, the system
displays the name associated with the table so when the desired name is shown, the user may then have the
system dial the number. The Triad-S system provides locations for up to 200 names.
The Directory Dialing list may be programmed and maintained at the first assigned attendant station in one
of two ways. However, this admin routine lets the directory list be maintained by the system programmer
locally (at Station 100) or remotely via modem access.

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e 7 - December 1998

2-68

System Parameters Programming
Access Codes

%i
#117

#114
NEXT ENTRY
*rscria

de115

#lIoxzil

PREV ENTRY
NEW ENTRY
%@mzil%;

To enter the Intercom number or System Speed Dial bin to associate to the name:
1

Press the BIN/KM flexible button (FLASH 23, button #l).

Enter a 3-digit station intercom number, a 3-digit System Speed Dial number, or a 3digit Local Number/name Translation Table number.
100-l 31 = Triad-S Extension Numbers
020-099 = System Speed Number
600-799 = Local Number/Name Table

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

BIN/KM - Each entry in the directory dialing list must be associated to a system speed dial bin (for calling

a destination outside of the system) or to an intercom station (for calling internal station including CO line
transfers).
To enter or change the current Name shown on the display:
I

Press the NAME flexible button (FLASH 23, button #2).

Enter the name (up to 24-characters may be entered) by using keys on the dial pad as
illustrated on the following page:

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

System Parameters Programming

2-69

Access Codes

Other Codes:

6=6#
7 = 7#

l-=13

I$=*2

I#=##

‘=14

& = *4

Table 2-8: Dial Pad Keys
3

If an error is made while entering the name, press the BACK SPACE flexible button
(FLASH 23, button #4). This button backspaces one character at a time.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

NAME -A name up to 24-characters may be entered into each directory dial list entry. The names display

alphabetically when accessed by a station user. It is possible to have multiple entries that are associated to
the same station number or system speed dial bin. This lets the same name be entered into the list several
times, For example, by last name and by first name, pointed to a station number and a speed dial bin (home,
or mobile phone number). Or, several different names associated to the same speed dial bin.
To clear an entry:
I

Press the CLEAR flexible button (FLASH 23, button #3).

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

Issue I- December 1998

2-70

System Parameters Programming
Hunt Groups

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.
The entry is erased (both the BIN/KM assignment and the programmed name).

CLEAR - Entries in the table may be erased and cleared from the table allowing placement of another entry
into the list. When a system speed dial bin is deleted or changed the name associated to the bin must also
be erased. When a multiple table listing is associated to one system speed dial bin it may be necessary to
clear more than one entry.

Hunt Groups
Hunt Group Programming
Programming Steps
I

Press FLASH and dial [30]. The following message displays on the display:

HUNT GROUP 450 P #i#'+,
w, w, m, w,

#W
w,

#?%#

The top left button in the flexible button field is lit for programming Hunt Group 1 (450).
To change Hunt Groups or enter a different Hunt Group, press the appropriate flexible
button 1-12 (450-461) and perform the following procedures.

Enter the 3-digit station numbers up to a maximum of 24 digits (8 stations). Hunt groups
are joined together by entering another Hunt Group Pilot Number as the last entry of
the group.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
The system can be programmed for up to 8 hunt groups. Each hunt group can contain up to 8 stations
each. Each hunt group can be independently arranged to utilize a pilot hunting technique or station
hunting technique. Hunt groups may also be chained together when larger groups are desired. Hunt groups
can be joined together by programming a hunt group number as the last member of a hunt group. If a
station is in DND or is forwarded to another station, it is considered busy.

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

System Parameters Programming

2-71

Hunt Groups

HUNT GRP 450
3&m
HUNT GRP 454
%+m
HUNT GRP 458
+%19
STATION /

HUNT GRP 461
HUNT GRP 452
*a
Q13
HUNT GRP 456
HUNT GRP 455
s%8HUNT GRP 459
HUNT GRP 460
#l!iorxl
s:-

HUNT GRP 453
4814
HUNT GRP 457
*mril
HUNT GRP 461
a#
II:,

Station / Pilot Hunting Assignment
Programming Steps
1 Press the STATION/PILOT flexible button (FLASH 30, button #13) to indicate Station
Hunting or Pilot Hunting.
LED On = Station Hunting enabled
LED Off = Pilot Hunting enabled

To remove stations from a Hunt group:
1

Enter [#] three times on the dial pad.

Press HOLD. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates. This removes all
stations previously programmed in that group.
458-461 are ONLY for RAN applications.

Description

STATION HUNTING -Transferred CO, and intercom calls that are presented to a busy, or DND station, that
are members of a Station Hunt group, search sequentially (in the order the extensions were entered in
database programming) for an idle station in the group and rings that station. Direct ringing CO Line calls to
the station number ring at the station. If station hunting is desired on a direct ringing call, program the
station hunting pilot number in the CO Line ring assignment list. This lets the member of the hunt group to
receive private calls and hunt group calls.

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

2-72

System Parameters Programming
Hunt Groups

PILOT HUNTING - Incoming CO, transferred CO, and intercom calls can be directed to a pilot number of
a hunt group. The system searches sequentially (in the order the extensions were entered in the database
programming) for an idle station in the group and rings that station. Calls directly to stations (by calling the
extension number) within the hunt group do not hunt but receive call progress tones from the extension,

Verified Account Codes Table/Traveling Class of Service
Programming Steps
Press FLASH and dial [31]. The following message displays:

ACT
xxxxxxxxxxxx

cos
YY

Where:
ACCT = Up to 12-digit account code
COS = Class of Service for account codes
Press the ACCT CODE flexible button (FLASH 31, button #I). Enter up to 12 digits (O9, *, #). [*] represents a do not care digit. The system ignores all digits after this digit
when entering an account code. The [#I represents a single do not care digit.
Press the Class of Service flexible Button (FLASH 31, button #2). Enter a 2-digit Class
of Service Number (l-6) that corresponds to Class of Service l-6. The first digit
represents Day COS and the second digit represents Night COS.
Press HOLD to complete the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
The Verified Account Code/Traveling Class of Service (COS) feature provides tracking of specific calls by
entering a verified, variable length (up to 12 digits) identifier. Each account code can be assigned a day and
night Class of Service for determining the dialing privileges allowed by that account code. This provides a
means for users to override a restricted station. If the dialed account code matches the Verified Account
code table, an intercom dial tone is returned, otherwise an error tone is returned. The use of forced
Account Codes is optional, offered on a system-wide basis. SMDR must be enabled for the account code to
print as part of the SMDR record. The Triad-S System allows up to 250 12-digit account codes and must be
enabled in Flash 06, Button 3. By default, no Account Codes are assigned.

I s s u e I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

I ..

System Parameters Programming
Hunt Groups

#i:

CLASS OF
SERVICE
%:-

%113

+% lTir-74

NEXT
#mIcxl

PREV
%
l7c-i-l

IL21

Sk122

#r2z33

0124

ACCT CODE

-_;..sr,..
c‘G

This option lets the user adjust the reseize timer on a per CO Line basis. The reseize timer can be used on
any trunk type. This timer sets the time period that a trunk is held disconnected after receiving a disconnect
before being reseized when a device is queued for a member of the trunk group. By default, the Reseize
Timer is set for two seconds.

Guard Timer
Programming Steps
1

Press the GUARD TIMER button (FLASH 40, Page C, button #4) in the flexible button
field. The following message displays:

I
/

GUARD TIMER
50

l-60
I

Enter a 3-digit value on the dial pad which corresponds to I-60 (100 ms to 6 seconds).

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
The outgoing guard timer is the length of time a tie trunk is held busy to outgoing seizure after a valid release
is detected. By default, the Guard Timer is set for five seconds.

Preset Forward Timer
Programming Steps
1

Press the PRESET FWD TIMER flexible button (FLASH 40, Page C, button #5). The
following message displays:
PRESET FWD TIMER
00

00-99

Enter a 2-digit timer value on the dial pad which corresponds to 00-99 seconds.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

Issue I- December 1998

CO Line Attributes Programming

3-24

Miscellaneous CO Parameters

Descriptiop
This timer determines the time an outside line rings before being forwarded to a predetermined
destination, If a forward destination is programmed in the CO line field, the CO calls forward to that
destination after the CO preset forward timer expires. This forward occurs regardless of how many stations
the line is ringing. The digits entered for the CO line are sent in the station field.This feature applies to
initial CO ringing lines only and works with Preset Forward CO Line assignments. By default, the CO Line
Preset Forward Timer is set at 10 seconds and is variable from 00-99 seconds. A [00] entry disables the
timer and the feature is disabled.

Miscellaneous CO Parameters
Programming Steps
If the system is in the programming mode, continue using the program codes. If starting to program here,
enter the programming mode first.
1

Press FLASH and dial [41]. The following message displays:
CO FEATURES
ENTER BUTTON NUMBER

Select any of the features by pressing the appropriate flexible button(s) in the flexible
field.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
When entering the Miscellaneous CO Parameters programming area the buttons on the digital terminal are
defined as shown below:

I s s u e I - December 1998

STARPLLJS Triad-S System Programming Manual

I :. - .

CO Line Attributes Programming

3-25

Miscellaneous CO Parameters

Dial Pulse Parameters
&??,,
<-&

Pwrammi”g steps
,
Press the DIAL PULSE flexible button (FLASH 41, button #l). The following message
displays:

I
z

DIAL PULSE
60/40 10 PPS

Enter the l-digit value (O-3) which corresponds with the following entries:

[0] = 60/40 (RATIO), 10 pps (SPEED)
[I] = 66/33 (RATIO), 10 pps (SPEED)
[2] = 60/40 (RATIO), 20 pps (SPEED)
[3] = 66/33 (RATIO), 20 pps (SPEED
3

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description

option lets the installer adjust the dial pulse ratio and speed when using dial pulse (rotary) type
signaling. By default, all lines are DTMF (tone) signaling. If pulse dialing is required, the individual outside
line must be programmed for Dial Pulse (DP) . When Dial Pulse is selected, this system-wide parameter must
be set to determine the break/make ratio and the dial speed of the dial pulse signal.

This

This program code is on/y used when an outside (CO) line is programmed

for Dial Pulse.

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e I - December 1998

3-26

CO Line Attributes Programming
Miscellaneous CO Parameters

issue I- December IQ98
I

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

: . . . . --:

:..

Programming Steps
If the system is in the programming mode, continue using the program codes, If starting to program here,
enter the programming mode. If station features must be changed:
1

Press FLASH and dial [50]. The following message displays:
STATION ATTRIBUTES
SELECT A STATION RANGE

Enter a 6-digit number for the station range being programmed. If one station is being
programmed, enter that number twice (100100).

,-’
‘.

/f HOLD is pressed without entering a station range, ALL stations (1&l13 1) are selected.

Press Button #I9 and the display updates.The display updates to current programming
for Page A:
XXX-XXX PAGE A
ENTER BUTTON NUMBER

Where:
XXX-XXX = Station Range (100-131)

Description
This section describes the steps and procedures necessary to program station attributes.
;g$
cl

Range programming enables the programmer to change a specific parameter or a few parameters for a range
of stations, leaving intact the remaining data fields not requiring changes. Those data fields continue to
operate with the previously programmed data. By default, Page A is shown,

Issue 1

- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

4-2

Station Attributes Programming
Page A Introduction

When programming the Page A features, the flexible buttons are mapped as follows:
PAGE ACCESS
*n
PRIVACY
%15
OHVO
*n
EXEC OVRD
BLOCKING
#L13
#a
PAGE C
%D

DO NOT
DISTURB
%a

CONFERENCE
%+13

SYSTEM SPEED

LINE QUEUING

%+m

#ITILl

CALL FORWARD

FORCED LCR

%+110
CO LINE RING
OPTIONS
*114

EXECUTIVE
OVERRIDE
%pi--Rl
PREF LINE
ANSWER
#IT--i-l
ACD SUPV
BARGE-IN
%i!cExl

#a
NAME / NUMBER
DISPLAY
Sk+#C
PAGE A
PAGE B
1118
9119
e
(301
NEXT (FWD)
NEXT (BACK)
NEW RANGE
%kD
1123-%%n

Paging Access
Programming Steps
1

Press the PAGE ACCESS flexible button (FLASH 50, Page A, button #I). The
following message displays:
PAGE ACCESS
ENABLED

o-1

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the Paging Access feature.
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled

Press HOLD to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard.

Description
Stations can individually be allowed or denied the ability to make pages. This applies to all internal and
external zone paging. A station denied access to paging may still answer a meet-me page announcement.
(Station COS 6 does not deny a station the ability to make a page.) By default, Paging is enabled at all
stations.
issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

4-3

Station Attributes Programming
Page A Introduction

Do Not Disturb
Programming Steps
Press the DO NOT DISTURB flexible button (FLASH 50. Page A, button #2). The
following message displays:

I
2

DO NOT DISTURB
ENABLED

O-l

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the Do Not Disturb feature.
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled

Press HOLD to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard.

Description
Stations can be individually allowed or denied the ability to place their telephone in Do Not Disturb. By
default, Do Not Disturb is enabled at all stations. The first programmed attendant cannot utilize DND.

Conference Enable / Disable (Per Station)
Programming Steps
1

Press the CONFERENCE flexible button (FLASH 50, Page A, button #3). The following
message displays:

CONFERENCE
ENABLED

o-1

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the Conference feature.
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled
2

Press HOLD to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard.

““’ Description
I

This feature lets the system be programmed on a per Station basis for the ability to initiate a conference.

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

issue I- December 1998

Station Attributes Programming
Page A introduction

Executive Override
Programming Steps
Press the EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE flexible button (FLASH 50, Page A, button #4). The
following message displays:

EXEC OVERRIDE
DISABLED
l

o-1
.

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the Executive Override feature.
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled

Press HOLD to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard.
Use of this feature when the Executive Override Warning Tone is disabled
may be interpreted as a violation of federal, state, or local laws, and an
invasion of privacy. Check applicable laws in your area before intruding on
calls using this feature.
A change in volume may occur on the CO line or intercom call after the
barge-in occurs.

Description
This feature lets certain stations be designated as Executive stations with the ability to override and barge-in
on other key sets engaged in a CO line or intercom conversation. If Supervisor Monitor with barge-in
function is denied, this feature MUST be disabled An optional warning tone is programmed on a system
wide basis to enable or disable the tone. This tone is presented to all parties prior to actual cut through of
the third party.
A separate condition was added to this feature that allows or disallows an
Executive to override an extension. This prevents an extension with
override capability from overriding an Executive’s station.

By default, Executive Override is disabled for all stations. Supervisor Barge-In can be programmed in
[FLASH so] [Button 131.

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Station Attributes Programming
Page A introduction

Privacy (Per Station)
,.-~~, P r o g r a m m i n g Steps
.-A... T
.;.: =
-2.<-.-:>i
c
Press the PRIVACY
I

message

\
z

flexible button (FLASH 50, Page A, button #5). The following

displays:

PRIVACY
ENABLED

o-1

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the Privacy feature.
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled

Press HOLD to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard.

the privacy feature may be limited by federal, state, und locul
law, so check the relevant laws in your urea before disabling privacy.

Disabling

For Single Line Telephones:
1

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the camp-on feature.
[0] = No Camp-on is allowed
[I] = Camp On is allowed

Press HOLD to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard.

Description
The system provides privacy on all communications in the system which prevents other stations from
accidentally entering an existing conversation. However, the system provides, on a per station basis, the
ability for a station to join an existing outside CO line conversation. Each station can be granted the privilege
to join an existing CO line conversation by simply pressing the CO line button of a CO line in use. The Privacy
flag when enabled on SLT type stations allows/denies Camp-on requests to the SLT. This can be useful in
situations where a modem is using the SLT port for data transmission. Disabling this feature lets data
transfer proceed without being interrupted with a camp on tone.
4.
+z+
+

Both the station and the CO Line must have Privacy disabled before the system allows cut-through.
If Privacy is disabled and a station joins an existing call, a programmable warming tone is presented
to both parties prior to actual cut-through.
If Privacy is disabled, up to eight other stations may join in on an existing conversation.

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

Issue I- December 1998

4-6

Station Attributes Programming
Page A Introduction

Privacy is enabled for all stations in default.
CO Line in Use by Another Station
Privacy Enabled
Privacy Disabled

Station Attempting to
Access CO Line
Privacy Enabled

Private
(No Cut-through)

Privacy Disabled

Private
(No Cut-through)

Privacy Released
(Cut-through Allowed)

Table 4-l: Station Privacy Flag

System Speed Dial Access
Programming Steps
1

Press the SPEED flexible button (FLASH 50, Page A, button #6). The following
message displays:
SYSTEM SPEED
ENABLED

o-1

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the Speed Dial feature.
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled

Press HOLD to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard.

Description
Stations can be individually allowed or denied the ability to use system speed dial (20-99) numbers. The
last 40 system speed numbers are not monitored by toll restriction. Stations cannot be prevented
from using station speed dial. By default, System Speed Dialing is enabled at all stations.

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

Station Attributes Programming
Page A Introduction

Lihe Queuing
Programming Steps
I

Press the QUEUING flexible button (FLASH 50, Page A, button #7). The following
message displays:
LINE QUEUING
ENABLED

O-l

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the Line Queuing feature.
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled

Press HOLD to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard.

Description

‘\.

Stations can be allowed or denied the ability to manually queue for a busy group of CO lines. Even when
disabled, stations have automatic LCR queuing privileges. By default, CO Line Queuing is enabled at all
stations.

Preferred Line Answer
Programming Steps
1

Press the PREF LINE ANSWER flexible button (FLASH 50, Page A, button #8). The
following message displays:
.
t

PREF LINE ANSWER
ENABLED

O-l

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the Preferred Line feature.
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled

Press HOLD to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard.

Description
Stations can be given the ability to answer a call by simply going off-hook. By default, Preferred Line Answer
is enabled on all stations.
STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

issue I- December 1998

Station Attributes Programming
Page A Introduction

Off-Hook Voice Over (OHVO)
Programming Steps
1

Press the OHVO flexible button
message displays:

(FLASH 50, Page A, button #g). The following
O-1

OFF HOOK VOICE OVER
DISABLED

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the Off-Hook Voice Over
feature.

[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled
3

Press HOLD to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard.

Description
When enabled, this feature allows a digital station to receive OHVO while on a call. A station can be denied
the ability to receive OHVO calls by disabling this feature. By default, Off-HookVoice Over is disabled for all
stations. The station must be in H or P mode to enable this feature.

Call Forwarding
Programming Steps
1

Press the CALL FORWARD flexible button (FLASH 50, Page A, button #IO). The
following message displays:

4
2

CALL FORWARD
ENABLED

o-1

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the Call Forwarding feature.
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled

Press HOLD to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard.

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

Station Attributes Programming
Page A introduction

Description
_.+z:-.F- --.-.-. i>.
63

Stations can be allowed or denied the ability to forward incoming CO calls, intercom calls, or transferred
outside lines to another station or group. By default, Call Forwarding is enabled at all stations.

Forced Least Cost Routing (LCR)
Programming Steps
1

Press the FORCED LCR flexible button (FLASH 50, Page A, button #II). The following
message displays:
FORCE LCR
DISABLED

o-1

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the LCR feature.
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled

Press HOLD to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard.

Description
Stations may be forced to place outgoing CO calls by use of LCR (dial [9]) to access an outside line. This lets
the system administrator control dialing patterns and lines used for outgoing CO calls. This can be
enabled/disabled on a per-station basis for additional flexibility and control. Forced LCR is optional
(disabled) for all stations, and eliminates access to all other line groups.

ACD Supervisor Monitor with Barge-In
Programming Steps
1

Press the SUPV BARGE-IN flexible button (FLASH 50, Page A, button #12). The
following message displays:

I
2

ACD SUPV BARGE IN
DISABLED

o-1

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the ACD Supervisor feature.
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

issue I- December 1998

Station Attributes Programming

4-10

Page A Introduction

Press HOLD to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard,
The use of Supervisor Monitor with Barge-In is limited by federal low and
mayalso belimitedorprohibitedbystote orlocallaw, so check fherelevant
laws in your area before employing these features.
A change in volume may occur on the CO line or intercom call offer the
barge-in occurs.

Description
Eh%feature k avadable with optiomzlsoftware. The ACD Supervisor Monitor with Barge-In feature
provides a means for an ACD Supervisor to monitor an agents call in progress to coach sales techniques or
customer relations skills. When used, a supervisor may intrude into an agent’s call in a listen-only mode or
in a true conference mode. Prior to barge-in, a supervisor must log into the agent’s group using the
supervisor log-in code 576xXx. This feature is available with or without a warning tone. By default, the
Supervisor Monitor with Barge-In feature is disabled.
Executive Override is a system feature and, therefore, fakes precedence
over this feature. If Supervisor Monitor with Barge-In is used properly,
Executive Override MUST be disabled. Otherwise, the barge-in is performed with the MUTE button OFF.

Executive Override Blocking
1

Programming Steps

Press the EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE BLOCKING flexible button (FLASH 50, Page A,
button #13). The following message displays:
EXEC OVERRIDE BLOCK
ENABLED

O-l

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the Exec Override Block feature.
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled

Press HOLD to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard.

I s s u e I - December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

,_,1
.
‘,;;-;;: ,

Station Attributes Programming
Page A Introduction

Description
;+,-7.
_,.:,.G
.‘.2
c.-;

The Executive Override Feature has a separate condition added to it that allows or disallows an Executive to
override an extension. This prevents an extension with override capability from overriding an Executive’s
station. By default, Executive Override is enabled at all stations.
The Executive Override blocking feature also blocks an AC0 Supervisor
Monitor with Barge-/n.

CO Line Ringing Options
Programming Steps
1

Press the RINGING OPTIONS flexible button (FLASH 50, Page A, button #14). The
following message displays:
CO RING OPTIONS
MUTED RING

O-1

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the Ringing Options feature.
[0] = Reminder Ring
[I] = Muted Ring -

Press HOLD to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard.

Description
When a CO call rings at a busy station, the call rings at the station using a muted ring signal. This option lets
a user receive a reminder ring at his station, instead of muted ring. In addition, a reminder ring timer has
also been added to the system to provide the reminder ring every time the timer expires, for as long as the
incoming CO line has not been disconnected. By default, Muted Ringing is allowed at all stations.

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Issue I- December 1998

Station Attributes Programming

4-12

Page

Blntroduction

Name / Number Display at Idle
Programming Steps
I

Press the NAME/NUMBER DISPLAY flexible button (FLASH 50, Page A, button #is).
The following message displays:
NAME AT IDLE ICD
NAME

O-l

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable the Name/Number feature.
[0] = Name
[I] = Station Number

Press HOLD to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard.

Description
This feature displays the standard idle LCD showing the programmed 7-digit name and station number
together. This option is programmable on a per station basis, however, the feature must be enabled /
disabled in admin programming. If a station has this feature enabled but has not programmed a name, the
name portion of the LCD is blank. The idle display priority is UCD/ACD, Hunt, Station/Name, or Station. By
default, the Name and Station number display on the LCD.

Page B Introduction
Programming Steps
If the system is in the programming mode, continue using the program codes. If starting to program here,
enter the programming mode.
I

Press FLASH and dial [50]. The following message displays:
STATION ATTRIBUTES
SELECT A STATION RANGE

,' *.i. ',
.,.:.
I.:;..;1 _.i. ,

Enter a 6-digit number for the station range being programmed. If one station is being
programmed, enter that number twice, e.g., [100100].

I s s u e I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Station Attributes Programming
Page B Introduction

HOLD is pressed without entering a station range, all stations (100-131)
are selected.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.
Flexible button #24 (New Range) is lit.

Press [PG B] button. The current programming for those features displays as:

XXX-XXX PAGE B
ENTER BUTTON NUMBER

Where:
XXX = Station Range (100-131)

Description
i

This section describes the steps and procedures necessary to program station attributes. Range programming
enables the programmer to change a specific parameter or a few parameters for a range of stations, leaving
intact the remaining data fields not requiring changes. Those data fields continue to operate with the
previously programmed data.
When programming the Page B features, the flexible buttons are mapped as follows:
DAYCLASSOF
SERVICE
sEiIxl*12

NIGHT CLASS
OF SERVICE
+%l3rIizl
PRESET
GROUP PICKUP
PAGING ZONES
FORWARD
*m
%fn
%a
LCR CLASS OF
OFF-HOOK
BUTTON
SERVICE
PREFERENCE
ASSIGN
s#~liEIE!l8111
VMID
DISPLAY
TRANSLATION
BUTTONS
%+113
%114
%llEIzl
CKTU
PAGE A
%sn
%I!iBzxl
*Ils
PAGE C
NEXT (FWD)
NEXT (BACK)
%1219122
+%D
STATION ID

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

SPEAKERPHONE
*
14
CO LINE GROUP
ACCESS
%+-I
KEY SET MODE
2#

+#lTcr-Hl
PAGE B
Q
130
NEW RANGE
%kLi?Kizl

I s s u e I- December 1998

Station Attributes Programming
Page B Introduction

Station ldentif ication
Programming Steps
1 Press the STATION ID flexible button (FLASH 50, Page B, button #l).
STATION ID
KEYSET
1

o-7

Enter a 1, 2, 3 or 4-digit value on the dial pad to identify the type of terminal:
[000] or [0] = 24-Button Terminal
[I] = DSS Console
[6] = SLT without Message Wait
[7] = SLT with Message Wait
[007] = 12-Button Terminal
[008] = g-Button Terminal

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
Each system port must be programmed to identify the type of station that operate on that port. Each station
type must be identified. By default, all Key Telephone Boards (DTIB) default to ID 0 (24-Button Digital
Terminal), all Single Line Boards (SLIB) default to ID 6.
When identifying a station as a DSS / OLS console, you must also enter
the station number of the key telephone to which the DSS / DL S console
is associated. To associate a DSS console with Station 100, the entry
would be 1100 [HOLD].

Station ID for DSS / DLS Console with Map
Programming Steps
I

Dial [I] on the dial pad.

Enter the 3-digit station number (100-131) to which the DSS/DLS Console is
associated.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming fvk~nual

Station Attributes Programming
Page B Introduction

o-7
STATION ID
DSS MAP X ASSOC XXX
Where:

x =I
XXX = Station Range (100-131)

MAP #l by default has all 12 CO Lines and all 32 Stations, 100-131. This provides a default layout for a
12x32 configuration. Station/Feature buttons are flexible and can be changed by the station user. CO Line
buttons are NOT changeable.

128

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

issue I- December 1998

4-16

Station Attributes Programming
Page B Introduction

SLT Station ID
Programming Steps
1 Dial [6] on the dial pad.
2

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.
STATION ID
SLT

o-7

Description
The STARPLUS Triad-ST”’ system supports industry standard 2500-type (DTMF) single line instruments.
When the CSIB is installed in the system, a maximum of 24 single line telephones are supported,

SLT with Message Waiting Lamp Station ID
Programming Steps
1 Dial [7] on the dial pad.
2

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates,
STATION ID
SLT W MSG

o-7

Description
The Triad-S system supports industry standard 2500-Type (DTMF) single line instruments. When the CSIB
is installed in the system, a maximum of 8 single line telephones may be supported. The Triad-S system
supports up to 24 single line telephones.
Triad-S system sends 9OV DC to SL Ts with message waiting lamps.

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

4-17

Station Attributes Programming
Page B Introduction

Station Day Class of Service (COS)
Programming Steps
I

Press the DAY COS flexible button (FLASH 50, Page B. button #2).
DAY COS
1

1-6
.

The six classes of service are:
COS 1 = No restrictions.
COS 2 = Table A governs
COS 3 = Table B governs
COS 4 = Table A and B govern
COS 5 = Restricts [0], [I], [*I, [#] dialed as first-digit and places a 7-digit maximum.
COS 6 = Intercom Only (no CO line access - will result in 911 block)

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

issue I- December 1998

4-18

Station Attributes Programming
Page 6 Introduction

Description
Each station must be assigned a certain COS for Day Mode operation and for Night Mode operation. Class of
Service (COS) determines the station’s dialing privileges. By default, all stations are assigned a COS 1 for
Day Mode.

CO LINE CLASS OF SERVICE
I
Unrestricted

A - - - Table A
T 2’
I -7

Table B
0 3
N ---:
Table A&B
4
C-....-Canned
0 5 ; Restricted*
S-Intercom
6 1Only

Unrestricted

Canned
Restricted*

Unrestricted

Table A

Unrestricted

Canned
Restricted*

Unrestricted

Table B

Canned
Restricted*

Unrestricted

Table A

Table B

Canned
Restricted*

Unrestricted

Canned
Restricted*

Unrestricted

Intercom
Only

* Canned Restriction: No [O], [I], [#I, [%J as first dialed digit, and 7-digit dialing /imitation; plus I800, 1911, 1611 are allowed, and 411, 976, and 555 numbers are denied.

Table 4-2: Class of Service (COS)

Station Night Class of Service (COS)
Programming Steps
I

Press the NIGHT COS flexible button

NIGYT cos

(FLASH 50, Page B, button #3).

1-6

The six classes of service are:

L
.-I
:::::: :
\. ..::
_

COS 1 = No restrictions.
COS 2 = Table A governs
COS 3 = Table B governs
COS 4 = Table A and 6 govern
COS 5 = Restricts [0], [I], [*I, [#] dialed as first-digit and places a 7-digit maximum.
Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Station Attributes Programming
Page 8 Introduction

COS 6 = Intercom Only (no CO line access - will result in 911 block)
z

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
Each station must be assigned a COS for Night Mode operation. The Night COS goes into affect when the
system is manually or automatically placed into Night Mode. This prevents misuse of phones after hours.
Class of Service (COS) determines the station’s dialing privileges. By default, all stations are assigned a COS 1
for Night Mode. Refer to Table 4-2: Class of Service (COS).

Speakerphone / Headset
Programming Steps
Press the SPEAKERPHONE flexible button (FLASH 50. Page 6, button #4). The
following message displays:
SPEAKERPHONE
FULL SPEAKERPHONE

O-2

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to identify the speakerphone operation.
[O]= Works as normal speakerphone. Full speakerphone capabilities on CO lines and
Intercom.
[I] = Speakerphone enabled for intercom calls only. Speakerphone capabilities disabled
for outgoing CO line calls (monitoring and on-hook dialing are still permitted).
[2] = Permits toggling of speakerphone and headset operation via the [634] Headset
code.
Forces the telephone to always ring in the tone intercom mode.
Forces the telephone to the hand-free intercom mode always.
Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
Speakerphones are programmable. By default, all stations are assigned an ID of 0 (Full Speakerphone).

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming

Mc~nuol

Issue I- December 7998

Station Attributes Programming

4-20

Page B Introduction

Pickup Group(s)
Programming Steps
I

Press the GROUP PICKUP flexible button
following message displays:
PICKUP
1

1
2

GROUPS

(FLASH 50, Page B, button #5). The

o-4

Enter a 1-4 digit number to program pickup groups.
[0] = No Group
[I] = Group 1
[2] = Group 2
[3] = Group 3
[4] = Group 4

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates,

Description
Stations are assigned to pick-up groups. Stations can be in any combination of the four groups or in no
group at all. By default, all stations are in Group 1.

Paging Zone(s)
Programming Steps
1

Press the PAGING ZONES flexible button
following message displays:

.
2

PAGE ZONE
1

(FLASH 50, Page B. button #6). The

o-4

Enter a 1-4 digit number to program paging zone(s).
[0] = No Zone (no pages received)
[I] = Zone 1
[2] = Zone 2
[3] = Zone 3
[4] = Zone 4

lssoe I - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

4-21

Station Attributes Programming
Page I3 Introduction

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
?@
c-

Stations are assigned to internal paging zones. A station can be in any or all zones or in no zone at all. All Call
is all page zones combined. If a station is not in an internal zone, it is excluded from all call pages. Stations
not assigned to a page group can make page announcements if allowed in station programming. Stations can
be assigned to a page group to receive pages but cannot make pages, All stations are in Zone 1.

Preset Call Forward
Programming Steps
1 Press the PRESET FORWARD flexible button (FLASH 50, Page 6, button #7). The
following message displays:

I
2

PREE FORWARD

xxx
I

Enter a 3-digit entry to determine the destination where calls must be routed when the
Preset Forward Timer expires.
Valid 3 digit destinations are:
[020-099]= System Speed Bins 20-99 for off-net forwarding
[IOO-1311 = Triad-S Extension Numbers
[440-447]= Voice Mail Groups l-8
[450-457]= Hunt Groups l-8
[550-557]= UCD Groups l-8
[550-565]= ACD Groups 1-16

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
;:z;,
.I >l., .,..,A”
c:+

This feature lets the system database be configured so incoming CO Lines, programmed to ring at a
particular station, can be forwarded elsewhere in the system predetermined by programming. This feature is
active if the station ringing is not answered in a specified time. This is particularly useful in overflow
applications where a Voice Mail or Auto Attendant may be in use. A station may have one designated preset
forward location defined in the database.
Preset Call Forward only can be chained to other preset forward stations specified in the database (up to five
stations), If a CO Line forwarded by Preset Call Forward encounters a manually forwarded station (Call
STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

4-22

Station Attributes Programming
Page B Introduction

Forward - Station), or a station in DND, the incoming CO Line bypasses that station and forwards to the
next in the chain. If that station is the last in the chain, the call forwards no further and continues to ring at
that station until answered or terminated. Chainable Preset Call Forwarding forces the incoming CO Line to
ring at each station preassigned in the database for the Preset Forward Ring Timer [FLASH 011 [Button 51,
specified in the database, before forwarding.
CO Lines can be preset forwarded to ring into an ACD, UCD, Voice Mail, Hunt Group or Off-Net via speed dial
from any station. A CO Line does not preset forward to a busy Hunt, Voice Mail, ACD, or UCD Group. Each
time the preset forward timer expires (for a total of five attempts), the group is checked for an idle station.
If a member of the group is idle, the call is presented to that member. No preset forward destinations are
programmed.

CO Line Group Access
Programming Steps
I

Press the CO LINE GROUP ACCESS flexible button (FLASH 50, Page B, button #8)
The following message displays:
LINE GROUP ACCESS
1

o-7

Enter up to seven digits (0, or l-7) for the outside line groups the station to access.
[0] = No

Access (911 Calls disallowed/blocked)

[I] = Access to Group 1, Code 9 or 81
[2] = Access to Group 2, Code 82
[3] = Access to Group 3, Code 83
[4] = Access to Group 4, Code 84
[5] = Access to Group 5, Code 85
[6] = Access to Group 6, Code 86
[7] = Access to Group 7, Code 87
3

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the

display updates.

Description
A station can access any combination of outside line groups, or a station may not be allowed access to
outside lines. CO line groups are used primarily by single line telephones or for flexible buttons assigned as
pooled group buttons on a Key Telephone. B Stations are allowed access to Group 1.

issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

4-23

Station Attributes Programming
Page B Introduction

LCR Class of Service (COS)
Programming Steps
1 Press the LCR COS flexible button (FLASH 50, Page B, button #Q). The following
message

displays:

LCROCLASS OF SERVICE

O-6

Enter a 1 -digit number (O-6) to correspond to the LCR Class of Service desired.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
Stations can be given a class of service assignment for Least Cost Routing. The range is between 0-6, with 0
being unrestricted and 6 the most restricted. A station can use LCR routes with a priority number equal to or
higher than the stations LCR COS assignment. Stations are given unrestricted access (0).

Off -Hook Preference
Programming Steps
1

Press the OFF-HOOK PREF flexible button (FLASH 50, Page 8. button ##lo). The
following message displays:

OFFHOOK PREFENCE BTN
00 ENABLED

XXY
I

Enter the 2-digit button number (01-24) or (00) to indicate no specific button is
preferred. SLTs use [Ol] to enable or [00] to disable.

Enter one of the following:
[ 0] = Disables programmable preference so users may not change the of f-hook
preference as set in programming. Also use for SLT stations.
[I]= Enables programmable preference to key station users so that they may change the
off -hook preference through a user dial code.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

issue I- December 1998

4-24

Station Attributes Programming
Page B Introduction

Description
This lets a key station user automatically have a flex button selected when going off-hook or when pressing
the ON/OFF button, An SLT user may have a particular CO line or a CO line group selected automatically
when going off-hook. This may be established in programming so that key station users can select and/or
change their off-hook preference through the use of a dial code [691] + BB (01-24). Dialing [691] +00
disables Off-Hook Preference. This user programmable preference may be allowed or denied in
programming.
When establishing an off-hook preference for SLT stations, it is necessary to program the SLTs CO line, or
line group, to access when going off-hook, using a flex button programming procedure. By default, all
digital terminals can change their preference but no button is assigned (00). SLT stations cannot use this
feature.

Flexible Button
Programming Steps
i

Press the BUTTON ASSIGN flexible button (FLASH 50, Page B. button #ll). The

following message displays:
c

FLEX BUTTON PROG
ENTER BUTTON DATA
2

Enter the 2-digit button number [Ol-241 to program followed by the desired button
function as follows:

[0] = Flexible/user changeable
[l] = COline
[2] = Loop button/all-purpose CO appearance
[3] = Pool for specific groups
[4] = Direct feature programmable
[#] = Locks button

,X.;T-.-.
,. . ...- __.
9
.. . .
I._..._
c .yy

Description
Each Digital terminal has 8, 12 or 24 flexible buttons that can be programmed. One of the following five
operations can be selected in programming for each button.

issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

4-25

Station Attributes Programming
Page

B Introduction

To assign a button as a Flexible button (user programmable):
I

Enter [BB], [0], [HOLD].

FZ
-:-‘-:L‘ :.Y.zz, When a button is assigned as a flexible button [0], the user can program any features or functions on the
-SZ buttons to which they have access.
To assign a button as a CO Line button:
I

Enter [BB], [I], [LLL], [HOLD]
Where: LLL = CO Line 001-012
Example:

E
01

:
1

003
002
001

HOLD

Button
CO
CO
Number Code Line

Buttons assigned as specific CO lines provide direct access and appearance of the CO line at a station. The
station receives call status indications such as LED flash rates for incoming ringing when the line is placed
on HOLD, etc. CO Line ringing is programmed in CO Line Attribute programming.
TO assign a button as a Loop button:
1

Enter [BB], [2], [HOLD]
Example:

2
I

HOLD

Button Loop
Number Code

5~~:
....
c.::;
L

Used for a station without direct CO line appearance to answer the line ringing in or transferred to the
station. It is recommended that all stations be given a loop button so they can receive a transferred call on a
line for which they have no button access.
To assign a button as a Pool Group button:
I

Enter [BB], [3], [G], [HOLD]
Where: G = Line Group Number (l-7)

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e 7 - December 1998

Station Attributes Programming

4-26

Page 6 introduction

Example:

20
I

1
I

HOLD

Pool
Line
Button
Number Code Group

Some or all outside CO lines may be grouped together and accessed via a POOL button for the purpose of
placing an outgoing CO call. Pressing this button accesses the highest numbered unused CO line in that CO
line group.
To assign a button as a Feature button (admin programmable):
I

Enter [BB], [4], [XXX], [HOLD]

This feature enables flexible buttons to be programmed from a remote location, Range programming can
be used to assign these buttons to multiple stations. When a button is assigned as a feature button [4], the
programmer can program any features on the buttons.
To unassign (lock out) a button:
I

Enter [BB], [#I, [HOLD]

If SLT stations must be programmed for off-hook preference, program the desired CO line, or CO line group
the SLT must access when going off-hook.
To assign a CO line for an SLT with off-hook preference:
I

Enter [Ol], [I], [LLL], [HOLD]
Where: LLL = CO Lines (001-012)

To assign a CO Line Group for an SLT with off-hook preference:
I

Enter [Ol], [3], [G], [HOLD]
Where: G = Line Group Number (l-7)

,.T;-:.
‘.....
,. . . .
b> . ^ . . .
,;.
.-;
.:
\;...-,

I s s u e I - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

.
.,
:-;

Station Attributes Programming

4-27

Page B Introduction

Description

Code
570+[XXX]
579+[XXX]

ACD Call Qualifier

1ACD Calls in Queue Display

1 694

ACD Logout

Description

643

571
572+[XXX]

Code

Repeat Redial
I

Custom Message

644+[lDX]

A C D Login

Mailbox Button (IDX = OOI255)

645

Intercom Button

573

ACD Member Status

646+[XXX] Call Coverage (Ringing)

574

ACD Supervisor Help

647+[XXX] Call Coverage (Non-Ringing)

575+[XXX]

ACD Supervisor Logout

649+[44V]

One-touch Recording (VM
440-447)

576+[XXX]

ACD Supervisor Login

653

Caller ID Name/Number
Toggle

577+[XXX]

ACD Supervisor Status

654+[ 0, I]

Answering Machine Emulation

607

Attendant Available /
Unavailable

709

LCR

601

Attendant Override

695+[ 01-351

Distinctive Ringing (Station)

622

1Call Back

1770

1All Call Page

438

1Call Park (Personal)

I 633+[XX]

1Personalized Message

430-437

I Call Park (System)

1 632

I Background Music

1 771-774

I Internal Zone Page

624

Conference

( Universal Day / Night Answer (

602

I Disable CO Outgoing

I Group Pickup

625

Executive Override

775

Internal All Call

450-457

Hunt Groups

634

Headset Mode

621

Line Queue

760

External Page

LCR Queue Cancel

626
I

777
I

Meet Me Page
I

604

Night Service

706

Dial by Name

578

Overflow Available I
Unavailable

680

Speed Dial Directory

000-019

( CO Off-Net Forward

I Station Speed Bins

I
1 627

I Account Code

Table 4-3: Flex Button Codes for Remote Programming
STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

issue I- December 1998

4-28

Station Attributes Programming
Page B introduction

Code

Description

Code

Description

020-099

System Speed Bins

628

OHVO

100-131

Triad-S DSS

631

Do Not Disturb

566

UCDIACD
Available/Unavailable

640

Call Forward

567

UCDlACD Calls in Queue

641

Release Key

440-447

VM Pilot Groups

635

ICLID Unanswered Call

Table 4-3: Flex Button Codes for Remote Programming

Specific buttons may be assigned as unused or locked out. When a button is programmed as unused, the
button may not be programmed by the station user using flex button programming procedures.
24-Button Digital Keyset Default:
STA 100
%+n
STA 104

STA 102
%ErEl
STA 106

STA 103
#D
STA 107

STA 108
STA 109
STA 110
*I3rxl**co1
co2
co3
%%+licxEl*co5
CO6
LOOP

STA 111
%+112
co4
4km
POOL

%15

#lirLil

STA 101
#12
STA 105

#em

#XK;

#en

CALL BACK
PICKUP
%6121*-

DND
*D

ols

$120

LINE QUEUE
*-

12-Button Digital Keyset Default:
STA 100
*iIirxl
co1
915
CALL BACK
#t+l3c3zl

issue I- December 1998

STA 101
+%D
co2
116
PICKUP
%+l3cxl

STA 102
STA 103
3%;
*DzEl
LOOP
POOL
8617
%#lzEziJ
DND
LINE QUEUE
%+mzxl%112

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Station Attributes Programming
Page 6 introduction

&Button-Digital Keyset Default:
STA 100
*CALL BACK
#6121

STA 101
9
118
PICKUP
e-

LOOP
rar--Tl
DND
%+123

POOL
9#
I?0
LINE QUEUE
sit-

Keyset Mode
Programming Steps
1

Press the KEYSET MODE flexible button (FLASH 50, Page B, button #12). The
following message displays:
KEYSET MODE
INACTIVE MODE

o-4

Enter a l-digit number to change the mode of a digital terminal:
[0] = Inactive Mode (normal mode without CTI box)
[I] = PC Phone Mode at 4800 baud
[2] = ATD Command Mode at 4800 baud
[3] = ATH Command Mode at 4800 baud
[4] = CKTU Mode

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
This feature lets the station user determine the mode in which the Digital Terminal with CT1 Box (optional)
operates, The 5 modes are: Inactive, PC Phone, ATD Command, ATH Command and CKTU. Through the use
of a dial code, the station user can also determine the baud rate for each mode selected. This setting is stored
in back-up memory in the event of a power outage or system reset.
By default, keyset is set for Inactive Mode.

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

Station Attributes Programming
Page 6 introduction

Voicemail ID Translation
Programming Steps
I Press the VMID TRANSLATION flexible button (FLASH 50, Page B, button #13). The
following

message

VOKXW&L

displays:

0000-9999

Enter a four-digit VMID number which corresponds to 0000 to 9999.

Press HOLD to update the table. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
This feature enables programming of the station number sent to the Voice Mail via In-Band integration. By
default, the station number is sent to the Voice Mail system. In station programming, there is a field to
insert a $-digit entry (0000-9999) which can be sent to the Voice Mail system in place of the station
number. By default, Station Numbers are assigned as VMID Digits.

Display Flexible Buttons
Programming Steps
1

Press the DISPLAY BUTTONS flexible button (FLASH 50. Page B, button #14). The
programming assignment on four buttons display starting with the lowest button number.

Each time the DISPLAY BUTTONS button is subsequently pressed, the next four
buttons display. The following message displays:

BUTTONS XXX-YYY OlDlOO
02D101
03D103
04D104

Where:
XXX = Station Number
/_ .:‘-z :,
I.
ir::::::‘;
:‘

BB = Button Number

‘.-‘-,7;

YYY = Button Function (See Table 4-4)

Description
Press the display button (FLASH 50, Page B, button #14) to display programming assignments. Each
time the DISPLAY BUTTONS button is subsequently pressed, the next four buttons display.
Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

.:.

Station Attributes Programming
Page B Introduction

When a button is assigned as a flexible button [O], the user can program any features or functions on the
buttons to which he has access. When the buttons are programmed with user programmed functions, the
display shows the function assigned to the button.

Flex Button

Designation

Flex Button

Designation

A[AAA]

ACD Group with Pilot Number

ACC

Account Code Enter

W’JI

Internal Page with Zone

ACP

All Call Page

LCR

LCR Access

ALI

1Agent Login

I LP

1Loop

AL0

1Agent Logout

1IAC

1Internal All Call Page

AMD

I Agent Member Display

I LNR

Last Number Redial

ANS

Answering Machine Emulation
Mode

LQU

Line Queue

AOR

Attendant Override (attn)

ML=1

Personalized Message with
Message Number

AVL

ACD or UCD Available /
Unavailable

MMP

Meet Me Page

CBK

Call Back

MUL

Flexible Button

CID

Caller ID Name / Number
Toggle

MUS

Background Music

CIQ

ACD or UCD Calls in Queue

NTS

Night Service

CO[LLL]

CO Line Button (CO Line [LLL]) OFD

CQD

ACD Calls in

D[XXX]

Station DSS / BLF

Queue Display

ACD Overflow Station
Available I Unavailable

OHP

Off -Hook Preference

OHV

Off -Hook Voice Over

DND

1Do Not Disturb

1ww

(

DRG

) Distinctive Ringing

) PKU

) Pickup

Call Park with Park Location

DUA

Display Unanswered Calls

PUGI

Pool with CO Line Group
Number

EAC

External All Call

PPK

Personal Park

Table 4-4: Flex Button Display Designations

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Issue I- December 1998

Station Attributes Programming

4-32

Page B Introduction

Flex Button

Designation

Flex Button

Designation

EOR

Executive Override

WY1

Speed Dial Button with Bin
Number

WNI

External Page with Zone

SLI

Supervisor Login

FFW

Incoming Transfer CO Line

SLO

Supervisor Logout

H[ HHH]

Hunt Group with Pilot Number

SNR

Save Number Redial

HLP

Agent Help

STS

Supervisor Status Display

HST

Headset Mode

U[UUU]

UCD Group with Pilot Number

IAC

Internal All Call Page

UNA

Universal Night Answer

V[VVV]

VM Group with Pilot Number

w-L1
[Gl

CO Line Number

WA1

ACD Group Pilot Number

Pool or CO Line Group Number

[UUU]

UCD Group Pilot Number

Station Number

tvw

Voicemail Group Number

WW
[CCC1
WI

Hunt Group Number

w3
WI

Personalized Message Number

Call Park Location

Speed Dial Bin

Page Zone Number
Table 4-4: Flex Button Display Designations

Issue 7 - December 7998

S JARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Station Attributes Programming
Page B Introduction

Cordless KTU Feature Button
Programming Steps
TO assign FEAT Buttons on the Cordless KTU (CKTU) :
I

Press the Cordless Key Flexible Button (Flash 50, Page B, Button #17). The following
message displays:

CORDLESS KEY BTN
xx

00-24

Where XX = the assigned FEAT Button
00 = None
01-24 = Button l-24
Description
If a CKTU is associated with the station, the FEAT Button on the CKTU may be assigned to function as any one
(1) of the 24 Flexible Buttons on the telephone. This programming area defines which Flexible Button on the
telephone will be applied to the CKTU FEAT Button. Not all features are available to be assigned to the CKTU
FEAT button. By default, no button (00) is assigned to the FEAT.

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e I - December 1998

4-34

Station Attributes Programming
Page B Introduction

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Introduction
The ICLID (Incoming Calling Line Identification) feature was added to the STARPLUS TriacMP
System. For this feature to operate properly, it must be activated from the Central Office so the numbers or
name, if available, of the calling party are delivered over the individual tip and ring of the CO lines during the
first silent interval between ringing.

Calling Number / Name Display
This feature is the basic offering of the ICLID service when associated with the Triad-S System. Essentially,
whenever an incoming call is received at the system, the number received with the ringing signal is stored in
the line control tables and used during the call processing.
The primary function is that the calling number is displayed (if available) at any point at which the LINE
RINGING message is displayed in the system.
If two lines are ringing at the same time, the display shows the oldest line
information. After one of the lines is answered, the display shows the
information on the unanswered lines.

Additionally, with the availability of the calling name feature, if the calling name is provided, it displays
instead of the calling number. Note that although the Central Office delivery of the calling name is 12
characters, the internal table used to store the name for translation of a received number is 24 characters. If
the Central Office delivers a name, it is positioned left justified in the 24-character field on the display. If a
number is received that matches a number/name translation, the translated name is used and the name
delivered from the Central Office is discarded.
000000000111111111122222
123456789012345678901234

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

ICLID Route Programming
Introduction

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
I

If no name is available, supplied from the Central Office or internally from the translation table, the
delivered number is positioned centered in the display as shown above for the 14 Ns.
An option was added to the Local Number/Name Translation Table to route ICLID or Caller Entered ID
Digits based on a partial compare with the number entered in the translation table.

Incoming Number/Name for SMDR Records
When this feature is implemented, the system operates normally in the absence of ICLID information or
the failure of the ICLID equipment. If the information is present at the time that an SMDR record is
generated for a call, it alters the content and format of the SMDR output record.
Q

If the calling number is available, the number is output in the SMDR record in the same location as
the dialed number is located in the outgoing call record.
o If the calling name is present, an additional line is output in the SMDR identifying the name, This
record immediately follows the normal SMDR record. The normal SMDR record includes an
indicator that states the following record with name identification is present.
Unanswered calls are recorded in the SMDR record for incoming calls with a U indicator to provide caller
identification for statistical and call-back purposes.

Unanswered Call Management Table
An Unanswered Call Management Table with 100 entry capacity for the DVXp’us Digital System is maintained
in the system. The calling number/name information pertaining to any unanswered call is placed in this
table at the time the system determines the call was abandoned.
This table may be interrogated from any station user so that the unanswered calls may be reviewed and
handled by the customer. Upon entering the review process, the functions available to a phone are:
Function
Button

Function
1. Go to the beginning of table.

Lssue

1Dial Code 635

12. Review next item in this table entry. 1MUTE

13. Step to next table entry.

I- December 1998

HOLD

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

ICLID Route Programming
ICLID Ringing Assignments

4. Delete this table entry.

FLASH

5. Exit table review function.

ON/OFF

6. Step to previous table entry.

TRANSFER

7. Call Back

SPEED

ICLID Ringing Assignments
Programming Steps
If ICLID Ringing Assignments must be assigned or changed:
i

Press FLASH and dial [43]. The following message is shown on the display phone:
ROUTE 000 XXXY
.

c
Where:
000 = Route Number (000-252)
XXX = Ringing Destination
Y = Ringing Type
2

Press the RING ASSIGNMENT flexible button (FLASH 43, button #l). LED #I is lit
indicating Route 000 is ready for programming.

Enter the 3-digit destination (XXX) and the l-digit ring type (Y) followed by HOLD. A
confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Valid 3-Digit Destinations (XXX) are:
[020-0991 = System Speed Bins 20-99, for Off-Net ringing.
[IOO-1311 =Triad-S Extension Numbers
[440-447]= Voice Mail Groups 1-8
[450-457]=

Hunt Groups l-8

[499] = Direct Ringing to modem
[550-565]= ACD Groups 1-16
[550-557]=

ACD Groups l-8

Valid Ring Types (Y) are:
[0] = No Ring; unassigned; or to delete a station
[I] = Day Ring [D]
STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

Issue I- December 1998

ICLID Route Programming
ICLID Ringing Assignments

[2] = Night Ring [N]
[3] = Day/Night Ring [DN]
[4] = Special Only [S]

- I_.
..i . ._,.“_
. I._._..
. _ _. .,
c-.:-r-‘:‘_.’

[5] = Day/Special [DS]
[6] = Night/Special [NS]
[7] = All Modes [Day/Night/Special [A]

Description
ICLID Ringing Assignments let you change the ring assignment based on the incoming number received.
This feature permits you to select from 252 ringing routes for each entry in the name to number translation
table and DID table. For example, this feature could be used to re-route selected customers to a specific
ACD or UCD group and bypass the general attendant. The Direct Inward Dialing (DID) feature permits oneway direct inward dialing access to stations on specific DID lines from the public telephone network,
without going through an attendant answering position. DID capabilities refer to incoming calls only.
The system accepts 2-7 digits from the Central Office. This lets the number and name field of the LCD
display on a DID call be presented to the ICLID port. Calls are identified in the SMDR field as answered (I)
or Unanswered (U) followed by the DID number. At least one DTMF receiver must be installed.

RINGING
ASSIGNMENTS
#lirm

%%+ikm
DISPLAY
RINGING
ASSIGNMENTS
*n
*Izizzl

Issue I- December 1998

%12

4kE

#K;
*n

%+n
*-

#+#116

PREVIOUS
ROUTE NUMBER

SELECT ROUTE
NUMBER

NEXT ROUTE
NUMBER
*IaLicl

*lliszil

*122

+#a

STARPLUS

Es-7-l

Triad-S System Programming Manual

ICLID Route Programming
ICLID

Ringing

Assignments

View ICLID Ringing Assignments
Programming Steps

If ICLID Ringing Assignments must be viewed:
I

Press FLASH 43, button #17 to display ring assignments. Assignments are displayed in
sets of six, up to the number programmed. Press FLASH 43, button #I7 additional times
to cycle to the next group of six ring assignments.

ROUTE 000 DOORR OOORR
DDDRR DDDRR DDDRR DDDRR

Where:
DDD = Destination
RR:
[0] = No Ring
[D] = Day Ring
[N] = Night Ring
[DN] = Day/Night Ring
[S] = Special Only
[DS] = Day/Special
[NS] = Night/Special
[A] = All Modes (Day/Night/Special)

Multiple station assignments are accomplished by assigning another destination with ring status, DDDR, and
pressing HOLD. This can be done for up to the maximum number of stations on the system.
Ring assignments are continuous and display in order of the destination number from
1

001-557.

A maximum of eight stations display. Additional stations and ringing assignments are
displayed using button #I 7.

To advance to the next Route:
I

Press the NEXT flexible button (FLASH 43, button #18) to advance to the next ICLID
Route number.

To go to a previous Route:
1

Press the PREVIOUS flexible
ICLID Route number.

button (FLASH 43, button #19) to return to the previous

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Issue I- December 1998

ICLID Route Programming

5-6

ICLID Features

To select a different Route:
1

Press the SELECT ROUTE NUMBER flexible button (FLASH 43, button #20)
the desired route number.

to select

Enter the 3-digit ICLID route number ([000-2521 for Triad l/2/3 Systems).

Press HOLD to change to the different route entered. A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
Keysets designated to ring on an incoming CO line but not designated to ring on the ICLID ring, may receive
a ring cycle before the call is moved. The same ringing restrictions applied to CO line ringing are applied to
ICLID ringing. By default, no destinations or ringing assignments exist.

ICLID Features
Programming Steps
If ICLID to use:
I

Press FLASH and dial [56]. The following message is shown on the display phone:

To program ICLID features, use the flexible button(s) as defined in the following
procedures.
Button # 1 = Disable/Enable
Button # 2 = Name In Display
Button # 3 = Baud Rate Display
Button #4 = Port Assignment

After all entries are made, press HOLD to accept the data.

The Triad-S system provides ICLID input on the standard RS-232C connector on the MPB, or to the optional
SIU2 Module. When ICLID is desired, the following system-wide parameters determine how the ICLID
information is distributed.

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

<;:’ ;:;:.. . _
I, - _.:. . . ...,
I .\ _

I --

5-7

ICLID Route Programming
ICLID Features

When entering the ICLID features programming area the buttons on the digital terminal are defined as
shown below:
ENABLE /
DISABLE
#Eixxl

NAME
%#iIz3al

BAUD RATE
*o

PORT
%14

Enable / Disable
Programming Steps
I

Press the DISABLE/ENABLE flexible button (FLASH 56, button #I).

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad to enable/disable this feature.
[0] = Disabled
[I] = Enabled

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
\

The ICLID (Incoming Calling Line IDentilication) feature was added to the Triad-S system. These features are
unavailable unless the Basic ICLID Software package was purchased separately. For this feature to operate
properly, it must be activated from the central office so the numbers of the calling party are delivered over
the individual tip and ring of the CO lines during the first silent interval between ringing. By default, ICLID is
disabled.

Name in Display
Programming Steps
I

Press the NAME flexible button (FLASH 56, button #2) to determine whether the name
shows in the LCD display instead of the incoming telephone number.

Enter a l-digit value on the dial pad.
[0] = Telephone number in display
[I] = Name in display

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard.

Description
The system can be set to display the incoming telephone number or the person’s name on the LCD display.
By default, the system shows the telephone number on the LCD display.
STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e 7 - December 1998

:
5-8

ICLID Route Programming
ICLID Features

Baud Rate Display
Programming Steps
The ICLID baud rate is programmed using Flash 15 baud rate assignments. The LCD displays the current
baud rate based on which number is assigned to the ICLID Port number.
FLASH 56, button #3

returns an error tone when pressed.

Description
The Triad-S system can provide ICLID input on the standard RS-232C on the optional MISU. The baud rate
is displayed as 150, 300,600, 1200, 2400, 4800, or 9600 baud.

Port Assignment
Programming Steps
1 Press the PORT flexible button (FLASH 56. button #4) to determine which port to use
for ICLID information.
2

Enter a l-digit entry for the ICLID Port number:
[I] = Port #I (MPB RS-232C on optional MISU)
[2] = Port #2 (MPB RS-232C on optional MISU)
[3] = Port #3 (Optional modem)
The LCD displays the current baud rate based on which number is assigned to the ICLID
Port number.
ICLID
NO

NAME
YES

f3i3;;

;ORT

Press HOLD to accept the data. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

I s s u e I- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

$c-$;.t$
“.“’ ACD Group Programming
Programming Steps
If the system is in the programming mode, continue using the program codes. If starting to program here,
enter the programming mode. If ACD Groups must be assigned:
1

Press FLASH and dial [60]. The following message displays:
ACDSXXA

ALT OVR
AAA BBB

AN
CCCC

SUP
DDD

Where:
[5Xx] = ACD Group Number (550457)
[A] = Page A Parameters
[AAA] = Alternate ACD Group Assignment
[BBB] = ACD Overflow Assignment
[CCCC] = ACD Announcement Tables
[DDD] = ACD Supervisor Programming
2

The top left button in the flexible button field is lit for programming ACD Group 1 (550).
To change ACD Groups or enter more ACD Groups (550-557), press the appropriate
flexible button and perform the following procedures.

Description

h..,.il
Yz;.‘A‘<
62

This feature is available with optional software. There can be 16 ACD groups of up to 16 stations
each, The ACD groups use a pilot hunting technique. If the pilot number is dialed, the assigned stations in
that ACD group are searched for the station in an idle condition for the longest period of time. Each ACD
Group may have an assigned Alternate ACD Group, an Overflow station and up to 16 stations as ACD
members. The eight system RAN ports (tables) may also be referenced on a per ACD group basis. By default,
ACD Group Tables are empty.
When entering the ACD Group(s) programming area, the buttons on the digital terminal are defined as
shown below:

Issue I- December 7998

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

6-2

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
ACD Group Programming

ACD GROUP 550 ACD GROUP 551 ACD GROUP 552 ACD GROUP 553
+km
*L2
%13
#kKE
ACD GROUP 554 ACD GROUP 555 ACD GROUP 550 ACD GROUP 557
*+kn
*i
s&i;
ALTERNATIVE
ACD OVERANNOUNCMENT
ACD SUPV
ACD GROUP
FLOW ASSIGN
TABLES
PROGRAMMING
**110
%D
*m
ACD WRAP-UP
CIQ
TIMER
THRESHOLD
%+m
%+n
%115
%116
DISPLK; S T A S SELECT PAGE A DISPLc6STAS
*m

#ki?iKzKl

119

I:1

#124

Alternate ACD Group Assignment
Programming Steps
To program an alternate group:
1

Press the ALTERNATE ACD GROUP flexible button (FLASH 60, button #Q).

Enter the 3-digit pilot number (550 to 557) of the desired alternate ACD
c

ACDSXXA

4
3

ALT OVR' AN
AAA BBB CCCC

group.

SUP
DDD

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
An alternate ACD group can be programmed so if no station in a group is available, the alternate group is
checked for an available station. This provides a way to chain or link ACD groups together. To delete an
Alternate ACD Group, press [#I three times and press HOLD.

I s s u e 7 - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
ACD Group Programming

ACD Overflow Station Assignment
Programming Steps
To program ACD Overflow station:
I

Press the OVERFLOW ASSIGN flexible button (FLASH 60, button #IO).

Enter a 3-digit station number to designate the ACD Groups overflow station.
c

ACD5XXA

ALT OVR AN
AAA BBB CCCC

SUP
DDD

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
When an overflow station is assigned, callers that remain in queue for a specified amount of time are routed
to the assigned overflow station. The overflow station may not be one of the ACD group stations. Only CO calls
transferred to a ACD group overflow to the overflow station when RAN tables are assigned. To delete an
Overflow Station, press [#I three times and press HOLD.

ACD Recorded Announcement Assignment(s) (RAN)
Programming Steps
To program a Recorded Announcement:
1

Press the ANNOUNCEMENT TABLES flexible button (FLASH 60, button #II).

Enter a four-digit sequence on the keypad:
First Digit = RAN port specified for Guaranteed Message (Direct Calls)
Second Digit = RAN port specified for primary message,
Third Digit = RAN port specified for secondary message.
Fourth Digit = RAN port specified for Guaranteed Message (transferred calls)

Press [#] once as the first digit if no Guaranteed Message is desired.

Example:
+z+

An entry of [#I, [2], [3] = No Guaranteed Message is heard. Announcement Table 2 provides a
primary message and Announcement Table 3 provides a secondary message.

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Issue 1

- December 1998

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

6-4

ACD Group Programming

+:*

An entry of [ 11, [2], [3] = Announcement Table 1 provides the Guaranteed Message upon initially
answering the call, Announcement Table 2 provides a primary message and Announcement Table 3
provides a secondary message.
An entry of [8], [ 11, [2] = Announcement Table 8 provides the Guaranteed Message upon initially
answering the call, Announcement Table 1 provides a primary message and Announcement Table 2
provides a secondary message.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

To erase Recorded Announcement(s):
1

Press [#] four times and press HOLD.

ACD5XXA

ALT OVR
AAA BBB

AN
CCCC

SUP
DDD

Description

Optional Recorded Announcement device(s) may be connected to the system to provide an announcement
if all stations in a ACD group are busy. Up to eight ports in the system may be assigned to provide a path to
Recorded Announcement devices. Incoming CO Callers are answered and routed to the Overflow
assignment only if a RAN Table is assigned.
The Guaranteed Message announcement provides a means to force incoming callers to an announcement
before being placed into an ACD Queue or routed to an agent. Outside callers are presented with a message
before being routed to the ACD Group. Agents in an ACD Group with a Guaranteed Message enabled receive
incoming callers only after the caller hears the designated recorded announcement in its entirety, or after
the incoming caller dials up to 14 digits followed by (#). These digits are inserted as ICLID incoming
number identification. If the Guaranteed Message announcement is programmed in Admin, incoming ACD
calls are routed to the Guaranteed Message RAN before going to the ACD Group.
The Guaranteed RAN Enhancement allows a second guaranteed RAN type to be associated with each ACD
Group in the system. This RAN handles only transferred CO calls. This lets a CO call transferred to an ACD
Group enter caller entered ID digits via this RAN. The digits are then compared to the local name/number
translation table and routed based on table entries. If no match is found, the call rings to the ACD Group.
Intercom calls to the group pilot number result in a busy tone. Once the intercom caller hangs up to
complete the transfer, the CO call is presented to the RAN device.

issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
ACD Group Programming

ACD Supervisor
-zz>

ProgrammingSteps

-.:.::

‘?2’

To program an ACD Supervisor:
i

Press the ACD SUPV flexible button (FLASH 60, button #12).

Enter the 3-digit station number of the desired ACD Supervisor station.
ACD5XXA

ALT OVR
AAA BBB

AN
CCCC

SUP
DDD

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description

/’

The ACD Supervisor Station assignment feature provides a means to assign each ACD group a supervisor.
This Supervisor Station can receive the calls in queue display in real time, receives No Answer/Out of Service
conditions, HELP displays from the groups to which the supervisor is assigned, and can barge-in on active
calls in his ACD Group or groups.
A supervisor can be assigned in ADMIN to a group or groups to receive the help request and out of service
(00s) messages. If a supervisor station is assigned in ADMIN, it is considered logged in. In addition, a
supervisor can dial a supervisor login code followed by the ACD group that the supervisor is logging into and
his 4-digit ID number.

ACD Auto Wrap-Up Timer
Programming Steps
To change the ACD Auto Wrap-up Timer:
1

Press the AUTO-WRAP TIMER flexible button (FLASH 60, button #13). The following
message displays:

Enter the 3-digit value on the dial pad which corresponds to 000-999 seconds.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
ACD Group Programming

Description
After completion of a ACD call (on-hook) the agent is not subjected to another ACD call for the duration of
the Auto Wrap-Up Timer allowing the agent to finish call related work or access other facilities. This lets
agents remove themselves from the group (e.g., DND, Call Forward) or originate another call. By default,
the ACD Auto Wrap-Up Timer is set for 4 seconds and is variable from 000-999 seconds.

ACD CIQ Threshold
Programming Steps
To make a change to the CIQ Threshold:
1

Press the CIQ THRESHOLD flexible button (FLASH 60, button #14). The following
message displays:

ACD5;;CIQ

THRSHOLD

00-99

,
2

Enter the 3-digit value on the dial pad that corresponds to 00-99 calls.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
This feature determines how many calls appear in queue before the LED flashes at 240 ipm flutter. Once
the number of calls in queue falls below the CIQ threshold, the LED extinguishes. By default, this feature is
disabled.
Conditions
+

Any ACD station can have a button assigned to view the calls in queue of any ACD group.

ACD Station Assignment(s)
Programming Steps
To program stations into a ACD group:
I

Press the DISPLAY STAS 9-16 flexible button (FLASH 60, button #lQ). The following
message displays.

issue I- December 1008

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

6-7

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
ACD Group Programming

ACDSXXB
?W#########
#?#######t!w#

Where:
[5Xx] = ACD Grp Number (550457)
[B] = Page B parameters
[###I = ACD Station assignments
:!

The top left button in the flexible button field is lit for programming ACD Group 1 (550).
To change ACD groups or enter further ACD groups (550-557) press the appropriate
flexible button and perform the following procedures.

Enter the 3-digit station numbers of the stations in the ACD group in the order in which
they are checked. The order is only relevant for the first call. After that, the rule is oldest
idle. Up to16 stations may be entered. No station entries are displayed at this time.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description

Any type of station (excluding DSSDLS Consoles) may be entered as valid ACD stations. Calls are routed to
station in the order they are entered for the first round of calls only. After that the calls are routed to stations
based on On-Hook time. The-station with the longest On-Hook time receives the next call. If a specific station
number is dialed, only that station is rung; no distribution is done if that station is busy.
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined as shown below when entering the ACD Station Assignments
programming area:
ACD GROUP 550 ACD GROUP 551
s%n
%kn
ACD GROUP 554 ACD GROUP 555
*a
*16
#iIEzEl

%+n

ACD GROUP 552 ACD GROUP 553
s#
I3
#slxzizl
ACD GROUP 556 ACD GROUP 557
s%
l-r-i-l
117
6111

#
115
%l!iExl#114
DISPL;-; S T A S SELECT PAGE A DISPLE6STAS
s%EYil

%k-

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

+%lzrxI
~lzcxHl

I s s u e I- December 1998

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
ACD Timers

To erase all stations, press [ #] three times and press HOLD.

If an ACD member is assigned to a specific ACD group and uses the loginlogout codes to enter and exit an ACD group other than their own assigned
group, the database programming for ACD stations is automatically
changed to re fleet the different group.
It is recommended that ACD agent station not be deleted from an ACD
group through database administration when that station is in the Unavailable Mode. This causes the LCD to display unavailable even though the
station is no longer part of the ACD group. The station can dial the 566
code to remove the message.

View ACD Station Assignments
Programming Steps
If ACD Station Assignments in the second group of eight (Stations Y-16) must be viewed:
1

Press the DISPLAY STAS l-8 flexible button(FLASH 60, Page B, button #17). The first
group of station assignments display. If no additional stations are assigned beyond the
first eight stations, the display shows (#)s instead of station assignments.

Press DISPLAY STAS 9-16 flexible button (FLASH 60. button #IS) to view the second
group of eight stations in the same ACD group.

Description
Any time a display of the first group of ACD Station assignments (default or changed) is needed, press the
DISPLAY STAS 1-8 button (button #17). It displays the first group of station assignments, up to eight
stations at a time. Button # 19 always shows the second group of eight stations programmed in the ACD
Group. Button #17 always displays the first group of eight stations programmed in the same ACD Group.

ACD Timers
Programming Steps
If ACD timers must be changed:
I

Press FLASH and dial [61]. The following message displays:

Lssue I - December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

,‘l.. .‘::.
‘I .I:.‘-!
1: L‘

6-9

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
ACD Timers

ACD TIMERS
ENTER BUTTON NUMBER

Description
Six timers for ACD operation are programmable on a system-wide basis. The ACD timers include: A Ring
Timer, Message Interval Timer, an Overflow Timer, a No/Answer Recall Timer, a No/Answer Retry Timer, and
a Guaranteed Message Timer. Each timer is described in the following section:
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined as shown below when entering the ACD Timers programming
area:
RING TIMER
*NO-ANSWER
RECALL
#15

MIT TIMER
812
NO-ANSWER
RETRY
#m

OVERFLOW
TIMER
3k13
GUARANTEED
MSG TIMER
*-

#km

ACD Ring Timer
Programming Steps
To make a change to the ACD Ring Timer:
1

Press the RING TIMER flexible button (FLASH 61, button #I). The following message
displays:
RING

000-300
060

Enter the 3-digit timer value on the dial pad which corresponds to 000-300 seconds.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Lssue I- December 1998

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

6-10

ACD Timers

Description
The ACD Ring Timer determines how long a call rings into a busy ACD group before being presented to the
first recorded announcement. By default, the ACD Ring Timer is set for 60 seconds, and is variable from
000-300 seconds.
A RAN Table must be specified in ACD programming. If a RAN Tab/e is
NOT specified, incoming CO callers are not answered but continue to
receive ringback.

ACD Message Interval Timer
Programming Steps
To change the ACD Message Interval Timer:
1

Press the MIT TIMER flexible
displays:
MESS/W&

INTERVAL

button (FLASH 61, button #2). The following message
000-600

Enter the 3-digit timer value on the dial pad which corresponds to 000-600 seconds.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.
The ACD Ring and Message Interval timers only apply when RAN ports are
specified. If RAN ports are not specified, incoming callers continue to
receive a ringback tone.

Description
The ACD Message Interval Timer (MIT) determines the length of time a caller remains in queue (listening
to MOH, if provided) between recorded announcements. By default, the ACD Message Interval Timer is set
for 60 seconds and is variable from 000-600 seconds.

ACD Overflow Timer
Programming Steps
To change the ACD Overflow Timer:

issue 7 - December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
ACD Timers

Press the OVERFLOW TIMER flexible button (FLASH 61, button #3). The following
message displays:
OVERFLOW
060

000-600

Enter the 3-digit value on the dial pad which corresponds to 000-600 seconds.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
The ACD Overflow Timer determines the total length of time a caller remains in queue for a particular ACD
group. When the timer expires, the caller is routed to the designated overflow station. The timer starts when
an incoming call is answered and presented to the first recorded announcement. Transferred CO callers
overflow at the expiration of the Overflow Timer. By default, the ACD Overflow Timer is set for 60 seconds and
is variable from 000-600 seconds.

ACD No-Answer Recall Timer
Programming Steps
To change the ACD No-Answer Recall Timer:
I

Press the NO-ANSWER RECALL TIMER flexible button (FLASH 61, button #5). The
following message displays:
NO-ANS RECALL
000

000-300

Enter the 3-digit value on the dial pad which corresponds to 000-300 seconds.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
If a call routed to a station via ACD is not answered by the ACD Agent/Station before the No-Answer Recall
Timer expires, the call is returned to ACD Queue with the highest priority. In addition, the station that failed
to answer the ringing ACD call is placed into an out-of-service (00s) state. By default, the ACD No-Answer
Timer is at 000 (disabled) and is variable from 000-300 seconds.

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

issue I- December 1998

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
ACD Timers

ACD No-Answer Retry Timer
Programming Steps
To change the ACD No-Answer Retry Timer:
1

Press the NO-ANSWER RETRY TIMER flexible button (FLASH 61. button #6). The
following message displays:
000-999

NO AK$;ER RETRY
.
2

Enter the 3-digit value on the dial pad which corresponds to 000-999 seconds.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
When the No-Answer Recall Timer expires, a station that failed to answer the ringing ACD call is placed into
an out-of-service (00s) state. The station that was taken out-of-service (00s) is placed back in service if the
agent presses the available flex button or dials the available flex code. In addition, the agent is placed back
in service if the No-Answer Retry Timer expires. If the agent does not answer his next ACD call, he is taken
out-of-service. This cycle continues until the station answers calls, logs out, or goes unavailable. By default,
the ACD No-Answer Retry Timer is set for 300 seconds and is variable from 000-999 seconds.

Guaranteed Message Timer
Programming Steps
To change the ACD Guaranteed Message Timer:
I

Press the GUARANTEED MESSAGE TIMER flexible button (FLASH 61, button #7).
The following message displays:
GUARANTEED

005

MSG

000-300
. _ :.

Enter the 3-digit value on the dial pad which corresponds to 000-300 seconds.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

I s s u e 7 - December 7998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

,;:<. -‘II
pL-“.<-:Z;:
: “,.::y
I

.“-

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

6-13

ACD Timers

Description
: .^;;.._. .::c?Z

This timer determines how long a call rings before being answered by Guaranteed Message RAN when the
Guaranteed Message RAN feature is added to an ACD Group. By default, the Guaranteed Message Timer is set
for 5 seconds and is variable from 000-300 seconds.

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

Issue I- December 1998

6-14

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
ACD Announcement Tables (RAN)

ACD Announcement Tables (RAN)
Programming Steps

.-,_, ..: . .
:-.’, c i

If Recorded Announcement devices are installed to operate with ACD, these tables must be programmed
1

Press FLASH and dial [62]. The
following message displays:

To program a table for CO line port:

ANNOUNCEMENT TABLE 1
TYPE # INDX ## TIME ####
z

The top left button in the flexible
button field is lit for programming ACD
RAN Announcement Table #I. To
change to ACD RAN Announcement
Table #2, press (FLASH 62, button
#2) flexible button.
(* Repeat the above for Tables 3-8.)

Press the TABLE X flexible button s
(l-8).

Dial [I] for CO Port Interface.

Dial [OOI-0121 for CO Lines used.

Enter Message duration (000-300
set)

To program a table for an SLT port:

Enter a string of six, or seven digits on
the dial pad. The order of data entry is:
Type Number:

Press the TABLE X flexible button
(Buttons 1 to 8).

Dial [2] for SLT Port Interface.

Dial [IOO-1311 for SLT stations used.

Enter Message duration (000-300
seconds).

[I] = CO Port Interface
[2] = SLT Port Interface

To program a table for RAN Hunt Group port:

[3] = RAN Hunt Group

Press the TABLE X flexible button
(Buttons l-8).

[OOI-0121 = Triad-S CO Line Ports

Dial [3] for RAN Hunt Group.

[IOO-131]= Triad-S SLT Station Ports

Dial [458-4611 for RAN Hunt Group
used.

Enter Message duration (000-300
seconds).

Index (port) Number:

[458-4611 RAN Hunt Group
Message Time:
000 to 300
4

seconds

Press HOLD to save the entry. A
confirmation tone is heard and the
display updates.

To clear entries in a Table:
1

Press [#] once followed by HOLD.

I
-..

-.-

---_

I able 6-I: Programming AC;lJ Announcement Tables

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

6-15

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
PC I ACD Interface Trace

Description
Determines the type, index (port) number and message length for the eight available Recorded
Announcements (RAN). There are eight RAN Tables that can be programmed. Table 1 can be the answer port
for unanswered incoming calls to a ACD group. Table 8 can provide the secondary message or vice versa.
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined as shown below when entering the ACD RAN Announcement
Tables Programming area:
ANNOUNCEMENT TABLE 1

ANNOUNCEMENT TABLE 2

ANNOUNCEMENT TABLE 3

ANNOUNCEMENT TABLE 4

ANNOUNCEMENT TABLE 5
%sn

ANNOUNCEMENT TABLE 6
s:-

ANNOUNCEMENT TABLE 7
%+-

ANNOUNCEMENT TABLE 6
1ls

811

%12

+#13

The type can be either a CO line port, an SLT port or a RAN Hunt Group port. The index number specifies
which circuit for the type of interface. The message length is used to match the maximum length of the
message to the device that is used.
,’

PC / ACD Interface Trace
Programming Steps
To enable PC/ACD Interface Trace options:
f

Press FLASH and dial [63]. The following message is shown on the display phone:

ACD-EVT-TRACE
NO

I/O
X

BAUD
YYYY

Where:
X = Port for PC/ACD Interface Trace
YYYY = Baud Rate of desired port

Description
b avduble with opthzdsofume. The PC/ACD Interface Trace feature provides an event trace
output which is compatible with a third-party PC/ACD Reporting package

Thefeature

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Issue I- December 1998

6-16

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
PC / ACD Interface Trace

The buttons on the digital terminal are defined as shown below when entering the PC/ACD Event Trace
feature programming area:
ENABLE /
DISABLE
#km

TRACE PORT
ASSIGNMENT
*D

%EcIa

#k.

Enable / Disable
Programming Steps
1

Press the DISABLE/ENABLE flexible button (FLASH 63, button #l). The following
message is shown on the display:
ACD-EVT-TRACE
NO

I/O
X

BAUD
YYYY

Press the ENABLE/DISABLE flexible button.
LED On = YES (Enabled)
LED Off = NO (Disabled)

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
The PC/ACD Interface Trace provides a series of events trace output which is compatible with a third-party
PC/ACD Reporting package. By default, the PC/ACD Event Trace is disabled (NO).

Trace Port Assignment
Programming Steps
I

Press the TRACE PORT ASSIGNMENT flexible button (FLASH 63, button #2) to
determine which port to use for the PC/ACD Interface Trace.

Enter a l-digit entry for the PC/ACD Event Trace Port number:
[I] = Port #I (MISU)
[2] = Port #2 (MISU)
[3] = Port #3 (Modem)

issue I - December 7998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
ACD Group

The LCD displays the current baud rate based on which Port number is assigned to the
ACD SMDR Port number.

52,
cI;;-:.._ .:.;u.:I-*.

ACD-EVT-TRACE
NO
3

I/O
X

#
.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Baud Rate Display
Programming Steps
The PC/ACD Port baud rate is programmed using Flash 15 baud rate assignments, The LCD displays the
current baud rate based on which Port number is assigned to the ACD SMDR Port number. The following
message displays:

ACDJ;T-TRACE

I/O
X

BAUD
YYYY

Description
The STARPLUS Digital Hybrid Telephone System can provide PC/ACD Reporting output to the optional MISU
RS232C I/O ports. The baud rate is displayed as 300, 1200, 2400,4800, or 9600 baud. By default, the
PC/ACD baud rate is set to 9600.

ACD Group
Programming Steps
If the system is in the programming mode, continue using the program codes. If starting to program here,
enter the programming mode. If ACD Groups must be assigned:
1

Press FLASH and dial [64]. The following message displays:
ACD5XXA

ALT OVR
AAA BBB

AN
CCCC

SUP
DDD

Where:
[5Xx] = ACD Grp Number (558-565)

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

lssue I- December 1998

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
ACD Group

[A] = Page A Parameters
[AAA] = Alternate ACD Group Assignment
[BBB] = ACD Overflow Assignment
[CCCC] = ACD Announcement Tables
[DDD] = ACD Supervisor Programming
2

The top left button in the flexible button field is lit for programming ACD Group 9 (558).
To change ACD Groups or enter further ACD Groups (558 to 565), press the
appropriate flexible button and perform the following procedures.

Description
i%isfeature is available with optionalsoflware. There can be sixteen ACD groups of no more than sixteen
stations each. The ACD groups use a pilot hunting technique. If the pilot number is dialed, the assigned
stations in that ACD group are searched for the station that is in an idle condition the longest time. Each
ACD Group may have an assigned Alternate ACD Group, an Overflow station and up to sixteen stations as
ACD members. The eight system RAN ports (tables) may also be referenced on a per ACD group basis. By
default, ACD Group Tables are empty.
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined as shown below when entering the ACD Group(s)
programming area:
ACD GROUP 558 ACD GROUP 559 ACD GROUP 560
*!IiIxi
*+k;
ACD GROUP 562 ACD GROUP 563 ACD GROUP 564
%+m
s##m
ALTERNATE
ACD OVERANNOUNCEACD GROUP
FLOW ASSIGN
MENT TABLES
?#;
#llmrE!l
%+a
ACD WRAP-UP

ACD GROUP 561
*ACD GROUP 565
*D
ACD SUPV
PROGRAMMING
+#L!cxx.l

DISPLA--4 S T A S SELECT PAGE A DISPLE6STAS
*117

Issue I- December 1998

*118

at+-

STARPLUS Triad-S Sysfem Programming Manual

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

6-19

ACD Group

Alternate ACD Group Assignment
Programming Steps
To program an alternate group:
I

Press the ALTERNATE ACD GROUP flexible button (FLASH 64, button #Q).

Enter the 3-digit pilot number (558-565) of the desired alternate ACD group.
L

ACD5XXA
.
3

ALT OVR
AAA BBB

AN
CCCC

SUP
DDD

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
An alternate ACD group can be programmed so that if no station in a group is available, the alternate group is
checked for an available station. This provides a means to chain or link ACD groups together. To delete an
Alternate ACD Group, press [#I three times and press HOLD.

ACD Overflow Station Assignment
Programming Steps
To program ACD Overflow station:
I

Press the OVERFLOW ASSIGN flexible button (FLASH 64, button #IO).

Enter a 3-digit station number to designate the ACD Groups overflow station.
ACD5XXA

.t>
.-~.+
/
“;;.:
L

ALT OVR
AAA BBB

AN
CCCC

SUP
DDD

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
When an overflow station is assigned, callers that have remained in queue for a specified time are routed to
the assigned overflow station. The overflow station may not be one of the ACD group stations. Only CO calls
transferred to a ACD group overflow to the overflow station when RAN tables are assigned. To delete an
Overflow Station, press [#I three times and press HOLD.

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

6-20

ACD Group

ACD Recorded Announcement Assignment(s) (RAN)
Programming Steps

,...;.-.>‘
_ ,..‘_
i : :x .,,
‘-. . b’-:

To program a Recorded Announcement:
1

Press the ANNOUNCEMENT TABLES flexible button (FLASH 64, button #ll).

Example:
+

An entry of [#I, [2], [3] = No Guaranteed Message is heard. Announcement Table 2 provides a
primary message and Announcement Table 3 provides a secondary message.
o An entry of [ 11, [2], 131 = Announcement Table 1 provides the Guaranteed Message upon initially
answering the call, Announcement Table 2 provides a primary message and Announcement Table 3
provides a secondary message.
$8 An entry of [8], [ 11, [2] = Announcement Table 8 provides the Guaranteed Message upon initially
answering the call, Announcement Table 1 provides a primary message and Announcement Table 2
provides a secondary message.
3

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

To erase Recorded Announcement(s) :
1

Press [#] four times and press HOLD.

ACD5XXA

ALT
AAA

OVR
BBB

AN
CCCC

SUP
DDD

Description
Optional Recorded Announcement device(s) may be connected to the system to provide an announcement
if all stations in a ACD group are busy. Up to eight ports in the system may be assigned to provide a path to
Recorded Announcement devices. Incoming CO Callers are answered and routed to the Overflow
assignment only if a RAN Table is assigned.
The Guaranteed Message announcement provides a means to force incoming callers to an announcement
before being placed into an ACD Queue or routed to an agent. The outside callers are presented with a
Issue 1

- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

6-21

ACD Group

7%
d$2

message before being routed to the ACD Group. Agents in an ACD Group with a Guaranteed Message enabled
receive incoming callers only after the caller hears the designated recorded announcement in its entirety, or
after the incoming caller dials up to 14 digits followed by (#). These digits are inserted as ICLID incoming
number identification. If the Guaranteed Message announcement is programmed in Admin, incoming ACD
calls are routed to the Guaranteed Message RAN before going to the ACD Group.
The Guaranteed RAN Enhancement allows a second guaranteed RAN type to be associated with each ACD
Group in the system. This RAN handles only transferred CO calls. This lets a CO call transferred to an ACD
Group enter caller entered ID digits via this RAN. The digits are then compared against the local
name/number translation table and routed based on table entries. If no match is found, the call rings to the
ACD Group. Intercom calls to the group pilot number result in a busy tone, Once the intercom caller hangs
up to complete the transfer, the CO call is presented to the RAN device.

ACD Supervisor
Programming Steps
To program an ACD Supervisor:
I

Press the ACD SUPV flexible button (FLASH 64. button #12).

Enter the 3-digit station number of the desired ACD Supervisor station.
ACD5XXA

ALT
AAA

OVR
BBB

AN
CCCC

SUP
DDD

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
The ACD Supervisor Station assignment feature provides a means to assign each ACD group a supervisor.
This Supervisor Station can receive the calls in queue display in real time, receives No Answer/Out of Service
conditions, HELP displays from the groups to which the supervisor is assigned, and can barge-in on active
calls in his ACD Group or groups.
-iy7,,
3;c3
L
c7c

A supervisor can be assigned in ADMIN to a group or groups to receive the help request and out of service
(00s) messages. If a supervisor station is assigned in ADMIN, it is considered logged in. In addition, a
supervisor can dial a supervisor login code followed by the ACD group that the supervisor is logging into and
his 4-digit ID number. For maximum compatibility with the STARPLUS PC-ACD Reporting package, the
supervisor assignment should be left blank and the supervisor login-logout feature used.

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Lssue I- December 1998

6-22

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
ACD Group

ACD Auto Wrap-Up Timer
Programming Steps

I.
,’ :. :...*
,,_...
r.;- ‘,.2,

To change the ACD Auto Wrap-up Timer:
Press the AUTO-WRAP TIMER flexible button (FLASH 64, button #13). The following
message displays:

ACD5;i4

WRAP-UP

000-999
I

Enter the 3-digit value on the dial pad which corresponds to 000-999 seconds.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description
After completion of a ACD call (on-hook) the agent is not subjected to another ACD call for the duration of
the Auto Wrap-Up Timer allowing the agent to finish call related work or access other facilities. This lets
agents remove themselves from the group (i.e., DND, Call Forward) or originate another call. By default, the
ACD Auto Wrap-Up Timer is set for four seconds and is variable from 000-999 seconds.

ACD CIQ Threshold
Programming Steps
To change the CIQ Threshold:
1

Press the CIQ THRESHOLD flexible button (FLASH 64, button #14). The following
message displays:

ACDSXXCIQ
00

THRSHOLD

00-99
.

Enter the 2-digit value on the dial pad which corresponds to 00-99 calls.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

, :( .:-.
,,::-. .,.. ,
:, .; ..:I

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

6-23

ACD Group

Conditions
+z+

Any ACD station can have a button assigned to view the calls in queue of any ACD group.

ACD Station Assignment(s)
Programming Steps
To program stations into a ACD group:
1

Press the DISPLAY STAS 9-16 flexible button (FLASH 64, button #19). The following
message displays:
ACD5XXB ### ###
#Mf##########

### ###

Where:
[5Xx] = ACD Grp Number (558-565)
/
‘L.

[B] = Page B parameters
[###I = ACD Station assignments
2

The top left button in the flexible button field is lit for programming ACD Group 9 (558).
To change ACD groups or enter further ACD groups (558-565), press the appropriate
flexible button and perform the following procedures.

Enter the 3-digit station numbers of the stations in the ACD group in the order in which
they are checked. The order is only relevant for the first call. After that, the rule is oldest
idle. A maximum of sixteen stations may be entered. No station entries are displayed at
this time.

Press HOLD to save the entry. A confirmation tone is heard and the display updates.

Description

A
1 -1
c-:.l=
r::
r ., . .t
. . 2,
..,
. ...
.

I s s u e I - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Voicemail Groups (VM)
Voicemail Outpulsing Table

Voicemail Disconnect Table
Programming Steps
i

Press the DISCONNECT TABLE 8 flexible button (FLASH 66, Button #9). This table
number is used for the voicemail disconnect signal.

Enter up to 12 digits used for the disconnect signal, including [+k] and [#I, TRANS button
= pause.
VOICE DIS E

1
3

MAIL

Press HOLD to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard and the display now updates.

Description
A disconnect signal can be programmed into the Triad-S system to notify the VM system that a call has been
abandoned. This is accomplished through in-band signaling. If a CO or Intercom disconnect signal is
detected, the Triad-S system sends a series of DTMF digits programmed in the voicemail disconnect table to
the voicemail port. This can be any digit stream up to 12 digits including [++I and [#I. This table serves all
eight voicemail groups. When no digits are programmed in the disconnect table, silence is provided to the
voicemail port followed by busy tone to aid the voicemail system to recognize that the caller has abandoned
the call.
TheTriad-S provides Loop Supervision monitoring while a CO call is connected to a port designated as
voicemail.
Loop Supervision must be enabled on the CO lines (in CO Line programming) for the VM Disconnect feature to operate.

By default, there are no entries in the Disconnect Table (Table #S),

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

Issue I- December 1998

Voicemail Groups (VM)
Voicemail In-Band Features

Voicemail In-Band Features
Programming Steps
I

Press FLASH and dial [67]. The following message is shown on the display:
VM FEATURES ICID AFWD
VBRK

Description
Entries into the Voicemail In-Band Features determines the in-band signaling required for ICID Incoming
ID Digits (forwards incoming CO callers directly to a Stations Voicemail Box), and AFWD Call Forward (lets
voicemail calls, upon reaching a forwarded to VM station, forward back into the voicemail system).
INCOMING ID
DIGITS
#liIzl

CALL
FORWARD
+-

VM BROKER
#m

Voicemail In-Band Digits
Programming Steps
I

Press the INCOMING ID DIGITS flexible button (FLASH 67. Button #l). The following
message is shown on the display phone.
*
VM FEATURES ICID AFWD
VBRK

Press the button to Enable/Disable this feature.
LED Off = NO (Disabled)
LED On = YES (Enabled)

Press HOLD to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard and the display now updates.

Description
This feature enables and disables station in-band signaling.
Incoming CO callers can be Station Call Fotwarded into voicemail only when the ringing CO line is
programmed to ring at one station. CO lines programmed to ring at an attendant station, call forward into
Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

;5;i^.i-_..‘;L:_, ,:
/::-< :i--.--

Voicemail Groups (VM)
Voicemail In-Band Features

-~~~~~~
-.-.y-.G
- :ir5

the voicemail system (if programmed to ring only at one attendant station). Callers are presented to the main
greeting (not the attendant stations’ mail box) even when ID digits are enabled. By default, ID digits for
incoming CO calls is enabled.

Voicemail Transfer / Forward
Programming Steps
1

Press the CALL FWD flexible button (FLASH 67. Button #2). The following message are
shown on the display phone.
.

;;R;EATURES

ICID AFWD

Press the

button to Enable/Disable this feature.

LED Off = NO (Disabled)
LED On = YES (Enabled)
3

Press HOLD to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard and the display now updates.

Description
This feature forwards voicemail calls, upon reaching a forwarded to VM station, back into the voicemail unit.
It is useful when VM ports are being used as both Auto Attendant and VM ports. This feature can be
enabled/disabled for all VM groups. By default, the VM TransferlForward feature is enabled.

Voicemail Broker
Programming Steps
1

Press the VM BROKER flexible button (FLASH 67, Button #3). The following message is
shown on the display phone.
;FR;EATURES

ICID AFWD

Press the button to Enable/Disable this feature.
LED Off = NO (Disabled)
LED On = YES (Enabled)

Press HOLD to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard and the display now updates.

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e I- December 1998

Voicemail Groups (VM)

8-10

Voicemail Index Table

Description
This feature modifies the operation of voicemail ports when disabled. Broker operation is unavailable when
using supervised transfers to stations. If enabled, the current operation of broker mode during supervised
transfers remains in effect. This means that the call to the station remains as the second party in a broker
mode, If disabled, the VM port disconnects the call to a station and return to the original party. By default,
the VM Broker feature is enabled.

Voicemail Index Table
Programming Steps
To add Mailbox buttons, change Voicemail Groups, or Voicemail ID Numbers:
1

Press FLASH and dial [68]. The following message is shown on the display:
MAILBOX TBL: XXX
VM GROUP: YYY

VMID ZZZZ

The top left button in the flexible button field (FLASH 68, Button #I)
programming VM Group 1 (440).

is lit for

To change VM Groups:
1

Enter the 3-digit VM Group number (440-447).

Press HOLD to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard and the display now updates.

To change the VMID Number:
I

Press the VMID NUMBER flexible button (FLASH 68, Button #2).

Enter the four-digit VMID Number which corresponds to 0000-9999. A value of 0000
disables this table entry. In this case, no VM digits is sent.

Press HOLD to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard and the display now updates.

To advance to the next VM Index Number:
I

Press the NEXT flexible button (FLASH 68, Button #18). The Mailbox Table number
increments by 1.

To go to a previous VM Index Number:
1

Press the PREV flexible button (FLASH 68, Button #19). The Mailbox Table number
decrements by 1.

To change to a different VM Index Number:
Lssue I- December 4998

S JARPLUS

Triad-S System Progromming Manual

Voicemail Groups (VM)

8-11

Voicemail index Table

&g?+
p&

Press the SELECT flexible button (FLASH 68, Button #20).

Enter a 3-digit Mailbox Table Number (001-255).

Press HOLD to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard and the display now updates
and shows the new Mailbox Table Number.

Description
This feature provides an attendant or station user a way to transfer a caller directly into a voicemail box.
Station identification digits can be entered by the transferring party. Using this feature, a caller can be
transferred to a voicemail box when:
*:a a station user on the system is not forwarded to VM, or
ez.9 the destination voicemail box owner is not a station user.
CO trunks and internal calls may be transferred into voicemail using this feature. If no voicemail ID digits are
dialed by the transferring station, the ID digits of the transferring station are sent to voicemail.

,’

This feature permits dialing digits 0000-9999 when using the VM with ID feature. On a per station basis, the
ID number that is sent to voicemail can be flexible. By default, the station number is sent to the voicemail
system. In administrative programming, there is a field to insert from O-4 digits (0000-9999) which can be
sent to the voicemail system in place of the station number. This is useful when a station user manually
transfers a caller to a mailbox. By default, no mailbox buttons are assigned at key stations.

VM GROUP
*m

VMID NUMBER
%cm

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

I s s u e I - December 1998

8-12

Voicemail Groups (VM)
Voicemail index Table

I s s u e I - December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

----

Exception Tables Programming
The STARPLUS Triad-S’” Systems offer a flexible means of applying toll restriction to stations or
individuals. Dialing privileges (or toll restriction) is determined through assignment of station and CO line
Class Of Service (COS). Several types of restriction can be derived simply by programming COS assignments
and CO line access to stations. This may, in some cases, be all that is necessary. However, when a more
complex or specific type of restriction is desired the system offers two Allow and two Deny tables along with
four special tables. These tables can be programmed in a variety of ways to handle applications that are
straight forward or applications that require a more complex arrangement.
The Allow and Deny tables are assigned to stations based on their station Class of Service (COS) assignment.
The Station (COS) interacts with CO Line COS assignments to provide several different types of dialing
privileges. Rrefer to Table 9-l: Class of Service.
-

CO LINE CLASS OF SERVICE
1

1
T A
2
T
I
0 3
N 4
C 0
5
S
-

Unrestricted

Canned
Restricted*

Unrestricted

Table A

Unrestricted

Canned
Restricted*

Unrestricted

Table B

Unrestricted

Table B

Canned
Restricted*

Unrestricted
I

Table A&B

Table A

Table B

Canned
Restricted*

Unrestricted

Canned
Restricted*

Unrestricted

Intercom
Only

rC ii7 feej Restriction: No [OJ [I], [#I, [S] as first dialed digit, and 7-digit diuling

I
I

limitation; plus I-

600, 1911, 1611 are allowed, u n d 411, 976, and 555 numbers are denied.
Table 9-l: Class of Service

Issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS

Triad-S System Programming Manual

Exception Tables

9-2

Exception Tables Programming

The Allow and Deny tables enable entries of either general or specific allow and deny codes such as allowing
all [l-800] type calls, and/or denying all [l] + or [O] + calls. The Allow and Deny tables allow a maximum
of 8 digits to be entered as allow or deny digits. This enables entry of certain area codes or office codes that
can specifically be allowed or denied. For example, the code [l-555-1212] may be entered in the Deny
Table to deny local toll information calls. Each Allow Table contains 20 bins for entry of allow codes. Each
Deny Table contains 10 bins for entry of deny codes.
The following rules should be remembered when setting up the Allow/Deny tables. Refer to Table $2:
Allow /Deny Tddde.
1

If both tables (Allow and Deny) have no entries, no restriction is applied.

If entries are made in the Allow Table and only there, then only those numbers are
allowed. All other dialing is denied.

If entries are made in the Deny Table and only there, then only those numbers are
denied. All other dialing is allowed.

If there are entries in both Allow and Deny tables, the Allow Table is searched first, and
if a match is found, it is allowed. If a match is not found, the Deny Table is searched; if a
match is found, the call is denied. If the number does not match an entry in either table,
it is allowed.

Allow
Table
I

RULE1

Deny mi
T a b l e DIaled

Entries
Found A

RULE2 Entries

RULE3

No
Entries

\lO

Entries N o t
Found ’
Found D
intries

Not
Found A
Found 1 A

RULE4

Entries

Table 9-2: Allow / Deny Table

issue I- December 1998

STARPLUS Triad-S System Programming Manual

, . . . :.. .
7. ‘;-.’
I,_ :.-..:
_..

Exception Tables

9-3

PDF Vodavi Triad S Description Install & Program

Starplus Triad-S Desc Install & Program Starplus Triad-S Desc Install & Program

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation